Harvard Botany Libraries
3 2044 1
05 174
38
W " £*
Library
Arnold Arboretum
of
Harvard University
Digitized by the Internet Archive
in 2015
https://archive.org/details/journalofwashing5019wash
JOURNAL
of the
WASHINGTON
ACADEMY
* * *
" "
•V, ^
-I- -vi
jv-
SCIENCES
Vol. 50 • No. 1
January, 1960
Ht
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Editor: Chester H. Page, National Bureau of Standards
Managing Editor: Ilekn E. SVewart, National Science Foundation
Associate Editors
Frank L. Campbell, National Academy of Russell B. Stevens, Geo. Washington Univer-
Sciences sity
Samuel B. Detwiler, Jr., U.S. Dept, of Agri- John K. Taylor, National Bureau of Standards
culture
Contributors
Ralph E. Gibson, Applied Physics Laboratory
Henry P. Ward. Catholic University
Elliott B, Roberts, Coast & Geodetic Survey
Margaret D. Foster, Geological Survey
Russell B. Stevens, Geo. Washington University
Moddie D. Taylor, Howard University
Frank L. Campbell, NAS-NRC.
Bourdon F. Scribner, National Bureau of
Standards
Howard W. Bond, National Institutes of Health
Allen L. Alexander, Naval Research Laboratory
Victor R. Boswell, USDA, Beltsville
Henry S'tevens, USDA, Washington
William H. Bailey, University of Maryland
This Journal, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes: (1)
historical articles, critical reviews, and scholarly scientific articles, (2) original research, if the
paper, including illustrations, do$s not exceed 1500 words or the equivalent space, (3) notices of
meetings and proceedings of meetings of the Academy and its affiliated societies, and (4) regional
news items, including personal news, of interest to the entire membership. The Journal appears
eight times a year in January to May and October to December.
Manuscripts and original research papers should be sent to the Editor. They should
be typewritten, double-spaced, on good paper; footnotes and captions should be numbered and
submitted on a separate sheet. The Editor does not assume responsibility for the ideas expressed
by any author.
Contributions to the regular columns should be sent to the appropriate Associate
Editor whose name appears at the beginning of each column, or to one of the Contributors, listed
above. The deadline for news items is approximately three weeks in advance of publication date.
News items should be signed by the sender.
Proof of manuscripts will generally be sent to an author if he resides in the Washington
area and time allows. Otherwise the Editor will assume responsibility for seeing that copy is
followed.
Subscription rate $7.50 per yr. (U.S.)
Single issues $0.50 per copy.
Subscription Orders or requests for back numbers or volumes of the Journal, or copies of the
Proceedings, should be sent to the Washington Academy of Sciences. 1530 P St., N.W., Washing-
ton, D.C. Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences”.
Claims for missing numbers will not be allowed if received more than 60 days after date
of mailing plus time normally required for postal delivery and claim. No claims will be allowed
because of failure to notify the Circulation Manager of a change of address.
Changes of address should be sent promptly to the Academy Office, 1530 P St.. N.W.,
Washington, D. C. Such notification should include both old and new addresses and postal zone
number, if any.
Advertising rates may be obtained from the Managing Editor, lleen E. Stewart, Office of
Science Information Service, National Science Foundation, Washington 25, D. C.
Reprint prices may also be obtained from the Managing Editor.
Prices of back numbers and volumes, of Monograph No. 1, ‘‘The Parasitic Cuckoos of
Africa” by Herbert Friedmann, Index to Vols. 1-40, and Proceedings may be obtained by writing
to the Academy Office.
Entered as second class matter at the Post Office, Washington, D. C. Printing by McArdle
Printina Co.. Washinaton. D. C.
The Journal for 1960
Frank L. Campbell
All members of the Washington Acad-
emy of Sciences would probably agree that
its Journal should contain whatever the
majority wants, within the bounds of finan-
cial and human feasibility. If the Board
of Managers can be regarded as a fair
sample of the membership, it is certain
that the majority does not want the kind of
Journal we have had in recent years, but
we still do not know what the majority
does want. It is also possible, but* im-
probable, that the Board does not repre-
sent the opinions on the Journal of the
membership as a whole. Because of these
uncertainties the Board at its December
meeting authorized a referendum on the
question of the contents of the Journal.
We must act now on the probability that
changes in content are desired, but if the
referendum shows that the majority wishes
to support an archival Journal such as we
have had, we can and will promptly revert
to it. If it shows that the majority do
not wish to support such a Journal but
are not sure what they do want, then we
should experiment with the contents of the
Journal guided by comments we hope to
receive from interested members. It will
be much easier for members to offer sug-
gestions after they have in hand some-
thing to criticize.
The new editorial group has only one
conviction at this time; namely, that the
Journal should serve in part as a medium
of communication between the officers and
members of the Academy, and between the
Academy and its affiliated societies. But
some members disagree even on this point.
They fear that the use of the Journal as a
medium of local communication may cause
it to become essentially a house organ and
submerge or extinguish its scholarly as-
pects. This feeling is prevalent not only
among those who favor an archival Journal
but among those who will not give up hope
that the Journal could become a medium
for the publication of papers reporting
original research in both experimental and
descriptive science. Experience shows,
however, that such a hope is not realistic.
Only a Journal having lavish financial re-
sources for free and prompt publication
could hope to draw all kinds of high-grade
research articles away from specialized pro-
fessional journals. We doubt that such a
hope could be realized even under optimum
conditions because experimental scientists
have a strong desire to publish their most
significant results in journals that are seen
regularly by their own professional col-
leagues.
It seems to us that local communications
in the Journal need not destroy its scholar-
ly character. If the Journal can no longer
be a factor in the publication of primary
research, it should and can publish its
share of papers concerned with the later
processes in the growth of knowledge—
what Paul Weiss calls the digestive and
assimilative processes leading to the pro-
duction of knowledge. Such papers may be
called historical articles, critical reviews,
critiques, etc., papers that bring together
existing information and opinions and
integrate them into the body of knowledge.
Members of the Academy have ideas and
opinions to publish in the Journal that
will be of interest to scientists everywhere.
We think such feature articles will take
up much of the space in the Journal. They
should be articles that every member of the
Academy and other scientists can read
with interest and with profit. Not all such
articles will have permanent value, but they
should give to the world examples of the
synthetic writing of Washington scientists.
Some members contend seriously that
there is no need for a Journal that can be
read with interest. They argue that we
already have more general publications
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
1
than we can read and that the Academy
can make its best contribution to science
by publishing an archival journal. There
is much to be said for this point of view.
It is true that we all have too much to read.
We guess that few scientists could state that
they read every issue of Science from cover
to cover, and yet we think most scientists
like to feel they are paying for a periodical
that may contain something they want very
much to read, and when something ex-
traordinary comes along, the word travels
rapidly on the grapevine; for example,
“Have you read in Science Warren Weav-
er’s proposal on special committees?”
If the referendum indicates that our
members want a Journal they can read if
they wish, then we can go ahead toward
producing a Journal that more and more
of them will want to read. This first issue
from the new editorial group is the best that
could be done under present difficult cir-
cumstances. Subsequent issues should be-
come progressively more comprehensive
and interesting as the volunteer organiza-
tion needed to produce such a Journal be-
comes experienced and effective. Please
remember, however, that dues were not in-
creased for 1960 and that we can spend
this year, for the production of the Journal,
only $4000, less than half as much as we
did in 1959. Therefore, the Journal will
be smaller than it was last year and the
possibilitities for improvement will be re-
stricted until greater support can be pro-
vided. We hope that you will be patient
and tolerant as we move toward a Journal
in which the Academy can take new pride.
Virchow’s “Cellular Pathology” in the
Framework of Biology and Medicine*
Alfred Plaut
Armed Forces Institute of Pathology, Washington, D. C.
This title is chosen because the cen-
tenary has brought the words “Cellular Pa-
thology” to the attention of many. The
topic at hand, however, is cellular physiol-
ogy and cellular histology as well ; it is cel-
lular biology. The terms theory and doc-
trine also are used without intending to
establish a standpoint a priori. Virchow
himself liked the neutral term cellular
principle.
When his lectures were published in the
Fall of 1858 with the title “Die Cellular-
pathologie in ihrer Begruendung auf physi-
ologische und pathologische Gewebelehre”
the words “cellular” and “cell” had been
used for more than a century. One is
tempted to marvel at the prophetic vision
of the poet when one reads Voltaire’s ques-
tion, written about 1755. 1 “In what corner
of cellular tissue lies the genius of Homer
and Virgil?” But, cellular tissue was in
the 18th century what since 1834 has been
called connective tissue, and it was sup-
posed to contain the vital force. Blumen-
bach, the father of anthropology, saw in it
the seat of the “nisus formativus”, the
tendency to create; for Caspar Friedrich
Wolff, the pioneer of embryology, it har-
bored the “vis essentialis” the real life
force. An analogous misunderstanding has
made Lamarck a precursor of the cellular
principle. The old meaning survives in
the term “cellulitis” used for an inflam-
mation in subcutaneous connective tissue.
* This article is based on a lecture given at the
Armed Forces Institute of Pathology, on Novem-
ber 12, 1958, as part of the Institute’s Virchow
Centennial Program.
2
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
An 800 page American pathology book
of 1845, 2 speaks about “cellular trans-
formation”, meaning transformation of
another tissue into loose connective tissue,
which the author calls “cellular tissue”.
The word “cell”, as far as I can see, is
mentioned only casually in the book.
When things seen under the microscope
in sections of cork were called “cells” for
the first time (Hooke, 1665) the name was
given on account of the thick rectangular
walls. It is a far cry from there to the
still valid definition of a cell as “a lump
of protoplasm with a nucleus”.3 We reckon
the cellular era from the year 1839 when
Theodor Schwann in Berlin published his
“Microscopic Investigations on the Ac-
cordance in the Histological Structure and
Growth of Plants and Animals”. The thesis,
implied in the title, that not only plants
but animals also are composed of cells
had been voiced before by several people
more or less clearly but had failed to make
an impression on the scientific world. Dut-
rochet in 1824 had declared the cell “the
fundamental part” of the animal organ-
ism.4 It is difficult to know how far his
“cells” and those of other observers in the
late 18th and early 19th century really
were cells and not starch granules, drop-
lets of some substance, or artifacts caused
by the chromatic aberration of the lenses
and the lack of condensers. The often used
term “globules” makes one doubtful, and
it might be wise not to accept “cells” as
such unless they are unambiguously de-
scribed or illustrated.
Johannes Mueller, the teacher and spirit-
ual father of a whole group of men whose
names are connected with the develop-
ment of cellular ideas in Germany
(Schleiden, Schwann, Virchow, Remak,
Henle) recognized the cellular compo-
sition of tumors in 1838. Purkinje in
Breslau, who was ahead of his time in
several respects, had perhaps the clearest
ideas about cells before Schwann. The
good observations of Goodsir in Edin-
burgh were recognized by Virchow him-
self. (The second edition of the Lectures
on Cellular Pathology is dedicated to
Goodsir.) Virchow’s publications begin
to show his preoccupation with cells in
1847, in the first volume of his “Archiv”,
but at this time he still believed with
Schwann and others that cells were formed
in an amorphous substance, the “blastema”.
Later he shared Ilemak’s 5 view that cell
division is the only source of cell for-
mation. Much about cells had been writ-
ten by others, and much he had said him-
self in his lectures and written about them
during his professorship in Wuerzburg
(1849-1856). One can understand there-
fore that he was astonished about the
success of the book, saying that it did not
contain much that was new. He wanted
to ascribe the effect to its easy style. As
it appears today it was more the exhaus-
tive, convincing presentation and the offer
of a promising method.
The change caused by the “Cellular
Pathology” was perhaps even greater in
France than in Germany. Cruveilhier was
professor of pathology in Paris until 1866.
his atlas of gross pathology is unsur-
passed in beauty but he did not use a
microscope. One of his pupils 6 went to
Berlin and studied under Virchow together
with four Scandinavians. He transplanted
modern pathology into France. As he said
many years later, Virchow’s teaching had
been a revelation, pathological anatomy
became alive, it became connected with
physiology. The difference between medi-
cal teaching before the “Cellular Path-
ology” and afterwards was perhaps great-
est in Russia. The influence on pathology
in England was characterized as replace-
ment “by orderly arranged and objective
facts of what was before a tangled wilder-
ness of old superstitions and modern dis-
connected observations”. Similar opinions
were voiced at the celebration of Virchow’s
80th birthday “from Archangelsk to Cadiz”,
not to forget Japan, and the United States.
William Osier, with his historically
trained mind, realized that such a revolu-
tion in medicine could not be ascribed to
one man. that the “Zeitgeist” worked like
a leaven. “But”, he continued, “no phy-
sician of our time has done more to pro-
mote the change, or by his individual ef-
forts to win his generation to accept it
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
3
than Virchow”. The cellular theory stimu-
lated people to make use of the improved
microscope. As long as a man believed
that alterations of body fluids or disturb-
ances in innervation were the essential
factors in disease he could not expect to
learn much about disease by looking into
the microscope. But when he expected
to find meaningful alterations of cells then
he had reason enough for using this lately
improved gadget.
The English translation of the cellular
pathology 7 appeared in 1860, and within
a few years, seven American editions were
sold out, in spite of the fact that path-
ological anatomy always has been a step-
child in the United States. Before 1865,
that means in the years when Virchow’s
interests were essentially in pathology,
American students went to England and
France rather than to Germany, thus Vir-
chow had no important direct American
pupil. Welch, the nestor of American
pathology, worked under Virchow’s pupil
Cohnheim, whose experiments had laid
the foundation for modern concepts of
inflammation. In Welch’s laboratory at
Johns Hopkins Hospital, Virchow’s pos-
tulate of combining morphology and ex-
perimental pathology was fulfilled to a
degree but it is tempting to speculate how
American pathology might have developed
if Welch had worked in Virchow’s insti-
tute. The unprecedented impact of Vir-
chow’s publication — Welch said it was the
greatest advance ever made by scientific
medicine — must have had several causes.
One of them might have been that it offered
a striking fact of which people were not,
or not sufficiently aware, namely the cellu-
lar composition of the body, and at the
same time a unifying principle. People
suddenly were made to realize that the
human body was composed of cells like
any other organism, and that human dis-
eases were disturbances in the life processes
of these cells. In the middle of the nine-
teenth century, the human being was to
most people something apart from the
rest of creation, and diseases were entities
apart from the body. The new teaching
thus catered to man’s desire for unified
concepts.
Important progress in medicine is gen-
erally attributed to technical inventions,
and impulses given by changes in theo-
retical concepts are overlooked. The tran-
sition of tumor surgery from knife shyness
to optimistic activity in the later decades
of the nineteenth century was undoubtedly
caused by the emergence of anesthesia,
antisepsis and asepsis. But about at the
same time, cancer became a local disease in
the minds of physicians while it had been
a constitutional one before. And what is
the use of performing a local operation
for a constitutional ailment?
The much discussed topic of the precur-
sors to Virchow and the cellular doctrine
may be dealt with by quoting what Sir
Gavin de Beer recently has written about
Darwin: “For various reasons, including
imperfect formulation of the problem and
insufficiency of evidence, none of these i
precursors was able to compel attention, 1
let alone adherence, to these views; and it
is because of the completeness of his dem-
onstration . . . that the world owes its
debt to Darwin”.s Claude Bernard and
internal secretion furnish another parallel, i
The idea of internal secretion existed in
the mind of Albrecht von Haller, almost
a century before Bernard’s publications; !
several people voiced similar opinions, and
in 1849 A. Berthold reported a successful
substitution experiment by implantation
of testicle into a castrated rooster.9 None i
of these workers gave internal secretion I
to the scientific world, but Claude Bernard
did. There are more points of compari-
son, in spite of the fact that the “Cellular
Pathology” did not shake mankind as the
“Origin of Species” did. Both represent
the synopsis of painstakingly accumulated
observations, many of which were made
after the general idea had been conceived.
Both ran counter to feelings that had been
dear to man since time immemorial: Dar-
win offended the idea of man’s exalted
position in nature. Virchow hurt the
human individual’s proud feeling of being
a truly indivisible entity. As Virchow
4
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
said, all plant physiology was based on
the cellular principle, and the reluctance
of people to introduce the concept into
animal physiology was based only on
esthetic and moral objections. Darwin
as well as Virchow may have had a deep-
seated personal feeling for their theories.
Darwin s in his notebook from the Gala-
pagos Islands (1835) calls animals “our
fellow brethren in pain, disease, death,
suffering and famine, our slaves in the
most laborious works, our companions in
our amusements,” and he continues “they
may partake of our origin in one common
ancestor — we may be all melted together.”
His just conceived theory obviously agreed
with his love of animals. And through
Virchow’s whole life, there goes the idea
of true democracy in which every individ-
ual feels as a participant in a harmonious
whole, namely the state. He often talked
about the “Zellenstaat”, he called the
body “a free state of single beings with
equal rights,” and continued, “they keep
together because the single parts are de-
pendent upon each other.” A few years
later, he used the term federation to desig-
nate the relation of the cells to the body as
a whole. His antimonarchial, democratic
heart made him overdo such comparisons;
he loved them. When we read what he
said in parliament (1867) about decentral-
izing the administration of the state . . .
“the administration to be based on the
freedom of the communities . . . the con-
stitutional life built from below . . .” 10
then we almost expect to find something
about cells in the next line.
When we draw etiological conclusions
from histological pictures, we remember
that the patterns in which a tissue can
react may be few, and that diverse causa-
tive factors may result in one and the same
picture. This is well exemplified in der-
matology. But one should not forget that
the number of ideas a rational human
being is prone to conceive about a group
of phenomena is restricted also, and that
identical or closely related ideas spring
up independently in different minds. Most
of us enjoy having the good idea and let
it go at that, genius, however, puts it to
work. This historical reasoning applies
to some of Virchow’s ideas which can be
found in various writings of the German
Romantic period, and I hesitate to assume
from this a philosophical underpinning of
Virchow’s theories. We know that he
liked to read Aristotle but it would be
difficult to prove that his idea of the cell
state stems from Aristotle’s concept of the
body as a well-governed commonwealth,
neither do I know whether he ever read
Kant’s “Critique of Judgment” in which a
similar comparison is made.
The history of cellular doctrine through
the century of its existence is in no small
measure a comedy of errors or misunder-
standings. Virchow insisted that he had
based everything on observation, and that
criticism could come from observations
only. Others maintain that his work had
its basis in philosophical ideas of the
Romantic school. Virchow saw the main
merit of his work in abolishing systems
and speculation, but Ricker called the
cellular pathology anthropomorphistic na-
ture philosophy.11
An impressive almost incomprehensible
foreshadowing of cellular theory may be
seen in the words of Goethe,12 who was
a biologist in his own sublime way. “Every
living thing is not a single thing but is a
plurality. Even when it appears to us
as an individual it still remains an as-
sembly of independent living beings, that
are equal according to the idea, to the
anlage, while in fact they may appear
equal or similar, unequal or dissimilar
. . . The more imperfect a being is, the
more equal or similar are these parts and
the more they resemble the whole. The
more perfect the being becomes, the more
dissimilar will the parts be. The sub-
ordination of the parts indicates a perfect
being.” And he was conscious of both
the analytic and synthetic standpoint
when he wrote to Alexander von Hum-
boldt: “Your observations start from the
element, mine from the gestalt.”
Virchow was proud that his doctrine
was purely scientific, not burdened with
a system of therapeutics as the old “schools”
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
5
were. But Klebs, Virchow’s brilliant, re-
bellious pupil said that cellular pathology
could not amount to much since it had
not even created new therapeutics. Vir-
chow insisted from the beginning that it is
not so much the morphology but the life
of the cell that counts; nevertheless cellu-
lar pathology, even today, evokes in some
people the idea of one-sided, “dead”
morphology.
The history of cellular doctrine in the
framework of biology can be studied by
considering the standpoint of those who
oppose it for scientific reasons or other-
wise. Virchow’s pupil Cohnheim, who by
his famous experiment proved that leuco-
cytes migrate through the capillary walls,
has been considered an opponent of cellu-
lar theory by the medical historian Baas
and by others. In reality Cohnheim only
refuted Virchow’s erroneous ideas that the
blood vascular system is entirely closed
and that all pus cells are formed in loco,
but he was not opposed to cellular theory.
In his lectures on general pathology, he
calls the cells “living beings with a metabo-
lism . . . which certainly is a very active
one in many of them.” Thus I rather
agree with Cameron that Cohnheim’s ex-
periment gave a new impetus to cellular
pathology. It showed cells, namely the
leucocytes, in action, while they are not
in contact with other tissues.
The most vigorous attack upon cellular
pathology was made by Gustav Ricker in
1924. He wanted to replace it by “relation
pathology.” He denied that the cell has
any life by itself in health or disease, he
did not believe that the cell has a choice
in taking substances out of the surround-
ing blood. Virchow’s idea that the cell has
the faculties of function, nutrition and
proliferation appeared metaphysical to him
and an obstacle to clear, scientific causal
thinking. The cell, he said, cannot be
looked at in any way as separate from
its relation to the central nervous system
and to the blood. He denied even the
anatomical concept of the cell, pointing to
syncytial formations like the myocardium,
the fetal part of the placenta or the skin
epithelium with its intercellular fibres. The
functions and diseases of the body, Ricker
concluded, after decades of purposeful
animal experimentation, are located in the
central nervous system. It governs every-
thing by means of the nerves that accom-
pany all blood vessels, even the smallest
ones, and that form delicate networks
around and in the cells. The cell does
nothing, according to Ricker, things are
done to it. A statement made by Virchow
in 1855 represents a powerful argument
against Ricker’s theory. He wrote that an
entirely general innervation of the parts is
not sufficient for explaining “the many
special happenings in the course of nu-
trition and formation.” The restriction
of special happenings to structures as small
as cells could be explained only by isolated
and qualitatively different effects exerted
by the same nerve. And this, Virchow
continues, “is contrary to all available
experiences.” 13 Unless I am mistaken the
second part of this argument still holds
while the first one has been superseded by
the discovery of nerve endings in many
cells. What happens in the organs, rest
and function, anabolism and catabolism
follows, according to Ricker, a definite
law, his “Stufengesetz.” Constriction and
dilatation of vessels, which are regulated
by the central nervous system through the
vasomotor nerves, are the essential factors.
Morphological findings and localization
in the sense of Morgagni, Rokitansky and
Virchow are not of primary importance,
according to Ricker they are only one item
in diagnosis. The whole body is the seat
of disease. In Ricker’s opinion, Virchow’s
anatomical thinking has been proved in-
fertile by the history of medicine. Form
is to Ricker no scientific reality but a con-
cept of reflexion that can induce only
philosophical thoughts without heuristic
value. (To avoid misunderstandings, it
might be inserted here that Ricker con-
sidered Virchow’s merits immortal). Simi-
lar thoughts have been brought forward
in 1934 by Speransky,14 a pupil of Pavlov.
He believed that he could produce most
known pathological lesions by local freez-
ing of cerebral cortex, by withdrawing and
i-
1:
0
1:
t •
jfc
l
a:.:
ir.
e -■
k
i :
c
f*
■nt
u
k
k
K
6
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
Kchou- Vikciiow i\ rm-: s atk '}H50\
reinjecting spinal fluid repeatedly, or by
squeezing the hypothalamus into a glass
ring. He acknowledged the achievements
of cellular pathology in systematizing
pathological processes morphologically but
he doubted its value for constructing a
dynamic theory. Not only Virchow’s ideas
but also the medicine of Pasteur and Ehr-
lich was approaching exhaustion in Sper-
ansky’s opinion, and could not cope with
the contradictions that have arisen. Sper-
ansky’s book makes fascinating reading
and has influenced some people, notably
in Germany, to a degree designated as
“Speransky psychosis” by others. At-
tempts at repeating his experiments how-
ever, were successful only when the dogs
were infected with leptospira.15 Ricker
had, and still has, followers, but more and
more people declare themselves unable to
confirm his “Stufengesetz” which is sup-
posed to regulate the bloodstream after an
irritation has taken place. And it has
been shown long ago that nerveless
tissue of vertebrates can react to a stimu-
lus.16 I agree with those who think that
Ricker’s work is mainly of historical in-
terest today, and few people, I trust, will
share the opinion of Claudius Mayer that
Ricker’s ideas will become as important
for the future development of medical
research as was Virchow’s cellular theory
for the second half of the 19th century.17
Theories and doctrines are essentially
a matter of emphasis. Ricker, the most
important enemy of cellular pathology,
knew everything that was to be known
about cells but he stressed the dominat-
ing influence of vascular innervation. In
the same way, Virchow knew that the
organs are subject to changes in blood
supply, and are innervated, though the
finest nerve endings were not known in
his time but he minimized that because
he was so enraptured by the cells. No-
body denies that Virchow sometimes exag-
gerated in this respect, but one could
quote numbers of his utterances that show
appreciation of the body as a whole. And
Ricker’s theory neglects the many life
phenomena of organs and cells that are
separated from their nerves and from
their normal blood supply. Even the
complex Goldblatt phenomenon, the rise
in blood pressure after reduction of ar-
terial flow to one kidney, can be pro-
duced when the kidney first is trans-
planted to the neck, which entails a drastic
disturbance of perivascular nerves. In
all such discussions, we forget too easily
that plants function as organic units with-
out having a nervous system. Opponents
of cellular theory who stress the nerve
conditioned totality of the metazoan body
often refer to Pavlov. A survey of Pav-
lov’s writings, however, does not indicate
that he was opposed to cellular theory.
He used expressions like “the struggle for
existence among the cellular elements,”
he calls the cell “a whole organism, if a
small one;” he talks about disturbance in
cerebral cells as cause of the behavior of
an animal; he lets cells have “capacity for
work,” mentions “relaxation of nerve
cells” and “weakened irritability of gastric
cells.” 18 Speransky’s ideas had been ac-
cepted in Russia for a while but have been
repudiated lately.
The teaching of pathology, histology and
embryology at medical schools has not
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
7
been significantly influenced by the ob-
jections raised against cellular doctrine.
Numbers of recent textbooks, English,
French or German, teach according to
cellular doctrine, mentioning the theory
or simply taking it for granted. E. R.
Long in his history of pathology wrote in
1928: “We are all cellular pathologists
today, taking our post Virchowian cellu-
lar sense for granted.” 19 A recent French
textbook of zoology and a German text on
botany also stress cellular structure, al-
most unreservedly as did the botanist
Kuester in a historical survey of the prob-
lem in 1938.20 Such an attitude must be
expected because histology and pathology
can neither be practised nor taught from
the holistic standpoint, no matter how
much one might be enamoured of it
philosophically or esthetically. Horst
Oertel, in his General Pathology (1921)
emphasized the interrelations of cells whose
disturbance by a local process might be of
more consequence than the local process
itself, and that means disease of the whole
organism.21 The holistic totality aspect
and the atomistic (cellular) one are the
two horns of a dilemma out of which
there is no escape for the pathologist or
any other biologist. The poet-biologist
Goethe has worded it succinctly, in 1832.
a few weeks before his death: 22 “Thus
one is driven from the whole to the detail
and from the detail to the whole whether
one wants to or not.” If we stress the
heuristic standpoint, we can say that to
consider the whole body as the main object
of investigation means replacing one riddle
by another one: but the man who is essen-
tially interested in the patterns of nature
will strive again and again to comprehend
the totality of the organism without get-
ting lost in too much detail. An author
who with a subtle logical distinction, ex-
presses doubt whether pathology of the
cell really means “cellular pathology” de-
clares in the same paper that the cellular
doctrine is, today more than ever, one of
our secure possessions.23 He even thinks
that Virchow’s much attacked cellular
ideas about inflammation have more of a
future than the accepted vascular concept
of inflammation as established by Cohn-
heim. A philosophically minded patholo-
gist, wrote in 1928 that pathology is not
pure cellular pathology anymore, which
does not mean that it is wrong, but that
pathology has unending variations and
thus cannot be deduced from one single
principle. Roessle, the third successor in
Virchow’s chair, characterized Virchow’s
concept of the body as “a state of autono-
mous, widely independent cells,” and for-
mulated his own as “non autonomous
single cells cooperating with each other
and with blood and the nervous system.”
I feel that Roessle in this exaggerated Vir-
chow’s emphasis of the independence of
the cell, but what with the multitude and
variety of Virchow’s statements, this re-
mains a matter of personal taste. Many
authors have an ambivalent attitude to-
wards the cell concept because on the one
hand they see the cells, their role in
physiology and pathology, and work with
them all the time; but on the other hand
they see the body as a whole and are un-
willing to give up its individuality. An
example for this is furnised in a modern
English textbook of pathology.24 It regards
the cell as the ultimate unit of structure
and function however complex the tissue
or organ may be. But, it continues, “it
is more profitable to regard the organism
as the individual, . . . and the cells not
as units of which it is built up, but rather
as parts into which it is divided in order
to provide for the necessary division of
labor. ( Adami 25 expressed the same stand-
point in 1910). The conception of the
cell thus remains, but no longer requires or
is capable of the strict definition that was
needed when the word was supposed to
represent a fundamental biological entity.”
One should note the words “in order to
provide,” in the second half of the state-
ment. This is teleology and shows the
danger inherent in the biological totality
concept. When the authors say “it is more
profitable to regard the organism as the
individual,” I agree with them from the
psychological standpoint but I have doubts
from the standpoint of biological method-
ology. Hueck. whose studies of the
8
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
i- mesenchyme have played an important
)• role in the discussions about the cellular
it doctrine, considers the totality concept as
h absolutely necessary but, he too adds that
it we can study only the parts.26 The titles
d of publications are revealing. The first
e volume of the handbook of microscopic
ti anatomy (Moellendorf ) which appeared
s in 1929 bears the title: “Living Matter”,
i- thus referring collectively to the substance
of the organism and ignoring the cell,
s while the corresponding volume of the
r handbook of general pathology in 1955 is
titled: “The Cytoplasm,” which means the
stuff cells are made of.
{ Our tendency toward accepting one
1 opinion and condemning the opposed one
smacks of man’s primitive fighting instinct,
i- and he who objects to a theory is prone
to exaggerate it because that makes it
e vulnerable. Opponents of the cellular
i doctrine have invested it with a primitively
i additive character neither Virchow nor his
1 followers had seriously in mind. Thus
. we read in a modern textbook of histology :
i “Every cell of the human body, according
i to Virchow, is a kind of homunculus, and
s the combined efforts of these well special-
> ized microhumans shall result in the pre-
3 posterous cell state that represents the
t organism.” 27
i This book leaves out the word “cell”
t in its definition of tissue; it uses the words
r “elementary parts” and “masses.” The
r author tells us that “function can be con-
f ceived only dependent upon the undefin-
able totality of the organism.” Since
^ this gives us no hope of understanding this
r totality why not stick to less hopeless
. problems, reserving the totality concept
) for fields in which we can use it, or for a
’ remote future? At the other end of the
) line we have the statement made by a
zoologist in 1957: “The living part of na-
» ture is an atomized system; its atoms are
, the cells.” 28
t The period of rising bacteriology and
e immunology brought many attacks on cellu-
t lar pathology which were mainly based on
$ lack of knowledge in both fields. A French
author wrote in 1885: “Cellular pathology
e has lived. Down with the cells.” The ideas
of sera, of circulating antibodies brought
a resurgence of some kind of “humoral
pathology.” Deeper insight, furthered by
Paul Ehrlich’s work, showed how such
substances are manufactured by cells, and
today we see no contradiction between
immunology and the cellular doctrine.
Internal secretion, in health and disease,
has been considered as an expression of
the total organism and as contradicting the
cellular concept. But since we know that
giantism, acromegaly, and other endocrine
disorders are caused by alterations of hor-
mones, and since the hormones are pro-
duced by cells, sometimes by relatively few
cells, the phenomena of internal secretion
might be marshalled as well in favor of
cellular doctrine as against it.
While cellular doctrine was under heavy
attack the science of the cell was started and
grew. The term cytology seems to have
been used first in England about 1885;
a magazine “La Cellule” was founded in
Belgium in 1884; Verworn 29 wrote his
much maligned book on general physiology
in 1895. Today we have an imposing
monograph, Cameron’s “The Pathology
of the Cell” (which in spite of its title con-
tains much criticism of cellular doctrine),
in the same year Caspersson 30 published
his “Cell Growth and Cell Function.” And
what would Virchow say if he could see
the title “The Mammalian Cell as an In-
dependent Organism?” 21
The way tissues are formed by cells
suggests that the cells are morphological
and functional units. The existence of
syncytia, continuous masses of protoplasm
with many nuclei, seemed to contradict the
universal applicability of this statement.
Opponents of cellular theory have written
much about these structures,32 but without
agreeing among themselves, and in the
opinion of some, including myself, not
with convincing power. Structures with
two or more nuclei had been seen in 1802
long before the true cellular era 33 and
purley syncytical organisms, mycetozoa,
were described in 1860 (see Baker). But.
to my knowledge, no highly complex plant
or animal is entirely or even essentially
composed of syncytia. A crustacean
5
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
9
(Peroderma) has been mentioned as having
no cellular structure, but this is a parasitic
animal, and its lack of cellular organiza-
tion is a secondary adaptation to parasitic
life. Related species consist of cells, as
other crustaceans do, and we can reason-
ably assume that the free living ancestors of
Peroderma were cellular, not syncytial.
The absence of visible cell boundaries
apart from the fact that our optical meth-
ods may be at fault does not necessarily
indicate absence of functional boundaries.
The botanist Sachs, in 1893, postulated
smaller functional units in syncytia, each
dominated by a nucleus, he called them
“energids.” This concept, which has not
gained much recognition, appears plausible
when nuclei are evenly distributed; it is
convincingly demonstrated when two
flagella are found near each nucleus. The
idea that syncytial structure prevails in
the metazoan body has led to describing
the body as “a lump of living matter.” 32
Others stress especially the syncytial nature
of the mesenchyme (Hueck). The continu-
ous character of connective tissue had im-
pressed Virchow himself. He wrote in
1862: “The body appears composed of a
more or less continuous mass of connective
tissue like parts, as Reichert has pointed
out.” 34 The decision whether to call
something a group of cells or a syncytium
is sometimes an arbitrary one because cells
which have distinct outlines are often con-
nected by bridges or fibrils. Every medical
student learns about the intercellular
bridges of the skin epithelium. But it is
more than doubtful if these fibers are
biochemical pathways at all and actually
make a syncytium out of the skin epithe-
lium. Our daily experience as pathologists
speaks against it since we see severely
altered single epidermal cells surrounded
by normal ones or near normal ones.
Schultze, who in 1861 defined the cell as
a lump of protoplasm with a nucleus, de-
nied that even broader connections inter-
fered with the individuality of cell life.8, 33
The fibrils which seem to connect the
epithelial cells of the skin may well have
a mechanical function. It is noteworthy
that these so-called intercellular bridges
do not seem to interfere with the isolating
of cells by microdissection. The concept
of the cell certainly is not abolished by the
existence of connections,35 and syncytial
structures are the exception in the essen-
tially cellular metazoan organism. But
anticellular considerations based on the
textbook concept of syncytial structures
begin to be only of historical interest.
Electron microscopy has shown cell boun-
daries in most so-called syncytia, first in
the neurons, the very embodiment of con-
tinuity, then in neuroglia, and lately also
in heart muscle, skeletal muscle, nervous
endplates, myoepithelium of glands, and
squamous epithelium. This marks, “the
beginning twilight for syncytial theories
in which the lode star of cellular doctrine
shines more brilliantly than ever.” 36 Oskar
Hertwig has called the cell “one step in the
organization.” With the progressive dis-
appearance of syncytia, this step gains in
importance.
The supposed active and decisive role of
noncellular mesenchymal ground substance
in the genesis of collagen diseases did not
agree with cellular theory. But the factor
that characterizes the classical collagen dis-
ease Lupus erythematosus disseminatus
(the L. E. factor) seems to counteract an
enzyme which normally inhibits depoly-
merization of nucleoproteins. This enzyme
(desoxyribose nuclease inactivator) is
found in cells, and provided these rela-
tively recent findings will stand the test of
time, the cellular doctrine will be vindi-
cated once more. A similar situation exists
concerning the formation of collagen fibrils.
They can be formed in a solution of col-
lagen molecules without the help of cells.
But the collagen molecules in turn have
been secreted by cells.37 This knowledge,
arrived at by our most modern techniques,
was theoretically anticipated long ago.
Adami wrote in 1910 “we can well admit,
with Virchow, that the cells discharge liv-
ing molecules of the order of enzymes
which act upon and modify the surrounding
matrix.” At least two other supposedly
cell free structures have been believed to
be “living:”
10
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
The vitreous of the eye forms hyaluronic
acid but as has been shown recently cells
are numerous in its outer layers.38 The
second example is more striking. In fishes
and in other animals, a long filament, which
appears structureless on ordinary micro-
scopic examination, extends from the brain
deep down into the central canal of the
spinal cord ; it is called Reissner’s fibre, its
function is unknown. Older literature
stated that the distal portion of this fibre
could regenerate itself after transverse cut-
ting, and this distal portion is not in
contact with cells while the proximal is.
Recent work however does not confirm
this; the peripheral portion disappears after
transection, and secreted material accumu-
lates cephalad to the cut.39 No metabolism
that is independent of cells has been demon-
strated to my knowledge. Johannes Muel-
ler wrote in 1838 about the cellular com-
position of tumors, a year before Schwann’s
studies appeared, and since that time the
tumor cell has been the center of onocology.
The aggressive cancer cell evokes the
image of an animal more vividly than the
normal tissue cell does. Uncounted work
hours have been spent in anatomical, physi-
ological, and chemical laboratories with
attempts at determining its characteristics.
The practical diagnosis of malignancy in
the hospital laboratory, however, has been
based not so much on the characteristics of
the single tumor cell as on the structures
formed by tumor cells and their behavior
toward the adjoining normal tissue, in
short, it is more structural than cellular.
Only in the last decades, following the
work of Papanicolaou, has cytological tu-
mor diagnosis gained momentum, and
exfoliative cytology has become a recog-
nized branch of clinical pathology. Com-
bined with the hoped for progress in histo-
chemistry this may develop into an im-
portant diagnostic method based on the
characteristics of single cells. The fail-
ure of all the ingenious methods devised
for a humoral diagnosis of cancer might
be referred to in this connection. Develop-
ing in a time when cellular pathology was
vigorously attacked, exfoliative cytology
has, wittingly or not, furnished a prop
for it.
Theoretical cytology is expanding
rapidly, urged on by modern methods, and
even the time hallowed, often belittled
routine procedure of studying the paraffin
section has added something to the bio-
logical importance of the cell, namely the
sex chromatin. The single cell that bears
the hallmark of as decisive a general body
character as sex is, may claim a higher
dignity than that of a brick in the building.
The cell is the only component of the
metazoan body that also exists as an in-
dependent, motile organism, namely the
protozoon. Neither organs nor tissues,
nor any postulated units have a free living
animal as counterpart, and the few exist-
ing syncytial organisms are poorly differ-
entiated ones like the myxomycetes. This
may be the strongest claim the cell has for
being called “elementary organism,” a
title conveyed upon it not by an anatomist,
but by the physiologist Bruecke in 1861.
Another physiologist, Max Verworn, de-
clared it inadmissible in 1895 to call a
structure an elementary unit unless we
knew about an analogous free living or-
ganism.29, 8 The unicellular character of
many protozoa is evident beyond doubt,
and while complicated organelles and
skeletal structures give others an organ-
ismic habitus they still remain a mass of
protoplasm with a nucleus, and thus a cell.
The cellular nature of bacteria has been
proved, and viruses as well as bacte-
riophages, which are not cellular, are not
free living organisms either.
The converse question namely how far
the cells of the metazoan body have the
nature of living organisms is much more
difficult because their variety is so great
and because “life” and “living organism”
are ill defined concepts. Something half-
way between the two problems may be seen
in the behaviour of the cells of certain
sponges, primitive sessile metazoa. When
separated by squeezing the sponge through
a porous cloth, they swim around with
ameboid motion and sometimes reunite to
form another sponge. This remarkable
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
11
sponge experiment did not create much of
a stir perhaps because sponges are such
lowly creatures. But, as has been shown
recently, even mammalian embryonic kid-
ney cells, when carefully separated, can
reassemble and be organized into typical
kidney structures.57 This almost exempli-
fies what Oken wrote in 1805, “Organisms
are a synthesis of infusoria.” A genera-
tion later, Schwann went to the core of
the problem when he wrote that each
metazoan cell could lead an independent
life if the relations it bore to its new
surroundings were but similar to those in
which it stands in the organism.40
In dealing with this problem, namely
the autonomy of the cell, we must differ-
entiate between the potential autonomy and
the actual one. The former can be proved
by single cell culture, e.g., but the latter
is beyond accurate proof. I cannot imagine
a method for proving autonomous be-
haviour of a cell while it is in its normal
place within the metazoan organism. This
is a kind of Heisenberg situation. Virchow,
while repeatedly referring to the import-
ance of neural and vascular influences,
stressed the individual reaction of the cell
very much, sometimes in an exaggerated
way. Ricker, who believed that all re-
actions in the body are regulated by
vasomotor nerves, denied any reactivity
of single cells. Many opinions between
these extremes have been voiced, and no
general answer can be expected when we
compare the dependent status of a ganglion
cell with the relative freedom a leucocyte.
During phagocytosis the leucocyte must
breach its cell membrane and reestablish
it after having engulfed the foreign par-
ticle, and it accomplishes this tricky phys-
icochemical feat without being in contact
with other tissue not to mention a nerve.
The power of locomotion is one of the
criteria of life, but it stands to reason
that metazoan cells, caught as they are in
the tissues, cannot move around much.
Leucocytes move; the term “wandering
cells” speaks for itself ; each type of
myeloid cell has is own characteristic style
of ameboid motion, and so has the lympho-
cyte. Motility of tumor cells has been
observed long ago, and migration of non-
tumorous mammalian cells occurs in the
pituitary gland of man, where basophile
cells of the intermediate zone are seen
singly invading the posterior lobe. I have
little doubt that these cells are actually
migrating.
As said before, one must differentiate
between the actual and the potential mo-
tility of the cell. The latter must be wide-
spread since all cell types in tissue cul-
tures exhibit ameboid motion.41
The double nature of metazoan cells
manifests itself in the tissue culture. Mam-
malian cells, isolated by trypsination, can
be grown in serum free media.42 They
move around, more or less in the fashion
of amoebae, single cells can be observed
in the motion picture eating their way
through the medium. Even ganglion cells
move. Single cells break off their con-
tact with the others, especially before
dividing, and they rejoin the others. Cells
do not only adhere to each other by
stickiness, but form protoplasmatic con-
nections through which material, pigment,
e.g. has been seen carried from one cell
to the other. Stimuli also are transmitted
from cell to cell since waves of ciliary
movement run along a row of cells and
can be interrupted by injuring one cell. 41
The growth curve of a single cell in tissue
culture turned out to be a counterpart
of that of a bacterium. Mutant strains
of such cells “have been identified, isolated
and established as standard stocks.” Some
mutant characteristics have remained stable
after more than 200 generations, corre-
sponding to stable mutations of micro-
organisms. These astounding similarities
between the metazoan cell and the free
living unicellular organism justify the
designation of the body cell as a unit of
life. Virchow and the men who shared
his opinions could hardly know how right
they were in many respects.
The dominance of morphological studies
under the influence of Virchow and his
school has misled people into identifying
12
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
the cellular doctrine with a one sided
morphological attitude that neglects func-
tional, physiological aspects. Virchow’s
numerous statements to the contrary have
been quoted so often that I am reluctant
to repeat them. May I just point to his
one dictum that “pathological physiology
is the main fortress of medicine while the
pathological anatomy and the clinic are out-
lying bastions”.43 He postulated in his
early years, and in 1900, that pathology
should be pathological physiology. Young
Virchow’s first great scientific accomplish-
ment was experimental, namely the demon-
stration of embolism (he coined the term).
But the fact remains that he and his
pupils worked mainly in tissue pathology.
People who complain about this and lay
it at the door of cellular theory do not
realize that this morphological work created
the basis for later physiological studies.
Furthermore, no methods were available
at the time for cellular physiology, and
physiology did not furnish ideas for cel-
lular study. The anatomist Fleming,44 who
did classical work on cells and cell division,
stated in 1882 that cell problems mostly
belonged to the field of physiology, espe-
cially physiological chemistry. “But,” he
continued, “both seem hesitant to direct
their action into a truly microscopic area.”
And as late as 1900 Eugen Albrecht, who
was a man of vision, was pessimistic
about a future cellular physiology. Mod-
ern techniques have made it possible.
The terms cytochemistry and biochemi-
cal cytology refute the idea that the cellular
concept is necessarily a morphological one.
These disciplines remedy the antiquated
situation in which biochemistry did not
apply the localization principle, be it Mor-
gagni type according to organs or Virchow
type according to cells, and they bring
the cellular aspect once more into the fore-
ground of medical science. Clinical blood
chemistry, notwithstanding its practical
usefulness, is like touring a state in a low
flying airplane and counting the number
of freight cars that are loaded with coal.
That will not tell us how much coal is
burning in furnaces, lying in covered sheds
or still underground, and this may be more
important than the amount in transit.
Pflueger’s proof that metabolism takes place
in the tissues and not in the blood was the
real death blow for humoral pathology. A
recent paper, “The cellular principle in
today’s biochemistry,” 45 describes the
chemical accomplishments of the cell in
detail, how it transports glucose and ami-
noacids even against the concentration
gradient, how it keeps sodium out of the
cell, and how the membranes which sur-
round the nucleus and the mitochondria
function in similar ways. It concludes that
modern biochemical knowledge shows the
correctness of the cellular principle.
The functional completeness of the single
cell decreases with evolution, it is best
preserved in the sex cell. But many mam-
malian cells do have a specific metabolism
which represents a functional separateness
perhaps inherited from a chemical mutation
in a single cell, and how shall one interpret
the different phases of secretion in neigh-
bouring glandular cells if not by individual
differences in reactivity?
The division of matter from energy hav-
ing disappeared, it has become meaningless
to separate form from function. If we
elaborate Karl Ernst von Baer’s delight-
ful idea of having our life extremely com-
pressed in time or extremely stretched, and
imagine an exaggerated slow motion picture
of a living cell at a magnification that
shows the molecules, then substance and
function will be one, and histology will
be identical with cytochemistry. A hundred
years ago, Virchow said that the basis for
the normal and pathological life of the cell
was to be found for the time being in
histology, in the finest anatomy. Mor-
phology to him was the way to physiology,
and pathology as well as biology have
travelled this road a good distance in the
last century. Thus it does not sound too
paradoxical any more when we say that
biochemistry is micro-micro-anatomy, that
in the ever flowing stream of a living
system, a histological aspect and a func-
tional phase are identical, or that “the
anatomy of an organism is the greatly
magnified expression of its chemistry.46
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
13
Life processes, like everything else, take
place in a space-time configuration.
It is an ever returning wish to make bi-
ology or one of its branches like pathology
into an exact science. This was Virchow’s
dream, and he went a long way in the
right direction. Almost 70 years after the
publication of the “Lectures on Cellular
Pathology,” Ricker, this sharp opponent of
Virchow, gave his book the title “Pathol-
ogy as Natural Science,” 11 and in 1950, V.
Bertalanffy closed his paper on “Open
Systems in Physics and Biology” by ex-
pressing the hope that this will “pave the
way for biology to become an exact
science.” 47 Finally in 1955, the anatomist
Zeiger wrote that it does not appear im-
possible anymore to resolve cytology into
physics and chemistry.35 The cellular doc-
trine opened the way to this desired goal.
Science often has been thwarted by
ecclesiastical or political interference, and
the cellular doctrine has not been spared.
An Austrian book from the National-So-
cialist era lets the “crazy idea” of cellular
pathology originate in the brain of a
French Jacobine (meaning Raspail), and
Virchow, it says, succeeded by a coup over-
night in introducing it, because Germany,
at the time, was infected wdth liberalistic,
materialistic ideas.48 Conversely we learn
from a paper, which appeared in Warsaw
in 1950, that cellular theory is built on
idealism and reactionary metaphysics,
and that its vestiges must be eradicated.49
In the same year, a new “dialectic-material-
istic” cell theory by Lepeshinskaya gained
official recognition in Russia and was
given a Stalin prize. This theory revived
Schwann’s belief that cells are formed in
a fluid, a blastema, which belief, ironical-
ly, had represented idealism to the Nazi,
in opposition to Virchow’s materialism.
Fortunately Lepeshinskaya has been dis-
avowed lately,50 and the “omnis cellula
e cellula” is recognized again in Russia.
Such things appear to us extreme, almost
unpardonable; but how will future histor-
ians judge our generation’s attitudes to-
ward the Malthus problem or to the ge-
netic danger of radioactive fallout?
Today’s situation of medicine is not un-
like that of 100 years ago in some re-
spects: The improved microscope of 1830
yielded a multitude of not always easily
digestible new facts, and the electron
microscope does the same today. One-
sided theories had to be and are to be
dealt with: humoral and solid pathology
then, systems like those of Ricker and
Speransky in our time. And the danger of
metaphysics encroaching upon medical
science which was so great in the “Roman-
tic” era should not be underrated today
either. We still live in the era of cellular
pathology and therefore are unable to
judge it historically. Its beginnings, three
generations back, are sufficiently removed,
and we can say that the cellular doctrine
has freed biology and medicine from
metaphysical chaos and thus gained last-
ing fame. Future history of science will
have to decide about the merits of anti-
cellular theories because they keep us from
a one-sided attitude and about their de-
merits because they raise anew the spectre
of metaphysics. Philosophical minds have
often dealt with analogies between world
and man, considering both as entities, and
the extremely holistic anticellular atti-
tude evokes the saying of a 16th century
humanist: “The world is one; not the
sum total of atoms that are subject to
chance, devoid of reason and incapable of
building up an orderly cosmos.” 51
Our ego feeling, the consciousness of
the human being as an indivisible unit,
may be the real basis of the biological
totality concept. But none of the theories
which accuse the cellular doctrine of neg-
lecting the organism as a whole has helped
us in grasping the genesis of our ego
consciousness.
As long as we have no method for at-
tacking the problem how the totality of the
metazoan organism is realized, it will re-
main preferable to study the parts that
make this totality, the cells, the tissues, the
organs. I am no judge of how far the
concept of the whole organism as an open
system in stream equilibrium (Bertalanffy)
has heuristic value, with the mathematical
14
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
possibilities which are claimed for it. But
it seems that the single cell with its in-
dividual metabolism also represents such
a system.
People will react in different ways to a
dictum like “every branch of science has
its roots in metaphysics.” 17 It may be
easier to accept Goethe’s formulation: “My
way of looking at things is my thinking,
and my way of thinking determines the way
I am seeing.” This shifts from metaphysics
to psychology, and it catches the pivotal
word “theory” in its original meaning of
“to see.” Even the sober Darwin once said
that there is no good observation without a
theory. The struggle between cellular doc-
trine and the totality aspect of living or-
ganisms is based to a large extent on dif-
ferences of personality. The totality aspect
is tempting esthetically ; the whole, the all
embracing, has more appeal than the de-
tails, one can feel like Faust compared
with his unimaginative famulus. The
philosophically trained Virchow knew how
to deal with such feelings. After describ-
ing how the analytical method leaves us
with the parts in our hands instead of the
whole, he continues “is not this whole de-
structive (zersetzende) natural science a
dead end street, and is it not truly high
time that we turn back to other pathways?
If only there were any: But we have no
choice.” 12, 51 The holistic aspect does not
only satisfy philosophical urges, it has in-
estimable value in practical medicine. No
good therapeutics are thinkable without
it. the total person should always be treated
not the localized disease. But psychother-
apy also must have a means of entry, which
may be represented by influencing a cere-
bral field of energy about whose function
we have not even a nebulous idea. All this
is beside the point when we look at theories
as tools of science, as means of finding out
more and more about the world around us
and in us. The whole, from the empirical
standpoint, always remains something we
add by thinking to the parts we perceive,
fein Hinzugedachtes) . Fr. Kraus,52 who
was the protagonist of constitutional medi-
cine, saw no discrepancy between it and
cellular doctrine. He believed that cells
retain a certain autonomy within the or-
ganism they form. The question thus be-
comes quantitative. Do we think more of
a federation (Staat) of rather independ-
ent cells as Virchow was inclined to do?
Or do we think of mutually dependent cells
which act together somehow through the
blood and the nervous system. This “some-
how” is the crux, the great question mark,
of biology and natural philosophy. Schwann
had recognized it clearly, twenty years
before the Lectures on Cellular Pathology
appeared. Virchow accepted the concept
of the unity of the organism in the realm of
psychology. His slogan for the practising
physician: “to console, to alleviate, to
cure” shows that the analytic cellular the-
ory need not interfere with a healthy holis-
tic attitude toward man, in medicine or
otherwise. Few will deny that the body
consists essentially of cells and their prod-
ucts since this is an observation not an
interpretation. Neither Virchow nor his
pupils have, to my knowledge, ever main-
tained that the cells lead an entitrely in-
dependent life, they only underestimated
the importance of interrelations.
The importance of the cell as the small-
est unit of life has been denied not only
by those who prefer larger units, but also
by those who in atomistic fashion look for
ever smaller ones.
The many colorful names given to imag-
inary units have disappeared from the lit-
erature, and so have Haeckel’s anuclear
protists and the “naked” nuclei. Locke, in
“ignorabimus” fashion, declared that man.
even with instruments, could never hope to
see the smallest units of biological func-
tion. R. Altmann in 1890 wrote a much dis-
cussed monograph with the title “The ele-
mentary organisms and their relationship
to the cells.” He described granules, “bio-
blasts”, as the ultimate units of living mat-
ter. The cell appeared too complex for him
for being the unit of life. I would rather
say that life is extremely complex, and a
simple unit therefore is unthinkable.
The idea even has been proposed that the
cell can disintegrate into minute particles
each of which will give rise to a new cell
in analogy to sporulation. Electron micro-
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
15
scopy has brought many details of cellular
structure to light, but not one of them so
far resembles a free living organism. Nor
do we see the postulated symbiotic con-
glomeration of virus sized living particles.
Granting that a gene and a virus may
sometimes be identical, and that viruses
are organisms in a way, the fact remains
that viruses do not lead an independent
life but need the host cell. In this respect,
the much compartmentalized cell still is the
smallest unit of complete independent life,
and there seems to be consensus about this.
When people doubt the role of the cell as a
fundamental unit because a denucleated
fragment of an amoeba retains properties
of living matter for some time, then the
conclusion does not appear cogent. The
anuclear fragment cannot divide and thus
survive, it can ingest particles but cannot
digest them, it can use glucose as a source
of food but cannot synthesize nitrogenous
compounds from glucose and urea. A de-
nucleated plant cell does not form a new
cellulose wall unless it is in contact with
a complete cell.
Similarly, a denucleated egg cell can
sometimes undergo cleavage, but develop-
ment does not go further than the blastula,
and the anuclear cells of such a blastula
do not react to induction stimuli. The addi-
tion of a nucleus to the previously denucle-
ated egg cell is followed by normal de-
velopment in many instances. We do not
know how far the evolution of life out of
ordinary molecular structures took place
slowly in minute steps or what role sud-
den, mutation like, changes have played.
No matter how this has been there must
have been precursors to the cell. But
nothing compels us to assume that any
existing forms resemble the postulated pre-
cursors. To take viruses as the precursors
of cells is as unfounded as calling the
chimpanzee the ancestor of man. We may
discover smaller entities that possess some,
but not all, characteritics of life, but we
will have to be wary about assigning to
them ancestorship to the world of cellular
life. Maybe we should declare a mora-
torium on theories about the microstruc-
ture of living matter until a larger body of
electron microscopic data and correspond-
ing microchemical data is available. But
I seriously doubt that we ever shall find a
“unit of life” at the Angstrom level.
The concept of the atom as the smallest
particle of matter existed for two millennia
before methods were devised to prove its
reality; that means: theory preceded obser-
vation. It was the converse with the cell
since cellular theory came about 150 years
after cells had been seen. Virchow, in 1855,
considered it easier to build the basic
ideas of biology upon the cellular ele-
ments than to build physics upon molecules
and atoms since “cells are within the boun-
daries of sensual perception while the units
of the physicists, the molecules and atoms,
are only conclusions from sensual percep-
tions and are philosophically so little sat-
isfactory that we can look at their assump-
tion only as a temporary termination of
research.” 13 The inner structure of cells
as well as atoms appears more and more
complex with improving methods of in-
vestigation. Both were originally consid-
ered static structures but appear now as
dynamic systems.
A historical comparison between physics
and biology as far as small units are con-
cerned may not be out of place. Howt real
is the connection between the atomic ideas
of Democritus and the modern concept of
atoms, and what about the relationship
between cellular theory and Leibniz’s
monads? Dalton’s publications on atoms,
which began in 1803, were in part re-
sponsible for the interest in small units of
living matter. But the urge to know about
the atoms of life had been strong for gen-
erations in the best minds: Leibniz,
Locke, Buffon, to mention only a few7. The
divisibility of matter, living or not, ap-
pears as a logical postulate, a thought that
arises independent of observation. Thus
when Virchow7 applied the recently proved
cellular composition of the animal body to
the often voiced idea of everything consist-
ing of small units he fulfilled a strong log-
ical desire of his generation, and similar
ideas had been voiced in the decades before
him by people who had not made original
observations. The large number of new
16
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
anatomical observations that had accumu-
lated since 1830 made a theory into which
new facts could be fitted doubly welcome.
The comparison between physics and biol-
ogy may have entered a new phase in our
days with the concept of feedback. How far
do we think of the computer as a whole, a
totality, and how far do we think of the
single tubes or transistors. One might call
that a “seeming problem” (Scheinproblem)
not a true problem but could one not say
the same of the totality aspect and the cel-
lular aspect in biology?
The cells serve two masters, one rules
from inside the cell by Virchowian law, the
other resides in the organism of which the
cells are a part, but where and how he rules
is unknown. In the fertilized egg, the cell
and the organism are the same. When Spe-
mann, using a fine hair, carefully sepa-
rated the two blastomeres which had re-
sulted from the first division of an am-
phibian egg, each cell developed into a
complete larva, in spite of the fact that it
was not under the influence of the total or-
ganism. When Roux, the founder of ex-
perimental embryology, had attempted in
1888, the same experiment by destroying
the one cell with a hot needle, the result
had been different: only half an embryo
was formed. The remaining cell was pre-
vented from following its inherent power
of forming a complete larva by the rem-
nants of the destroyed cell which so to say
reminded it of its dependent status in re-
lation to the total organism. Removal of
certain cells from a young embryo general-
ly leads to malformation of the larva be-
cause the total organism has been dis-
turbed. But careful removal (Ubisch) has,
in certain animals, resulted in defects of
only that part of the body that cor-
responded to the removed cell.54 That
means: the totality influence was nil, only
the removed cell counted. This ambival-
ence is demonstrated in grotesque fashion
by the chimaera experiment. A fragment
of a young frog embryo is taken from the
area that is destined to become central
nervous system, and is transplanted into
that part of a salamander embryo that
will form the mouth. The fragment will de-
velop into a mouth, in spite of the fact
that it was meant to become nervous tis-
sue; thus it obeys the law of the total or-
ganism to which it now belongs. But this
mouth will be a frog’s mouth in a sala-
mander body because the transplanted
cells also obey their inherent nature.
Thus, there is no yes-or-no-answer to
the question of independence or depend-
ence of the cell. Simple answers hardly
ever do justice to the complexity of life
processes.55 Even the staunch enemy of
cellular doctrine, M. Heidenhain,56 con-
sidered the antithesis between cellular
dominance and organismic dominance as
erroneous since “all and everything in the
living body is based on interrelation be-
tween the whole and the part.” But who,
may I ask, no matter how philosophy
minded he may be, can refrain from
searching for the source and seat of this
mysterious force which the whole exerts
over the parts? We come back to the above
quoted word of the 80 year old Goethe:
“Thus one is driven from the whole to the
detail and from the detail to the whole
whether one wants to or not.” We can ex-
pect the cell to remain, for some time to
come, if not our unit of life so certainly
our main unit of investigation, and the cel-
lular doctrine will remain a most valuable
guide in the progress of biology and that
part of it which we call medical science.
REFERENCES
1 de Voltaire, J. F. A., “La Pucelle”, chant 21.
3 Gross, S. D., 1845, Elements of Pathological
Anatomy, 2 ed., Barrington and Haswell, Phila-
delphia.
3 Schultze, M., 1861, Arch. f. Anat. u. Physiol,
u. wissenschaftl. Med. 9, 24.
4 Rich, A. R., 1926, Johns Hopkins Hosp. Bull.
39, 330.
5 Remak, R., 1951, quoted by G. R. Cameron,
The Pathology of the Cell, C. C. Thomas, Spring-
field, 111. p. 24.
3 Cornil, V., 1901, Berk Klin. Wchnschr., Oct.
14, 1936.
7 Virchow, R., 1860, Cellular Pathology as
Based upon Physiological and Pathological His-
tology. Twenty lectures delivered at the Patho-
logical Institute of Berlin during the months of
February, March and April 1858, R. M. DeWitt.
New York.
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
17
8 tie Beer, Sir Gavin, 1958, in C. Darwin and
A. R. Wallace, Evolution by Natural Selection,
Cambridge Univ. Press, pp. 1-22.
* Berthold, A., 1849, Arch. f. Anat. u. Physiol,
u. wissenschaftl. Med.
10 Klein-Hattingen, 0., 1871, Geschichte des
Liberalismus in Deutschland, Berlin-Schoeneberg,
Buchverlag der Hilfe, 1, 377.
11 Ricker, G., 1924, Pathologie als Naturwis-
senschaft, Berlin.
18 Goethe, quoted by R. Virchow, 1862, “Atome
und Individuen” in Vier Reden ueber Leben und
Kranksein, Georg Reimer, Berlin, p. 58.
13 Virchow, R., 1855, Arch. path. Anat., 8, 33.
14 Speransky, A. D., 1935, A basis for the
Theory of Medicine, transl. and ed. by C. P.
Dutt in collab. with A. A. Sobkov, Internat.
Publ., New York.
15 Randerath, E., 1956, Deutsches med. J. 7, 49.
16 Lange, F., W. Ehrich and A. E. Cohn, 1930,
J. Exp. Med. 52, 65.
17 Mayer, C. F., 1952, Bull. Hist. Med., 25, 71.
18 Pavlov, J. P., 1953-54, Saemtliche Werke,
Akademie Verlag, Berlin.
19 Long, E. R., 1928, A History of Pathology,
William and Wilkins, Baltimore.
29 Kuester, E., 1938, “Die Entwicklung der
Lehre von der Pflanzenzelle” in Hundert Jahre
Zellforschung, vol. 17, of Protoplasma-Mono-
graphien Deuticke, Berlin.
21 Oertel, H., 1921, General Pathology, P. B.
Hoeber, New York.
22 Goethe, in letter to Sulpiz Boisseree, Feb. 25,
1832, Ausgabe letzter Hand, 1833, 55, 96, Cotta
Verlag, Stuttgart u. Tuebingen.
23 Doerr, W., 1958, Deutsche Med. Wchnschr.
83, 370.
24 Beattie, J. M., and W. C. Dickson, 1948, A
Textbook of Pathology, Gruene and Stratton,
New York.
25 Adami, G. J., 1910, The Principles of Pa-
thology, 2 ed., Lea and Febiger, Philadelphia,
vol. 1, p. 40.
20 Hueck, W. 1920, Beitr. z. Pathol. Anat., 66,
330.
27 Stoehr, P., Jr., 1951, Lehrbuch der Histologie
und der mikroskopischen Anatomie des Menschen,
Springer Verlag, Berlin.
28 Mnzia, D., 1957, “The Life History of the
Cell”, in Science in Progress, ser. 10, G. E.
Baitsell, Ed. (Yale Univ. Press, New Haven,
Conn.) .
29 Verworn, M., 1895, Allgemeine Physiologie,
Ein Grundriss der Lehre vom Leben, Fischer-
Jena.
30 Casperson, T. 0., 1950, Cell Growth and Cell
Function. A Cytochemical Study, Norton and Co.,
New York.
31 Puck, T. T., 1957, The Mammalian Cell as
an Independent Organism. Spec. Publ. of the
New York Acad. Sc. 5, 291.
38 Studnicka, F. K., 1929, Die Organisation der
lebendigen Masse, in Handbuch der mikroskopi-
schen Anatomie des Menschen, W. v. Moellendorf
Ed. (Springer Verlag, Berlin) 1/1/1, 421.
33 Bauer, 1952, quoted by J. Baker, The Cell
Theory: A Restatement, History and Critique,
Part 3, “The Cell as a Morphological Unit,”
Quart. J. Microsc. Sc. 93, 157.
34 Virchow, R., 1862, Die Cellularpathologie in
ihrer Begruendung auf physiologische und patho-
logische Gewebelehre, 3 Aufl, August Hirschwald,
Berlin.
35Zeiger, K., 1955, Zur Geseschichte der Zell-
forschung und ihrer Begriffe, in Handbuch der
allgem. Pathologie, Buechner, Letterer, Roulet
ed., Springer Verlag, Berlin, Goettingen, Heidel-
berg, 2 part 1.
30 Bargmann, W., 1958, Deutsche Med.
Wchnschr., 83, 361.
37 Gross, J., 1958, Bull. New York Acad. Med..
43, 701.
38 Szirmai, J. A., and E. A. Balazs, 1958, Arch.
Opthalm. 59, 34.
39 Olssen, R., 1957, Z. Zellforschung 46, 12.
40Wightmann, W. P. D., 1951, The Growth of
Scientific Ideas, Yale Univ. Press, New Haven,
Conn. p. 388, 390.
41 Fischer, A., 1946, Biology of Tissue Cells,
Cambridge Univ. Press, p. 53, 58.
42 Pumper, R. W., 1958, Science, 128, 363.
43 Virchow, R., 1847, Arch, pathol. Anat. 1, 19.
44 Fleming, W., 1882, Zellsubstanz, Kern und
Zellteilung, Vogel Verlag, Leipzig.
45 Netter, H., 1958, Deutsche Med. Wchnschr.
83, 364.
46 Wald, G., 1958, Science, 128, 1481.
47 Bertalanffy, L. V., 1950, Science, 111, 23.
48 Lartschneider, J., 1940, Hippokrates oder
Virchow, Franz Deuticke, Vienna.
49 Krupinsky, J.. 1950, Polski Tygodnik Lekar-
ski, 5, 1137. '
50 Zhinkin, L. N., and V. P. Mikhailov, 1958,
Science, 128, 182.
51 Reuchlin, J., quoted by W. Ppgel, 1958,
Paracelsus, S. Karger Verlag, Basel and New
York, p. 292.
52 Kraus, F., 1919, Die allgemeine und spezielle
Pathologie der Person, Allgemeiner Teil, Leipzig,
Georg Thieme Verlag, p. 51.
53 Altmann, R., 1890, Die Elementarorganismen
und ihre Beziehungen zu den Zellen, Veit und
Co., Leipzig.
54 von Ubisch, 1957, quoted by W. Bargmann,
Vom Bau und Werden der Organismen, Rowohlt
Verlag, Hamburg, p. 46.
55 Plaut, A., 1924, Beitr. z. Path. Anat. u. Allg.
Path., 72, 654.
56 Heidenhain, M., 1937, Synthetische Mor-
phologie der Niere des Menschen, E. J. Brill
Publ., Leiden.
57 Moscona, A. A., 1959, Scientific Amer. 200,
132.
For further references see:
G. R. Cameron, 1951. Pathology of the Cell,
C. G. Thomas, Springfield, 111.
18
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
The Insecticide Society of Washington
C. M. Smith
In January 1959 there was affiliated with
the Washington Academy of Sciences an
organization known as the Insecticide So-
ciety of Washington. It is believed that
members of the Academy will be interested
in an account of the founding and nature
of this organization, and this seems an
appropriate time to so acquaint them be-
cause the Society was started by Dr. F. L.
Campbell, the 1959 President of the Acad-
emy, and October of that year marked the
25th anniversary of its founding.
The U. S. Department of Agriculture has
long been interested in avoiding or con-
trolling the damage caused by insects at-
tacking crops, farm animals, and even man
himself. As the interest in controlling
these pests grew it was natural that chemi-
cal compounds were tried and recommend-
ed for the purpose. The manufacture
and sale of such chemical insecticides as-
sumed such dimensions that there arose a
need for some form of control over their
purity and for keeping a check-rein upon
the validity of the claims made for their
efficacy. In 1910 the U. S. Congress passed
the so-called Insecticide Act. The Insecti-
cide and Fungicide Board, composed of
representatives from the U. S. Bureaus of
Entomology, Plant Industry, Animal Indus-
try, and Chemistry, was appointed to ad-
minister the act. There also was estab-
lished in the Bureau of Chemistry an In-
secticide Division for the analysis of chem-
ical insecticides. Naturally, need arose
for a considerable amount of research
work to develop the knowledge necessary
properly to enforce the act. The regula-
tory and research activities were finally
separated, with each group building up
laboratories staffed by scientists of vari-
ous kinds.
In October 1934, Dr. F. L. Campbell,
an entomologist in the Division of Control
Investigations of the Bureau of Entom-
ology, recognized the need for closer per-
sonal association of the scientists in the
Washington area who were working in the
field of insecticides, particularly to pro-
vide for informal exchange of ideas and
discussion of technical and scientific prob-
lems. In a letter dated October 4, he re-
ported to the Chief of his Division the
results of a meeting held at his house the
previous evening. This meeting was at-
tended by all members of his own labora-
tory and by Dr. R. C. Roark and Mr.
C. M. Smith of the Insecticide Division,
Mr. W. S. Abbott of the Insecticide Testing
Laboratory at Beltsville, and Dr. C. A.
Weigel from the Truck Crop and Garden
Insects Division. This group decided to
hold an organizing meeting on October
17 and this action was then called to the
attention of all those men in the nearby
laboratories of the Department of Agricul-
ture and the University of Maryland at
College Park, who conceivably might be
interested. This meeting was held as
planned in Dr. Campbell’s laboratory at
7710 Blair Road. Takoma Park.
The response was very gratifying, 55
persons attended. A temporary committee
composed of Mr. W. S. Abbott, Chairman,
and Drs. L. A. Hawkins, R. C. Roark, E.
H. Siegler, and C. A. Weigel, was ap-
pointed to suggest an outline for the na-
ture of the organization and the rules and
regulations to govern the conduct of future
meetings. This committee met in the
Takoma Park laboratory on October 24,
1934 and drafted such a set of recommen-
dations. They then set the date for the
next meeting November 14, at which time
temporary chairman, Mr. W. S. Abbott
brought the recommendations before the
membership and the following rules were
adopted in lieu of a formal constitution
and by laws:
I. The name of the organization shall be
“The Insecticide Society of Washing-
ton”.
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
19
2. The membership shall be limited to
federal and state men who are inter-
ested in insecticides.
3. A nominating committee shall be ap-
pointed to suggest candidates for the
following offices: Chairman, Vice-Chair-
man, Secretary, Treasurer, and a “Steer-
ing Committee” to be composed of the
first two officers and three other mem-
bers.
4. The Steering Committee shall be au-
thorized to perform all the functions
that are usually assigned to several
committees in larger organizations; i.e.,
executive, program, membership, ar-
rangements for meetings, and refresh-
ment. This committee shall endeavor to
secure speakers best qualified to talk
on the topic chosen. Non-members, in-
cluding employees of commercial firms
may be invited to speak.
5. Meetings shall be held preferably on the
third Wednesday of each month from
September to June, inclusive.
6. Dues shall be SI. 00 per year per mem-
ber.
The nominating committee suggested in-
dividuals for the four offices and the mem-
bers confirmed Dr. F. L. Campbell as
Chairman, Mr. C. M. Smith as Vice-Chair-
man, Mr. J. W. Bulger as Secretary, and
Mr. S. C. Billings as Treasurer. Drs. E.
L. Griffin, C. A. Weigel, and E. H. Siegler
were chosen to be the steering committee.
Following a lapsus linguae by the secre-
tary, this committee came to be called for
quite some time, the “steerage committee”.
Some of these regulations were changed
as time passed. The two offices of secre-
tary and treasurer were merged into one
and the election date changed to May, the
officers then serving from July to June.
At the suggestion of the Entomological So-
ciety of Washington, the Insecticide Society
soon devoted the June meeting to partici-
pating in the annual picnic of that other
affiliate of the Washington Academy. The
most significant change, however, was to
broaden the membership to include inter-
ested scientists and technical people from
industry.
Since the membership of the Insecticide
Society consisted mainly of entomologists
and chemists, it immediately became the
practice to elect a Chairman from among
the former one year, and from the latter
the next year. In most cases this conven-
tion has been followed to the present day.
The Society has used a number of meet-
ing places over the years, as necessity and
expediency demanded. The first ten meet-
ings were held at Dr. Campbell’s labora-
tory in Takoma Park. Meetings numbered
11 to 52, inclusive, were held at the nearby
Jesup-Blair House on Georgia Avenue,
just outside the District of Columbia.
With the coming of World War II, this
building was taken over by the county
draft board and the next three meetings
had to be held in other county buildings
in Silver Spring. One of these was in a
room over the police station and the other
two over the liquor dispensary. The
record does not make clear whether the
latter two were better attended or more
lively than those held elsewhere! Meetings
numbered 56 to 62 were held at the
Bethesda Recreation Center Building at
4700 Norwood Place, Bethesda. Finally,
Dr. E. N. Cory, then Professor of En-
tomology at the University of Maryland
in College Park, and State Entomologist
of Maryland, kindly made arrangements for
the Society to meet in his quarters in
Morrill Hall at the University. This proved
to be quite satisfactory and the Society
met here until October 1954. That year
the Entomology Department moved to new
quarters in Symons Hall and the Society
went along, meeting in lecture rooms and
later in the auditorium.
One unique feature of the Society that
deserves comment is that the dues of one
dollar per year, established in 1934, have
never been increased. Where else will a
dollar buy as much today as 25 years ago?
In the course of 25 years over 300 papers
have been presented at the meetings. The
first two were given by Mr. J. S. Yip, a
specialist in the cultivation of the insecti-
cidal plant, pyrethruin, and Dr. F. B.
Laforge, a chemist long identified as an au-
thority on the chemistry of the insectici-
20
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
dally active constituents of this plant. It
seems quite appropriate that the Society
began its existence by consideration of
this, one of the most important and inter-
esting of plant insecticide materials.
Through the years the topics discussed
have ranged over the entire broad field of
pesticides and their use. There also have
been excellent papers on such diverse sub-
jects as plant growth regulators, photo-
periodism in plants and insects, insect
physiology and even scientific travelogues.
The list of speakers includes bureau and
division chiefs from various civil agencies,
professors, representatives of the Armed
Services, prominent authorities from in-
dustry and members of Congress. We also
have had prominent guests from other
countries from time to time. Among the
early speakers were Mr. R. H. LePelley, a
government entomologist from Kenya Col-
ony, British East Africa, and Dr. F. Tat-
tersfield, Head of the Department of In-
secticides and Fungicides at the Rotham-
stead Experiment Station in England. The
Society honored the latter at a dinner meet-
ing at the Cosmos Club on May 31, 1935.
Now for a few words concerning the
attendance at the meetings of the Society
through the years. Naturally the number
soon dropped below the 55 who attended
the organizational meeting, but an average
of 45 was maintained through the eight
meetings of the first year. In April 1939,
Dr. L. P. Ditman, then Secretary-Treasurer,
presented a report on the attendance fig-
ures. He stated “Many individuals seemed
rather surprised that the Society has existed
for so long a period. Many are still rather
uncertain as to the future of the Society”
and concluded his memorandum with his
own comment, “As far as the future of
the Society is concerned, the Secretary feels
that it will exist as long as a minimum of
20 good souls will continue to brave such
nights as were experienced during January,
February, and March of 1939”. His faith
in the Society was well founded, for al-
though the attendance figure once dropped
to 13, the Society has now lasted an ad-
ditional 20 years. It also speaks well for
the insight of Dr. Campbell and the other
founders of the Society, that the purpose of
the organization is still the same — a place
where these “20 or more good souls” can
meet in an informal atmosphere to en-
hance their knowledge of insecticides and
like matters; to listen, to discuss, even
to argue at times; and, not the least, to
enjoy the company of our colleagues. It
also is gratifying that the Society has the
stature to be honored as an affiliate of the
Washington Academy of Sciences.
REPRINT PRICES
for the journal
To take advantage of the following prices, orders must be placed by authors when
they return galley proof.
100 reprints $1.60 per pg.
200 $2.65
300 $2.95
400 $3.40
500 $3.75
600 $4.20
700 $4.65
800 $5.05
900 $5.50
1000 $5.95
Four page covers, printed on one side of one page only, may also be ordered at
the same time.
100 covers $13.00
Additional 100’s $ 2.50
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
21
Science in Washington
SCIENTISTS IN THE NEWS
This column will present brief items
concerning the activities of members of
the Academy. Such items may include
notices of talks given, important confer-
ences or visits, promotions, awards, elec-
tion to membership or office in scientific
and technical societies, appointment to
technical committees, civic activities, and
marriages, births, and other family news.
Formal contributors are being assigned for
the systematic collection of news at in-
stitutions employing considerable numbers
of Academy members (see list on mast-
head). However, for the bulk of the
membership, we must rely on individuals
to send us news concerning themselves and
their friends. Contributions may be ad-
dressed to S. B. Detwiler, Jr., Associate
Editor. 2605 S. 8th St., Arlington, Va.
Applied Physics Laboratory
Alfred J. Zmuda has been appointed
a consultant to the Geophysics Panel of the
Air Force Scientific Advisory Board.
Coast & Geodetic Survey
Dean S. Carder was appointed chief
seismologist of C&GS in October, 1959.
During December he was elected a member
of the Scientific Council of the Geological
Society of Washington; also, he partici-
pated as observer and analyst in Phase l
of the Louisiana “Cowboy Shots.” Dr.
Carder is serving as president of Rapidan
Camps. Inc., a cooperative camping group
in the Blue Ridge.
Charles A. W hitten, chief of the Tri-
angulation Branch, presented a paper on
the computation and adjustment of geo-
detic networks as part of an international
symposium held at Cracow, Poland, Sep-
tember 9-13, 1959. The presentation was
made by invitation of the Polish Academy
of Sciences.
Aaron L. Shalowitz has been elected
a fellow of the American Geographical
Society. Dr. Schalowitz represented
C&GS at the recent Third Annual Meeting
of the Florida Shore and Beach Preser-
vation Association.
David G. Knapp recently visited Peru,
Chile, Argentina, Brazil, and Puerto Rico,
to confer with geophysical scientists; he
was accompanied by Mrs. Knapp. Dr.
Knapp participated in the Symposio Ant-
artico de Buenos Aires, held November
17-25 under the sponsorship of the Insti-
tuto Antartico Argentino.
Thomas J. Hickley was recently
made chief of the Instrument Davision.
Geological Survey
At the annual meeting of the Mineralogi-
cal Society of America in early November,
George Switzer was elected secretary, and
Marjorie Hooker the treasurer of the
organization. George T. Faust was ap-
pointed to the Nomenclature Committee for
1960-62, while Edwin W. Roedder was
appointed to the Board of Associate Editors
for 1960-62, and to the Awards Committee.
At the annual meeting of the Geochemi-
cal Society last November, George T.
Faust was re-elected treasurer and reap-
pointed to the Advisory Board on the
International Critical Tables.
Francis R. Fosberg attended AAAS
Council meeting in Chicago, December 26-
30. While in Chicago he presented a
paper, “Problems of Tropical Herbaria,”
before the Society of Plant Taxonomists
on December 28. On December 10, Dr.
Fosberg sat with the NAS Committee on
Science in UNESCO, as U. S. member on
the Advisory Committee on Science Re-
search in the Humid Tropics.
While on a vacation trip in November
and December. Margaret D. Foster
visited points of interest in Morocco, Spain,
Majorca, Sicily, Italy, and southern France.
National Bureau of Standards
On January 4. Director Allen V. Astin
resumed his duties on a part-time basis fol-
lowing recuperation from a heart attack.
22
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
Three NBS staff members presented
invited papers at a symposium on weights
and measures at the Chicago AAAS meet-
ings, December 28-29. Lewis V. Jutlson
spoke on “Our Units of Weights and Meas-
ures”; Irvine C. Gardner discussed
“Adoption of a New System of Weights
and Measures”; and Wiliner Souder
presented “Metric Usage — Report of Spe-
cial AAAS Committee.” At the same meet-
ing, George C. Paffenbarger spoke on
“Dental Materials from 1939 to 1959.” Dr.
Paffenbarger is a research associate of the
American Dental Association, stationed at
NBS.
Two staff members have been appointed
to editoral boards of the American Chemi-
cal Society for the three-year term 1960-63.
Roger G. Bates, assistant chief of the
Chemistry Division, was appointed to the
Advisory Board of Chemical and Engi-
neering News, and Bourdon F. Scribner,
chief of the Spectrochemistry Section, will
serve on the Advisory Board of Analyti-
cal Chemistry.
Kurt E. Shuler spoke on “Energy
Transfer and Relaxation Processes in Gas
Phase Collisions” at the Harvard MIT
Physical Chemistry Colloqium held at
Cambridge on January 7.
Walter J. Hamer, chief of the Electro-
chemistry Section, on December 15 was
elected vice president of the Electrochem-
ical Society for the three-year term 1960-
63. He will assume office on May 1, at
the Society’s national meeting in Chicago.
On completion of his term as vice presi-
dent. Dr. Hamer will become president of
the Society for the 1963-64 term.
On January 5, William J. Youden
presented a paper on “Experiments In-
volving Several Variables” at the Air Re-
duction Corporation, Murray Hill, N. J.,
and a paper on “Statistical Ideas Useful in
Experimentation” at a meeting of the So-
ciety for Applied Spectroscopy in New
York City.
William F. Meggers, former chief of
the Spectroscopy Section and now retired,
left Washington January 15 on a trip
around the world, accompanied by Mrs.
Meggers. The couple plans to visit Near-
and Far-Eastern countries during a 60-day
tour.
Alan D. Franklin was appointed act-
ing chief of the Mineral Products Division
in November; he replaces Irl C. Schoon-
over, who will devote full time to his
duties as associate director for planning.
Dr. Franklin, who received the Ph.D. de-
gree from Princeton in 1950, served as
chief of the Franklin Institute’s Magnetics
Section from 1945 to 1955, when he came
to NBS. Since joining the Mineral Prod-
ucts Division he has conducted research
on the fundamental properties of ferroelec-
tric materials.
Karl G. Kessler was appointed chief
of the Spectroscopy Section last August.
In this capacity Dr. Kessler will direct
work in interferometry, analysis of spectra,
and the study of hyperfine structure and
isotope shift in spectra; additionally, he
will continue to head the Bureau project to
develop a new wavelength standard of
length, using atomic beams as a light
source.
National Institutes of Health
Erich Mosettig of the Laboratory of
Chemistry, National Institute of Arthritis
and Metabolic Diseases, returned to
Bethesda December 23 after an unusual
international lecture tour of extensive prop-
portions. The trip, sponsored jointly by
NIAMD and the Cancer Chemotherapy
National Service Center, involved over
25 formal lectures and informal talks be-
fore scientific groups in Honolulu. Japan.
Hong Kong, Thailand, India, Pakistan.
Lebanon, Turkey, and Austria. These lec-
tures covered various aspects of the NIH
research program, including the biochem-
istry of steroidal compounds, modern anal-
gesics, endogenous carcinogenesis, and
cancer chemotherapy.
State Department
Wallace R. Brode, science adviser to
the Secretary of State, has won the Amer-
ican Chemical Society’s 1960 Priestley
Medal, according to recent announcement
by retiring ACS President John C. Bailar.
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
23
Jr. The gold medal — highest honor in
American chemistry — was awarded to
Dr. Erode for ‘‘distinguished services to
chemistry”; it will be presented at the
137th national meeting of ACS in Cleve-
land next April. Immediate past president
of AAAS, Dr. Brode is on leave from the
National Bureau of Standards, where he
has been associate director for the past
12 years; he was for 20 years professor
of chemistry at Ohio State University.
Deaths
Rees F. Tener, assistant chief of the
Testing and Specifications Section, Na-
tional Bureau of Standards, died suddenly
on December 25. A native of Sinking
Springs, Ohio, Mr. Tener received the
M.S. degree from GWU in 1926. After
Army service during World War I and
science teaching experience, he joined the
NBS staff in 1924, serving in the Rubber
Section until 1930 and thereafter in the
Testing and Specifications Section. Mr.
Tener, a recipient of the Commerce De-
partment’s Meritorious Service Award, was
an authority in various fields of rubber
chemistry and on the development of speci-
fications and test methods for organic and
fibrous products. He was particularly ac-
tive in committee work for ASTM and
the American Standards Association.
Walter J. Murphy, editorial director
of the American Chemical Society’s applied
journals, died of cancer on November 26.
Dr. Murphy’s death came at the height
of a notable career devoted to bettering
the chemical profession and industry. Un-
der his leadership over a 17-year period,
the ACS applied publications became the
largest scientific publication program in
the world, with a total circulation of over
165,000. He was also director of the
Society’s News Service, the public rela-
tions organization serving the chemical
profession.
Following a successful start in the chem-
ical process industries, Dr. Murphy en-
tered the technical publication field in
1930, when he was named managing edi-
tor, and later editor and general manager,
of Chemical Industries. Subsequently he
was named editor of Chemical and Engi-
neering News and Industrial and Engineer-
ing Chemistry. In 1953 he initiated the
Journal of Agricultural and Food Chem-
istry, and in 1959 the Journal of Chemical
and Engineering Data. In 1947 he had re-
ceived the honorary D.Sc. degree from
Centre College of Kentucky.
AFFILIATED SOCIETIES
As time goes on, we hope to establish in
this section of the Journal periodic reports
of the activities of the some twenty-six
scientific bodies affiliated with the Wash-
ington Academy of Sciences, reports which
will be of interest and service to members
of the Academy. Experience will indicate,
as we go along, just what sorts of material
are both obtainable and worthwhile, but at
this stage we have in mind such items as:
meeting places, dates, and topics, special
projects, summaries of society proceedings,
educational and promotional programs,
public relations efforts, and so on. Machin-
ery is gradually being set up whereby one
individual in each affiliate will keep us in-
formed of what goes on in his particular
organization. In addition, we will include,
as data become available to us, names of
incumbent president and secretary of each
society listed, with indications of changes
as they occur.
We solicit information from individual
members of the Academy as a most wel-
come supplement to the established chan-
nels.— Russell B. Stevens, Associate Edi-
tor, George Washington University.
American Meteorological Society,
District of Columbia Branch
Oct. 21. panel discussion on the “Use of
Artificial Satellites in Meteorology,” with
Sigmund Fritz, David Wark, Charles Bris-
tor, Jay Winston, Lester Hubert, and David
Johnson, all of the U. S. Weather Bureau,
participating.
Nov. 18, address by A. H. Mikesell, U. S.
Naval Observatory, on “Finding the Jet
Stream by Star Twinkling.”
24
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
Dec. 16, panel discussion on “Oceano-
graphic Forecasting,” with John Schule,
Richard James, Howard French, and Wal-
ter Wittman, all of U. S. Navy Hydro-
graphic Office as participants.
Jan. 20, meeting in Lecture Room, NAS-
NRC, 2101 Constitution Ave., N.W., 8:00
P.M., with a talk by Albert P. Crary, Geo-
physical Research Directorate, on “Antarc-
tic Meteorology.”
Feb. 10, meeting scheduled as above, to
hear Joseph Smagorinsky, U. S. Weather
Bureau, discuss “Digital Simulation of the
General Circulation.”
American Society for Metals,
Washington Chapter
President: William L. Holshouser
(NBS). Secretary : Glenn W. Geil (NBS)
Nov. 16, meeting and address by Robert
F. Thompson, General Motors Corporation,
on “Automotive Gas Turbines.”
Dec. 21, joint meeting with AWS and lec-
ture by Alexander Lesnewich, Air Reduc-
tion Company, on “Electron Beam Weld-
ing.”
Jan. 18, Meeting and talk by Morris
Tanenbaum, Bell Telephone Laboratories,
on “Metallurgy in Electronics.”
Feb. 8, Burgess Memorial Lecture, Ar-
lington Towers, by R. H. Aborn, U. S. Steel
Corporation.
March 21, John E. Hilliard, General
Electric Company, “Pressure - Induced
Transformation in Metals.”
April 18, Walter L. Finlay, Crucible
Steel Company, “Titanium and Competi-
tive Stainless Steels.”
May 16, National Officers Night, fea-
turing address by the National President,
Walter Crafts, on “Facing the Productivity
Challenge: Men and Metals of the Next
Decade.”
The Washington Chapter, ASM, spon-
sored a series of six Thursday Night Talks
on Metallurgy, Oct. 29-Dec. 10, for high
school students, metal workers, and others.
A second series, sponsored by the NBS
and local technical societies, is scheduled
for the Department of Commerce audito-
rium at 7:30 P.M., on Tuesday evenings,
Jan. 12, 19, 26 and Feb. 2, 9, on the gen-
eral topic: “Materials Development in the
Space and Atomic Age.” All interested per-
sons are invited.
Anthropological Society
of Washington
Three meetings were held in the fall of
1959, as follows: (1) Oct. 27, Carlson
Gadjusek, National Institutes of Health,
an illustrated lecture on “Child Growth
and Development Patterns in New Guinea”;
(2) Nov. 16, Eugene I. Knez, The Smith-
sonian Institution, a “Korean Dance Festi-
val,” featuring dances in costume by five
Korean women and children; and (3) Dec.
11, Louis J. Luzbetak, two color films on
tribal life in the interior of New Guinea.
Botanical Society of Washington
President: Harold T. Cook (USDA). Cor-
responding Secretary: Muriel J. O’Brien
(USDA)
Dec. 1, presidential address by H. C.
Hanson, Catholic University, on the flora
of Alaska.
Jan. 6, regular meeting and presenta-
tion by H. C. Murphy, Department of
Agriculture on “Oat Diseases are Shifty
Enemies.”
Feb. 2, next regular meeting, Powell
Auditorium, 2170 Florida Ave., N.W., at
8:00 P.M.
Chemical Society of Washington
President: Allen L. Alexander (NRL).
Secretary: John L. Torgesen (NBS).
Dec. 10, general meeting of the society,
featuring an address by Wallace R. Brode,
Department of State, on “Formulation of
a Science Program.” A Board of Managers
meeting, on the same date, under the chair-
manship of President W. W. Walton, heard
reports as follows: (1) Committee on Edu-
cation— CSW is cooperating with the ACS
Division of Chemical Education in can-
vassing local high schools for requests for
the Visiting Lecturer Program; (2) Com-
mittee on Programs — arrangements are
being completed for a joint meeting with
the Maryland Section of the ACS, prob-
ably Friday. May 6. at the University of
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
25
Maryland; (3) from R. F. Gould of ACS
Headquarters concerning the chemistry
merit badge of the Boy Scouts of America
— which problem will be studied by the
Committee on Education.
Geological Society of Washington
President: Harry S. Ladd (USGS). Cor-
responding Secretary: j. Thomas Dutro
(USGS).
Dec. 9, address by retiring President
Joseph W. Greig, Carnegie Institution,
on “Development of Phase Equilibrium
Studies in the Interest of Petrology.”
Jan. 13, council meeting.
Helminthological Society
of Washington
President: George W. Luttermoser (NIH).
Corresponding Secretary: Edna M. Buhrer
(USDA) .
Dec. 1, joint meeting with the Washing-
ton Tropical Medicine Association and the
Howard University Chapter of Sigma Xi,
at Howard University, at which Sir Phillip
Manson-Bahr. London School of Tropical
Medicine, spoke on “Wild Game and Man
in Central Africa,” illustrating with slides
the life-cycles of some common parasites of
man and animals.
Jan. 20, meeting at 8:00 P.M., McMahon
Hall. Catholic University, with two sched-
uled addresses: (1) Benjamin Schwartz,
“'Discovery of Trichinae and Determina-
tion of their Life History and Pathoge-
nicity”; and (2) Major R. I. Anderson,
“Serological Diagnosis of Schistosoma
mansoni Infection.”
Feb. 17, meeting at University of Mary-
land.
Mar. 16, meeting at National Institutes
of Health.
Oct. 8, Fiftieth Anniversary meeting
of the Society, with morning and afternoon
scientific programs and an evening banquet.
Society for Experimental Biology and
Medicine, District of Columbia Section
President: George A. Hottle (NIH). Secre-
tary: Edwin P. Laug (FDA).
Dec. 3, four papers as follows: (1) H.
Wishinsky, E. Poole, and S. P. Erkel,
Sinai Hospital, Baltimore, “Gamma Glo-
bulin Separation Using ‘RivanoF ”; (2)
Jiro Oyama and R. Lorimer Grant, FDA,
“Serum Insulin-like Activity as Measured
by the Mouse Diaphragm Method”; (3)
Elsworth R. Buskirk, NIH, “Study of Hu-
man Energy Metabolism as Influenced by
Food and by Cold”; and (4) Emilio
Weiss and Harry R. Dressier, NMRI, “Cen-
trifugation of Rickettsiae and Viruses onto
Entodermal Cells and its Effect on their
Absorption.”
Feb. 4, 8:00 P.M., program of scientific
papers in Hall A, The George Washington
University School of Medicine, 1335 H
Street, N.W.
April 7, meeting at same location.
June 2, Annual Dinner Meeting, time
and place to be announced later.
ACADEMY ACTIVITIES
Board of Managers. January Meeting
These notes are intended to outline
briefly , for the information of the mem-
bership., the principal actions taken at
Board meetings. They are not the official
Minutes as prepared by the Secretary. —
Ed.
The Board of Managers held its 523rd
meeting on December 15 at NAS, with
President Campbell presiding.
The Secretary (Dr. Specht) distributed
draft Minutes of the 521st and 522nd
meetings of the Board. Approval was de-
ferred until the next meeting.
Dr. Campbell reported that in recent
balloting on the proposal to increase
Academy dues from $6 to $10 annually,
only 61 percent of the voting members had
favored the change. Since a two-thirds
majority was required for adoption, the
proposal had failed.
Dr. Campbell reported on the Executive
Committee meeting held just prior to the
Board meeting, and on a meeting held
December 14 between Academy officers
and a number of members from the Smith-
sonian Institution. At the latter meeting,
26
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
the Smithsonian members had expressed
concern over recent Board actions di-
rected toward changes in the Journal —
that is, from a publication containing
chiefly scientific material of a descriptive
character, as in the past, to a publication
containing original cross-disciplinary ar-
ticles as well as news of the Academy and
local scientific activities. The Smithsonian
members had felt that they should have
been given an opportunity to vote on the
proposed changes.
The Board agreed that it had acted
within its authorization in approving a
curtailment of the Journal — and indeed,
that such curtailment was imperative in
view of the failure of the dues increase
proposal. However, it was decided that the
Secretary should conduct a referendum to
determine the preferences of the member-
ship as to the content of the magazine.
Dr. Goldberg reported on two informa-
tional resolutions passed at a recent meet-
ing of the Philosophical Society. The
Society felt that the Academy should re-
duce its capital before increasing dues.
Secondly, the Society indicated its expec-
tation to publish its papers in national
journals, its Minutes in the Journal of
the Academy.
Chairman Biberstein of the Committee
on Awards presented the Committee’s
recommendations on award recipients at
the next annual meeting of the Academy,
in the categories of physical sciences,
mathematics, engineering sciences, bio-
logical sciences, and teaching of science.
His report was accepted with the Board’s
commendation for its thoroughness.
Chairman Schubert of the Committee
on Encouragement of Science Talent re-
ported on current activities of the Wash-
ington Junior Academy of Sciences. He
mentioned that the Junior Academy had
scheduled a meeting on December 28 for
the presentation of scientific papers, and
that at least a third of the membership
was expected to be present.
Dr. Schubert introduced David Chen,
president of the Junior Academy. Mr.
Chen presented a proposed change in
Article IX of the WJAS constitution, which
would change the procedures for amending
the bylaws in order that 7th- and 8th-grade
students might be admitted to the Junior
Academy. The Board approved the pro-
posed change.
Dr. Campbell presented the recommen-
dation of the Executive Committee, that
$4,000 be budgeted to the Journal for its
expenses in calendar 1960. (This repre-
sents less than half the cost of the maga-
zine in 1959, which is estimated at $9,500.)
He estimated other Society obligations in
1960 at $8,475 and its income at $9,100,
and that a deficit of about $3,400 could
accordingly be expected. The Board ap-
proved the budget for the Journal.
Dr. Frenkiel objected to the apparent
inconsistency of approving a budget for
the Journal while simultaneously prepar-
ing to ask the membership’s opinion on
the future policy of the magazine. Dr.
Campbell replied that the proposed refer-
endum was concerned only with the con-
tent of the Journal, and that a reduction
in size and frequency of issue, and hence
in overall cost, had already been estab-
lished.
Dr. Campbell presented a report on four
Academy projects for which a 1960 pro-
posal would be submitted to the National
Science Foundation. These projects are
a continuation of those undertaken in 1959,
except that two are to be expanded; the
total amount involved is $47,000. The
Board approved submission of the grant
request.
Chairman Kushner of the Membership
Committee presented for first reading the
names of seven candidates for membership
in the Academy. Dr. Kushner thereupon
presented for second reading the names of
seven other candidates previously proposed,
as follows: Roy J. Barker, Lafe R. Ed-
munds, Robert B. Fox, Stanley A. Hall,
Thomas C. Hoering, Ronald E. Kagarise,
and Gunnar Kullerud. These candidates
were then elected to membership.
Dr. Campbell presented a report from
Chairman Van Evera of the Committee on
Grants-in-aid for Research, recommending
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
27
grants to two area high school students
in a total amount of $141.82. The Board
approved the grants.
In the absence of Chairman Shepard of
the Committee on Bylaws, Dr. Gurney
presented a third draft of the proposed re-
vision of the Bylaws. It was agreed that
this draft should be distributed to the
Academy membership for consideration
and approval.
The Amateur and the Academy
SurjiTJiary of the Retiring President’s
Address , to he presented at the February
18 meeting of the Academy.
Because membership in the Washington
Academy of Sciences has been restricted
to those “who by reason of original re-
search or scientific attainment are deemed
eligible . . it has been and is an or-
ganization composed almost exclusively of
professional scientists: that is, of those who
earn their living in some kind of scientific
work and who are usually highly skilled
specialists. Although amateurs are not spe-
cifically excluded, few have been admitted
to the Academy because as a rule they
neither publish original research nor hold
important positions in the scientific com-
munity.
Past-President Campbell will argue that
amateurs, teachers of science, professional
neophytes, and intelligent citizens who
recognize the philosophic, economic, and
social importance of science and seek to
understand it should all be encouraged to
apply for membership in the Academy after
its Bylaws on membership have been suit-
ably amended. He believes that amateur
interest in science should be encouraged
by the Academy, not only among young
students, as is now being done, but among
adults; that observation of nature offers
the readiest and most interesting introduc-
tion to science for the amateur; and that
the amateur can, if he tries, add something
to the great body of informational data
from which knowledge is derived. By
way of illustration of what can be done.
Dr. Campbell will show some beautiful
color photographs of animal and plant
specimens that were taken by two enthu-
siastic amateurs, both over seventy years
of age. Frank L. Campbell
JUNIOR ACADEMY NEWS
By David Malin, Chairman
Publications Committee, W.J.A.S.
The December 28th convention of the
Washington Junior Academy of Sciences
held at the Burlington Hotel was the high
point of the organization’s activities in
1959. Thirty-three papers based on orig-
inal research were given by junior sci-
entists of this area to more than two
hundred of their scientifically minded con-
temporaries. Separate sessions were held
in Biology, Physics, Chemistry, and
Mathematics.
To give some indication of the interest
and achievement of this area’s young sci-
entists, the titles of the papers are listed
here:
Biology
Iris Lipkowitz, “Observations on the
Nutritional Requirements of Spirostemum
amhiguum ”
Grover Sherlin, “Information from Tree
Rings”
Barbara Miller, “The Production of
Antibiotics — From Mold to Medicine”
Morgan Morrison, “Determination of the
Efficiency of Organic Pesticides on Com-
mon Economic Insect Pests”
Mark Levy, “The Sodium Chloride Tol-
erance of Certain Chlorella”
Carol Anne Love, “The Effect of Tem-
porary Cooling on the Development of the
Chick Embryo”
Betty Jane Sherlin, “Studies of Trees in
Winter”
Heijia Lee, “Effect of Cholesterol on the
Growth of Chorioallantoic Membranes”
David Chen, “Experiments on Hormonal
Control of Insect Metamorphosis”
Dennis Marienfeld, “Do the Widely Ad-
vertised ‘Germ Killers' Really Kill Germs?”
Harlan Himel, “The Cellular Slime
Molds”
28
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
Daniel Wheeler, “Simple Techniques of
Photomicrography Applicable to Biologi-
cal Research”
Physics
Robert Schooley, “Radioactivity in
Washington, D.C. Milk”
Janet Price, “What is a Cloud Cham-
ber?”
Eugene Wengert, “Radioactive Probe
I Currents and Potential Gradient Related
to Storms and Fair Weather”
Barbara Levin, “Analysis of Properties
of Concrete”
David Malin, “A System for Automatic
Optical Recognition of Printed Char-
; acters”
Dennis Herrin, “Solar Energy”
Jerome Dufour, “X-Ray Diffraction”
Michael Brownstein, “A Seismic Model
Study”
Delo Mook, “Using a Tape Recorder as
a Multi-Channel Recording System for In-
dustrial Control”
Chemistry
Harold Weiler, “Paper Chromotography
in Medical Research”
Barbara Blount, “Corrosion of Metals”
Raymond Baggs, “Correlation of Re-
spiratory Decline with Amount of Vita-
min E in Rat Liver Tissue”
Michael Mitchell, Jr., “Development of
I an Experimental Universal Wax Crayon
from Ordinary Household Ingredients”
Margaret Ferguson, “Acid Production
in the Mouth”
Cathy Briggs, “A Chemical Study of
Carotenoids and Vitamin A in Inverte-
brates”
Gil Fritz, “Physical and Chemical Prop-
| erties of Polymers”
Morgan Morrison, “Experimental Studies
of Proteolytic Enzymatic Hydrolytic Sys-
tems”
Mathematics
Joel Dressier, “Universal Mathematics”
David Zalkind, “Theory of Probability
and Pascal’s Triangle”
Kenneth Taylor, “A Logical Approach
to Space”
James Baker, “Game Mathematics”
JOINT BOARD
The Joint Board on Science Education
of the Greater Washington Area has an-
nounced that it has planned expenditures
for I960 in the amount of $10,500. The
items contained in this budget are:
Science fairs expenses-local, national..! 3,100
Science teacher awards 750
Publication of The Reporter 2,200
Frontiers of Science lecture series 250
Research training projects 300
Publication of Science Projects Guide
Book 2,500
Administrative, Committee, and Direc-
tory 1,100
Miscellaneous 300
Total $10,500
In addition, the Joint Board has been
intrusted with the administration of the
4-fold science projects of the Washington
Academy of Sciences financed by a grant
from the National Science Foundation.
Although this grant amounts to $35,200,
none of these funds may be allocated to the
regular program of the Joint Board.
In consideration of other sources of
income, the Board will need to raise $8,000
of the above $10,500. These funds are
being solicited from technical societies and
industrial and business organizations. Al-
though all voluntary gifts from persons are
acceptable, no solicitation of individual
scientists and engineers is being made, in
the belief that they participate indirectly
in society or organization giving. Certainly
their principal contribution is one of con-
tact, counselling, speaking, or advising,
within the Joint Board program.
The success of the local educational
program lies in the unselfish services of
many scientists, engineers, and teachers
freely given and with extreme dedication.
It would be very foolish to assume that
the importance of this work has lessened.
Only on ostrich-like individual could fail
to heed to the warnings of Iron-Curtain
countries concerning their plans to surpass
us, particlarly in science.
Many technical societies of this area
have been outstanding in their financial
support of the educational activities of the
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
29
Joint Board. Others have given only token
support. Every scientist in the Washing-
ton area is urged to encourage their so-
cieties, organizations and business or
industrial connections to give liberally to
the Joint Board’s solicitation for funds
for 1960. John K. Taylor, National Bu-
reau of Standards.
SCIENCE AND DEVELOPMENT
The annual Tidal Current Tables
for 1960 covering: 1. the Atlantic Coast
of North America, 2. the Pacific Coast of
North America and Asia, 3. Europe and
the West Coast of Africa, including the
Mediterranean Sea, 4. Central and West-
ern Pacific Ocean and the Indian Ocean
have been published by the Coast and
Geodetic Survey of the U.S. Department
of Commerce. Tide tables have been is-
sued by the Survey since 1853. The tables
are now published in four volumes which
include the entire maritime world. They
contain daily predictions for 190 refer-
ence stations and tidal differences and
ranges at about 5,000 subordinate stations.
Culminating three years of exploratory
work, a plastic foam shelter was dem-
onstrated recently by the Atlantic Research
Corporation (Arlington, Va.) and the Army
Quartermaster Corps. The shelter, twelve
feet in diameter and six feet high, was
formed by spraying a rigid polyurethane
plastic foam onto an inflated canvas
hemisphere. The foam rises in a few
minutes and hardens in less than an hour.
The shelter weighs under 200 lbs. and is
almost completely impervious to the ele-
ments. A better insulator than cork, the
foam, one and a half inches thick, can
easily be cut by a knife or bayonet. All
components are portable making the foam
shelter ideal for field use.
The National Science Foundation esti-
mated in No. 16 of the series “Reviews
of Data on Research and Development”,
that total funds for scientific research
and development in the U.S. A. will
reach an all-time high of $12 billion
for the year 1959-60. up $7 billion from
30
the 1953 level. An increase of nearly |
160% in funds used in the performance
of R&D by private firms and related or-
ganizations from 1953-54 to 1959-60 was
found.
A highly efficient, large capacity
“Fogger” has been developed by the
Sanitary Engineering Branch of the U.S.
Army Engineer Research and Development
Laboratories, Fort Belvoir, Va. for use in
control of mosquitoes and other flying
insects. Using a solution of DDT the
“fogger” can practically rid an area of
insects in 10 minutes. In tests, fog was •
detected more than a mile from the point
of release when the fog generator was held
in a stationary position and operated at
full output.
Modern mass education may be sup-
pressing the development of “genius”
claimed Dr. Harold G. McCurdy, Univer-
sity of North Carolina psychologist in a
recent Smithsonian Institution report. In
his study of the childhood of 20 generally »
admitted men of supreme ability, Dr.
McCurdy found three factors common to ;
all: 1. A high degree of attention focused
on the child by parents and other adults,
2. Isolation from other children, espe-
cially outside the family, 3. A rich efflores-
cence of fantasy. The author remarked I
that “the mass education of our public
school system is, in its way, a vast experi- |
ment on the effect of reducing all three of •
these factors to minimal value and should,
accordingly, tend to suppress the occur-
rence of genius”.
The history of science, invention
and technology is featured in a new
publication released in December by the
Smithsonian Institution. The volume con-
tains 11 research articles written by mem-
bers of the Museum’s staff. Alexander
Graham Bell’s part in making the phono-
graph a workable device is the subject of
one article. Among other articles are ones !
that tell of the introduction of English
patent medicines in colonial America, the
failure of an early attempt to make a
dollar watch, and the battle between Besse-
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences j
mer and certain of his contemporaries over
patent rights to the process for producing
cheap steel.
W. F. Libby, who served as a Research
Associate in the Geophysical Laboratory
at the Carnegie Institution of Washington
during his entire term as Atomic Energy
Commissioner, spent the past year in-
vestigating the radioactive strontium
content of rainfall during the crucial
period March-May, 1959, following an in-
tensive series of bomb tests fired by the
Soviet Union in October 1958. This event
afforded a unique opportunity to test the
characteristics of fallout from injections
of nuclear materials at polar latitudes, as
contrasted with the equatorial explosions
fired by the U.S. and the United Kingdom.
Analysis of samples collected during the
critical period showed that the radioactive
materials from the Russian shots had ap-
proximately one-year of residence in the
stratosphere as contrasted with a residence
time of three years or more for equatorially
injected material. This discussion and
many others appeared in the 1958-59 An-
nual Report of the President of the In-
stitution.
The Optical Society of America has
recently undertaken to translate the
Russian journal, Optika i Spektro-
scopiya , with the help of a grant-in-aid
from the National Science Foundation.
This translation journal is being distributed
free to OSA members as part of their
membership privileges. It is also available
to non-members in a package deal with
the OSA Journal, at $25 per year.
“Preservation of Documents by
Lamination”, by W. K. Wilson and B.
W. Forshee has been issued by the Na-
tional Bureau of Standards (Monograph
No. 5). Subjects covered include prop-
erties of an ideal laminating film; prop-
erties of cellulose acetate film; degradation
of film and paper during lamination; pre-
liminary studies of films other than cellu-
lose acetate; and specifications for archival
laminating film formulated from cellulose
acetate. The study was requested and
supported by the National Archives, U.S.
Army Map Service, Library of Congress
and Virginia State Library.
Officers of the Washington Academy of Sciences
President Lawrence A. Wood, National Bureau of Standards
President-elect Philip H. Abelson, Carnegie Institution
Secretary Heinz Specht, National Institutes of Health
Treasurer Carl Aslakson, Coast & Geodetic Survey
Archivist Morris C. Leikind, Armed Forces Institute of Pathology
Custodian of Publications Harald A. Rehder, U.S. National Museum
Editor Chester H. Page, National Bureau of Standards
Managers to 1961 Bourdon F. Scribner, Keith C. Johnson
Managers to 1962 Philip H. Abelson, Howard S. Rappleye
Managers to 1963 William B. Brombacher, A. 0. Foster
Board of Managers All the above officers plus the vice-presidents rep-
resenting the affiliated societies
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
31
Vice-Presidents of the Washington Academy of Sciences
Representing the Affiliated Societies
Acoustical Society of America
Institute of the Aeronautical Sciences
Anthropological Society of Washington
Society of American Bacteriologists
Biological Society of Washington
Society for Experimental Biology and Medicine
Botanical Society of Washington
Chemical Society of Washington
American Society of Civil Engineers
International Assn, for Dental Research
American Inst, of Electrical Engineers
Washington Society of Engineers
Entomological Society of Washington
Society of American Foresters
National Geographic Society
Geological Society of Washington
Helminthological Society of Washington
Columbia Historical Society
Insecticide Society of Washington
Amer. Society of Mechanical Engineers
Medical Society of the Dist. of Columbia
American Society for Metals
American Meteorological Society
American Nuclear Society, Washington Section .
Philosophical Society of Washington
Institute of Radio Engineers
Society of American Military Engineers
Richard Cook
Not Named.
Regina Flannery
Mary Louise Robbins
Herbert Friedman
Kathryn Knowlton
Herbert C. Hanson
William J. Bailey
Not Named.
Gerhard Brauer
Robert D. Elbourn
Howard S. Rappleye
Harold H. Shepard
Not Named.
Alexander Wetmore
Carle Dane
Carlton M. Herman
U. S. Grant, III
Joseph Yuill
William G. Allen
Fred 0. Coe
John A. Bennett
Morris Tepper
Urner Liddel
Louis R. Maxwell
Robert Huntoon
Not Named.
Chairmen of Committees
Standing Committees
Executive
Meetings
Membership
Monographs
Awards for Scientific Achievement
Grants-in-aid for Research
Policy and Planning
Encouragement of Science Talent .
Science Education
Ways and Means
Public Relations
Frank L. Campbell, National Research Council
Ralph B. Kennard, American University
Lawrence M. Kushner, National Bureau of Standards
Dean B. Cowie, Carnegie Institution of Washington
Frank A. Biberstein, Catholic University
B. D. Van Evera, George Washington University
Margaret Pittman, National Institutes of Health
Leo Schubert, American University
... Raymond J. Seeger, National Science Foundation
Russell B. Stevens, George Washington University
John K. Taylor, National Bureau of Standards
Special Committees
Bylaws Harold H. Shepard, U. S. Department of Agriculture
Directory James I. Hambleton, U. S. Department of Agriculture (Ret.)
Library of Congress John A. O’Keefe, National Aeronautics and Space Administration
32
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
\ oliime 50
JANUARY 1960
No. 1
CONTENTS
Page
The Journal for 1960. FRANK L. CAMPBELL 1
Virchow’s “Cellular Pathology” in the Framework of Biology and
Medicine. ALFRED PLAUT 2
The Insecticide Society of Washington. C. M. SMITH 19
Science in Washington
Scientists in the News 22
Affiliated Societies 24
Academy Activities 26
Junior Academy News 28
Joint Board 29
Research and Development 30
~ a-rnnid Arboretum
Library of Arnoia
22 Divinity Ave
Cambridge 3° Mass
WAS
1
4
JOURNAL
of the
WASHINGTON
ACADEMY
of
SCIENCES
Vol. 50 * No. 2
February, 1960
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Editor: Chester H. Page, National Bureau of Standards
Managing Editor: Ileen E. Stewart, National Science Foundation
Associate Editors
Frank L. Campbell, National Academy of Russell B. Stevens, Geo. Washington Univer-
Sciences sity
Samuel B. Detwiler, Jr., U.S. Dept, of Agri- John K. Taylor, National Bureau of Standards
culture
Contributors
Albert M. S'tone, Applied Physics Laboratory
John A. O'Brien, Jr., Catholic University
Elliott B. Roberts, Coast & Geodetic Survey
Margaret D. Foster, Geological Survey
Russell B. Stevens, Geo. Washington University
Moddie D. Taylor, Howard University
Frank L. Campbell, NAS-NRC.
Bourdon F. Scribner, National Bureau of
Standards
Howard W. Bond, National Institutes of Health
Allen L. Alexander, Naval Research Laboratory
Victor R. Boswell, USDA, Beltsville
Harold R. Curran, USDA, Washington
William H. Bailey, University of Maryland
This Journal, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes: (1)
historical articles, critical reviews, and scholarly scientific articles, (2) original research, if the
paper, including illustrations, does not exceed 1500 words or the equivalent space, (3) notices of
meetings and proceedings of meetings of the Academy and its affiliated societies, and (4) regional
news items, including personal news, of interest to the entire membership. The Journal appears
eight times a year in January to May and October to December.
Manuscripts and original research papers should be sent to the Editor. They should
be typewritten, double-spaced, on good paper; footnotes and captions should be numbered and
submitted on a separate sheet. The Editor does not assume responsibility for the ideas expressed
by any author.
Contributions to the regular columns should be sent to the appropriate Associate
Editor whose name appears at the beginning of each column, or to one of the Contributors, listed
above. The deadline for news items is approximately three weeks in advance of publication date.
News items should be signed by the sender.
Proof of manuscripts will generally be sent to an author if he resides in the Washington
area and time allows. Otherwise the Editor will assume responsibility for seeing that copy is
followed.
Subscription rate $7.50 per yr. (U.S.)
Single issues $0.50 per copy.
Subscription Orders or requests for back numbers or volumes of the Journal, or copies of the
Proceedings, should be sent to the Washington Academy of Sciences, 1530 P St., N.W., Washing-
ton, D.C. Remittances should be made payable to “Washington Academy of Sciences”.
Claims for missing numbers will not be allowed if received more than 60 days after date
of mailing plus time normally required for postal delivery and claim. No claims will be allowed
because of failure to notify the Circulation Manager of a change of address.
Changes of address should be sent promptly to the Academy Office, 1530 P St., N.W.,
Washington, D. C. Such notification should include both old and new addresses and postal zone
number, if any.
Advertising rates may be obtained from the Managing Editor, lleen E. Stewart, Office of
Science Information Service, National Science Foundation, Washington 25, D. C.
Reprint prices may also be obtained from the Managing Editor.
Prices of back numbers and volumes, of Monograph No. 1, “The Parasitic Cuckoos of
Africa” by Herbert Friedmann, Index to Vols. 1-40, and Proceedings may be obtained by writing
to the Academy Office.
Entered as second class matter at the Post Office, Washington, D. C. Printing by McArdle
Printing Co., Washington, D. C.
Adaptive Radiation in the
Flowering Plants
Hui-Lin Li
Morris Arboretum , University of Pennsylvania
Introduction
The plasticity of living organisms is
I more obvious in the widely divergent adap-
tations, which are structural as well as
I functional, in some groups of animals, such
j as mammals and insects, than in flower-
ing plants.1 In these groups of animals,
adaptive trends often are reflected in dis-
tinctive taxonomic groupings of major
rank, such as families or orders. On the
other hand, in flowering plants the major
orders seemingly all occupy the same range
of habitats and most of them have about
the same range of types in their external
| appearance.
This leads Stebbins (1951) to state that
“One of the most striking impressions
j which results from a comparison between
I the major subdivisions — families, orders,
( and classes — of the animal kingdom and
i the corresponding ones in the higher plants,
is that while in animals the characters on
l which these subdivisions are based are for
: the most part of obvious adaptive signifi-
I cance, and must have evolved through the
guidance of natural selection, in plants this
!• is by no means the case.”
This seemingly less obvious significance
1 of adaptation in the classification of flower-
i| ing plants is apparently due to their essen-
tially similar methods of obtaining foods,
[j As photosynthetic autotrophs, they all pos-
| sess chlorophyll and a root system anchored
fi permanently in the soil to absorb minerals,
(i As the large majority of flowering plants
adhere to this basic type of existence, it
ft gives the impression that flowering plants
H as a whole are less versatile in differenti-
*| ating into habitat groups along phylogenetic
i| lines.
When all families of flowering plants are
reviewed, actually many forms are to be
found which are extraordinarily modified
in adaptation to the most diverse environ-
mental situations. These adaptations to the
same environmental conditions are often
repeated independently many times along
different and distinct phylogenetic lines and
resulted not infrequently in the formation
of highly differentiated families or even
orders.
The large majority of existing flowering
plants are terrestrial plants inhabiting more
or less mesophytic habitats. Radiating
from this basic and generalized habitat,
various other types of plants are evolved
which are specialized for very different
habitats and modes of existence.
Climbing plants
While the majority of these plants are
autonomous, a number of them need sup-
port for ascending into the air up into the
light. Adaptations for climbing are thus
chiefly evident in a lengthening of the
stems. This may result in the twining of
the stems themselves or the development
of modified accessory structures of at-
tachment from the branches or leaves such
as tendrils, adventitious roots and sensitive
petioles. Climbing plants or klinophytes
occur in numerous widely divergent fami-
lies and among both herbaceous and
woody plants. The following families are
cither exclusively or predominantly vines:
Actinidiaceae
Ancistocladaceae
1 The term flowering plant is used in this paper
as equivalent to angiosperms.
1
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
Convolvulaceae
Dioscoreaceae
Lardizabalaceae
Menispermaceae
Passifloraceae
Sargentodoxaceae
Schisandraceae
Vitaceae
Epiphytes
The climbing habit seems to lead in the
family Marcgraviaceae into the epiphytic
habit. Another essentially epiphytic family,
but of an entirely different type of appear-
ance, is the Bromeliaceae, wnich contains
generally acaulescent herbs and are also
eminently xerophytic. Epiphytic plants are
also found scattered in many other large
families, such as the Araliaceae, Ericaceae,
Rubiaceae, etc. and are more particularly
abundant in the Orchidaceae.
Saprophytes
Deviating from the basic photosynthetic
autotrophic mode of nutrition, some plants
become heterophytic either as saprophytes
or parasites. Not a few flowering plants
are saprophytes, deriving their nourishment
from humus. Chlorophyll becomes un-
essential and thus disappears. The stems
become yellowish or reddish and the leaves
become scale-like. The subterranean rhi-
zome or root system is solely responsible
for absorption of nutrients. The individ-
ual plants thus become of very small size
and the essential dominant feature is often
the large inflorescence which is of prime
importance for perpetuating the race.
Saprophytic plants evolve independently
in several distinct families such as the
Orchidaceae and the Pyrolaceae. The family
Triuridaceae, constituting solely the order
Triuridales, is exclusively saprophytic. The
family Burmanniaceae, with the exception
of a few autotrophic species with greatly
reduced green leaves, consists also of
chlorophyll-less saprophytes. The family
Pyrolaceae consists of strongly geophytic
but independent plants (subfamily Pyrolo-
ideae) and saprophytes (subfamily Mono-
tropoideae or sometimes treated as a dis-
tinct family Monotropaceae) .
Parasites
Parasitism in flowering plants begins in
liemiparasites, in which the plants remain
green but live partially on the roots of
other plants. It culminates in holopara-
sites in which chlorophyll disappears entire-
ly and the plants depend solely on the host
plants for nutrition. Parasitism occurs re-
peatedly and separately in different fami-
lies, such as Cassytha in the Lauraceae and
Cuscuta in the Convolvulaceae, and also
notably in the tribes Geradieae and Rhin-
antheae of the Scrophulariaceae. The orders
Balanophorales and Santalales consist
mostly of parasitic plants. The families of
these orders as well as other families en-
tirely or predominantly of parasitic plants,
including hemiparasites or holoparasites
or both, are as follows:
Balanophoraceae
Cynomoriaceae
Hydnoraceae
Lennoaceae
Loranthaceae
Myzodendraceae
Orobanchaceae
Rafflesiaceae
Santalaceae
Geopliytes
Among normally terrestrial plants, there
are a large number of many different
families assuming geophytic habitats. They
frequently develop strong underground
stems. Families like the Begoniaceae in
the Dicotyledons and the Taccaceae and
Zingiberaceae and many others in the
Monocotyledons are distinctly geophytes
persisting for a short or long period by
thickened subterranean parts. In extreme
cases the plants spend most of their life
underground with parts appearing above
ground only during a brief period of the
year when flowering and fruiting are con-
summated very quickly. Such families as
the Podophyllaceae and others contain
nearly all members of the subterranean
habitat.
Xerophytes
Plants adapted to extremely dessicated
2
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
situations in the deserts and steppes of
the Old and New Worlds are found in
many families, notably in the Gramineae.
Liliaceae, etc. Some of these plants be-
; come succulents while others become highly
sclerophyllous to check excessive transpi-
1 ration. The xerophytic Cactaceae and
Aizoaceae, predominant in America and
i Africa respectively, are especially notable,
i Lack of a large dominant family in the
Asiatic deserts may indicate their relatively
| recent origin. The following families are
predominantly xerophytes. The families
Cactaceae, Casuarinaceae and Proteaceae
are the sole members of the orders Cactales.
i Casuarinales and Proteales respectively.
Aizoaceae
Cactaceae
Casuarinaceae
Crassulaceae
IPortulacaceae
Proteaceae
STamaricaceae
Aquatic plants
Many large families of flowering plants
I contain some members that are adapted
to the aquatic habitat such as the Ranun-
culaceae and Scrophulariaceae. A very
considerable number of families in the
! Dicotyledons are solely aquatic or semi-
: aquatic in habitat. These hydrophytes as-
sume a wide variety of structural differen-
tiation modified for varied existence as
; floating or attached plants and living in
still or rapidly running waters. While
most of these are either completely sub-
merged or floating some are adapted to
marshy or semiaquatic habitats. These
l aquatic Dicotyledonous families are:
Barclayaceae
Hi Callitrichaceae
Cabombaceae
Ceratophyllaceae
Elatinaceae
Euryalaceae
Haloragaceae
Hippuridaceae
Hydrostachyaceae
Nelumbonaceae
]| Nymphaeaceae
Podostomaceae
Tristichaceae
Trapaceae
Trapellaceae
The aquatic habitat is especially pre-
dominant in the Monocotyledons, a large
proportion of which are aquatics or semi-
aquatics. The large order Helobiales con-
tains eight families entirely of hydrophytes.
The aquatic families in the Monocotyle-
dons are as follows: (These include plants
living in freshwater as well as in brackish
water and in the sea).
Alismaceae
Aponogetonaceae
Butomaceae
Hydrocharitaceae
Juncaginaceae
Lemnaceae
Najadaceae
Pontederiaceae
Potamogetonaceae
Sparganiaceae
Typhaceae
Zanichelliaceae
A distinct type of aquatic adaptation is
manifested by the so-called mangrove plants
with highly specialized modifications in
vegetative as well as reproductive struc-
tures to survive and perpetuate along
muddy coasts and estuaries in the tropics.
The most notable modifications are aerial
roots and viviparous germination. Man-
grove plants are found in the families
Sonneratiaceae, Combretaceae, Verbena-
ceae, etc. The family Rhizophoraceae
consists entirely of mangrove plants.
Insectivorous plants
A very special trend of adaptation in
plants is the insectivorous or carnivorous
habitat which seems to be associated with
semi-aquatic habitats where insect life is
especially abundant. The order Sarra-
ceniales 2 is entirely insectivorous, with
2 The Sarraceniales, while generally recognized
as an order, are found by many authors to be a
composite group of unrelated stocks. The family
Nepenthaceae should probably be more appro-
priately included in the Aristolochiales and the
Droseraceae either in the Parietales or the Rosales.
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
3
I lie three families Droseraceae, Nepentha-
ceae and Sarraceniaceae developing very
different structural modifications in their
leaves for trapping and digesting insects
as a means of nutrition. The large pre-
dominently aquatic and insectivorous Len-
tibulariaceae are of an entirely different
phylogenetic stock, of the order Tubiflorae.
Another order, the monotypic Cephalotales,
with one family of a single species, is also
an unique insectivorous plant.
Discussions
The above brief account summarizes the
versatile adaptability of the flowering
plants, in spite of the limitation in their
method of obtaining food. It seems that
in the flowering plants there is an inherent
potential of evolution to adapt themselves
to widely different environmental condi-
tions just as in some groups of animals. As
is generally believed and for instance
summarized by Stebbins (1950), all long
continued evolutionary trends in plants as
well as in animals apparently occur through
a progressive series of random mutations
guided by natural selection. Recently,
Waddington (1953), while discrediting the
inheritance of acquired characters, con-
siders this current biological belief as an
extreme view and postulates a hypothesis
of genetic assimilation of such characters,
which thus become hereditarily fixed. The
whole problem is in need of much more
experimental study than has now been
made.
The number of plant families recogniz-
able mainly by their adaptive features is
impressive. Among these 27 or over 10
percent are entirely aquatic in habitat.
Ten families or about 4 percent are climb-
ing plants. Seven families or about 3 percent
are solely adapted to dry situations. Simi-
larly 9 families or about 4 percent are
wholly parasitic plants. Five families or
about 2 percent are adapted to the very
unique insectivorous habitat. In view of
their immobility and their similar mode of
obtaining food, these figures, showing ma-
jor groupings of flowering plants differ-
entiated by means of adaptive trends, are
surprisingly high. This situation compares .
favorably with the conditions expressed in
the mammals which have the different or-
ders occupying different habitats. In ad-
dition to the seed habit, the adaptability
of the flowering plants is largely responsible
for the dominant position they hold in the
plant world of today.
The different adaptive trends in these
plants require structural modifications of
considerable magnitude, not only in inter-
nal organization but also in gross outward
appearance. The difference in appearance
between an aquatic Ceratophyllum, a para-
sitic Rafflesia and a xerophytic Cactus is as
great as if not greater than that between an
aquatic whale, a volant bat and a fossorial
gopher. It is natural that these modifica-
tions in the plants are manifested in vege-
tative parts like roots, stems and leaves,
while the reproductive organs and the
methods of reproduction remain little
changed. The same is also true in animals.
It seems that botanists on the whole lay
more emphasis on the evolutionary signifi-
cance of reproductive structures than zool-
ogists and consequently overlook generally
the relative importance of vegetative struc-
tures in phylogeny. Perhaps this is true
only in the study of higher plants as habi-
tats are generally recognized as of great
importance in the major divisions of lower
plants. For instance, if habitats are not
considered as of prime importance, some
of the Chlorophyceae would perhaps assume
closer relationship in phylogenetic schemes
w ith some of the Phycomycetes than among !,
their respective selves.
The various trends of adaptation in the
flowering plants seem to radiate from a
more generalized terrestrial and moist
mesophytic habitat. In other words they
represent derivative types. While the re-
lationships of some of these specialized
families are uncertain or disputed, the kin- [
ships of many others are well established
and generally recognized from morphologi- i
cal and anatomical studies.
For instance, among the parasitic fami- u
lies, the Hydnoraceae are regarded as de- I
rived from the large family Aristolochiaceae 1
4
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences I
loranthaceae
DIOSCOREACEAE
V IT ACE A E
MARCGRAVIACEAE
POOOPHYLLACEAE HYOROCHARITACEAE C E R AT 0 PH Y LL AC E A E S A R R A C E N I A C E A E
Fig. 1. Diagram of parallelism in evolution and adaptive radiation in the flowering plants.
e and the Orobanchaceae from the large
family Scrophulariaceae. Similarly among
I the aquatic plants, the Ceratophyllaceae
r are supposed to be modified types derived
l i from the Onagraceae, the Trapellaceae from
f the Pedaliaceae, and the Podostomaceae
e probably from the Saxifragaceae. Among
, the others, the mangrove family Rhizo-
ff I phoraceae are probably derived from the
i Lythraceae, the essentially saprophytic
Monotropaceae from the Pyrolaceae and
a | Ericaceae, and the essentially epiphytic
;| Marcgraviaceae from the Ternstroeiniaceae.
v This situation is comparable to that
e- 1 occurring in the mammals although in the
d latter, habitat groups are often differen-
n- dated at ordinal ranks such as the Chirop-
d tera, an entirely volant group, and the
[i Cetacea, an entirely aquatic group. In
others, however, such as the Carnivora, the
ii- 1 component groups are adapted to various
le- different habitats as digging, swimming,
ae and walking forms, a situation very simi-
esI Journal of The Washington Academy
lar to most of the larger orders or families
of the flowering plants.
It is clear that these various adaptive
trends occur repeatedly and independently
at different times and from different stocks.
This serves to show not only adaptive radi-
ation but also parallelism in evolution in
the flowering plants (Figure 1).
As stated above, these trends of adapta-
tion in the flowering plants are sometimes
manifested in entire families and orders
but also in genera and species among other
families. This differentiation presumably
has some significance in the relative age of
these groups, although the difference in the
rate of evolution should also be considered.
However, little can be said on either case at
our present state of knowledge.
It does seem clear that the flowering
plants as a whole are inherent in their
great adaptability. In large families, these
various trends are sometimes manifested
within a single family. As the time goes
of Sciences 5
i
on. these trends may lead on to additional
parallel but independent evolutionary peaks
which represent taxonomically and momen-
tarily as orders and families.
As an illustration, we may select the
large and relatively recent family Scro-
phulariaceae. The family contains over
250 genera and over 3,000 species. They
occur widely in all continents from warm
to cold parts. There are woody as well as
herbaceous members. While the majority
are terrestrial plants of mesophytic habitats
abundant especially in moist lands in
warmer parts of the world, special trends
of adaptation are apparent in various other
situations. Generally they are erect plants,
but some may be prostrate and creeping, as
in some Veronicas, and in Mazus , Linaria,
etc. Many plants are adapted to marshy
habitats and true aquatics occur in Am-
biilia, Hydrotriche , etc. A large number
of genera, such as Euphrasia , Pedicularis,
Odontites , Melampyrum, Bartsia, Rhinan-
thus , etc. are hemiparasites which are green
plants but attach themselves by suckers or
the reduced lateral roots to roots of grasses.
In Lathraea, Harvey a and Hyobanche, there
are true parasites devoid of chlorophyll.
The same trend apparently leads into the
development of the wholly parasitic family
Orobanchaceae. The insectivorous Len-
tibulariaceae are related and probably de-
rived from the Scrophulariaceae.
On the generic level, habitat groups cir-
cumscribed as taxonomic entities are very
numerous and are found in nearly all large
families. There are many large and
ecologically variable genera such as the
oaks and willows. However, many smaller
genera are adapted to narrow ecological
niches. Some such habitat groups are
highly specialized and are thus distinctly
recognizable, such as the already mentioned
parasitic genera Cassytha in the Lauraceae
and Cuscuta in the Convolvulaceae. Others
are of a more subtle nature, but their dis-
tinct adaptive trends often also become
apparent upon closer scrutiny.
In the later category, we may select
at random a few examples. In the genus
Alnus , the Alders, although there are some
30 species distributed widely in the north-
ern hemisphere, they are all more or less
restricted ecologically to cool climates and
moisture-laden soils. On the other hand,
the Chestnut trees, Castanea, with some 10
species in the temperate regions of the
northern hemisphere, are adapted to
warmer situations and well-drained soils.
These trees can in fact withstand drought
better than most other trees of temperate
mesophytic habitats.
A very notable feature in plant evolu-
tion, as shown by the many families men-
tioned above, is that these widely divergent
trends of evolution occur most especially
in the tropics and subtropics. Bews (1927)
has demonstrated that the moist warm con-
ditions are most effective in bringing
about a differentiation among the most
primitive types of angiosperms. The vari-
ous derivative types of plants as discussed
above are shown by him to originate
mostly under moist favorable conditions.
Evolution is apparently a subject that is
best studied in the tropics where it is being
carried on by nature on the fullest scale
and at the fastest rate. Our knowledge of
evolution will certainly be greatly aug-
mented as we know more about the develop-
ment of tropical vegetation.
The above mentioned author has made
a very important contribution in his at-
tempt to ascertain plant phylogeny from an
ecological point of view, which he called
ecological evolution. The study of plant
taxonomy and plant phylogeny has much
to gain from a geographical approach,
which in this sense is used to include
ecology. The advantage of this approach
in plant taxonomy has been amply demon-
strated by many modern monographical
and revisional studies. As indicated by
Camp (1947) and others, its advantage in
studying phylogeny is equally promising.
Summary
Among the flowering plants, specialized
habitat groups are developed parallelly
along different phylogenetic lines. These are
usually accompanied by pronounced struc-
tural modifications and often resulted in
6
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
the differentiation of major taxonomic
groupings such as families or orders. Radi-
ating from a generalized terrestrial meso-
phytic focus, trends of adaptation are par-
ticularly notable for climbing, epiphytic,
saprophytic, parasitic, geophytic, xerophy-
tic, aquatic, and insectivorous habitats.
There are many whole families that follow
strictly one of these lines of adaptive
radiation. The great inherent adaptability
of the flowering plants is largely respon-
sible, in addition to the seed habit, for their
dominant position in the plant world of
today.
The Referendum
The results of the referendum on the con-
tents of the Journal of the Washington
Academy of Sciences reveal that the mem-
bership is divided into three parts. The
largest group is indifferent to the question,
the next largest wants a change, and the
third group, a vociferous minority, wants
the Journal to remain a primary research
publication. It is clear that the best com-
promise would require two publications:
one like the Journal of the past, the other
a house organ. At present the Academy
cannot afford to publish two periodicals;
it cannot even afford to maintain the Jour-
nal as it was. Therefore an attempt will
be made to please the long-suffering ma-
jority with a smaller journal of scientific
thought and action characteristic of the
Academy.
Although we would have accepted a man-
date to maintain an archival periodical, our
heart would not have been in it. We are
not among the minority who believe that
the most important function of the Academy
is to publish an archival journal. We are
not impressed by those who cry that the
Academy will lose its dignity, prestige, or
reputation if the old Journal is not con-
tinued.
The practice of publishing in one journal
research articles in all fields of natural
science is a venerable one and is maintained
REFERENCES
Bews, J. W. 1927. Studies in the ecological
evolution of the angiosperms. New Fhytol. 26:
1-21, 65-84, 129-148, 209-248, 273-294.
Camp, W. H. 1947. Distribution patterns in
modern plants and the problems of ancient dis-
persal. Ecol. Monog. 17: 159-183.
Stebbins, G. L. 1950. Variation and evolution
in plants. Columbia University Press, New York,
643 pp.
Stebbins, G. L. 1951. Natural selection and the
differentiation of angiosperm families. Evolu-
tion 5: 299-324.
Waddington, C. H. 1953. The evolution of
adaptations. Endeavour 12: 134-139.
by the Royal Society, the National Acad-
emy of Sciences, and many other academies.
No doubt the prestige thought to be con-
nected with such a practice flows down
from the old and very distinguished scien-
tific organizations that adopted it of neces-
sity before the rise of specialized scientific
societies and their journals and other out-
lets for the publication of scientific work.
Now that natural science has become high-
ly specialized, it takes great prestige to
draw good research articles away from spe-
cialized journals into over-all journals.
The Washington Academy, having rela-
tively little prestige, could get for its jour-
nal as a rule only descriptive articles that
become effective after they arrive upon
library shelves. To a taxonomist it does
not matter where his article is published so
long as he can get reprints and a good dis-
tribution of it in the libraries of the world.
We zealously advocate and defend the
need for more systematic work in the life
and earth sciences and for its prompt and
complete publication and pertinent distri-
bution. At the same time we contend that
systematic articles should not be published
in the Journal of the W ashington Academy
of Sciences , because it is unfair to accept
subsidy for their publication from unwilling
scientists and wasteful to distribute them
among people who do not need them. We
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
believe that systematists should re-examine
their publication requirements and the
means of meeting them in the 1960’s.
At present most archival papers are writ-
ten and offered for publication by profes-
sional scientists; i.e.. by those who are paid
to work in the field on which they write.
We believe that a continuous and persistent
effort should be made by these workers and
all other professional scientists to convince
their employers that the cost of publication
is an integral part of the cost of scientific
work and must be paid for in full by the
employer. Looking to the future when the
problem of storage, filing, and transporta-
tion of special libraries will become acute,
we feel that very serious consideration
should be given to the original publication
of systematic articles on microcards. There
is a tendency to dismiss this less expensive,
faster, and more manageable system be-
cause the present International Rules do not
recognize species described in microfilm.
Would it not, however, be more progressive
to begin to use microcards and press for
the improvement of readers and the repeal
of the repressive rule?
The Academy should not disregard this
problem but, perhaps through the work of
a special committee, should try to increase
outlets for publication of taxonomic papers.
For a time during a period of transition
grants might be made from the reserve fund
of the Academy to assist publication of pro-
fessional taxonomic papers in such local
journals as that of the Biological Society
and of the Entomological Society. We also
hope there will always be amateurs at work
whose publications ought to receive sup-
port from private funds.
Our colleagues who are genuinely con-
cerned about the effect our new publication
policy may have on the alleged prestige of
the Academy should be invited to state
their case in this column as frankly as we
have presented our point of view. We do
not believe that recent publication of pro-
fessional scientific research in the Journal
reflects much credit on the Academy. The
work would have been done and no doubt
published whether the Academy existed or
not. The Academy, as such, usually has
played no part in the initiation, guidance,
or criticism of the research published in its
Journal; it has served only as a publisher
and payer of bills that should have been
paid by the employer. The Academy really
counts in those activities that require or-
ganized effort toward the promotion of
science in the Washington area. In such
effort we can take pride and we can make
known our work and stimulate our mem-
bers and many others through the Journal.
Frank L. Campbell
Dr. Lawrence A. Wood
1960 President of the Washington Academy of Sciences
At the 62nd Annual Meeting and Ban-
quet of the Washington Academy of Sci-
ences, which was held on Thursday, Janu-
ary 21, 1960, at the John Wesley Powell
Auditorium in Washington, D. C., Dr.
Lawrence A. Wood was installed as the
society’s President for the year 1960.
Dr. Wood was born in Peekskill, N. Y. in
1904. He received an AB degree in chem-
istry and mathematics from Hamilton Col-
lege in 1925. He then transferred to Cornell
University for his graduate work, where
he changed his field of science to physics
and received his PhD degree in 1932. He
remained at Cornell as an instructor in
physics for three years, where he conducted
research and published papers in the field
of electricity, and then came to the Na-
tional Bureau of Standards as a member of
the Rubber Section. In 1943 he became
chief of this section, a position which lie
still holds today.
8
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
Dr. Lawrence A. Wood
Dr. Wood’s early research work on rub-
ber Avas concerned with measurement and
interpretation of the basic physical con-
stants and properties of natural rubber.
However, his interests later turned toward
the synthetic rubbers, and his subsequent
experience with these new materials proved
to be extremely valuable to rubber science
and technology. In 1940, when very few
people realized the importance of synthetic
rubbers, he prepared an excellent compre-
hensive review article on the composition,
properties, and uses of various synthetic
rubbers. This paper was published as a
National Bureau of Standards Circular, and
the demand for it was so great that several
reprintings were required by the Govern-
ment. Because of its timeliness and im-
portance it was translated by the Germans
and the Japanese into their languages and
printed in their journals.
Dr. Wood is the author or coauthor of
more than forty other scientific papers.
His early research with rubber was con-
cerned largely with transitions; and as a
result of his excellent work in this field he
was selected to prepare the chapter on
“Crystallization Phenomena in Natural and
Synthetic Rubbers” for a book “Advances
in Colloid Sciences,” published in 1946. He
was also selected to write the chapter on
“Physical Chemistry of Synthetic Rubbers”
for a comprehensive treatise on “Synthetic
Rubbers” published in 1954. In 1938, and
again in 1948, Dr. Wood was an official
delegate from the U.S. Department of
Commerce to an International Rubber Con-
ference held in London, England. At both
of these meetings he presented invited
papers.
As a result of Dr. Wood’s recognition
as an outstanding authority on synthetic
rubber he is called upon very frequently
for advice by many Government agencies.
He has collaborated with many of them
and also with several congressional com-
mittees, furnishing them with technical ad-
vice and recommendations for guidance on
synthetic rubber problems. Several times
during World War II he was called into
private conferences with the Secretary of
Commerce, the Honorable Jesse Jones, con-
cerning vital problems related to the Gov-
ernment’s production of synthetic rubber.
For his excellent work and outstanding
achievements in research he received in
1943 the Physical Science Award of the
Washington Academy of Sciences. In 1958
he also received the Meritorious Service
Award from the U.S. Department of Com-
merce for his valuable fundamental contri-
butions to the science and technology of
rubber.
Dr. Wood has always shown a great in-
terest in scientific societies, both locally
and nationally. In addition to being a
member of the Washington Academy of
Sciences he is also a member of the Philo-
sophical Society of Washington and the
American Chemical Society and is a Fellow
of the American Physical Society. He was
one of the founders of the Division of High
Polymer Physics of the American Physical
Society and has held several offices in this
Division, including the chairmanship in
1947. He has also held various offices in
the Philosophical Society of Washington,
including its Presidency in 1955. Be-
cause of Dr. Wood’s distinguished career as
a scientist and because of his interest and
activities in the WAS and other societies,
the Washington Academy of Sciences is to
be congratulated on its choice of Presi-
dent for 1960. Norman Bekkedahl
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
9
Academy Activities in 1959
A Report to Nonresident Members
Frank L. Campbell, Retiring President
It occurred to me that nonresident mem-
bers of the Washington Academy of Sci-
ences, who could not attend the Annual
Meeting on January 21, would like to
have some idea of what the Academy was
doing last year. Let me try to report briefly
to you as I did to those present at the
annual meeting.
The Board of Managers
The Academy is governed by a large
Board of Managers consisting of seven
officers, six elected members-at-large, and
representatives of 26 affiliated local scien-
tific and engineering societies, who have
been called vice-presidents of the Academy.
These 39 people are expected to meet on
the third Tuesday of each month, except
July, August, and September. There is a
regular order of business calling for reports
of the officers, of 13 standing committees,
and of whatever special committees are
active. Therefore up to 17 chairmen of
committees should also appear at Board
meetings. These members, plus our paid
administrative secretary, add up to a throng
of 57 people who might gather for meetings
of the Board, which in 1959 were held be-
tween 8 and 10 p.m. in the so-called Read-
ing Room of the National Academy of
Sciences — National Research Council. Of
course no such number ever appeared, but
attendance at regular meetings was re-
markably good. There is also an Execu-
tive Committee consisting of five of the
above officers, which often met prior to
Board meetings to study and make recom-
mendations to the Board on fiscal matters.
The Board meetings of 1959 departed
from the routine, regular order of business
at nearly every meeting. Two subjects were
of principal concern to the Board: (1)
the recommendation of the Executive Com-
mittee that dues be increased from $6 to
$10 per year and (2) revision of the By-
laws. Both questions would have to go
to the membership for approval by mail
ballot.
The Journal of the Academy
The first question became connected with
the cost of operating a central office and of
publishing the Journal of the Washington
Academy of Sciences because both were
responsible for the operating deficit that
made necessary an attempt to increase dues.
The Board did not attack the central office,
but did challenge the Journal , calling it a
publication not worth to most of the mem-
bers the money being spent on it. The
Committee on Policy and Planning and
that on Ways and Means were asked to
study the problem and report. The an-
swers did not come easily and are still
tentative. The Board favored a change
in the character of the Journal and gave
the president the authority to appoint a
volunteer staff that could do more than
receive and process manuscripts for pub-
lication— a staff that could solicit material,
write and rewrite, and establish communi-
cation among the members of the Academy
and its affiliated societies. The experi-
ment on the Journal, as you see, is under-
way and we want your comments and
criticisms, knowing that we cannot please
everyone. Please bear in mind, too, that
we are allowed only $4,000 to spend on the
Journal in 1960, whereas $10,000 were
spent on it in 1959. The decision of the
Board to change the character of the
Journal was supported by a referendum to
the membership.
Revision of the Bylaws
A thorough revision of the Bylaws re-
quired hours of the Board’s time for dis-
cussion of controversial items. Thanks to
the willingness of some members to attend
10
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
two special meetings of the Board the job
was finished (temporarily, of course) in
1959. The revised Bylaws will soon go to
the membership for approval. An expla-
nation of substantive changes will accom-
pany the document. 1 might say here that
the Board thought it somewhat ridiculous
for the Academy to have 26 vice presidents
and to require that they be elected (en
masse!) at the annual meeting of the
Academy. The revised Bylaws will call
them Delegates from the affiliated societies,
and the Academy will seat whomever is
designated by the affiliated society, pro-
vided he is a member of the Academy.
There is now a move afoot to make these
delegates members of a new Council of the
Academy, analogous to the Council of the
AAAS. Thus the Board of Managers would
be relieved of the weight of their numbers
at most Board meetings and yet could get
advice from them from time to time, par-
ticularly on questions affecting the affili-
ated societies.
The Joint Board
Enough for the Board of Managers, for
there is another Board that should be
known to you. I refer to the Joint Board
on Science Education for the Washington
Area, usually known locally as “the Joint
Board.” It is composed of the Committee
on Science Education of the Academy and
a similar group from the D. C. Council
of Engineering and Architectural Societies.
The Joint Board has its own budget, com-
mittees, and meetings and takes only policy
direction from the Academy. It effectively
helps students and teachers of science in
this area, particularly those in the second-
ary schools. Its Secondary School Con-
tacts Committee provides liaison between
every junior and senior high school, public,
private, and parochial, in this area and the
professional scientific and engineering com-
munity. There is a contact man or woman
for every school, to help in any way he can.
And back of him are large numbers of
volunteers who will lecture, teach, counsel,
demonstrate, or evaluate as needed. Just the
bookkeeping on the roster of volunteers is
a large task. Beginning in 1959, thanks
to the National Science Foundation and the
central office of the Academy, an assistant
could be employed to bring the roster up
to date, maintain, and operate it. This was
one of four projects supported by a grant
of $35,000 from the new Academy pro-
gram of NSF. Our Academy was ready for
it and was among the first to receive this
support. Two other projects have to do
with experimental teaching in elementary
and secondary schools, combining mathe-
matics and science, with advice from special
committees of the Joint Board. The fourth
project brings together for free discussion
teachers in secondary schools and univer-
sities and scientists in government or pri-
vate employment on the general topic of im-
proving science education leading to careers
in science. All these projects have been
under way since last September, and sup-
port for a second year has already been
requested.
All secondary school teachers are kept
informed of Joint Board activities through
a monthly 8-page newspaper written and
edited by a member of the Board. It is sup-
ported by a grant from a private founda-
tion.
In addition to contact work with the
schools, the Board is concerned with local
science fairs, sending the winners to the
national fair, participating in an annual
event of the D. C. Council called Engineers,
Scientists, and Architects Day, etc.
The Office of the Academy
You have noted that I have so far not
mentioned the names of people on or con-
nected with the Board of Managers of the
Academy or with the Joint Board. I have
omitted them deliberately because there are
so many to whom credit is due. I could not
name them all even if I would. You will
learn the names of many as you read the
new Journal. However, I do want to men-
tion here our Administrative Secretary,
Mrs. R. R. Fell, a woman of unusual com-
petence who works full time for a modest
salary in our central office in the room that
the Carnegie Institution of Washington has
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
11
provided free of charge for the Academy’s
use. It is just to the right of the entrance
of the Carnegie building at 1530 P Street
N.W. It is open only during working hours,
from 8:30 to 5:30 Monday through Fri-
day. I suggest you drop in when you are
in Washington. There you will find Mrs.
Fell and Miss Juliette Grant, Assistant to
the Joint Board, and you will then ap-
preciate the work they are doing.
1 helped to set up the central office in
the summer of 1958 when Mrs. Fell came
to us from the University of Virginia.
It was in full operation in 1959. First Mrs.
Fell took over the business of getting out
the weekly Science Calendar, a list of
meeting announcements of local scientific
and engineering societies that is published
in the local newspapers. Gradually as the
records and materials of the secretary,
treasurer, custodian, and archivist were
brought into the office, she undertook the
routine work of bookkeeping, member-
ship records, filling orders for back issues
of the Journal, etc. — everything that should
be done in the office of a society. She also
helped to revise the directory of the Acad-
emy’s membership, which was published
recently, and summarized many of the
voluminous minutes of the secretary. More
and more the office is serving as the most
convenient source of information about the
Academy and the Joint Board and their
work; the telephone is busy.
I have tried to give you a picture of
Mrs. Fell s work so that you can answer
anyone who tells you that the office is
an unnecessary luxury. As a matter of fact,
Mrs. Fell is now doing regularly and well
necessary work that some of our volunteer
officers did irregularly and incompletely.
Her work on Journal subscriptions, re-
prints, and sales of back issues brought
in gross receipts greater than the amount
of her salary.
Report of the Treasurer
At this point I suggest you look at the
appended summary financial report for
1959. You will see that although we had
an operating deficit of more than $4,000.
the value of the Academy’s investments
suffered little loss during the year. There
is no need to build up this reserve any
further; on the other hand, it could be
seriously reduced if we should continue to
spend more than we receive. That is the
reason for curtailing expenditures on the
Journal in 1960. An increase in dues or in
membership or both will permit an ex-
panding Journal. On the other hand, in-
come from subscriptions to the Journal
will probably diminish, because it will no
longer be an archival publication that li-
braries must keep.
Membership
In 1959 a well-organized, hard-working
membership committee prevented any net
loss of dues-paying members and the total
membership increased from 1066 to 1083.
In 1960 there may well be a temporary j
net loss of dues-paying members owing to
impulsive resignations of some who op- ]
posed a change in the character of the
Journal. But these defections should soon
be overcome by new members who will
like a journal that keeps them informed
about scientific activities in their own com-
munity. The growth of the Academy could
be very rapid if it will admit all who are
interested or may become interested. The
present members, who are persons of con-
siderable experience and achivement in
science, could become Fellows of the Acad-
emy, and people of all ages without special
qualifications could become members and
make the work of the Academy in the
scientific community more cooperative and
less benevolent.
Meetings
The Academy holds eight meetings per
year on the third Thursday of the month
including the annual dinner meeting in
January. In 1959 the annual meeting was
held at the Kennedy-Warren apartments.
The officers’ reports and Academy awards
were presented at the annual meeting. In
February the meeting was held in the
John Wesley Powell auditorium of the
Cosmos Club. Retiring President McPher-
12
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
son gave a remarkable address on food and
civilization, from the beginning of agri-
culture to the future when expanding popu-
lations may require production of food
by chemical industry. In March the Acad-
emy met jointly with the Junior Academy
in the auditorium of the U. S. National
Museum to hear Dr. F. 0. Rice and rec-
ognize members of the Junior Academy
who had distinguished themselves in the
National Science Talent Search. The next
three meetings were held in the Powell
Auditorium. In April two Academy award
winners, Drs. Bolton and Branscomb,
talked about their work in biophysics and
physics respectively. In May the Academy
was addressed by Dr. Hugh L. Dryden
on space science, in October by Dr. Ed-
ward Teller on Project Plowshare, the
constructive utilization of atomic explo-
sions. In November members of the Acad-
emy met for dinner at the Johns Hopkins
Applied Physics Laboratory in Howard
County, Md. After dinner some of the
laboratories were opened for inspection
and then a meeting was held in the Lab-
oratory’s auditorium at which Academy
award winners Rubin and Shen spoke
about their work in radiocarbon dating
and aeronautical engineering, respectively.
The December meeting in the Powell Audi-
torium was addressed by Mr. Willard
Bascom on the Mohole, the project of the
American Miscellaneous Society to take
a sample of the mantle of the earth and
of all that lies above it on the bottom of
the deep ocean. All nondinner meetings
of the Academy were preceded by small
dinners at which the officers entertained the
speakers, and all meetings in the Powell
Auditorium were followed by light re-
freshments for all.
Awards for Scientific Achievement
In the preceding paragraph Academy
awards were mentioned. These are cer-
tificates of merit in the biological sciences,
the physical sciences, the engineering sci-
ences, and in teaching. In 1959 for the
first time an award was made in mathe-
matics. Each of these fields was rep-
resented by a carefully selected panel of
six or seven Academy members, each a
scholar in his own subject. The task of
obtaining nominations, coordinating the
work of the panels, and reporting the re-
sults was done by the chairman of the
overall committee. These awards, estab-
lished in 1939, have been very significant
as shown by the subsequent careers of the
young men and women who have received
them. Award winners are invited to become
members of the Academy, if they were
previously overlooked.
Encouragement of Science Talent
A committee on this subject pays par-
ticular attention to the Washington Junior
Academy of Sciences. In 1959 it had a
hand or a voice in various activities of the
Junior Academy: The Science Fair; the
Science Talent Search; the Science Trip
to New York; the first Science Conference,
an all -day paper-reading session at the
Burlington Hotel attended by 150 high
school students, the meetings of the Gov-
erning Council, etc. In addition the Com-
mittee sponsored a summer research pro-
gram that gave selected students an op-
portunity to work without remuneration
at the National Institutes of Health. Of
course, this committee cooperates with the
Joint Board. We are very proud of its
altruistic work among the junior scientists
of this area.
Miscellaneous
In 1959 the Washington Section of the
American Nuclear Society became affiliated
with the Academy.
The Academy’s second monograph, on
microsomal particles, was published by
Pergainon Press and had a satisfying sale.
Two small grants-in-aid for research
were made to high school students, who re-
quested support of less than $100 each for
the purchase of supplies and equipment
for their projects on the speed of light and
paper chromatography.
Aided by representations from a special
committee of the Academy on the need for
science service in the Library of Congress
after the usual working hours, the Librar-
ian succeeded in getting support for longer
Library hours.
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
13
Summary Financial Report for 1959
Washington Academy of Sciences
W. G. Brombacher, Treasurer
RECEIPTS
Dues $5,377.50 t'
Journal subscriptions and reprints 4,572.33 i
Sales of back numbers of the Journal 1,096.59 a
Interest and Dividends 3,413.20 :
Miscellaneous Income 90.60 ij
Total income, 1959 $14,550.22
EXPENDITURES
Journal: Printing, reprints, editorial assistant (11 issues) $10,712.55
Routine operations; officers and meetings 2,231.62
Headquarters office expense 4,884.75
Membership certificates (backlog cleared up) 338.99
Joint Board, Science Education 500.00
Science calendar 75.00
Total expenditures, closely, in 1959 $18,742.91
Deficit, 1959 operations $4,192.64
Cash balance, WAS only, December 31, 1958 $6,919.16
Bonds matured and cashed 2,000.00
Savings bank account closed out 1,586.25
Cash balance, WAS only, December 31, 1959 6,321.82
Investments, WAS only
Value, December 31, 1958 (includes savings account) $70,218.98
Value, December 31, 1959 70,097.88
Junior Academy
In checking account,
December 31, 1958 $833.59
December 31, 1959 1,337.04
In savings account, American Security & Trust Co., Dec. 31, 1959 2,000.00
Grant, National Science Foundation
June 1959 $35,250.00
Expended to December 31, 1959 13,512.92
Balance in checking account, December 31, 1959 $21,737.08
Grand total in checking account, December 31, 1959 $29,395.94
Science in
SCIENTISTS IN THE NEWS
This column will present brief items
concerning the activities of members of
the Academy. Such items may include
notices of talks given , important confer-
ences or visits , promotions , awards , elec-
tion to membership or office in scientific
and technical societies , appointment to
technical committees , civic activities, and
marriages, births, and other family news.
Washington
F ormal contributors are being assigned for
the systematic collection of news at in-
stitutions employing considerable numbers
of Academy members (see list on mast-
head). However, for the bulk of the mem-
bership, we must rely on individuals to
send us news concerning themselves and
their friends. Contributions may be ad-
dressed to S. B. Detwiler, Jr., Associate
Editor, 2605 S. 8th St., Arlington, V a.
14
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
i Catholic University
Virginia F. Grilling, professor of
chemistry, participated in a Symposium on
| “Comparative Effects of Various Radia-
; tions,” held February 15-20 under the
auspices of the NAS Photobiology Sub-
i committee. The meetings took place on the
Rio Piedras campus of the University of
Puerto Rico.
Regina F. Herzfeld, professor of anth-
ropology, presented a paper entitled “The
| Missionary’s Knowledge of Local Lan-
guage and Culture” at the Fordham Uni-
versity Conference of Mission Specialists,
! January 23-24.
Herbert C. Hanson, research profes-
| sor of biology, has been elected first vice-
chairman for 1960 of the Capital Section,
American Society of Range Management.
Frank A. Biberstein, Jr., professor
of civil engineering, was a member of
the Advisory Panel for the New Laboratory
Equipment Program to the NSF, which
j met in Washington February 4-5.
George Washington University
During the week of January 4, Ben-
jamin D. Van Evera, in company with
Acting President Colclough and Meredith
Crawford, director of the Human Resources
Research Office, visited GWU’s Human Re-
sources Research Units at Fort Knox,
! Rucker, and Benning, for conferences and
! demonstrations of the work these units
j are doing in the field of Army training.
On behalf of the Washington Board of
• Trade, Dean Martin A. Mason is direct-
ing a study of desirable improvements in
graduate study opportunities in the Wash-
ington area. The purpose is to strengthen
and improve the attraction of the area
for private research and development com-
panies.
Mary Louise Robbins, professor of
bacteriology, was recently elected a Charter
Fellow of the American Academy of
Microbiology and President of the Wash-
ington Branch, Society of American Bac-
teriologists for 1960.
Journal of The Washington Academy
NAS-NRC
Walter H. Larrimer brought to a suc-
cessful conclusion, last August, the ten-year
NAS-NRC project on the production of
Handbooks of Biological Data. Work on
the Handbooks will be continued by the
Federation of American Societies for Ex-
perimental Biology. Dr. Larrimer is now
serving temporarily as a staff officer of the
Division of Biology and Agriculture, in
charge of arrangements for certain meet-
ings and conferences.
Naval Research Laboratory
Herbert Friedman appeared on the
CBS Conquest program, “Mystery of the
Sun,” on January 24, illustrating the back-
ground of, and recent advances in, rocket
astronomy.
Dr. Friedman was recently elected to the
Board of Directors of the American Rocket
Society for a three-year term beginning
January 1. On January 27 he attended the
Board’s first 1960 meeting in New York
City.
Richard Tousey attended the First In-
ternational Space Science Symposium of
the Committee on Space Research
(COSPAR), held recently in Nice, France,
and presented a paper, “The UV Spectrum
of the Sun.” This paper reported recent
rocket spectrograms in the range 500-
1800A.
Horace M. Trent gave two talks at
Virginia Polytechnic Institute on January
18. He addressed the Mathematics Club
on “Some Contributions of Mathematics
and Mathematicians to the Work Carried
on at the U. S. Naval Research Labora-
tory”; and he addressed the Naval Re-
search Reserve Unit on “The Functions of
the Naval Research Laboratory as set up
under the Office of Naval Research.”
George R. Irwin and J. A. Kies pre-
sented a paper, “Fracture Theory as Ap-
plied to High Strength Steels for Pressure
Vessels,” at the Golden Gate Metals Con-
ference, held in San Francisco February
4-6. On February 15 Dr. Irwin and J. S.
Srawley presented a paper, “Brittle Frac-
of Sciences
15
ture." before the American Institute of
Mining, Metallurgical, and Petroleum En-
gineers in New York City.
Smithsonian Institution
The American Ornithologists’ Union has
presented the Brewster Award — its highest
honor — to Alexander Wetmore, re-
search associate and former secretary of
the Smithsonian Institution. This award
was granted at the Union’s 77th Stated
Meeting, held August 25-30 in Regina.
Saskatchewan. The citation read in part:
“In Alexander Wetmore we hail a biologist
who, during a career that now spans more
than 50 years, has been one of the chief
architects of American ornithology.”
USD A, Beltsville
Bei •nice G. Schubert has been ap-
pointed technical editor of Economic
Botany , effective February 1. This journal
is now the official organ of the new Society
for Economic Botany, formed last sum-
mer.
Erwin L. LeCIerg, director of biometri-
cal services, Agricultural Research Service,
served as chairman of a meeting of Agricul-
tural Experiment Station statisticans, held
concurrently with the annual meeting of
the Biometric Society in Washington, late
in December. Dr. LeClerg was elected to
serve again as chairman of this group at
its next meeting, at Stanford University
next August.
John H. Martin and Reece I. Sailer
served as members of a USDA team that
visited India, Pakistan, and Egypt during
October and November, 1959, to negotiate
grants for agricultural research by scienti-
fic institutions in these countries. The
grants will be financed by Public Law
480 funds received from sales of surplus
farm products.
Myron S. Anderson, before his re-
tirement an employee of the Agricultural
Research Service, has accepted an invita-
tion from William Penn College, Iowa, to
conduct a short course next May on the
topic, “Soil and Civilization.” He has
prepared a syllabus designed to present
soil science as a cultural subject, suitable
for consideration in a liberal arts college.
J. L. Lowe and R. L. Gilbertson of
the New York School of Forestry were
guest workers at Plant Industry Station
for two weeks in January, in cooperation
with the Forest Disease Research Labora-
tory and the National Fungus Collections.
Both men are specialists in the classifica-
tion of Polyporaceae, one of the principal
groups of wood-rotting fungi.
Paul R. Miller has been appointed to
the Editorial Committee of Annual Reviews
of Microbiology for a five-year term ef-
fective January 1.
Lawrence Zeleny of the Grain Divi-
sion, Agricultural Marketing Service, spoke
before the Chesapeake Section, American
Association of Cereal Chemists, at its meet-
ing on January 28. Dr. Zeleny’s topic,
“Wheat Quality Requirements in Asia
and Europe,” was based upon observations
during his trip to Japan, Hong Kong, In-
dia, Pakistan, Holland, Germany, and Eng-
land during the summer of 1959, under
the sponsorship of USDA’s Foreign Agri-
cultural Service and the Great Plains
Wheat Market Development Association.
Jolm W. Mitchell has been appointed
head of the Growth Regulator and Anti-
biotic Laboratory of the Crops Research
Division, Agricultural Research Service.
Dr. Mitchell, who described his research on
plant regulators to Premier Khrushchev
during the latter’s visit to the United States,
has recently published several papers on
absorption and trans-location of agricul-
tural chemicals by plants, and on methods
used in studying responses of plants to
regulating chemicals.
Arthur W. Lindquist represented the
Entomology Research Division, Agricul-
tural Research Service, at a meeting of the
WHO Committee on Insecticide Evalua-
tion held at Geneva, November 30-Decem-
ber 5. The committee consisted of single
representatives from seven research organ-
izations. Purpose of the meeting was to
plan how WHO could speed up evaluation
16
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
of insecticides for control of Anopheles
mosquitoes that are resistant to DDT, diel-
drin, and BHC.
USDA, Washington
Hazel K. Stiebeling was a member of
the U. S. delegation to an FAO conference
in Rome, November 1-21, 1959, serving
as advisor on matters relating to human
nutrition and home economics.
Wilbur T. Pentzer attended the 10th
International Congress of Refrigeration,
held in Copenhagen last August, as a dele-
gate appointed by NAS-NRC. At the Con-
gress, he was elected vice-president of the
Technical Board for the International In-
stitute of Refrigeration, 1959-63, and vice-
president of Commission 4, which deals
with the refrigeration of foods and other
agricultural commodities.
Dorothy Nickerson is author of a
paper, “Light Sources and Color Render-
ing,” which appeared in the January is-
sue of the Journal of the Optical Society
of America. The paper summarizes prog-
ress on industrial and agricultural prob-
lems concerned with good color rendering
of light sources, including progress being
made nationally by a committee of the Il-
luminating Engineering Society and inter-
nationally by a committee of the Inter-
national Commission on Illumination.
Edson J. Hambleton attended the
Sixth Session of the FAO Desert Locust
Control Committee meeting, held in Rome
June 29-July 4, 1959. After the meeting,
he made an inspection tour of Regional
Insect Control Project operations in Tuni-
sia, Libya, the Sudan, Ethiopia, Lebanon,
and Iran.
Last December, Dr. Hambleton attended
the annual conference of the Regional In-
sect Control Project, held in Beirut, Le-
banon, and afterward inspected project
operations in Ankara. The Control Project
is operated by USD /Vs Plant Pest Control
Division in cooperation with ICA.
Joseph R. Spies attended the annual
meeting and postgraduate course of the
American Academy of Allergy, held at
Hollywood, Fla., January 10-13.
On November 3, Kenneth W. Parker
presented an illustrated talk, “Recent Ad-
vances in Range Management Research,”
before the Botanical Society of Washing-
ton. On December 16 Dr. Parker gave his
impressions of New Zealand in a talk, “Life
Down Under,” presented to the Bethesda-
Chevy Chase Chapter of the Izaak Walton
League of America.
A three-week holiday in Mexico, De-
cember 19- January 8, gave Harold H.
Shepard an opportunity to observe the
considerable improvement in road and
lodging conditions since his last visit in
1957. In some areas, the economic condi-
tion of the people also appeared better.
An informal visit to the archeological site
of El Tajin, near Poza Rica, was extreme-
ly interesting; Dr. Shepard recommends it
to others who may desire to learn some-
thing of Mexico outside the capital city
and Acapulco.
University of Maryland
S. Fred Singer, professor of physics,
presented a research paper before the
American Astronautical Society on Jan-
uary 2L during its Sixth Annual Meeting
in New York City. His topic was, “The
Radiation Belts of Planet Mars and
Venus.”
Monroe H. Martin, director of the
University’s Institute for Fluid Dynamics
and Applied Mathematics, has been ap-
pointed honorary lecturer in mathematics
at St. Salvator’s College in Scotland. Cur-
rently on a year’s sabbatical leave from
Maryland. Professor Martin is now at St.
Andrews, Scotland, where he is carry ing on
studies on the uniqueness of solutions to
linear and non-linear boundary problems
for partial differential equations.
Retirements
Benjamin Schwartz of the Animal
Disease and Parasite Research Branch.
Agricultural Research Service, retired No-
vember 30 after more than 43 years in Gov-
ernment service. Dr. Schwartz, whose maj-
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
17
or interests and contributions lay in the
fields of parasitology and helminthology,
received his formal education at CCNY,
Columbia University, and GWU (Ph.D..
1920) . He spent several years in the Philip-
pines, where he served as professor of
parasitology at the University of the Philip-
pines, director of hookworm research for
the Philippine Health Service, and co-
editor of the Philippine Journal of Science.
He was U. S. delegate to the International
Congress of Tropical Medicine and Malaria
in 1948, and president of the American
Society of Parasitology in 1951. Dr.
Schwartz plans to remain in Washington,
and to write a book on parasitology and
helminthology.
Deaths
Word was recently received at the Acad-
emy office of the death on July 23, 1959, of
C. E. Van Orstrand, a retired member
who had been living in Manito, 111., since
1947. Mr. Van Orstrand, formerly with
the Geological Survey here, was elected
to the Academy in 1909.
AFFILIATED SOCIETIES
American Institute of Electrical
Engineers, Washington Section
Chairman : Wade M. Edmunds (REA).
Secretary-Treasurer: Irvin L. Cooter
(NBS). Meetings in PEPCO Auditorium,
10th and E, N.W., 8:00 P.M. on 4th Tues-
day.
March 22, “Modern Automatic Dispatch-
ing for Electric Power Systems,” R. L.
Tremaine, Westinghouse Electric Mfg. Co.
American Meterological Society,
District of Columbia Branch
President: Jack C. Thompson (WB). Se-
cretary: Raymond McGough (USN Hydro.
Off.) Meetings at NAS-NRC, 2101 Con-
stitution Ave., N.W., on 3rd Wednesday.
March 16, “The Tracks of Tropical Hur-
ricanes,” William Haggard, U.S. Weather
Bureau.
American Society for Metals,
Washington Chapter
President: William L. Holshouser (NBS).
Secretary: Glenn W. Geil (NBS)
March 21, “Pressure-Induced Trans-
formations in Metals,” John E. Hilliard,
General Electric Company.
American Society of Civil Engineers,
National Capital Section
President: W. 0. Hiltabidle. Secretary:
Daniel P. Jenny. Meetings usually in John
Wesley Powell Auditorium
Chemical Society of Washington
President: Allen L. Alexander (NRL).
Secretary: John L. Torgesen (NBS).
The Board of Managers met on January
14 at the Cosmos Club, with incoming
President A. L. Alexander presiding.
Dr. Alexander introduced the Society’s
guest of the evening, Aristid von Grosse
of Temple University, who was later to
address the general meeting. He also in-
troduced new members of the Board and
several new chairmen of standing commit-
tees.
The minutes of the December 13 meet-
ing were read by retiring Secretary W. J.
Bailey, and approved. The financial re-
port for 1959 was presented by Treasurer
S. B. Dewiler, Jr.; this showed income of
$4,147 and expenses of $3,474, with year-
end balances of $1,000 in the checking ac-
count) $6,198 in the savings account, and
$8,511 in the ACS Cash and Investment
Pool.
Dr. Bailey stated that a summary annual
report of the secretary for 1959 would be
read at the general meeting, and that a
comprehensive annual report was expected
to be completed and forwarded to the
American Chemical Society about Feb-
ruary 1.
Chairman C. R. Naeser of the Budget
Committee presented a 1960 budget of
$3,670, stating that it was based on an
anticipated allotment from the American
Chemical Society of $3,731. Principal
changes from 1959 involved increases in
18
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
the Hillebrand Award and the Education
Committee budget, and decreases in the
Entertainment Committee budget and the
councilors’ travel fund. The budget was ac-
cepted by the Board.
J. M. Leonard reported for Chairman
Leo Schubert of the Education Commit-
tee that $1,600 was expected to be avail-
able to pay for bus fare and lunches for
high school students who will engage in
research projects at NIH next summer.
Of this amount, $1,000 will be contributed
by the Washington Junior Academy of
Sciences and $300 by the senior Academy,
while $300 has been authorized by the
Chemical Society of Washington. It is
anticipated that 20 students may be sub-
sidized with these funds.
Chairman P. J. Hannan of the Enter-
tainment Committee reported on arrange-
ments for the February 11 Board meet-
ing at Caruso’s Restaurant, and for the
Hillebrand Award dinner on March 10
at the Presidential Arms. In an effort to
publicize the dinner, an art contest for
posters is being sponsored in collobora-
tion with the Art Academy. After the con-
test, the posters will be displayed at various
insitutions.
Chairman W. A. Zisman of the Programs
Committee reported on tentative program
plans for 1960. Dr. Bailey announced that
the joint meeting with the ACS Maryland
Section would be held on Friday after-
noon and evening, May 6. The meeting is
expected to have co-chairmen, symposia,
and twice the number of papers as at the
regular May meeting of CSW.
Chairman R. P. Maickel of the Public
Relations Committee reported on the Com-
mittee’s recent survey of other ACS local
sections, to determine the use by news-
papers of academic titles in referring to
scientists. About half of the sections re-
sponded; they indicated that of 204 news-
papers surveyed, only eight liimted the use
of the title, “Doctor,” to the medical pro-
fession and the clergy.
Insecticide Society of Washington
Chairman: Milton S. Schechter (Ag. Res.
Cent.) Secretary-Treasurer: James F.
Cooper (Plant Ind. Sta.) Meetings in
Symons Hall Auditorium, 8:00 P.M. on
3rd Wednesday
Medical Society of the District of
Columbia
Secretary: Theodore Wiprud
Meetings in auditorium of Medical Society
Building, 1718 M St., N.W.
Society for Experimental Biology and
Medicine, District of Columbia Section
President: George A. Hottle (NIH). Sec-
retary: Edwin P. Laug (FDA)
April 7, meeting in Hall A, G. W. Univ.
School of Medicine, 1335 H St., N.W.
Society of American Foresters,
Washington Section
Chairman: James M. Owens
Mar. 17. “The National Wood Promo-
tion Program”, Mortimer B. Doyle, Exec.
V. Pres., National Lumber Manufacturers
Assoc., Washington, D.C.
Washington Society of Engineers
President: Adm. Charles Pierce (CDS).
Secretary: William R. Ganser, Jr.
Feb. 3, “The Bulldozer and the Rose,”
Dana E. Doten, USPHS, and Garnet W.
Jex, USPHS.
ACADEMY ACTIVITIES
New Members Since October 1959
Akers, Robert P.
National Institutes of Health
Allen, William G.
Maritime Administration
Birks, L. S.
Naval Research Laboratory
Buras, Edmund M., Jr.
Harris Research Laboratories
Burke, Bernard F.
Carnegie Institution of Washington
Crafton, Paul A.
George Washington University
Dawson, Reed
Department of Defense
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
19
Drummeter, Louis F., Jr.
Naval Research Laboratory
Haines, Kenneth A.
Agricultural Research Service
Hauptman, Herbert
Naval Research Laboratory
Karle, Isabella
Naval Research Laboratory
Karle, Jerome
Naval Research Laboratory
Krasny, J. F.
Harris Research Laboratories
Kruger, Jerome
National Bureau of Standards
Menkart. John
Harris Research Laboratories
Newton, Clarence J.
National Bureau of Standards
Orem, Theodore H.
National Bureau of Standards
Shen, Shan-fu
University of Maryland
Voss, Gilbert L.
Marine Laboratory, Miami, Fla.
Weil, George L.
Consultant, Washington, D. C.
Yaplee, Benjamin S.
Naval Research Laboratory
Yuili, Joseph S.
Forest Service, Beltsville, Md.
Reinstatement
Withrow, Alice P.
National Science Foundation
Corrections to 1959 Directory
Name F rom T o
Ford, Tirey F 1AW 1DNRL
JOINT BOARD
As part of the program supported by
a grant from the National Science Founda-
tion to the Washington Academy of Sci-
ences, the Joint Board on Science Educa-
tion is holding a series of curriculum con-
ferences. The purpose of these is to bring
together high school teachers, college in-
structors, and scientists to discuss prob-
lems in science education.
The agenda of these conferences con-
sist of informal discussions on such topics
as: problems in high school teaching aris-
ing from the need for college preparation;
problems in college teaching owing to high
school preparation; establishing better
liaison between high school teachers, col-
lege instructors, and the scientific com-
munity on matters related to science and
mathematics teaching.
In order to facilitate active participa-
tion of all attendees, the conferences have
been limited to about 30 persons equally
divided among the three types of par-
ticipants. Three area conferences — Mary-
land area, D.C. area, and Virginia area —
have been held for each of the disciplines
of biology, chemistry, mathematics, and
physics, or 12 in all. Participants met
on Saturdays from 9:30 to 4:00 P.M. A
group luncheon was sponsored by the
Joint Board. The biology meetings were
held in public schools while the chemistry
groups met at three different universities.
Private schools were chosen for the sites
of the physics conferences, and govern-
ment and private laboratories were hosts
to the mathematics meetings.
The second phase of the program is
now in progress. This consists of one area-
wide summary conference in each of the
four disciplines. To these have been in-
vited representatives from the preceding
conferences and, in addition, a few per-
sons from national scientific societies who
are particularly interested in secondary ed-
ucation.
Dr. Falconer Smith of NIH, who is
also Chairman of the Joint Board, has
chaired all of the conferences in biology;
Dr. John K. Taylor of NBS presided at
the chemistry conferences. Dr. Franz Alt
of NBS has been chairman of the mathe-
matics meetings, while Dr. Raymond J.
Seeger of NSF has presided at the physics
discussions.
The final phase of the conferences will
be a meeting between science and mathe-
matics supervisors of the local school sys-
tems and the chairmen of the preceding
conferences. Dr. Raymond J. Seeger, chair-
man of the Joint Board’s curriculum com-
mittee will preside. One objective of this
20
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
meeting will be to explore ways in which
the Joint Board and the local scientific
i comunity can establish better liaison with
the schools.
SCIENCE AND
DEVELOPMENT
High -purity tungsten can now he
easily plated on metal surfaces by us-
ing a vapor deposition process developed
for the Navy by the National Bureau of
Standards. The method, devised by W. E.
Reid and Abner Brenner of the Bureau’s
electrodeposition group, involves reducing
gaseous tungsten hexafluoride with hydro-
gen by passing it over the heated object
to be plated. At temperatures above 300°C.,
tungsten is deposited on the hot surface,
and the only other reaction product, hydro-
gen fluoride, passes out with the excess of
hydrogen.
Geophysicists Rutledge Brazee and
Frank Werner, of the Coast and Geodetic
Survey, are conducting site tests in several
Western States for a suitable location of
a proposed seismological laboratory.
Some of the states that are being surveyed
are Colorado, New Mexico, Wyoming,
Arizona, and Utah. Among its activities,
the new laboratory will conduct research
programs in the design, development, and
calibration of sensitive seismographic in-
struments.
A “Space Vehicles Group*’ that has
worked together as a unit for seven years
has been added to the staff of Atlantic
Research Corporation. This group has
! had extensive experience — averaging over
15 years per man — in the design, fabrica-
tion, and launching of multi-stage rocket
hardware for missions exploring the upper
atmosphere and space beyond the earth’s
atmospheric blanket. Formerly with the
Aerolab Development Company (now a
division of Ryan Aeronautical Company),
principal members of the group have par-
ticipated in major space projects such
as “Argus,” in which three atomic bombs
were exploded at a 300-mile altitude over
the South Atlantic.
Catholic University has begun con-
struction of a new building for the
School of Engineering and Architec-
ture. The Engineering Library and the
Departments of Civil, Chemical, Electrical,
and Mechanical-Aeronautical Engineering,
at present located in several buildings, will
be housed in the new structure.
The Biology Department of Catholic-
University is offering a new course, “Ra-
dioisotopes in Biology,” in the spring
semester, 1960. Part of the instrumenta-
tion necessary for the course was provided
by a grant from the Atomic Energy Com-
mission.
Proprietary medicines have a long
and flamboyant history. Some of the fan-
tastic extremes of the past are cited in a
study of old English patent medicines
which had a wide use in the American
colonies, recently published by the Smith-
sonian Institution. It is the work of George
B. Griffenhagen of the American Phar-
maceutical Association, and James H.
Young of Emory University. Such English
nostrums as Daffy’s Elixir Salutis, Turling-
ton’s Balsam of Life, Steer’s Opodeldoc,
Hooper’s Female Pills, and Bateman’s
Pectoral Drops appealed to the busy co-
lonial settlers with little time and small
means. The proprietors pioneered in both
advertising psychology and the develop-
ment of distinctive packaging. The popu-
larity of these remedies, some of which
have lasted into our own century, owed
much to the fact that though the ingredi-
ents inside varied (unbeknownst to the
customer), the shape of the bottle did not.
In a wind-blown, white sand desert
of northern South America — the great
Guajira Peninsula — a nomadic, polyga-
mous, matrilineal race of Indians has main-
tained its independence and ways of life for
nearly 500 years. The people of this cul-
tural island, the Guajiros, are described
by Raymond E. Crist of the University
of Florida, in a report recently pub-
lished by the Smithsonian Institution.
A notable characteristic of these people is
the survival of the matrilineal, polygamous
family. A man acquires a wife by pur-
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
21
chase from her family, paying in cattle,
jewelry, etc.; hence a girl child represents
a certain wealth to her parents, while a
boy child represents an economic drain.
Blood relationship is traced almost entire-
ly through the mother.
The forthcoming seventh edition
of the Merck Index , an outstanding
chemical reference book, is scheduled for
publication in March. This unique encyclo-
pedia of chemicals and drugs, now con-
aining 1,600 pages of text, has been pub-
lished by the Merck organization for more
than 65 years, and has become a standard
reference work for chemists, pharmacists,
physicians, dentists, veterinarians, botan-
ists, and members of allied professions. The
prepublication price of the new edition
is $11.
A grant of $22,388 has been
awarded by AEC to the University of
Maryland Physics Department for
purchase of equipment to be used mainly
in training senior physics students in an
atomic and nuclear energy course. Stu-
dents also will be enabled to use other faci-
lities such as the Department’s Van de
Graaf accelerator and related equipment
purchased from University funds.
A bibliography on plasma physics
and magnetohydrodynamics, the first
book to be compiled on the subject, has
been published by the University of Mary-
land. Prepared by James D. Ramer, a for-
mer librarian at Maryland, the publication
contains over 1700 subject titles, an author
index, and a numerical index to interna-
tional atomic energy reports.
Total domestic iron-ore resources
of the United States have been placed
at about 75 billion long tons of crude ore.
according to recent estimates by Geological
Survey scientists. Of this amount, about
10 billion tons is classed as reserves —
material usable under existing economic
and technologic conditions. The remaining
65 billion tons is potential ore — material
likely to become available under more
favorable conditions. The potential ore
may yield 25 billion tons of concentrates
and direct-shipping ore.
LETTERS TO THE EDITOR
February 11, 1960
I regret to note the erroneous impres-
sion given on pg. 26-27 of the January i
1960 issue of the Journal of the Washing - *
ton Academy of Science to the effect that
the meeting on December 14 was “between i
Academy officers and a number of mem-
bers from the Smithsonian Institution”.
We made it entirely clear at that meeting
that the individuals with whom the of-
ficers conferred represented the Geological
Survey (Paleontology and Stratigraphy
Branch) and the Department of Agricul-
ture (Insect Identification and Partite
Introduction Laboratories) as well as the
Smithsonian Institution. As you well know,
the Institution provides quarters for staff
members of these groups (and also for
certain Fish and Wildlife scientists whose
viewpoint was implied at our meeting),
but they are in no sense to be considered
“Smithsonian members”.
The quoted notes imply that the view-
point expressed on December 14 was a
Smithsonian viewpoint: this is an error of
fact, as a much wider group of scientists
was represented. I wish to object to the
misrepresentation of the viewpoint as com-
ing only from “Smithsonian members”.
An objection must also be registered to
the implication that the scientists at the
December 14 meeting wish the Journal to
contain “. . . chiefly scientific material of a |
descriptive character, . . .”. Our viewpoint
was unmistakably stated as favoring the
publication of scholarly contributions j
within the fields of interest of all members ,
without discrimination and insofar as fi-
nances permit.
A. C. Smith, Director,
Museum of Natural History j
Smithsonian Institution.
Editor’s note. This column is now avail-
able to Academy members for comments, I
criticism, statements of policy, and pro-
posals about either the Journal or Acad-
emy actions. Contributions should be
limited to 100-200 words and sent direct-
ly to the Managing Editor.
22
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
ACADEMY ANNUAL MEETING-1960
AWARD WINNERS AND GUESTS: (reading from left to right) TOP ROW:
Betty Schaaf, science teaching award; Helen L. Garstens, science teaching award;
Harvey R. Chaplin, Jr., engineering sciences award; Frank L. Campbell,
President, 1959-60; MIDDLE ROW : Dwight W. Taylor, biological sciences award;
Geoffrey S. S. Ludford, mathematics award; Alan C. Kolb, physical sciences
award; David Chen, President, Washington Junior Academy of Sciences. BOTTOM
ROW: Ralph B. Kennard, chairman, Committee on Meetings; Thomson King,
Director, Maryland Academy of Sciences; W. Doyle Reed, member, Committee
on Meetings. (Photos by Pat Krauss)
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
23
Officers of the Washington Academy of Sciences
President Lawrence A. Wood, National Bureau of Standards
President-elect Philip H. Abelson., Carnegie Institution
Secretary Heinz Specht, National Institutes of Health
Treasurer Carl Aslakson, Coast & Geodetic Survey
Archivist Morris C. Leikind, National Institutes of Health
Custodian of Publications Harald A. Rehder, U.S. National Museum
Editor Chester H. Page, National Bureau of Standards
Managers to 1961 Bourdon F. Scribner, Keith C. Johnson
Managers to 1962 Philip H. Abelson, Howard S. Rappleye
Managers to 1963 William B. Brombacher, A. 0. Foster
Board of Managers All the above officers plus the vice-presidents rep-
resenting the affiliated societies
Vice-Presidents of the Washington Academy of Sciences
Representing the Affiliated Societies
Acoustical Society of America
Institute of the Aeronautical Sciences
Anthropological Society of Washington
Society of American Bacteriologists
Biological Society of Washington
Society for Experimental Biology and Medicine
Botanical Society of Washington
Chemical Society of Washington
American Society of Civil Engineers
International Assn, for Dental Research
American Inst, of Electrical Engineers
Washington Society of Engineers
Entomological Society of Washington
Society of American Foresters
National Geographic Society
Geological Society of Washington
Helminthological Society of Washington
Columbia Historical Society
Insecticide Society of Washington
Amer. Society of Mechanical Engineers
Medical Society of the Dist. of Columbia
American Society for Metals
American Meteorological Society
Institute of Radio Engineers
American Nuclear Society, Washington Section
Philosophical Society of Washington
Society of American Military Engineers
Richard Cook
Not Named.
Regina Flannery
Mary Louise Robbins
Herbert Friedman
Kathryn Knowlton
Herbert C. Hanson
William J. Bailey
Not Named.
Gerhard Brauer
Robert D. Elbourn
Howard S. Rappleye
Harold H. Shepard
Not Named.
Alexander Wetmore
Carle Dane
Carlton M. Herman
U. S. Grant, III
Joseph Yuill
William G. Allen
Fred 0. Coe
John A. Bennett
Morris Tepper
Robert Huntoon
Urner Liddel
Louis R. Maxwell
Not Named.
24
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
T SSBH q£ sSpT-iqureo
8AV zz
YM innqaJoq.iv ptoujy J°
Volume 50 FEBRUARY 1960 No. 2
CONTENTS
Page
Adaptive Radiation in the Flowering Plants. HUI-LIN LI 1
The Referendum. FRANK L. CAMPBELL 7
Dr. Lawrence A. Wood. NORMAN BEKKEDAHL
Academy Activities in 1959. FRANK L. CAMPBELL 10
Science in Washington
Scientists in the News 14
Affiliated Societies 18
Academy Activities 19
Joint Board 20
Science and Development 21
Letters to the Editor
22
JOURNAL
of the
WASHINGTON
ACADEMY
of
SCIENCES
Vol. 50 • No. 3
March, 1960
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Editor: Chester H. Page, National Bureau of Standards
Managing Editor: Ileen E. Stewart, National Science Foundation
Associate Editors
Frank L. Campbell, National Academy of Russell B. Stevens, Geo. Washington Univer-
Sciences sity
Samuel B. Detwiler, Jr., U.S. Dept, of Agri- John K. Taylor, National Bureau of Standards
culture
Contributors
Albert M. STone, Applied Physics Laboratory
John A. O’Brien, Jr., Catholic University
Elliott B. Roberts, Coast & Geodetic Survey
Margaret D. Foster, Geological Survey
Russell B. Stevens, Geo. Washington University
Moddie D. Taylor, Howard University
Frank L. Campbell, NAS-NRC.
Alphonse F. Forziati, National Bureau of
Standards
Howard W. Bond, National Institutes of Health
Allen L. Alexander, Naval Research Laboratory
Victor R. Boswell, USD A, Beltsville
Harold R. Curran, USDA, Washington
William J. Bailey, University of Maryland
This Journal, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes: (1)
historical articles, critical reviews, and scholarly scientific articles, (2) original research, if the
paper, including illustrations, does not exceed 1500 words or the equivalent space, (3) notices of
meetings and proceedings of meetings of the Academy and its affiliated societies, and (4) regional
news items, including personal news, of interest to the entire membership. The Journal appears
eight times a year in January to May and October to December.
Manuscripts and original research papers should be sent to the Editor. They should
be typewritten, double-spaced, on good paper; footnotes and captions should be numbered and
submitted on a separate sheet. The Editor does not assume responsibility for the ideas expressed
by any author.
Contributions to the regular columns should be sent to the appropriate Associate
Editor whose name appears at the beginning of each column, or to one of the Contributors, listed
above. The deadline for news items is approximately three weeks in advance of publication date.
News items should be signed by the sender.
Proof of manuscripts will generally be sent to an author if he resides in the Washington
area and time allows. Otherwise the Editor will assume responsibility for seeing that copy is
followed.
Subscription rate $7.50 per yr. (U.S.)
Single issues $1.00 per copy.
Subscription Orders or requests for back numbers or volumes of the Journal, or copies of the
Proceedings, should be sent to the Washington Academy of Sciences, 1530 P St., N.W., Washing-
ton, D.C. Remittances should be made payable to “Washington Academy of Sciences”.
Claims for missing numbers will not be allowed if received more than 60 days after date
of mailing plus time normally required for postal delivery and claim. No claims will be allowed
because of failure to notify the Circulation Manager of a change of address.
Changes of address should be sent promptly to the Academy Office, 1530 P St., N.W.,
Washington, D. C. Such notification should include both old and new addresses and postal zone
number, if any.
Advertising rates may be obtained from the Managing Editor, Ileen E. Stewart, Office of
Science Information Service, National Science Foundation, Washington 25, D. C.
Reprint prices may also be obtained from the Managing Editor.
Prices of back numbers and volumes, of Monograph No. 1, “The Parasitic Cuckoos of
Africa” by Herbert Friedmann, Index to Vols. 1-40, and Proceedings may be obtained by writing
to the Academy Office.
Entered as second class matter at the Post Office, Washington, D. C. Printing by McArdle
Printing Co., Washington, D. C.
Chemistry, Food, and Civilization
Synthetic Organic Chemistry Ushers in
A New Era of Civilization
Archibald T. McPherson
National Bureau of Standards , Washington, D.C.
The Washington Academy of Sciences
and its affiliated societies embrace a wide
range of interests in the physical, biolog-
ical, and earth sciences, and engineering.
The members of the Academy, as indi-
viduals, living at this critical time in his-
tory, are deeply concerned with broad
social, political, and economic problems
as well as with their own scientific en-
deavors. Consequently it is appropriate
for a retiring president to address the
Academy on an important problem of
world affairs, and for him to relate his own
field of science to this problem. Accord-
ingly, the problem to be considered in this
address will be that of providing sufficient
and adequate food for the world’s explo-
sively expanding population; the solution
that will be proposed will stem from the
I field of synthetic organic chemistry.
The Population Problem
A major problem confronting statesmen
and scientists today is that of stepping up
food production at a rate which will keep
pace with the explosive increase in the
world’s population. The unprecedented in-
| crease in population has come about large-
ly through advances in sanitation and the
( elimination of infectious diseases which
have greatly increased the span of human
! life.
The ultimate solution of the population
! problem lies in the field of social science;
but social changes that will limit the popu-
lation will, of necessity, be slow, and it is
unlikely that they can be implemented in
time to meet the present emergency. To gain
the necessary time the physical scientist
| must provide an immediate solution.
The problem of food supply is not new.
! At the dawn of civilization 9,000 years ago
food was scarce and food gathering was the
principal concern of man. Even so, the
population of the better-favored regions of
the earth probably did not exceed one or
two persons per square mile. The world
population was probably about one million
persons, and was certainly less than five
million.
The development of agriculture at about
7,000 B.C. permitted an enormous increase
in population, after which a condition of
saturation was slowly reached. From the
heyday of the Roman Empire up to about
700 A.D. the world population was rela-
tively stable and has been estimated at
about 200 to 300 million people. The popu-
lation dropped during the Dark Ages, par-
ticularly with the devastation of the
plagues; but it rose again during the Ren-
aissance; and at the beginning of the pres-
ent scientific age it has been estimated at
about 545 million. Since 1650 the world
population has been increasing at an ever
accelerating rate. Figures recently released
by the United Nations Department of Eco-
nomic and Social Affairs give 2,497 million
as the world population in 1950 and 3,828
million as the estimated population in
1975. Considering North America alone,
the population increased from 137 million
to 190 million in the short interval from
1933 to 1950.
In the light of these increases both
abroad and on our own continent the pres-
ent abundance of food and the large crop
surpluses in the United States and Canada
appear to be a very minor and transitory
factor in the world food picture. These sur-
This address, of a retiring President of the
Washington Academy of Sciences, was delivered
February 19, 1959.
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
1
pluses are large in relation to the population
of the United States, but our population is
only 7 percent of the population of the
world. If, by some miracle of transporta-
tion, our surpluses could be distributed
among the underprivileged peoples of
China who subsist on 1800 calories per day,
and among the only slightly more favored
peoples of India, Burma, the Philippines,
and Japan who live on 2000 to 2300 cal-
ories per day, such surpluses would suffice
for only a few weeks to bring the diets of
the ever-hungry peoples to the 3070 calorie
average of the American population.
Vigorous efforts are being made to in-
crease the food supply of the perpetually
hungry countries by improved agriculture,
by bringing more land under cultivation,
and by improving the practices of food
storage, preservation, utilization, and dis-
tribution. In agriculture two developments
— one, present, and the other, in prospect
— are of particular significance for increas-
ing the food supply. They are the produc-
tion of chemical fertilizer, and the soilless
culture of both present crops and new types
of crops.
Greatly increased crop yields are possible
through the use of fertilizers specifically
designed for local soil conditions. These
fertilizers can be produced in very large
quantities by the fixation of nitrogen from
the atmosphere and by obtaining potas-
sium, calcium, phosphorus, and other es-
sential elements from mineral deposits.
The soilless culture of plants gives prom-
ise of being a much more efficient operation
than conventional agriculture from the
standpoint of the utilization of space and
materials. The techniques are applicable
to many though not all common food
plants and afford the possibility of develop-
ing special types of algae and other new
food plants which may prove highly effi-
cient as food crops. Some algae have been
developed which give a high yield of pro-
tein; other algae produce fat, and still
others, carbohydrates. Heretofore the cost
of tanks has presented a major problem
in soilless culture. Now, however, tanks
can be provided very simply by the use of
inexpensive plastic film supported by earth
embankments as is done for small swim-
ming pools.
It is difficult to estimate how rapidly and
to what extent these and other means will
increase the production of food by agri-
culture. However, with the present supply
of food barely adequate, it seems improb-
able that agricultural production can be
stepped up so rapidly as to supply a more
adequate diet and, at the same time, keep
up with the rapidly growing population.
Certainly agricultural production cannot be
increased indefinitely and the inexorable
law of diminishing returns will slow down
and ultimately check the increase in pro-
duction.
A similar situation exists in relation to
increasing the supply of food through bet-
ter preservation, storage, and distribution.
A practical limit will be reached in the
utilization of food at which the waste and
other losses will be so small that further
improvements can have no effect on the
over all food situation.
In earlier ages when the population ex-
ceeded the food supply equilibrium was
restored by mass migration or by wide-
spread starvation. Today, barriers on im-
migration and the lack of suitable un-
developed land will prevent any extensive
population movement. Under previous
governments the Asiatic peoples have sub-
mitted to mass starvation, but with the
present political leadership any large food
deficit might precipitate a conflict between
the have- and the have-not nations with
disaster to both.
To meet the growing emergency, then, it
is necessary to look for a solution that is
entirely new but yet practical and capable
of speedy implementation. There can be
such a solution, — indeed, a solution that
has such vast potentialities that it cannot
only meet the present emergency, but it
can usher in a new era of civilization.
The Chemist’s Solution
The solution is based on the fact that it
is now possible to make all substances
essential for human nutrition by synthesis.
2
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
The raw materials required may he the
chemical elements themselves or any readily
available materials containing these ele-
ments. The raw materials that are the most
practical at the present time are petroleum
or coal as sources of carbon, nitrogen from
the atmosphere, and phosphorus, sulfur,
calcium, chlorine, fluorine, manganese, and
other elements from mines or from the
ocean.
The methods of synthesis, for the most
part, are still in the laboratory stage. Be-
fore large-scale manufacture can be
achieved it will be necessary to develop
practical chemical engineering processes,
and to build manufacturing plants. To ac-
complish such a development in the space
of a few years will require a major coordi-
nated research program comparable in
magnitude to the present atomic energy
program. The engineering phase of this
investigation will require facilities of much
larger capacity than the present chemical
engineering industry in its entirety. How-
ever, the experience in previous crash pro-
grams, such as the wartime production of
synthetic rubber, indicates that there will
be no insuperable difficulty if a far greater
program is undertaken. In the synthetic
rubber program the output of synthetic
rubber in less than three years reached
a level that was approximately as high as
the plantation industry had been able to
achieve in 30 years.
The Beginnings of Agriculture
The production of food by synthesis
affords the possibility of as far reaching
a change in human affairs as was brought
about by the discovery or development of
agriculture about 9000 years ago. Agri-
culture made possible our present civiliza-
tion by providing a reasonably dependable
source of food that could be produced on
a small area and stored for use throughout
the year. This availability of food per-
mitted large groups of men to live together
in fixed habitations and gave them time for
activities other than food gathering and
thereby enabled each new generation to
build upon the discoveries and knowledge
accumulated in the past.
The early development of agriculture is
still shrouded in darkness, and archae-
ologists are only beginning to obtain defi-
nite information about it. Very probably
this discovery took place in the vicinity
of the Tigris-Euphrates valley. The well
known Fertile Crescent bounds this valley
on the northeast, the north, and the north-
west. A hilly zone flanking this crescent
appears to archaeologists to have been the
habitat of potentially domesticable plants
and animals.
One of the earliest sites authentically
associated with agriculture is the village of
Jarmo. Braidwood, who excavated this site,
states 1 “Jarmo must lie near, but not at
the very beginning of the era of village-
farming communities; in my judgment this
beginning should be put at about 7000 B.C.
It should be made clear that Jarmo is not
conceived as the spot where the village-
farming community level of existence came
into being — we do not believe that there
ever was one single such spot — but only
that Jarmo represents the earliest example
of settled village life which the accident of
prior discovery has allowed us to use as a
basis for description.”
Solecki 2 in excavations of the cave of
Zawi Chemi Shanidar found querns and
manos dated as 10,870 years old or about
2000 years earlier than Jarmo. These
querns and manos were presumably used
for the grinding of cereal foods, but no
evidence was found as to the identity of
the grain or other material. Thus the
domestication of plants and the practice of
agriculture may have been slow and ran-
dom in the early stages, but, once devel-
oped, the advantages were so many and so
obvious that the village-farming pattern of
life quickly spread throughout the Tigris-
Euphrates valley, and from there into other
areas.
The economy of Jarmo was based on the
1 Science 127; 1419, June 20, 1958.
2 Solecki, Ralph S. (Smithsonian Institution).
Private communication.
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
3
Fig. 1. The Fertile Crescent bounds the Tigris- Euphrates Valley, on the east, north and west.
cultivation of wheat and barley and the
keeping of herds of goats and sheep. From
the standpoint of nutrition there was good
reason for this combination of vegetable
and animal foods, as will be discussed later
in this paper.
The Jar mo “Academy of Sciences”
Some early discoveries in science, mathe-
matics, and engineering were undoubtedly
made in villages such as Jarmo. It is very
probable that senior citizens of Jarmo came
together to discuss these discoveries and
to exchange speculations about strange
phenomena of nature that they now had the
time and opportunity to investigate. We
can imagine that these gatherings were
about an evening fire for warmth and soci-
ability. An early mathematician in the
group may have developed a system of
counting jars of grain in his storehouse
and dividing them by the number of moons
so as to assure a uniform supply of food
for his household until the next harvest. A
primitive engineer may have found how
to burn brick in order to construct rain-
resistant buildings. An early metallurgist
— this was long before the discovery of :
bronze— may have made some tools from
bits of meteoric iron picked up in the desert
that were vastly superior to the bone and
flint tools then in common use.
Not all of the discoveries were of a utili-
tarian nature. Undoubtedly some keen ob-
server who guarded the herds at night must
have noted that the star which we know
as Algol waned in brightness for a brief 1
period at intervals of about 3 days.
Agriculture, Food, and Civilization
At times the discussions around the
evening fire at Jarmo undoubtedly centered
on their mode of life, and the great ad-
vantages that they enjoyed over the people
who still lived in the desert or the wilder-
4
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
ness and subsisted by hunting and the
gathering of food where they found it. The
leader of such a discussion may have
pointed out that the city of Jarmo — it is
estimated to have had about 700 inhabit-
ants— occupied no more land with its fields
and pastures than had previously been the
hunting ground of a single family in the
time of their ancestors. Such a speaker
would undoubtedly have noted the great
advantages of a fixed abode with houses to
provide shelter and an abundant year-
around food supply. He would have looked
forward to a time when all of the inhabit-
ants of the earth would live in cities such as
Jarmo, and that it would no longer be
necessary to fight for the possession of
hunting grounds and caves because the new
method of living would provide food and
shelter for vastly more people and would
give them leisure to cultivate the arts and
learn about the strange and wonderful
world in which they lived.
The title of such a discourse might have
been, “Agriculture, Food, and Civilization.”
Our title this evening is “Chemistry, Food,
and Civilization.”
Chemistry of Life Processes
The bold assumption that chemistry can
make as great a contribution to civilization
in the next century as agriculture did 9000
years ago is based on the fact that the
chemist has produced from non-living ma-
terials almost if not all of the substances
essential to human nutrition. Furthermore
many of the less abundant and more ex-
pensive of these substances are already be-
ing manufactured in relatively large ton-
nages. This does not mean that plant and
animal tissues have been duplicated, but
rather that the basic substances which they
provide for the nutrition of the body have
been synthesized, and that these substances
are identical in every respect with the sub-
stances obtained from plant or animal
sources. This identity has been established
by a large amount of research, beginning
with the classic chemical investigations of
Wohler in 1828, and continuing through a
great number of chemical researches and
feeding studies up to the present time.
Whenever the feeding of synthetic materials
has failed to satisfy nutritional require-
ments for normal growth it has invariably
been found that some previously unrecog-
nized essential constituent was present in
trace amounts in the natural product but
not in the synthetic. Such a finding has
been at once a challenge to the chemist to
separate, identify, and ultimately to syn-
thesize the missing constituent.
The plant or animal grows and produces
substances such as carbohydrates, fats,
proteins, and vitamins by chemical reac-
tions. Many of these reactions are well
known and have been duplicated in the
laboratory. The chemist, in synthesizing
natural products, is by no means restricted
to the reactions by which they are made
in nature. He is often able to use simpler
and more efficient methods of production.
Synthesis of Non-Food Agricultural
Products
The major contribution that the chemist
has thus far made to the problem of feed-
ing the world has not been through the
synthesis of food materials themselves, but
rather through the synthesis of non-food
agricultural products and the consequent
freeing of agricultural lands for food crops.
Many common products that were once ob-
tained from plant or animal sources are
now manufactured in large quantities by
direct synthesis from petroleum, coal, at-
mospheric nitrogen, and other non-living
materials. The extent to which synthetic
products have displaced natural products
is shown in Table 1. Dyes lead the list
Table 1. Natural Products now Made
Synthetically*
Dyes 99 percent
Drugs and medicines 75 percent
Resins and plastics 97 percent
Paints 60 percent
Soap and detergents 59 percent
Rubber 52 percent
Textiles 25 percent
* The Chemical Industry Facts Book, 2nd
Ed., p. 5, Manufacturing Chemists’ Assoc.,
Washington, D.C., 1955.
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
5
with 99.5 percent synthetic production, and
only textiles, with the enormous crops of
cotton and wool, are still derived from
natural sources to the extent of more than
50 percent.
Alizarin . It was only about 100 years
ago that Perkin synthesized the dye, aliz-
arin, which gives the color commonly
known as turkey red. Chemically alizarin
is 1,2-dihydroxyanthraquinone; it is readily
made from coal tar as a raw material.
Until 1870, 12 years after its synthesis,
the sole commercial source of alizarin was
the madder root, which was cultivated in
France and other parts of Europe to the
extent of 400,000 acres. The yield of pure
dye from this area was about 750 tons per
year, or only about 4 pounds per acre.
By 1914 the cultivation of madder had been
completely abandoned and the world supply
of alizarin — now 2000 tons of the pure
dye per year — was the output of a few
men working in chemical manufacturing
plants.
Indigo. The replacement of natural in-
digo by the synthetic product was accom-
plished at about the same time. In 1897
India produced 8,000 tons of the familiar
blue dye; but only 17 years later, in 1914,
the once thriving and lucrative plantations
produced only 4 percent of the world’s
supply of the dye, in spite of extremely
cheap labor.
Dyes, drugs, and other products that
were among the first to be made syntheti-
cally had the advantage of being relatively
small in tonnage and high in price, and
hence could give a large return on the in-
vestment in facilities for their production.
Rubber. Rubber was the first product
in the large volume — low price category
to be synthesized commercially on a large
scale. Prior to World War II relatively
small quantities of Neoprene had been
produced and sold at about a dollar a
pound in competition with natural rubber
at less than 10 cents a pound because of its
superior oil-resistant properties. The shut-
ting off of natural rubber during the war
led to a crash program which, in the brief
space of 3 years, produced large tonnages
of both general purpose and special pur-
pose synthetic rubbers at a cost in the
same range or even below the price of
natural rubber.
Under the stress of competition the per-
acre yields of natural rubber have been
greatly increased and economies in produc-
tion have been effected that were not
thought possible before the war. The dif-
ferent synthetic rubbers compete with
natural rubber for the manufacture of some
products because of superiority of their
properties for particular applications. In
other areas the competition is on a price
basis. One synthetic rubber is identical in
composition with natural rubber but, on
account of cost, it is not yet in commercial
production.
To illustrate the impact of the synthesis
of rubber on the world food situation, let
us assume that the land used for the grow-
ing of rubber would produce foodstuffs
equivalent in calories to the rubber. Let
us assume further that food requirements
amount to 2350 calories per person per day,
a high figure for Asiatic countries where
most of the rubber is grown. On this basis
the 1,054,625 long tons of synthetic rubber
produced in the United States in 1958
would have required, if grown on planta-
tions, land capable of providing food for
12 million people.
A broader view of the possible effect of
synthesizing non-food agricultural products
may be had by comparing the food and the
non-food items in the world farm output.
The summary in Table 2 shows that 88
percent of the farm output, weighted by
prices, is in food items, and 12 percent in
non-food items. Thus the complete replace-
ment of cotton, wool, tobacco, rubber, cof-
fee, tea, and other natural products by
synthetic materials would release enough
land to feed many million people, but the
maximum that could be accomplished in
this way would provide for the increase in
population that would occur in 5 or 6 years.
Food Compared with Other
Sources of Energy
The production of food by synthesis
>6
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
Table 2. World Farm Output (Quantities weighted hy prices)*
Food : Wheat 10
Rice 10
Meat 20
Milk 15
Other 33
Total food products 88
Non-food: Cotton 4
Wool 2
Tobacco 2
Rubber 1
Coffee and tea 1
Other 2
Total non-food 12
* Anon., “New Statistical Light on the World’s Farm Output,
(United States Department of Agriculture), p. 14, April, 1958.
would employ petroleum, coal, and wood
as the principal raw materials, together
with atmospheric nitrogen and inorganic
mineral products. Petroleum, in the form
of either oil or natural gas, is now the
principal raw material for the synthesis of
rubber, resins, plastics, and other large-
volume synthetics. Petroleum and coal, and
to a lesser extent wood, are likewise the
world’s principal sources of energy for
heat and power. Hence, it is important
to look at the quantities involved to deter-
mine whether the wholesale production of
food by synthesis would seriously deplete
the raw materials needed for other sources
of energy.
As has already been mentioned the en-
ergy content of the food consumed in the
United States is 3070 calories per person
per day, and is the highest of any country
in the world. At the other extreme is
mainland China with only 1830 calories
per person per day. For purposes of the
present calculation 2500 calories per per-
son per day may be taken as the world-wide
average. Then the energy requirement for
the 1950 world population of 2,497 million
was about 6.0 x 1012 calories per day or
2.2 x 1015 calories per year. In terms com-
monly used for fuels this figure is 2.55
x 1012 kilowatt hours.
The energy required for food is shown
in comparison with the other sources of
percent
percent
percent
percent
percent
percent
percent
percent
percent
percent
percent
percent
percent
Foreign Agriculture
energy in Table 3. The heating value of
the wood produced is practically the same
as the food energy while the heating value
of the oil is twice as great and that of the
coal, four times as great. Thus, neglecting
the energy that would be required in manu-
facturing operations, all of the food for
the world could be synthesized from about
one-seventh of the fuel supply.
In the United States the situation is quite
different. While each person consumes
3070 calories per day in food, the fuel that
he uses directly or indirectly in coal, oil,
gasoline, and natural gas amounts to
160,000 calories per day. Hence, only one-
fiftieth of the consumption of energy from
other sources would suffice to provide the
calories needed in food.
Looking to the future the fossil fuel
resources of the world would quickly be
exhausted if all countries should come to
use fuel to the same extent as the United
States. However, solar energy and nuclear
energy will undoubtedly be called upon to
replace fossil fuels to an increasing extent
as sources of heat and power. The role
that solar energy can play is indicated by
the figures in the table which show that
the solar energy reaching the land amounts
to 100,000 times the energy represented by
all of the food consumed in the world.
The potentialities of atomic energy are vast,
but no reliable estimates of the future en-
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
7
Table 3. World Sources of Energy *
Food consumed by human beings
Wood production
Oil production
Coal production
Water power production
Photosynthesis by land vegetation
Solar energy reaching the land
Energy per year
(Unit, 1012 KW hr)
2.55
2.5
6.0
10.5
0.4
45.
260.000.
* Table compiled from data by Thirring, Hans, “Energy for Man,” p. 164, p. 222, and
p. 262, Indiana University Press, Bloomington, 1958.
ergy production from this source can as
yet be made. With the advent of the utili-
zation of solar energy and atomic power,
it may be possible to conserve the reserves
of fossil fuel for chemical synthesis, in-
cluding the synthesis of food.
Present and Potential Manufacture
of Different Types of Food
Having made the general determination
that food manufacture is possible and feas-
ible, consideration will next be given to
the specific accomplishments that have been
made to date, and to the methods which
appear practical for future development.
In making this survey consideration will be
given to the three major constituents of
foods — carbohydrates, fats, and proteins —
and to the minor constituents — vitamins,
minerals, colors, and flavors. These minor
constituents are minor only in the sense of
being small in percentage.
Carbohydrates. Carbohydrates are the
principal source of energy in the human
diet and are the cheapest and most abun-
dant food products in nature. The yields
in which starches and sugars can be pro-
duced by agriculture render it unlikely that
they will be an early target for commercial
synthesis. Carbohydrates can, however, be
synthesized directly from carbon by the
following schematic reactions,
n C -f M>nOo — » n CO
CO + Ho — > HCHO
6 HCHO C6H1206
If the chemist is called upon to meet
shortages of carbohydrates it is unlikely
that he would use these reactions. Instead,
he would probably turn to cellulose as the
raw material since it is produced in nature
in great abundance as the principal con-
stituent of all plants, both terrestrial and
marine.
Cellulose can be readily broken down by
acid catalysis to forms of lower molecular
weight, and ultimately to glucose. Under
accurately controlled conditions the yield
of glucose from cellulose is quantitative.
Cellulose serves as a food for cattle and
other ruminants because it is broken down
by microorganisms in the rumen to a form
capable of being assimilated, presumably
glucose. It is likewise through the instru-
mentality of microorganisms that the ter-
mite is able to subsist on a diet of wood.
The production of edible carbohydrates
from the cellulose in wood or woody ma-
terials is entirely possible, but the cost of
removing lignin and other interfering ma-
terials and obtaining cellulose in a reason-
ably pure form is such that production is
not economically profitable in competition
with the growing of sugars and starches
at the present time.
If the production were economically
feasible it would provide a means of utiliz-
ing the vast amounts of waste paper pro-
duced in the United States. The annual
consumption of paper and paper products
in the United States is 34.5 million tons,
or 400 pounds per person, in round num-
8
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
bers. Assuming that half of this paper is
discarded and that it could be collected in
the form of clean waste paper, it would
amount to 200 pounds per person per year.
Th is could be converted to about 180
pounds of edible carbohydrate, or about
one-half pound per person per day. This
amount of carbohydrate would provide
about 900 calories, or a little less than one-
third of the daily energy requirement.
Much larger amounts of cellulosic ma-
terial are available from other sources
such as farm crop wastes, and wastes in the
production of lumber which may amount
to more than one-half of the wood in the
tree.
Fats. Fats are glycerides of both un-
saturated and saturated fatty acids. Those
most common in nature are the glycerides
of palmitic, stearic, and oleic acids. The
natural fats are mixtures of the glycerides
of various fatty acids. Those in which the
saturated fatty acids predominate are solid
at room temperature; those in which the
unsaturated fatty acids are in the larger
proportion are liquid. The liquid fats such
as cottonseed oil or whale oil can be readily
converted to solid fats by hydrogenation,
as is done in the production of oleomar-
garine.
In the process of digestion fats are
broken down to the corresponding fatty
acids and glycerine. Hence, for purposes
of nutrition it would be necessary to supply
only the requisite fatty acids. However,
present day preferences relating to taste,
consistency, and other factors would
doubtless call for the glycerides rather than
the fatty acids themselves.
Fats were produced in Germany during
World War II from the paraffin-like prod-
ucts obtained by the hydrogenation of car-
bon monoxide. These paraffins were oxi-
dized to the corresponding fatty acids
which, in turn, were esterified with glyc-
erine to produce low-melting fats. Reports
state that these fats were of good taste and
odor and that they were found to be di-
gested and metabolized in the same way as
the natural fats. For any really large scale
synthesis of fats it would seem most prac-
tical to employ petroleum as a raw material
and to separate or to build up from crack-
ing products those hydrocarbons which
could be oxidized to the desired fatty acids.
Unlike carbohydrates which appear to be
interchangeable for meeting the body’s
energy requirements, certain fats are re-
garded as essential to the human diet.
These are the fats of the unsaturated acids
— linoleic, linolenic, and arachidonic acids.
When more is learned about the role of
fats in nutrition it may, at some future
time, be desirable to undertake the syn-
thesis of certain fats that might serve as
dietary supplements. The current avail-
ability of fats from natural sources, how-
ever, is such as to discourage efforts at
commercial production.
Proteins. Proteins are more critical
items in the human diet than are carbohy-
drates or fats. They cost more, especially
when derived from animal sources. They
cannot be stored in the body, hence must
be provided as needed. Furthermore, many
proteins are not adequate to supply the
body’s needs, but must be supplemented by
other proteins; for example, most plant
proteins require the addition of some ani-
mal proteins to provide an adequate diet.
Proteins are high molecular weight
polymers of amino acids and are usually
made up of a number of different amino
acids. Amino acids are characterized by
an amino group, -NH2, and a carboxyl
group, -COOH. In the protein molecule
the amino group of one amino acid is
linked with the carboxyl group of another
amino acid and this process is repeated
so as to produce a chain. When the chain
is short the product is a polypeptide; when
the chain is long and the molecular weight
is of the order of ten thousand to one
million the product is a protein. The dif-
ferent amino acids in a given protein
molecule are thought to be arranged in an
orderly manner since the molecules, as
viewed by the electron microscope, are uni-
form in shape and size, and may be crystal-
line.
The different amino acids differ widely
in composition and structure, except for
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
9
the -NHo and the -COOH groups which all
of them possess. Some are straight chain
compounds; others contain benzene rings
and other ring structures. Some are char-
acterized by the presence of sulfur, and
others by hydroxyl groups. Through the
number and diversity of the amino acids
the great number of different proteins
found in nature are built up.
Proteins are utilized by the body in the
form of amino acids into which they are
broken down in the process of digestion.
The amino acids themselves can be used to
replace proteins in the diet, and are so used
to some extent as will be discussed in sub-
sequent paragraphs. For the human diet
amino acids may be categorized as essen-
tial and non-essential. Eight are considered
to be essential: isoleucine, leucine, lysine,
methionine, phenylalanine, threonine,
tryptophane, and valine. The non-essential
amino acids can be produced in the animal
body from other amino acids or even from
some other sources of nitrogen. Some au-
thorities recognize three amino acids as
semi-essential — histidine, tyrosine, and
arginine. These can be formed slowly by
the body from other substances, but under
stress of growth the rate is too slow for
the maintenance of normal conditions.
The proteins from actively metabolizing
tissues, whether plant or animal, are com-
plete. Thus meat, seed germ, growing
grass, and growing microorganisms all
provide essentially the same nutritive value
from the standpoint of furnishing a com-
plete protein. The percentages of protein
that they contain are, of course, different,
and they differ widely with regard to other
constituents.
The storage proteins such as those in
grain, on the other hand, are incomplete to
a greater or lesser degree and must be sup-
plemented to provide an adequate diet.
Thus it was no accident that the early
western civilization in villages such as
Jarmo was based on a wheat-barley-sheep-
goat economy. Meat and milk were essen-
tial to provide the amino acids that were
lacking in the grains. All subsequent
civilizations which have made extensive
use of grains have supplemented the grains
by animal food.
The Chinese economy, on the other hand,
has been based from the early beginning
largely on the cultivation of the soy bean,
with relatively less attention to animal hus-
bandry than in the west. The reason is
that the soy bean provides a much more
nearly complete protein than does grain,
and a relatively small supplement of animal
food is required. Efforts to introduce the
soy bean into the American diet have met
with little success because the large con-
sumption of meat provides the essential
amino acids in proportions better suited to
human nutrition than would the soy bean.
The storage proteins from grain are
deficient in only a few of the essential
amino acids — principally 1 y c i n e and
methionine, or a combination of cystine
and methionine. These deficiencies are made
in the present-day diets by amino acids
from meat, milk, eggs, or other foods of
animal origin. The disadvantage of this
practice is that the total protein consump-
tion may include more of some proteins
than actually needed in order to secure a
sufficient quantity of those containing the
scarce amino acids.
A logical procedure, then, would be to
supplement the incomplete protein by the
addition of just the requisite quantities of
the amino acids needed to make it com-
plete. This procedure is coming to be the
practice in animal feeding, using synthetic
amino acids. For example, methionine,
which has the formula
ch3sch,ch>chcooh.
I
nh2
is produced under the trade name, H\DAN,
for use as a supplement in feed for poul-
try, swine, and other animals. It is used
along with fish meal to supplement the pro-
teins in grain. A vitamin supplement is
also used. The effectiveness of these sup-
plements is shown by the fact that it is now
possible to produce 3-lb broilers with 25
percent less feed and in 2 weeks less time
than formerly.
10
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
The use of amino acids in human food
has lagged behind its use for the feeding of
animals. However, one amino acid is cur-
rently sold in many food stores. It is glu-
tamic acid, in the form of monosodium glu-
tamate. Though almost tasteless itself, it is
employed as a condiment since it has the
property of augmenting the flavor of other
foods; in soup or rice it gives the flavor
of chicken. Because the amounts used are
small and because the glutamic acid is not
an essential amino acid, the monosodium
glutamate cannot be said to serve any
significant nutritional need.
The production of amino acids in 1957
was 4,345,000 lb. at market prices for the
most part in the range from $1.25 to $2.25
per pound of the pure materials. At first
glance these prices seem high in comparison
with natural foods, but such is not the
case when consideration is given to the
net protein content. Meat, for example,
contains only 10 to 20 percent of protein.
Hence, to supply amino acids at $1.25 to
$2.25 per pound meat would have to sell
at 12 Y2 to 45 cents per pound.
The relation between price, volume of
production, and types of use of amino acids
is illustrated by a market study that was
made of lysine.3 Lysine was first produced
commercially in 1955 by extraction from
natural sources at $12.00 per pound. In
1959 it was produced by a fermentation
process at the rate of about 100,000
pounds per years at a price of $6.00 per
pound. The major outlet was in the pharma-
ceutical industry for protein supplementa-
tion, appetite improvers, and vitamin
formulations. It was also used in the food
industry in specialty products such as high-
protein breads and cereals. The market
studies indicated that if the price could
be reduced to $1.50 or $2.00 per pound
the demand would increase by 50-fold.
Even at $3.00 per pound lysine would be ex-
pected to move into the field of animal
feeding as a supplement to the incomplete
proteins of cotton-seed meal. An extrap-
3 “Lysine prospects brighten,” Staff article,
Chemical and Engineering News, p. 25, April 20,
1959.
olation of the curve showing the de-
crease in the price of lysine as a function
of time indicates that the $2.00 per pound
price may be reached by 1962 to 1964.
From the standpoint of chemical manu-
facture the production of amino acids is
still in the stage of a small scale specialty
operation. Large scale production would
undoubtedly lead to a great reduction in
the prices that now obtain. The only raw
materials needed are petroleum, nitrogen
of the atmosphere, and sulfur. All are avail-
able and cheap. In the early part of the
century the fixation of nitrogen presented
a major problem but now synthetic am-
monia is produced in very large tonnages
from atmospheric nitrogen. Ammonia is,
of course, the substance used to introduce
the amino group, -NH2, into the amino
acid molecule. Efficient, large-scale produc-
tion of the amino acids might require the
discovery and development of new reac-
tions, and would certainly require extensive
engineering research to put the processes
into operation with automatic control. Ex-
perience in other fields of chemical manu-
facture indicates that all of this can be
done within a relatively short time if suffi-
cient manpower and funds are provided.
V itamins. The composition and structure
of vitamins have presented a particular
challenge to the chemist because of the
important role of vitamins in nutrition.
As a result of intensive research the major
vitamins have been identified chemically
and made synthetically. The chemical man-
ufacturer has been especially interested in
vitamins because of the possibility of a
large return from the production of re-
latively small quantities.
Vitamin C or ascorbic acid was once a
scarce item in many diets because it is
found in only a limited number of foods
and is easily destroyed by cooking and by
inadequate methods of food storage or pres-
ervation. The absence of this vitamin leads
to scurvy, once a common afflication among
persons of restricted diet, particularly in
winter. The production of ascorbic acid in
1957 was 3,429,000 pounds. This output
would provide a 25-milligram tablet for
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
11
every person in the United States every
day of the year. The wholesale price, $4.76
per pound, is equivalent to one-fortieth of
a cent for a 25-milligram tablet. This is
far below the price of citrus fruit or other
foods containing the same amount of as-
corbic acid.
Other vitamins, likewise, are produced
in quantity. The 1957 output was 7,802,000
pounds, with an average price of $12.18
per pound. As an indication of the price
range niacin at $2.42 per pound may be
compared with vitamin B12 at $22,500 per
pound. The high price of vitamin B12 is
offset by the fact that the daily dose is only
1 microgram costing 0.005 cent.
It is ironical that the production and
consumption of vitamins should be so high
in the United States where there is such
an abundant supply of adequate natural
foods that some authorities regard much
of the current use of vitamin supplements
as unnecessary. However, if synthetic vit-
amins have made a contribution to the well-
being of the American people, certainly the
large scale production and use of vitamins
elsewhere in the world would make an even
greater contribution to the health and well
being of many peoples having a much more
restricted food supply.
Minerals . The minerals required for
nutrition can, with a few important ex-
ceptions, be readily utilized by the body
if supplied in inorganic form. Some ani-
mals are capable of producing their own
supply of vitamin B12 if cobalt is fed
in the form of an inorganic salt. However,
the human body is not able to do this.
Mineral supplements such as those con-
taining calcium, iron, and occasionally
other elements are rather commonly added
to bread made from white flour to replace
elements lost in milling. Mineral supple-
ments are regularly added to prepared
feed for animals since the amounts nor-
mally present in grain and other constitu-
ents may not be adequate for optimum
growth.
Colors and Flavors. Colors and flavors
contribute little if anything to the nutri-
tional value of foods but they add a great
deal to the pleasure of eating. A very signif-
icant proportion of the colors and flavors
used in the food processing industries, as
well as those sold at retail, are manufac-
tured by synthesis because they can be thus
produced in far greater variety and more
cheaply than from the natural products.
The 1957 production of colors and flavors
was 45,294,000 pounds, with an average
price of $1.38 per pound. In other terms
this output amounts to about 4 ounces per
year for each person in the United States.
Natural flavors usually consist of a major
constituent with a variety of minor con-
stituents, whereas the synthetic flavor may
consist of a single, pure substance. The
principal constituent of vanilla extract is
vanillin. The artificial extract made from
pure vanillin can be distinguished by some
but not all persons from the natural prod-
uct. To duplicate natural vanilla or any
other natural flavor it would be necessary
to identify, synthesize, and add the minor
constituents.
The color and flavor industry is by no
means confined to the duplication or imita-
tion of natural products; the soft drink in-
dustry affords an illustration of the almost
endless variety of colors and flavors that
can be made which never occurred in na-
ture.
Food Synthesis and the Present
Chemical Industry
The order of magnitude of the task of
synthesizing food for the world’s increas-
ing population can be estimated by com-
paring the additional amount of food that
will be required with the present output
of the synthetic organic chemical industry
in the United States. According to esti-
mate by the United Nations the world
population will increase at the rate of about
53 million people a year between 1950
and 1975. Assuming that food for all 53
million persons is to be produced by synthe-
sis at the rate of 500 pounds on a dry
basis per person per year, the amount re-
quired would be 26.500 million pounds per
year. In 1957 the sales of synthetic or-
ganic chemicals produced in the United
12
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
States amounted to 21,696 million pounds,
valued at $5,367 million. Thus, to enable
synthetic food to keep pace with the in-
crease in population, the problem would
be that of constructing each year plant
and facilities for producing a quantity of
amino acids, carbohydrates, fats, vitamins,
and other materials only a little greater
than the total output of the American
synthetic organic chemical industry. The
problem, however, would not be nearly as
great as would be the duplication of the
present industry because only a small num-
ber of items would be produced on the larg-
est practical scale, whereas the present
manufacture of organic chemicals involves
the production of many thousand items,
the majority of which are made on a small
scale. But even with much of the produc-
tion on a small scale, the average value of
the synthetic organic chemicals produced
in 1957 was only 25 cents per pound. If
food products could be made at this price
the 500 pounds required per person per
year would cost only $125 at wholesale.
The capital outlay for plant and facili-
ties can be estimated roughly by assuming
a figure for the cost per pound of produc-
tion per year. This figure would vary
greatly with the items to be produced, the
labor and materials available in the dif-
ferent countries, and the degree to which
the processes had been developed to achieve
maximum efficiency. Assuming a figure
of $0.50 per pound per year, an annual
investment of the order of $13,000 million
would be required to step up synthetic food
production so as to keep pace with the
population during the next few years. This
investment is about seven time the $1,775
million that was invested in 1957 by the
American chemical industry for making
chemicals of all kinds. On a world-wide
basis this amount is small in comparison
with military expenditures and lies with-
in the realm of achievement. Certainly
it would be a small price to pay if it would
forestall major conflicts that might other-
wise arise from population pressure.
Acceptance of Synthetic Foods
The acceptance by the American public
of synthetic food products is an accom-
plished fact so far as vitamins, colors,
flavors, and supplements to processed foods
are concerned. The acceptance of complete-
ly synthetic foods, however, may present
problems because of the conservatism of
most people with regard to food habits, in
addition to the prejudice in many quarters
against anything that may be regarded
as “chemical” or synthetic. To aid in over-
coming objections the synthetic food ma-
terials can be produced in any desired text-
ure,— soft, hard, brittle, plastic, tough, and
even fibrous. There need be only an ex-
tension of the techniques already exploited
by the breakfast food manufacturers. Nat-
ural flavors can be duplicated and a wide
range of intriguing new flavors can be
created.
Opposition is to be expected particularly
from food faddists who base their practices
on the long outmoded vitalistic theory that
materials produced by plants or animals are
inherently different from those obtained
from non-living sources. Any such differ-
ence has, of course, been disproved by re-
search over the last 150 years, but the lag
in the general acceptance of scientific in-
formation is such that the vitalistic theory
still has many vigorous champions.
One popular misunderstanding that is to
be expected is that the synthetic foods
will be produced in the form of pills in
which the food is so highly concentrated
that a few of the pills will constitute a day’s
ration. Facetious and serious references to
such pills were added to some of the ac-
counts of this address which have appeared
in the daily press.
The acceptance of synthetic foods can
be brought about most simply by the grad-
ual extension of present practices of adding
essential synthetic ingredients as supple-
ments to agricultural food products that are
known to be inadequate in themselves, such
as white bread in the West and polished
rice in the East. Public education coupled
with the first hand experience of improved
health and well-being will serve to mini-
mize and ultimately to dissipate complete-
ly any problems with regard to acceptance.
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
13
Conclusion
The synthesis of food offers a solution
of the problem of feeding the world’s rapid-
ly increasing population that is within the
realm of practicality. The technical man-
power and the capital outlay required to
develop large-scale methods of manufac-
ture and to construct the initial facilities
would be large in comparison with most
civilian manufacturing operations but
would be small in comparison with the
cost of military preparedness or a small
war. Once the methods of production were
fully developed they would be practical
for utilization in even the now backward
countries where the greatest population
pressures are developing.
In the immediate future synthetic pro-
duction could most profitably be devoted to
materials designed to supplement those
foods that can be produced by agriculture
most economically and in the largest yields.
Beginnings have already been made in the
production and use of synthetic vitamins
and amino acids as supplements to grains
and other relatively abundant agricultural
products, particularly for the feeding of
animals. The use of these supplements could
be extended so as to replace the less eco-
nomical foods of animal origin. The signal
advances that have been made in animal
nutrition could be extended to human
nutrition with a correspondingly great
improvement in growth, health, and general
well-being.
In the longer range, with continued
population pressure, synthetic production
Other Academies
Lawrence A. Wood
Following my recent installation as
President of the Washington Academy of
Sciences I thought that it would be fitting
to find out just what an academy might be.
The encyclopedia quickly led me back to
an olive grove in a pleasure garden about
a mile outside the walls of Athens, where
Plato discoursed and founded a school of
could be extended beyond the supplements
to provide the major foods themselves, in-
cluding all of the essential amino acids, the
fats, the carbohydrates, and the vitamins.
The history of synthetic organic chem-
istry shows clearly that synthetic foods
can and undoubtedly will ultimately be
developed to the stage at which they can
be produced in such large quantities and
at so small an expenditure of human effort
that they will replace agriculture, just as
agriculture replaced the hunting of game
animals and the gathering of wild plants
for food.
Such a development would permit a
very great increase in the population of the
earth, and at the same time would enable
the population to be distributed in such
a way as to avoid crowding. The con-
sequent changes in the entire pattern of liv-
ing would mark a new era as different from
the present as the city of Jarmo was dif-
ferent from the cave of Shanidar.
Acknowledgment
The author gratefully acknowledges ad-
vice and assistance from Aaron M. Alt-
schul, Augustus R. Glasgow, Clem 0. Mil-
ler, Ralph S. Solecki, Neil W. Stuart, Fran-
cis Joseph Weiss, and other colleagues who
have read this paper and offered helpful
suggestions and comments.
Ed. Note: Page charges for excess ma-
terial ( above 8 pgs.) have been honored by
the author.
philosophic thought that continued to
flourish for more than nine hundred years.
In modern times, the encyclopedia con-
tinues, the word academy has come to de-
note a society having for its object the
cultivation and promotion of science, art,
or literature for the pure love of these
pursuits. The first academy of science,
14
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
founded in Naples in 1560, was the Acad-
emia Secretorum Naturae, and membership
was conferred only on those who had made
some discovery in natural science. Its es-
tablishment must have been premature,
for its founder, although acquitted on
charges of practicing black magic, was or-
dered to close the academy. Various na-
tonal or local academies devoted to sci-
ence founded in the seventeenth century
continue to this day. Our own organization
does not conform to a general rule laid
down in the encyclopedia to the effect that
modern academies have almost without
exception some form of public support in
being either founded, endowed, or sub-
sidized by a national or local government.
In this country our academy is a mem-
ber of a federation called The Academy
Conference of the A.A.A.S., which in-
cludes 35 academies of science bearing state
names, 3 bearing regional names, and 5
bearing city names. Other well-known acad-
emies not affiliated with the Academy Con-
ference are the American Philosophical
Society of Philadelphia (1743), the Amer-
ican Academy of Arts and Sciences of Bos-
ton (1780), and the New York Academy
of Sciences ( 1817) .
The range of activities of these acad-
emies of science is very great and strong-
ly reflects local conditions. Many of the
state academies have only a general meet-
ing once a year with the place of meeting
rotating among the colleges and universities
of the state. Many of the others sponsor
more frequent meetings on specialized
topics. The New York Academy of Sci-
ences, for example, may have a dozen
or more divisional meetings each month.
Junior academies of science and other
activities in secondary schools are often
sponsored by the academies, some of them
receiving grants for these purposes from
the National Science Foundation. Collegiate
sections for undergraduates are maintained
by some academies. Some of the academies
give annual awards of various sorts. Many
of them publish journals or “proceedings”
of varying content.
The most ambitious programs of acad-
emies include the ownership and opera-
tion of museums of science or natural his-
tory, planetaria, aquaria, libraries, etc.,
as well as the sponsorship of field expedi-
tions, weekly television programs, and
other activities. Only a few academies,
located in large cities, find it possible to
engage in activities of this sort, Some of
the work of this type is supported by the
income from endownments; other acad-
emies receive grants or other benefits di-
rectly from a state or city government.
In many ways the Washington Academy
of Sciences is similar to other academies
representing a state or a large city. The
major difference from most of them lies in
our activities as a federation of the local
sections of the 27 affiliated societies.
Founded in 1898 the Washington Acad-
emy of Sciences has developed slowly
over the years. In the past twenty years,
during which I have been in a position
to observe the Academy, the changes in the
organization have been too few and too
limited to reflect properly the tremendous
growth of scientific activity in the Wash-
ington area and the emergence of our city
as one of the outstanding world centers
of scientific research. The present officers
will be deeply appreciative of suggestions
from the members and affiliated societies
as to steps by which the Academy can in-
crease its effectiveness and begin to assume
again a more important position of lead-
ership in the scientific life of the Nation’s
Capital.
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
15
E, S, and A Day
E S and A Day, as it is called colloquial-
ly. is the most publicized contribution of
the DC Council of Engineers and Ar-
chitectural Societies to the encouragement
of education leading to careers in en-
gineering, science, and architecture. When
this local, annual event was first staged
five years ago, it was called E and A Day
and was limited to engineering and ar-
chitecture and to education underlying these
professions. Two years ago the coopera-
tion of the Washington Academy of Sci-
ences was sought, and S, for science, was
added to E and A Day. But the work re-
quired to prepare for E S and A Day is
still done by members of the DC Council
and credit for it belongs to that organiza-
tion.
E S and A Day attempts to accomplish
its mission by turning a public spotlight
for a half day each year on noted engineers,
scientists, and architects and their work,
and on dedicated secondary-school teach-
ers who might otherwise remain in ob-
scurity. But its impact is not limited to
the effect of the program of the Day on
its audience. Preparation for the Day is
a highly organized effort that goes on for
months preceding the event, and the process
of seeking financial support for it, of ob-
taining nominations of outstanding teach-
ers, engineers, scientists, and architects for
awards, of advertising the Day and selling
tickets to the luncheon — all this probably
makes an impression on more people than
does the Day itself.
On February 25, 1960, the featured event
of the Day was a luncheon that more than
seven hundred people attended at the Presi-
dential Arms, 1320 G Street, N.W. The
ballroom floor and a mezzanine floor above
one side of it were crowded with circular
or rectangular tables, each seating eight.
The tables along the mezzanine railing
faced an elevated head table on the other
side of the floor below. There ten persons
were seated: G. R. Tatum, General Chair-
man; Joseph L. Gillman, Jr., Toastmaster;
Ralph I. Cole, Chairman, DC Council; Law-
rence A. Wood, President, Washington
Academy of Sciences; the featured after-
luncheon speaker James A. Van Allen;
and the members of the morning symposium
on “Space”; i.e., Thomas J. Killian, Her-
bert Friedman, C. F. Gell, Paul A. Goettel-
man, and Hugh L. Dryden. In front of the
head table and at a lower level was a longer
table seating at its center those who were
to receive the National Capital Awards
in engineering, science, and architecture;
i.e., Thorndike Saville, Jr., M. Lee Rice,
and Anthony T. Zaia, respectively. On
either side of them were places for six
teachers: Mrs. Sarah B. Adams, Mrs. Edith
M. Allen, Mrs. Virginia W. Biedler, Mrs.
Edith L. Carter, Mrs. Helen N. Cooper,
Mrs. Pauline Desmond, Mr. Thomas P.
Hillman, Mr. Charles Kilbourne, Mr. How-
ard E. Kerr, Miss Johanna B. Kirstein, Dr.
Bernice G. Lamberton, and Miss Katherine
Shiels. By each of these twelve plates was
placed a one-volume encyclopedia of sci-
ence as a gift to the recipient of a Science
Teacher’s Award. Other nominees for
awards were named in the program. The
teachers were seated in the audience as
guests of the Joint Board on Science Ed-
ucation. Very few members of the Wash-
ington Academy were present.
The presentation of awards to those
named above preceded the address by
James A. Van Allen on the “Radiation
Environment of the Earth.” Dr. Van Allen
directed the design and assembly of in-
struments in Explorer 1 that detected
around the earth radiation belts now named
after him. It is well known that he is head
of the Department of Physics at the State
University of Iowa and that he played
a leading role in the US earth satellite
program before and during the Interna-
tional Geophysical Year, but it is not as
well known as it should be here in Wash-
ington that for almost a decade he was a
worker in the Washington scientific com-
munity and was a member of the Washing-
16
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
ton Academy of Sciences. From 1939 to
1942 he was a research fellow in the De-
partment of Terrestrial Magnetism of the
Carnegie Institution of Washington. Dur-
ing World War II he served as Lieutenant
Commander in the Navy, ordnance and
gunnery specialist and combat observer.
After the war he returned to Washing-
ton and worked in the Applied Physics
Laboratory, Johns Hopkins University, un-
til he went to Iowa in 1951. In January
1949, when he was 34 years old, he received
from the Washington Academy of Sciences
its annual award for 1948 in the physical
sciences “for his work in nuclear physics
and cosmic rays.” In April 1959 he was
elected a member of the National Academy
of Sciences.
Dr. Van Allen gave a long illustrated
lecture on the methods and results of his
investigations of the radiation environment
of the earth. His slides gave his audience
some appreciation of the complexity of the
instrumental packages, or payloads, that
were carried by five of our space vehicles.
Results were shown in the form of graphs
and maps of the radiation zones. At the end
he touched on the biological effects of
radiation found in these zones.
Science in Washington
SCIENTISTS IN THE NEWS
This column will present brief items concern-
ing the activities of members of the Academy.
Such items may include notices of talks given,
\ important conferences or visits, promotions,
awards, election to membership or office in sci-
\ entific and technical societies, appointment to
t technical committees, civic activities, and mar-
riages, births, and other family news. Formal
; contributors are being assigned for the systematic
collection of news at institutions employing con-
' | siderable numbers of Academy members ( see
list on masthead) . However, for the bulk of the
membership, we must rely on individuals to
\ send us news concerning themselves and their
friends. Contributions may be addressed to
S. B. Detwiler, Jr., Associate Editor, 2605 S.
8th St., Arlington, Va.
1
i APPLIED PHYSICS LABORATORY
1
1
d
e
i
;e
i-
15
b-
Ralph E. Gibson was guest of honor and
speaker at the annual dinner of the Cleveland
Chapter, National Defense Transportation Asso-
ciation, on January 14.
Alfred J. Zmuda has been appointed a con-
sultant to the Geophysics Panel of the Air Force
Scientific Advisory Board. A paper by Dr. Zmuda
entitled, “Some Characteristics of the Upper-
Air Magnetic Field and Ionospheric Currents,”
appeared in the January issue of the Journal of
Geophysical Research.
3 CATHOLIC UNIVERSITY
Frank A. Biberstein, Jr., professor of civil
engineering, has been appointed chairman of
ASTM Subcommittees III (Concrete and Sand
Lime Units) and XI (Editorial).
Henry P. Ward, professor of chemistry,
participated in a Summary Conference on Chem-
istry Teaching in the Washington Area, held
at American Chemical Society headquarters on
February 13.
COAST AND GEODETIC SURVEY
David G. Knapp received the Department of
Commerce Meritorious Service Award on Feb-
ruary 18, for unusual contributions to highly
technical areas of the C&GS Geomagnetic Pro-
gram.
Dean S. Carder spent most of February in Los
Angeles as technical adviser to AEC on its cur-
rent series of “Cowboy” experiments.
The Franklin Institute has awarded its Boyden
Premium to Carl I. Aslakson “in consideration
of his contribution to the measurement of the
speed or radiation in space through the use
of Shoran techniques and thereby as the first
American to aid in establishing a new and
significantly more nearly accurate value of 16
km per second higher than the long-accepted
value.” Captain Aslakson was expected to re-
ceive this award, which involves a cash payment
of $500, at ceremonies in Philadelphia on March
16. The Boyden Premium, established in 1859,
has been awarded on only two previous occasions.
GEORGE WASHINGTON UNIVERSITY
Mary L. Robbins has been appointed to an
Educational Advisory Committee for a confer-
ence to be sponsored by the Women’s Bureau
of the Labor Department, in commemoration of
its 40th anniversary next June.
:ES
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
17
HOWARD UNIVERSITY
Lloyd N. Ferguson, professor and head of the
Chemistry Department, served as visiting scient-
ist at Hamlin University, St. Paul, Minn., Feb-
ruary 8-10. The Visiting Scientist Program is
sponsored by the American Chemical Society’s
Division of Chemical Education.
Moddie D. Taylor, professor of chemistry, is
the author of a recent textbook, “First Principles
of Chemistry,” published by D. Van Nostrand
Company (Princeton, 1960).
NATIONAL BUREAU OF STANDARDS’
Harry A. Bright, chief of the Analytical
Chemistry Section, retired on February 29 after
almost 47
years of serv-
ice in the
Che mi st ry
D i vision.
Members of
the staff and
other friends
gathered a t
the S' e n i o r
Lunch Club
to wish him
well on his
retirement,
and to con-
gratulate him
for winning
the 1960
Anachem
Award for Outstanding Achievement in Analyti-
cal Chemistry.
Benjamin L. Page has been appointed chief
of the Length Section, Optics and Meteorology Di-
vision, effec-
tive January
24. Mr. Page
had been act-
ing chief of
the Section
since March
1959.
Fourteen
N B S Staff
members
were hon-
ored by the
Depart-
ment of
Commerce
at its Twelfth
Annual Hon-
or Awards
Program on February 18. They were: Francis C.
Breckenridge, Frank R. Caldwell, Francis M.
Defandorf, and Irvin H. Fullmer, who received
two-point diamond pins on solid gold and blue
enamel emblems, in recognition of 40 years of ex-
cellent service; Garbis H. Keulegan, Alvin G.
McNish, Chester H. Page, Charlotte M. Sit-
terly, Herbert P. Broida, and Arnold M. Bass,
who received gold medals for exceptional service;
and Hugh Logan, Benjamin L. Page, John K.
Taylor, and John Wachtman, Jr., who re-
ceived medals for meritorious service.
On February 19, Samuel N. Alexander ad-
dressed the Philosophical Society of Washington
on “World Wide Activities in Computing and
Data Processing Technology.”
John A. Bennett spoke on “Fatigue Frac-
ture” at the Seminar on Mechanics of Fracture
in Metals, held in Windsor, Conn., by the Hart-
ford Chapter of the American Society of Metals.
A paper on “Deposition of Tungsten Coat-
ings from Fused Salt Baths and from the Gas
Phase” was presented by Abner Brenner on
January 19 at MIT.
Florence H. Forziati has been elected secre-
tary of the Washington Section of the American
Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists.
Hans P. R. Frederikse spoke on “Properties
of Titanium Dioxide” at the General Electric
Research Laboratory, Schenectady, on Febru-
ary 19.
W alter J. Hamer presented a paper on “Air-
craft Storage Batteries” before the American In-
stitute of Electrical Engineers in New York City,
February 1, and a paper on “New Developments
in Batteries” at the regional meeting of the
American Transit Association in Washington, on
February 9.
Archibald T. McPherson, associate director
for engineering, spoke on “Recent Developments
in Standards” before the American Society for
Quality Control at Parkersburg, W.Va., on Jan-
uary 20.
Aaron S. Posner has been appointed to serve
on the Advisory Editorial Board of the Journal
of Dental Research.
Bourdon F. Scribner attended the Pittsburgh
Conference on Analytical Chemistry and Applied
Spectroscopy, February 29 to March 4, and
presented a paper on “Relative Intensities for the
Arc Spectra of Seventy Elements.”
On January 22, James L. Thomas participated
in the dedication of a new laboratory of the
Arma Corporation at Garden City, N.Y., and
reviewed “The State-of-the-Art in Electrical
Standards”.
NATIONAL INSTITUTES OF HEALTH
Sara E. Branham, currently participating in
the visiting biologist program of the American
Institute of Biological Sciences, has been named
Medical Woman of the Year by the Washington,
D.C., branch of the American Medical Women’s
Association. She retired as chief of the section
18
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
on bacterial toxins at the National Institutes of
Health last July, after 30 years of work for the
Public Health Service.
NAVAL RESEARCH LABORATORY
Richard L. Dolecek, superintendent of the
Solid State Division, represented NRL at the
Fourth Navy Scientific Symposium, entitled
“Naval Problems in Electromagnetic Radiation,”
which was held in Pasadena, Calif., March 9-11.
Dr. Dolecek is well known for his pioneering
work on the entropy of superconductors and his
role in the prediction of the isotope effect in
superconductors.
William A. Zisman addressed the Chicago
Section of the American Chemical Society on
February 18. His topic was, “Wetting and Surface
Constitution.”
Herbert Friedman presented an invited talk,
“X-ray Absorption Edge Spectroscopy,” at the
Norelco Eastern X-ray Spectroscopy School, New
York, on February 18. On February 28 Dr.
Friedman appeared as a guest on Johns Hopkins’
File 7 television program, “A New Look at the
Universe.” He presented the story of rocket as-
tronomy and reported on the latest developments
in this field.
L. S. Birks, head of the X-ray Optics Branch,
Optics Division, is author of a new book, “X-ray
Spectrochemical Analysis” (Interscience Pub-
lishers, New York). This is Volume XI of “Chem-
ical Analysis,” a series of monographs on analyti-
cal chemistry and its application.
US’D A, BELTSVILLE
Clarence H. Hoffman spoke on “Recent Ad-
vances in Entomology” on January 13, before the
37th Annual Meeting of the Pennsylvania En-
tomological Society at Harrisburg, Pa. On Janu-
ary 26 Dr. Hoffman presented a paper, “Insecti-
cide Residues on Fruits, Vegetables, and Forage,”
at a symposium on chemical residues in agricul-
ture held in East Lansing under the sponsorship
of the Michigan Department of Agriculture and
the Michigan AES. And on February 4 he pre-
sented a paper, “Aerial Applications of Insecti-
cides in Relation to Fish and Wildlife,” at the
9th Annual Nebraska Aerial Applicators Short
Course, held in Norfolk, Neb.
Edward F. Knipling, director of the En-
tomology Research Division, Agricultural Re-
search Service, was one of five scientists selected
to receive the Progressive Farmer 1959 “Men of
the Year” award. Dr. Knipling originated the
idea of releasing sexually sterile males as a means
of controlling or eradicating insect populations.
The five scientists played a vital role in the de-
velopment and application of this principle for
the eradication of the screw-worm, an important
insect pest, from the southeastern United States.
The possibilities of applying the sterile male
method to control other insects and higher animal
pests was discussed by Dr. Knipling in the
October, 1959, issue of Science.
Frank P. Cullinan, associate director of the
Crops Research Division, Agricultural Research
Service, has been elected president of the Scien-
tific Manpower Commission for the calendar
year 1960.
USDA, WASHINGTON
Elbert L. Little, Jr., dendrologist with the
Forest S’ervice, has accepted the position of visit-
ing professor of dendrology at the spring term of
the Forestry School, University of the Andes, at
Merida, Venezuela. He held the same position
in 1953-54.
Harold T. Cook and Herbert L. Haller
served on a USDA team that negotiated agricul-
tural research grants and surveyed research in-
stitutions in Poland, Finland, S’pain, France, Italy,
Yugoslavia, and Israel during the last three
months of 1959. The trip was undertaken in con-
nection with the foreign research program that
is being conducted under Public Law 480 and
financed with funds received from sales of surplus
farm products.
Harold H. Shepard is the editor of Volume
II of “Methods of Testing Chemical on Insects,”
recently issued by Burgess Publishing Company
of Minneapolis. The book includes techniques
for the selection of effective insecticides, attract-
ants, and repellents, with special attention to the
factors affecting experimental results. Individual
chapters are devoted to such subjects as the
handling of spider mites, systemic chemical con-
trol of internal pests of livestock, etc.
Among other activities, Ashley B. Gurney of
the Entomology Research Division is working on
a taxonomic study of the Blattoidea (cock-
roaches) of the Philippines, Formosa, and Japan.
This work is being done in collaboration with K.
Princis of Lund, Sweden, who is coming to the
U.S.A. under an NSF grant administered by the
Smithsonian Institution.
UNIVERSITY OF MARYLAND
S. Fred Singer spoke at a convocation of the
College of Arts and Sciences on February 25, on
the topic, “Rockets and Outer Space.” This was
the first of what the College hopes will be a
regular series of convocations, at which faculty
members returning from sabbatical leaves can re-
port on their activities.
DEATHS
William D. Urry, an active resident member
since 1941, died of a coronary occlusion on De-
cember 16, at his home in Bethesda. Dr. Urry had
been employed by the Air Force.
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
19
AFFILIATED SOCIETIES
American Institute of Electrical Engineers,
Washington Section
Chairman: Wade M. Edmunds (REA). Secre-
tary-Treasurer: Irvin L. Cooter (NBS).
April 26, “Power and Communications Prob-
lems in the Design and Construction of Dulles
International Airport,” Herbert H. Howell, Fed-
eral Aviation Agency.
May 24, program of technical papers in elec-
trical engineering.
American Society for Metals, Washington
Chapter
President: William L. Holshouser (NBS). Secre-
tary: Glenn W. Geil (NBS).
April 18, “Titanium and Competitive Stainless
Steels,” Walter L. Finaly, Crucible Steel Com-
pany.
May 16, National Officers Night, featuring
address by the National President, Walter Crafts,
on “Facing the Productivity Challenge: Men and
Metals of the Next Decade.” This meeting will
be at the Officers Club, Naval Weapons Plant
and not at the All States Restaurant.
American Society of Mechanical Engineers,
Washington Section
Chairman: Alfred F. Bochenek (Bit. Coal Inst.)
Secretary: Virgil L. Pence.
April 20, annual banquet, Terrace Dining Room,
Arlington Towers; speaker will be W. H. Upson,
writer and lecturer; music by a Navy choral
group; presentation of awards to local section
members by the President of ASME, Walker
Cisler.
Anthropological Society of Washington
President: Harvey Moore (AU). Secretary: Frank
Anderson (U.Md.).
Meetings on third Tuesday, except June-Sept.,
Room 43, Museum of Natural History, at 8:15
P.M.
March 22, “Culture Change Among the Utes,”
Dr. Gottfried Lang, Catholic University.
Botanical Society of Washington
President: Harold T. Cook (USDA). Correspond-
ing Secretary: Muriel J. O’Brien (USDA).
Meetings on first Tuesday, John Wesley Powell
Auditorium, 8:00 P.M.
Columbia Historical Society
President: Maj. Gen. U. S. Grant, 3rd. Execu-
tive Secretary: John T. Gibbs.
April 14, “History of the Cosmos Club,” Paul
H. Oehser; meeting at Heurich Memorial Man-
sion.
May 14, “The Friday Morning Music Club,
a Record of 75 Years,” Mrs. Frank P. Howard;
meeting at Heurich Mansion, musical program
and exhibit of sheet music.
Entomological Society of W ashington
President: Paul W. Oman (USDA). Correspond-
ing Secretary: Paul Woke.
Meetings on first Thursday, October to June,
Room 43, National Museum.
Insecticide Society of Washington
President: Milton S. Schechter (USDA). Secre-
tary-Treasurer: James F. Cooper (USDA).
Meetings on third Wednesday, Oct., Nov., Jan.-
May, in Symons Hall Auditorium, U. Md., at
8:00 P.M.
Institute of the Aeronautical Sciences, Wash-
ington Section
Chairman: B. C. Myers II (NASA). Secretary:
Harold Andrews.
Meetings usually on the second Tuesday of each
month, at the International Room, Occidental
Restaurant.
Philosophical Society of Washington
President: Louis R. Maxwell (NOL). Secretary:
F. N. Frenkiel (DTMB) .
Meetings held on alternate Fridays, John Wesley
Powell Auditorium.
Society for Experimental Biology and Medi-
cine, District of Columbia Section
President: George A. Hottle (NIH). Secretary:
Edwin P. Laug (FDA).
April 7, meetings in Hall A, G. Wr. Univ.
School of Medicine, 1335 H. St., N.W.
Society of American Bacteriologists, Wash-
ington Branch
President: Mary L. Robbins (GWU). Secretary:
Elizabeth J. Oswald (FDA).
Meetings on the fourth Tuesday, Oct., Jan.- April,
and sometimes May, at Walter Reed Army Medi-
cal Center, 8:00 P.M.
At its meeting on January 26, the members
unanimously approved a series of recommenda-
tions prepared by its Executive Committee, re-
affirming its support of the idea of the Science
Fairs, but urging that: (1) preparation of a
project for entry not be required as part of a
formal course; (2) that no form of pressure be
applied to induce students to prepare a project
for competition; (3) that the project be prepared
entirely in the home or school; (4) that major
equipment used be made and assembled by the
student, not borrowed from a scientific institu-
tion; (5) that a realistic limit be placed on the
amount to be spent on project materials; (6)
that the use of pathogenic organisms be pro-
hibited; (7) that the student’s advisor be notified
20
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
of the rules of the Science Fairs. These recom-
mendations are being sent to appropriate organiza-
tions in the Washington area for consideration.
Society of American Foresters, Washington
Section
President: James M. Owens (Dept. Commerce).
Secretary: Matt C. Huppuch (Dept. Army).
Meetings usually on third Thursday, during the
winter season, at the YWCA.
No meeting in April.
The Fifth World Forestry Congress, first to
be held in the Western Hemisphere, will be in
Seattle, Washington, August 29-September 10,
1960.
The 60th Anniversary, Society of American
Foresters, will be held in Washington, November
13-16, at Sheraton Park, with Arthur Greeley
(USFS’) serving as General Chairman.
Society of American Military Engineers,
Washington Post
Secretary: Col. Robert P. Tabb, Jr.
Meetings on third Monday, each month, at 12:15
for luncheon at Y.W.C.A.
Chemical Society of Washington
President: Allen L. Alexander (NRL). Secretary:
John L. Torgesen (NBS).
The Board of Managers met on February 11
at Caruso’s Italian Kitchens, with Pres. A. L.
Alexander presiding. The officers of the Wash-
ington Junior Academy of Sciences were present
as guests.
In a discussion of responsibilities of the Awards
Committee it was suggested that the Committee
consider nominations of members for awards other
than those sponsored by the American Chemical
Society.
Dr. Alexander read a letter from President
Elkins of the University of Maryland, expressing
appreciation to the Chemical Society for its in-
terest in a suitable memorial to the late Nathan
L. Drake. The letter stated that a new building
adjacent ot the Chemistry Building will be named
the Nathan L. Drake Lecture Halls, and that
an appropriate plaque will be erected therein.
President-elect W. J. Bailey reported that a
comprehensive annual report of the secretary
for 1959 had been completed and forwarded to
ACS headquarters. Several copies of the report
are available for circulation among the member-
ship of the Society. Dr. Bailey pointed out several
little-known items of interest in the report: (1)
numerous local section members serve in national
offices; (2) as many local section members serve
as councilors of ACS' divisions as serve on the
general ACS Council; (3) attendance at general
meetings of CSW has averaged only 5 percent
of the total membership.
The 696th general meeting of the Society was
held on February 11 in the auditorium of the
Museum of Natural History. This was a joint
meeting with the Washington Junior Academy
of Sciences. James H. Schulman, associate super-
intendent of the Solid State Division, Naval
Research Laboratory, presented a lecture dem-
onstration on “Crystals: A Study in Order and
Confusion.”
ACADEMY ACTIVITIES
Board of Managers, January Meeting
These notes are intended to outline briefly, for
the information of the membership, the principal
actions taken at Board meetings. They are not
the official Minutes as prepared by the Secretary.
—Ed.
The Board of Managers held its 525th meeting
of January 19 at NAS, with President Campbell
presiding.
For the Committee on Meetings, Dr. Campbell
reported on arrangements for the dinner meeting
of the Academy on January 19, and on the meet-
ing of February 18, at which he will give the
address of the retiring president.
On behalf of Chairman Van Evera of the Com-
mittee on Grant-in-aid for Research, Dr. Camp-
bell reported on the application of a Fairfax High
S’chool student for a $45 grant, to be used in
buying equipment for a science project. The
Board provisionally accepted the application, sub-
ject to receipt of Dean Van Evera’s formal recom-
mendation.
Chairman Schubert of the Committee on En-
couragement of Science Talent reported on the
first Science Convention of the Washington Junior
Academy of Sciences, held December 28 at the
Burlington Hotel. About three dozen papers
based upon original work were presented before
an audience of 150 persons; this attendance
comprised somewhat more than a third of the
membership of WJAS (see list of papers in
Jan. issue) .
Dr. Schubert also reported on activities of a
committee on research opportunities for high
school students, which is arranging for some 20
students to work at Government laboratories
during the summer. John M. Leonard of the
Naval Research Laboratory is chairman of the
committee. It is expected that a fund of $1600
will be available to provide transportation and
lunches for the students; of this amount, $1,000
is being provided by WJAS, $300 by the Chemical
Society of Washington, and $300 by the senior
Academy.
The treasurer questioned whether the WAS
Board had specifically authorized appropriation
of $300 for the foregoing purpose; it was left
that the secretary would check the Minutes of
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
21
previous meetings to determine what action had
been taken.
For the Special Committee on Bylaws, Dr.
S'pecht reported that the next action on the
revised Bylaws (approved by the Board at its
meeting of December 15) is to put them into
form for consideration and approval by the
Academy membership. In the version that is to
be sent out, proposed changes will be indicated.
Dr. Campbell recommended that this com-
mittee be continued in operation during 1960,
until action could be taken on a revision of
the Standing Rules.
The Board took note that the new 1959 Direc-
tory had just been issued and was being mailed
out to the membership.
Dr. Campbell suggested that incoming Presi-
dent Wood consider the appointment of a special
committee on science in the proposed National
Cultural Center. He felt that the Center might
be used for international scientific congresses,
or large national scientific meetings.
Dr. Campbell observed that the administrative
secretary of WAS is bearing the burden of com-
piling and distributing the Science Calendar.
He felt that the Joint Committee on Press Rela-
tions should be reactivated to direct this and
other public relations activities.
Chairman Kushner of the Membership Com-
mittee presented for second reading the names
of seven candidates previously proposed for
Academy membership, as follows: Seymour L.
Friess, Sydney Geltman, William A. Geyger,
Samuel K. Love, Raymond L. Nace, Bertram
stiller, and Madelyn Womack. These candidates
were then elected to membership.
Dr. Specht reported that as of January 15
the Academy had 765 regular resident members,
61 retired residents, 191 regular non-residents,
60 retired non-residents, and 6 others, for a
total membership of 1083. This represents a net
increase of 17 over last year’s total.
Dr. Specht reported the results of the recent
referendum on the preferences of the membership
on the future content of the Journal. The majority
was clearly in favor of including news of the
Academy and local scientific activities, as well
as original scientific articles.
Dr. Brombacher presented the treasurer’s finan-
cial report for 1959. This showed a total income
of $14,550 and expenses of $18,743, giving a
deficit of $4,193. The value of investments de-
creased from $70,219 to $70,098.
Dr. Rehder, custodian of publications, reported
that the Smithsonian Institution needed the room
in which Academy publications are kept, and
that he is hoping to find space at the Carnegie
Institution.
Board of Managers, February Meeting
The Board of Managers held its 526th meet-
ing on February 16 at NBS, with incoming Presi-
dent Wood presiding.
The minutes of the 525th meeting were ap- j
proved with minor corrections.
Dr. Wood announced the names of such 1960
committee chairmen as had so far been ap- ;
pointed. (See list elsewhere in this issue.)
The Board confirmed the appointment of an
editor, a managing editor, and four associate
editors of the Journal. (See list on masthead.) •
The 1960 budget was presented by Treasurer !
Aslakson and discussed. This showed estimated \
receipts of $12,900, including $5,500 from dues, ' >
$2,000 from Journal subscriptions, $1,000 from
sales of back issues of the Journal, and $3,500
from interest and dividends; and estimated ex- ;
penditures of $13,560, including $4,000 for print- .
ing the Journal, $5,515 for the headquarters
office, and $1,000 for the secretary’s office. The
budget was passed with the proviso that an item
be included under Receipts to show that the
$660 deficit was being offset by a withdrawal
from reserve funds.
Dr. Wood presented a recommendation of the
Executive Committee, that $300 be appropriated
— as an unbudgeted item — to the Committee on
Encouragement of Science Talent to defray trans-
portation and lunch expenses for high school '■
science students who will conduct research studies
at NIH during the summer; these funds are
to be supplemented by $1,000 from the Junior
Academy and $300 from the Chemical Society. /
The recommendation was approved.
Chairman Hall of the Membership Committee ,
presented for first reading the names of two a
candidates for membership. There were no can- ji
didates for second reading.
Chairman Schubert of the Committee on En- p
couragement of Science Talent discussed an
aspect of the March meeting of the Academy, n
which will be a joint meeting with the Junior
Academy. At this meeting some 25 winners of t*
the Science Talent Search will be present as K
dinner guests. Dr. Schubert indicated that in the r
past, the cost of meals for the guests had been h
personally defrayed by Committee members; but
that the affair had grown to such an extent that ^
some relief was needed.
There was extended discussion of the wisdom :t
of using Academy funds for the indicated pur- I
pose. The matter was resolved by formal action
appropriating $200 to the Committee for 1960, )
to spend as it sees fit. (Presumably this item is •
to be added to the budget.)
Dr. Schubert reported on plans to hold a
national meeting of Junior Academies of Science I
next fall, for the discussion of common problems; I
for the conduct of this meeting, it is hoped to
obtain an NSF grant of perhaps $30,000. Dr.
S’chubert moved that the Academy serve as one j
of the sponsors of the event, without financial |
obligation. The motion was passed.
22
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences I
I In a discussion of the Journal, various mem-
| bers commented favorably on the new format and
r content of the January issue, and on the im-
portant part that the publication can begin to
play in giving the membership a picture of
Academy activities. On motion of Aurel 0. Foster,
I the Board formally commended the editors for
' their maiden effort.
Dr. Wood read a letter from the Society of
American Bacteriologists, suggesting the develop-
i ment of improved rules for Science Fair exhibits.
It was recommended, for example, that prepara-
I tion of an entry should be voluntary, and not a
requirement of high school science courses; that
pathogens should not be included in exhibits;
and that exhibits should be self-made. The letter
was referred for comment to the Committee on
Encouragement of Science Talent, as a prelimi-
i nary to referral by the Board of Managers to
I the Joint Board on Science Education.
JOINT BOARD
Local Teachers Honored on E S and A Day
\
If
The annual Engineers, Scientists, and Architects
Day luncheon held at the Presidential Arms on
Thursday, February 25 was the occasion for the
presentation of Distinguished Teacher Awards
to twelve local elementary, junior high, and
senior high school teachers. In addition, seventy
five others were presented Citations for outstand-
ing teaching of science and mathematics in the
local area schools.
Engineers, Scientists and Architects Day was
established several years ago to honor and call
attention of the public to the contributions of
these professions to human progress. Each year
distinguished members of these professions who
have made outstanding contributions are singled
out for recognition. Because of the prime im-
portance of good teaching in technologic ad-
vancement, it seemed proper to honor outstanding
teachers at the same time. Accordingly, the
Distinguished Teaching Award was inaugurated
by the Joint Board on Science Education in 1958.
From nominations by school principals, twelve
are selected for the award which consists of a
Citation and a personalized copy of a scientific
encyclopedia. Others are presented Certificates
of Citation. All are honored guests of the Board
at the luncheon.
Distinguished Teacher Awards were presented
to Mrs. Sarah B. Adams, Calvin Coolidge H.S.;
Mrs. Edith M. Allen, Burrville Elementary
School; Mrs. Virginia W. Biedler, Randle High-
lands Elementary School; Mrs. Edith L. Carter,
Adelphi Elementary S’chool; Mrs. Helen N.
Cooper, North Bethesda Jr. H.S. ; Mrs. Pauline
Diamond, Sherwood H.S.; Mr. Thomas P. Hill-
man, Gunston Jr. H.S. ; Mr. Charles Kilbourne,
Suitland Sr. H.S. ; Mr. Howard E. Kerr, Francis
C. Hammond H.S.; Miss Johanna B. Kirstein,
McLean H.S. ; Dr. Berenice G. Lamberton, Paul
Jr. H.S. ; Miss Katharine Shields, Garfield
Elementary S’chool.
Certificates of Citation were presented to: Mrs.
Dorothy Arnold, Tuckahoe Elem. S.; Mr. Alfred
H. Benna, Newport Jr. H.S. ; Sister Mary Bennet,
Sacred Heart Academy; Mrs. Anita Bickford,
Leland Jr. H.S. ; Mrs. Ellen Bortz, Walter John-
son Jr. H.S. ; Mrs. Catherine S. Bride, Takoma
Park Jr. H.S.; Col. K. T. Brunsvold, St. Ste-
phen’s S. ; Rev. Angus N. Carney, Archbishop
Carroll H.S.; Mrs. Althea R. Carrick, Glenn
Dale Elem. S’.; Mrs. Lillian Casey, Bethesda
Elem. S.; Sister M. Margaret Charles, Academy
of the Holy Cross; Mrs. Elsie Covell, Annandale
Elem. S.; Mrs. Madeline H. Curtis, Western H.S. ;
Mrs. Helen Dawson, Cynthia Warner S.; Mr.
James R. Dietz, Mt. Rainier Jr. H.S.; Mr. William
W. Duncan, Francis Jr. H.S.; Mrs. Sophia R.
Edwards, Anacostia H.S.; Mrs. Margaret Eimer,
Chesterbrook Elem. S.; Mrs. Lucille R. Fon-
cannon, Mount Daniel Elem. S. ; Miss Willye
B. Freeman, Jackson Elem. S’.; Mrs. Thelma
L. Garrett, Hyattsville Jr. H.S.; Mr. James S.
Gaskins, Luther Jackson H.S.; Miss Mattylen
Gassett, Suitland Elem. S. ; Mrs. Ruth S. Genz-
ler, Rollingcrest Jr. H.S. ; Mrs. Virginia M.
Good, Eastern Jr. H.S. ; Mrs. Alice B. Goode,
Pine Crest Elem. S.; Mrs. Katharine M. H.
Hammond, Falls Church H.S.; Mrs. Pamela G.
Hanrahan, Oxon Hill H.S’.; Mrs. Anna B. Hawes,
Fairlington Elem. S.; Mrs. Francis L. Hiett,
Jefferson S.
Mrs. Elizabeth S. Hill, Langston Elem. S. ;
Miss Ida W. Hill, Alice Deal Jr. H.S.; Mrs.
Mildred D. Holloway, Neval Thomas Elem. S. ;
Mr. John H. Hoppe, Osbourn H.S. ; Mrs. Juliette
G. Hughes, Cardozo H.S.; Mr. Clarence L.
Jackson, Shaw Jr. H.S.; Mr. Jerry Kenny, District
Heights Elem. S’.; Miss Ruth Kevin, National
Cathedral S. ; Lt. Col. Milford A. Koehler, Lee
H. S.; Mr. Joseph Kulick, Stratford Jr. H.S. ;
Mrs. Mary E. Lacy, New Hampshire Estates
Elem. S.; Mr. Duane Lamkin. J. E. B. Stuart
H.S.; Mrs. Betty J. Long, Glenridge H.S. ; Mrs.
Emma M. Low, Westmore Elem. S.
Miss Gladys McCain, Williamsburg Jr. H.S.;
Dr. Henry N. Merritt, Northwood H.S. ; Miss
Mary Lou Munsey, Freedom Hill Elem. S.; Miss
Margaret R. Myerly, Laurel H.S. ; Mrs. Alma R.
Noble, Stanton Elem. S.; Mr. G. Franklin Padgett,
Jefferson Jr. H.S. ; Mrs. Marion H. E. Poole,
Monroe Elem. S.; Mr. Thomas L. Poore, Lafayette
El?m. S. ; Mr. Dale E. Potts, Thomas Jefferson
Jr. H.S.; Brother Robert, Ryken H.S.; Mr.
Chester Rockwell, George Mason Jr.-Sr. H.S.;
Mrs. Flora Ruffin, Banneker Jr. H.S. ; Mr. Peter
K. Schaffer, Herndon H.S.
Mr. Charles P. Scott, Wakefield H.S.; Mr.
Harold Sheridan, Lynbrook Elem. S. ; Mr. Robert
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
23
C. Sloop, Osbourn H.S. ; Mr. Robert L. S’mith,
Highland Elem. S.; Mr. Harold Stein, Mt. Rainier
Jr. H.S.; Miss Cecil Stiltz, Rock Creek Forest
Elem. S. ; Mrs. Veta M. Story, Woodley Hills
Elem. S.; Mrs. Dorothy Svirbely, Regina H.S’.;
Mrs. Esther Swire, Thomas Jefferson Elem. S. ;
Mr. Frank K. Thomson, Blandensburg Sr. H.S.;
Rev. Melvin Tracey, Mackin H.S.
Mrs. Rosalia J. Walters, Brightwood Elem. S. ;
Mr. Robert H. Weagly, Laurel H.S.; Mrs. Judith
S. Wescott, Macfarland Jr. H.S’.; Mr. Florent
P. Westfall, La Plata H.S.; Mr. Howard S.
White, Taft Jr. H.S. ; Mrs. Sylvia S. White, Jennie
Dean H.S. ; Mrs. Thelma Whitehead, Banneker
Jr. H.S.
JUNIOR ACADEMY
Reported by David Malin, Chairman
Publications Comm. WJAS
Ten members of the Junior Academy were
recently honored by the national Science Talent
Search. One of them, Samuel R. Friedman of
Woodrow Wilson High School, has been selected
as one of the 40 national finalists. As a finalist,
he will exhibit his research work in astronomy
at a Washington exhibition early in March and
will be eligible for scholarship awards.
Friedman’s research project was entitled “An
Analysis of Dark Markings On The North
Equatorial Belt of Saturn”. The markings were
observed primarily through the National Capital
Astronomers’ five-inch refractor telescope on the
Naval Observatory grounds and were analyzed for
spatial frequency. The resulting frequency curves
did not conform to theoretical expectation. Fried-
man theorizes that this may be due to optical
illusion, or to the pattern of reflection from the
planet’s rings. He is now planning further work
on this problem.
Other Junior Academy members who have
been selected for the Science Talent Search honors
group include the following high school seniors:
Patricia Page, Anacostia, Kenneth D. Taylor,
Anacostia, Steven Bollt, Bethesda-Chevy Chase,
Cathy Briggs, Bethesda-Chevy Chase, Michael
Brownstein, Northwestern, Frederick Moore,
Richard Montgomery, Thomas Pike, Washington
and Lee, Gilbert Fritz, Wakefield, and Frank
Taylor, McLean. The research work of these
winners will be published in the first issue of
the Journal of the Junior Academy.
The research work of these area winners varied
widely. For instance, Frederick Moore per-
formed experiments on thermo-electric conduc-
tion, while Cathy Briggs made a study of
Carotenoids and Vitamin A. Steve Bollt designed
computer circuits and Gilbert Fritz designed a
rocket system. Michael Brownstein presented a
seismic model study.
The annual joint meeting of the WJAS with
the Chemical Society of Washington was held
on February 11. The main speaker was Dr.
James Schulman of Naval Research Laboratory,
who spoke on “Crystals: A Study in Order and
Confusion”. Dr. S’chulman emphasized the
development of our concepts of the crystal lattice
on one hand, and such diversifying factors as
dislocations, interstitial vacancies and impurities
on the other.
During the program, the officers of the Junior
Academy summarized the activities of this Fall
and Winter. They stressed such achievements
as the Science Convention, the publication of
the Redbook, the Science Trips, and the closer
relationship with the school science clubs.
The Annual joint meeting of WJAS with the
Washington Academy of Sciences takes place on
March 19. At that time, the Junior Academy
will honor the Talent Search winners.
SCIENCE AND
DEVELOPMENT
A new physical sciences lecture hall at
the University of Maryland has been named
in honor of Nathan L. Drake, former head
of the Chemistry Department, who died last
October after 33 years of distinguished service
to the University. The building, adjacent to the
chemistry building at the north end of the
campus, was constructed under Dr. Drake’s
supervision at a cost of about $250,000. It has
a large lecture hall with a capacity of 360, a
smaller lecture hall, and a classroom.
Cieneia interamerieana is the name of a
new bimonthly periodical, of which Volume 1,
Number 1 has just been issued by the Panamer-
ican Union. This publication will carry news of
scientific accomplishments in countries of the
Western Hemisphere, as well as reports on
activities of the Panamerican Union in various
fields of science. The first issue contains a fea-
ture article by Bernardo Houssay, “Importancia
del adelanto cientifico para el desarrollo y prospe-
ridad de las Americas”; another on “El Oceano
— La ultima gran frontera”; news of the Or-
ganization of American States; and sundry re-
ports on hemispheric scientific activity.
The Smithsonian Institution has received
and placed on display a carbon specimen
received from French Equatorial Africa,
that weighs 740.25 carats and is the largest in
any U. S. museum, and possibly in the world.
Carbon, sometimes called carbonado or black
diamond, is an opaque, black, tough, compact
variety of diamond. It is unexcelled for diamond
rock drilling, but because of its scarcity is used
only where ordinary industrial diamonds cannot
operate. It is also useful in truing hard rubber
wheels and other difficult grinding operations.
24
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
Vice-Presidents of the Washington Academy of Sciences
Representing the Affiliated Societies
Acoustical Society of America
Institute of the Aeronautical Sciences
Anthropological Society of Washington
Society of American Bacteriologists
Biological Society of Washington
Society for Experimental Biology and Medicine
Botanical Society of Washington
Chemical Society of Washington
American Society of Civil Engineers
International Assn, for Dental Research
American Inst, of Electrical Engineers
Washington Society of Engineers
Entomological Society of Washington
Society of American Foresters
National Geographic Society
Geological Society of Washington
Helminthological Society of Washington
Columbia Historical Society
Insecticide Society of Washington
Amer. Society of Mechanical Engineers
Medical Society of the Dist. of Columbia
American Society for Metals
American Meteorological Society
Institute of Radio Engineers
American Nuclear Society, Washington Section
Philosophical Society of Washington
Society of American Military Engineers
Chairmen of Committees
Standing Committees
Executive Lawrence A. Wood, Nat. Bureau of Standards
Meetings Robert D. Stiehler, Nat. Bureau of Standards
Membership Wayne C. Hall, Naval Research Laboratory
Monographs Dean B. Cowie, Dept, of Terrestrial Magnetism
Awards for Scientific Achievement Archie I. Mahan, Applied Physics Laboratory
Grants-in-Aid for Research B. D. van Evera, George Washington University
Policy and Planning A. T. McPherson, Nat. Bureau of Standards
Encouragement of Science Talent Raymond J. Seeger, Nat. Science Foundation
Special Committees
By Laws
Library of Congress
Repres. on AAAS Council
Richard Cook
Not Named.
Regina Flannery
Mary Louise Robbins
Herbert Friedman
Kathryn Knowlton
Herbert C. Hanson
William J. Bailey
Not Named.
Gerhard Brauer
Robert D. Elbourn
Howard S. Rappleye
Harold H. Shepard
Not Named.
Alexander Wetmore
Carle Dane
Carlton M. Herman
U. S. Grant, III
Joseph Yuill
William G. Allen
Fred O. Coe
John A. Bennett
Morris Tepper
Robert Huntoon
Urner Liddel
Louis R. Maxwell
Not Named.
Harold H. Shepard, Dept, of Agriculture
John A. O’Keefe, Nat. Aeronautics & Space Admin.
Howard A. Meyerhoff, Scientific Manpower Commission
Return Postage Guaranteed.
Library of Arnold Arboretum WAS
22 Divinity Ave
Cambridge 38 Mass -
Volume 50 MARCH I960 No. 3
CONTENTS
Page
Chemistry, Food, and Civilization. ARCHIBALD T. McPHERSON __ 1
Other Academies. LAWRENCE A. WOOD 14
Engineers, Scientists, and Architects Day 16
Science in Washington
Scientists in the News 17
Affiliated Societies 20
Academy Activities 21
Joint Board 23
Junior Academy 24
Science and Development 24
SCIENCES
JOURNAL
of the
WASHINGTON
ACADEMY
of
Vol. 50 • No. 4
April, 1960
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Editor: Chester H. Page, National Bureau of Standards
Managing Editor: Ileen E. Stewart, National Science Foundation
Associate Editors
Frank L. Campbell, National Academy of Russell B. Stevens, Geo. Washington Univer-
Sciences sity
Samuel B. Detwiler, Jr., U.S. Dept, of Agri- John K. Taylor, National Bureau of Standards
culture
Contributors
Albert M. Stone, Applied Physics Laboratory
John A. O'Brien, Jr., Catholic University
Elliott B. Roberts, Coast & Geodetic Survey
Margaret D. Foster, Geological Survey
Russell B. Stevens, Geo. Washington University
Moddie D. Taylor, Howard University
Frank L. Campbell, NAS-NRC.
Alphonse F. Forziati, National Bureau of
Standards
Howard W. Bond, National Institutes of Health
Allen L. Alexander, Naval Research Laboratory
Victor R. Boswell, USD A, Beltsville
Harold R. Curran, USDA, Washington
William J. Bailey, University of Maryland
This Journal, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes: (1)
historical articles, critical reviews, and scholarly scientific articles, (2) original research, if the
paper, including illustrations, does not exceed 1500 words or the equivalent space, (3) notices of
meetings and proceedings of meetings of the Academy and its affiliated societies, and (4) regional
news items, including personal news, of interest to the entire membership. The Journal appears
eight times a year in January to May and October to December.
Manuscripts and original research papers should be sent to the Editor. They should
be typewritten, double-spaced, on good paper; footnotes and captions should be numbered and
submitted on a separate sheet. The Editor does not assume responsibility for the ideas expressed
by any author.
Contributions to the regular columns should be sent to the appropriate Associate
Editor whose name appears at the beginning of each column, or to one of the Contributors, listed
above. The deadline for news items is approximately three weeks in advance of publication date.
News items should be signed by the sender.
Proof of manuscripts will generally be sent to an author if he resides in the Washington
area and time allows. Otherwise the Editor will assume responsibility for seeing that copy is
followed.
Subscription rate $7.50 per yr. (U.S.)
Single issues $1.00 per copy.
Subscription Orders or requests for back numbers or volumes of the Journal, or copies of the
Proceedings, should be sent to the Washington Academy of Sciences, 1530 P St., N.W., Washing-
ton, D.C. Remittances should be made payable to “Washington Academy of Sciences”.
Claims for missing numbers will not be allowed if received more than 60 days after date
of mailing plus time normally required for postal delivery and claim. No claims will be allowed
because of failure to notify the Circulation Manager of a change of address.
Changes of address should be sent promptly to the Academy Office, 1530 P St., N.W.,
Washington, D. C. Such notification should include both old and new addresses and postal zone
number, if any.
Advertising rates may be obtained from the Managing Editor, Ileen E. Stewart, Office of
Science Information Service, National Science Foundation, Washington 25, D. C.
Reprint prices may also be obtained from the Managing Editor.
Prices of back numbers and volumes, of Monograph No. 1, “The Parasitic Cuckoos of
Africa” by Herbert Friedmann, Index to Vols. 1-40, and Proceedings may be obtained by writing
to the Academy Office.
Entered as second class matter at the Post Office, Washington, D. C. Printing by McArdle
Printing Co., Washington, D. C.
The Number System Based on Six in
The Proto* Finno-Ugric Language**
K. Laki
National Institute of Arthritis and Metabolic Diseases, National Institutes of
Health, Bethesda, Maryland (Present Address)
The concept of number and the skill of
counting developed well before recorded
history. It appears certain that even in
the most primitive times men had a sense
of “number”. (Number sense is not to be
confused with counting, which is prob-
ably of a later development and involves a
rather intricate mental process (1)).
A primitive number sense hardly greater
in scope than that possessed by many ani-
mals, was the nucleus from which the
number concept grew.
The next step was that an assortment
of vocal sounds evolved to denote
“couples”, “trios”, and perhaps a few other
“numerosities.”
Man’s ability to observe the different
j “numerosities” of things is probably just
as old as its ability to distinguish differ-
ent colors.
Our present number words very likely
originally referred to a set of concrete ob-
Ijects exhibiting the feature of being a
“couple”, a “trio”, and so on, although
these original connections are now lost
to us.
As man began to rely more and more
on language, the sounds replaced the
images for which they stood, and the
originally concrete objects gave way to the
abstract form of number words.
With the gradual evolution of the so-
ciety a simple counting became necessary.
* Proto is equivalent to primordial, primitive
and denotes a reconstructed, hypothetical stage of
the language.
** A brief account of the Finno-Ugric lan-
guage group is given in the appendix.
To create a counting process, the “nu-
merosities” represented by the number
words had to be arranged in an ordered
sequence.
When counting made it necessary, names
for larger numbers were compounded with
the original “simple” numbers and a
“base” by repeating the simple numbers in
combination with a base.
There is evidence that 2, 3, 4, and 5
served as primitive number bases.
The natives of Queensland count like:
one, two, two and one, two twos, much.
A tribe of Tierra del Fuego has its first
few numbers based on 3. Some South
African tribes use 4 as a base. The Api
language of the New Hebrides have their
numbers based on 5. Some of the natives of
Africa and Australia have independent
numbers for one and two and “composite”
numbers up to six; beyond this everything
is a “heap” (2).
The names of the cardinal numbers from
1 to 6 in the various Finno-Ugric (Fu)1
languages are similar. The Hungarian
I Hu) variants of these numbers are shown
in Table 1. These six numbers are of
great antiquity. They existed before the
Separation of the various Fu languages.
(The time of the separation of Fu unity
is usually placed in the II millenium B.C.).
1 Abbreviations used:
Ch = Cheremis, 1E= Indo-European, Fu = Finno-
Ugric, Fi=Finnish, Hu=Hungarian, La=Lap-
pish, Md = Mordvin, Os=Ostyak, Vg=Vogul.
Vt = Votyak, Zr=Zyrien.
Following the practice of Professor Collinder
(3), the Hungarian words will be written with
Hungarian orthography. For the rest of the
Finno-Ugric words a simplified spelling will be
followed.
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
1
There is no indication that these six Fu
cardinal numbers were developed with the
use of a base. However, the numbers
larger than six show interesting features,
which allows us to reconstruct that the
original five numbers were simple numbers
and the larger numbers were generated in
a number system based on six.
TABLE I
The First Stage in the Development
of the Finno-Ugric Numbers Is Illus-
trated With Present Day Hungarian
W ords
The simple numbers: (4)
egy = 1
ketto = 2
hdrom = 3
negy = 4
ot = 5
hat, mis, min = many, numerous, number,
six.
These numbers already existed before
the separation of the Finno-Ugric group
from the Samoyed.
At this stage there were developed five
simple numbers and words to designate
the concept: a lot, many, numerous . . .
It is not certain whether the words hat,
mis, min at this stage carried the spe-
cialized meaning of six. The variants of
hat appear as number six in the Finno-
Ugric languages but not in Samoyed.
According to Sauvageot (5) the Finno-
Ugric (-proto) people developed six
numbers.
The particle mis today appears in Hun-
garian only in composed numbers in the
shortened form: -nc, -c, -s (6). Similarly,
min appears in composed numbers in the
form: -van, -ven (6).
In the following I intend to discuss three
such features of the Fu numbers.
1. The Fu numbers 8 and 9 are not
simple numbers but composed numbers
(combination of a simple number and
a base) .
2. In religious folklore 7 and 6 show a
puzzling “equivalence” as if no difference
existed between them.
3. In building up the tens (combina-
tion of simple numbers and the base), the
base changes in some of the Fu languages
at 70, where a new base appears.
These features so far stood isolated and
resisted satisfactory explanation. Never-
theless, I believe that when these features
are examined in the proper light they
supply strong arguments for believing
that the original Fu numbers were built
up in the number system built on six.
There are many details that enter into
the picture I am presenting. In this dis-
cussion I selected only three features of the
Fu languages that, I believe, show7 quite
convincingly that the Fu people developed
their numbers in the system based on six.
To my knowledge this is the first time
that the invention and actual use of the
number system based on six is indicated.
There is, of course, nothing strange about
having a number system based on six.
People in various parts of the earth at
various times, as we have seen, developed
number systems that were based on vari-
ous numbers.2
In a system based on six we would have
2 It is interesting to speculate why these people
developed their numbers in the system based on
six.
According to Lenormant (7) six for these
people was a number “par excellence”. According
to Varga (8) the importance of six is related
to the observation, that for six days the moon
crescent represents an arc, but on the seventh
day it becomes a half disc.
This arc of the moon can be brought into
correlation with a counting process. Some tribes
in Northern Siberia have 13 months (9) in the
year and count them on the joints of the two arms
and the head. The first joint on the pointing
finger is one, the second joint two and so on.
The wrist is four, the elbow is five and the
shoulder six. The head represents seven, then
come the six joints again on the other arm.
In order to properly demonstrate the joints, there
must be a little bending at all the joints, thus
the finger, the hand and the arm form an arc,
which could represent the crescent moon on the
sixth day.
In this connection it is interesting to point
out that Monday in Hungarian is hetfd and means
the beginning of the week. Literally, the ex-
2
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
the names of the first five numbers. Then
a base would be selected and the larger
numbers would be compounded with the
simple numbers and with the base (Table
II).
TABLE II
Schematic Representation of How
Numbers May be Developed in a
System Based on Six
The capital letter “B” stands for the base.
For examples on how to carry out arith-
metical operations in the number system
based on six and for the use of the multi-
plication table, the reader is referred to:
Theory of Numbers by B. M. Stewart, The
MacMillan Company, New York. 1952.
In a number system based on six the
numbers 7, 8, 9, 10, and 11 would be
composed numbers; composed with a sim-
ple number and a base.
Our first inquiry is then to find out if
the numbers 7, 8, and 9 in the Fu lan-
guages were composed numbers com-
j pounded with a “base” and a “simple”
number.3
Let us look at the Hu numbers 8, 9, 20,
and 30. At first glance they do not look
“composed” (Table III), but students of
Fu languages discovered that they are
pression means: the head (=/o) of the week
( = het ). But since het also means number seven,
the expression could also mean: Seven is head.
It would be interesting to investigate whether
this latter connotation of hetfd is related to the
counting process just mentioned, where the head
represents the seventh number.
3 Today 7 is not a composed number in any
of the Fu languages, but a loan word, borrowed
from some Iranian tongue some 3000 years ago.
To show that 7 was originally a composed number
requires special considerations as will be shown
later.
composed. The letter -c in three of them
and the letter -s in one of them is the rem-
nant of the word -mis. The transforma-
tion of this particle takes place through
these stages: -mis, -ms, -ns, -s, - c , and
so on (6) .
TABLE III
The Composition of the Hungarian
Numbers, Nyolc, Kilenc, Husz,
Harmine (4)
2 -f- b Nyol — c (=8)
( Nyo — c )
2 X b Hu — sz (=20)
3 — j— b Kilen — c (=9)
3 X b Harmi — c (=30)
I Harmi-nc)
The original forms of these numbers
were then something like this: 8 =nyo-
mis, ( nyol-mis ) , 9 = kilen- mis, 20 = hu-
mis, 30 = harm-mis.
In the Zr and Md languages the com-
posed formation with - mis is still clearly
noticeable even today in numbers like:
8 = kikja-mis, 9 = ok-mis, similarly in
Md 9 = ko-mis (6).
These examples show that 8 and 9 are
indeed composed numbers, and the same
particle -mis is used in the composition,
that also serves as the base in the forma-
tion of the tens.
Let us now examine the first component
of these composed numbers. It is easy to
see that the Zr 8 and 20, & the Hu 20
are compounded with the simple number 2.
The words kik-, ki-, ko-, and hu- are pho-
netic variants of the Fu word for two.
This number had the form kikt or kakt
in the “proto” language (6). This form
later changed to forms such as kik- or
ket- or further to ko-, hu- by losing -t. No
doubt, then, that the structure of 20 and
8 in these examples has the pattern: “two-
base”.4
4 The Hu word for 8 does not contain the
above discussed form of the simple number 2.
Finno-Ugric linguists do not have satisfactory
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
3
The situation with 30 is also quite clear;
it has the structure “three-base”. (See
Hu harm-inc) (4).
Let us now turn to the Hu kilenc (= 9) .
We have seen that this is also a com-
posed number, where -c is the remnant of
the original base -mis. The first part of
the composition, kilen- may easily be
recognized as a variant of the words for
three * * * * 5 (Table IV). The Hu 9 thus has the
pattern : “three-base”.
TABLE IV
The Number “Three” in the Finno-
Ugric Languages (3,5)
(or nyol-) . I believe the simplest explanation is
that it is another word for two. This particle
appears in the construction of 8 in the three
Ugric languages only.
5 In the customary handling of kilenc (=9),
the -nc (rather than - c ) is considered to be the
contracted form of -mis. But for kile- no satis-
factory etymology has been found so far (4) .
If -nc rather than -c would be the remnant of the
base -mis then we could expect a variant of
kilenc to be kilec (in analogy to harminc, harmic
= 30). Such a variant, however, is not known.
This strongly indicates that only -c is the rem-
nant of the base, and -n is an integral part of
the word kilen-.
Since the Fu languages show both the “1” and
“r” as well as the back and front vowel variants
of 3 (Table IV) (10), the etymology proposed
here for the Hu kilen- is not objectionable on
linguistic grounds (11).
The reconstructed ancient forms of one ( = igt ,
ogt) and two ( =kikt , kakt) have both the front
and back vowel variants. It is not surprising that
3 also has the front and back vowel forms.
The Hu 8, 9, 20, and 30 have the same
base (originally mis). In the course of
time this base became reduced to essen-
tially one consonant, which almost fused
into the rest of the word.
We may summarize that in the Fu lan-
guages, 8 and 9 are composed numbers.
Eight is constructed with the simple num-
ber 2 and a base. Nine is also constructed
with a base, but the simple numbers of
the construction are now recognizable as
number 3 only in the Hu language.6
The important point here is, that these
numbers are composed numbers, whether
nine fits into the pattern of “three-base”
in all instances is not important. The im-
portant point is that at least one example
survived where the construction of nine
fits into the pattern.
These findings give strong arguments to
suggest that the Fu people generated their
numbers in the system based on six.
Six Simple Numbers
Depending on whether the operation be-
tween the simple numbers and the base is
6 While the Hu kilenc fits into the pattern
“three-base”, the Zr ok-mis for example, does not
fit.
The word -mis in ok-mis is generally accepted
to mean ten and ok- as a variant of number 1
(which is the “proto” language had the form
ogt. or igt) . And the expression ok-mis is ex-
plained to mean: “one- (minus) -ten”.
It is further pointed out that this formation
is analogous to the Latin duodeviginti (2 minus
20) and undeviginti (1 minus 20).
The idea of subtraction, however, is not indi-
cated in ok-mis, thus the literal translation is:
one-ten.
Most of the expressions today for 9 in the Fu
languages correspond to this “one-ten” pattern.
The likely explanation for the “one-ten” pattern
is that it is not original; that after the original
system based on six became forgotten and -mis
became identified to mean ten (originally it
simply meant number) , the pattern “two-base”
(=8) was interpreted to mean “two- (minus) -
ten”. Similarly, since at this stage three in com-
bination with ten (3-base=9) made no sense,
it was changed to the “one- (minus) -ten” pattern.
It is fortunate that such a “rational” re-evalua-
tion was not carried out in the Hu language and
4
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
addition or multiplication, we would get
the composed numbers of the “teens”
and the “tens”.
Probably the “tens” 12, 18, 24, 30, and
36 developed after the realization that
“base -f- base” means “two base”. With
this “two-base” * * 7 pattern (for twelve) 18,
24 ... . followed in an analogous man-
ner, probably in quick succession.
With the “tens” fully developed each
“number-base” combination acquired a
double value. The expression “five-base”,
for example, could mean “five and six”
( = 11), also “five times six” (=30).
See Table V.
Such a scheme must not necessarily
have given rise to confusion. The number
11 represents sufficiently smaller numer-
osity than 30. Undoubtedly, linguistic
differences also developed to avoid confu-
sion. In Hungarian, e.g., “three- ( and ) -
base” is kilen-c (9), and “three- (times) -
base” is harmi-c (=30, originally=18) .8
The appearance of these double values
as a result of the formation of the “tens”
may explain why number six in the Fu
language is a word different from the
base: in order to avoid confusion of the
composed six (one- (times) -six) with the
composed seven (one- (and) -six) , a new
word had to be selected for six, or perhaps
if six was already fully established by
long usage, a different base was selected
for the composed numbers. In either case
number six became different from, the
base.
thus kilenc retained in its original form, meaning
“three-six” ( = 9).
7 It should be pointed out, that in Hungarian
an expression such as “two base” has a structure
similar to the English “door knob”. The ex-
pression indicates that the “base” belongs to
“two”, that is, to a class of doubles. This is why
the noun following a cardinal number is not put
into plural in Hungarian.
8 In Hungarian the back vowel in word pairs
such as kever — 'kavar (=stir ) refers to a greater
intensity (12). It is then quite natural to expect
that harorn (back vowels) is used in the con-
struction of the “tens” and kilen (front vowels)
in the construction of the “teens”.
TABLE V
A Schematic Representation of the
Second Stage in the Development of
In this stage the composed numbers
(“teens” and “tens”) were formed with
the particle mis. It is very likely, that in
addition to mis, the particle min with its
variants also may have played a similar
role (see appendix).
The simplest method of adapting this
pattern to the decimal system is to take
over the group of “tens” to mean, 10, 20,
30 ... . 60. This can be done if 24
(=40) and 30 (=50) are sufficiently
different phonetically from 10 and 11. In
such a case 10 and 11 can be dropped
without fear that 40 and 50 can be con-
fused with 10 and 11. To form the tens
above 60, a new base has to be intro-
duced because 7 is already a composed
number (otherwise there would be a dupli-
cation of the same base) .
The Zyrien numbers come closest to ex-
hibiting this method of change with the
exception that the composed six (1-b) was
not taken over to represent ten.
Since in all the Fu languages the words
for number six are common, on the other
hand the base in the composed numbers
varies (6), it is very likely that the base
was adjusted to avoid the complications
of the composed six. Already in the
proto language there were several words
with the original meaning: “number”,
which apparently were used to represent
the base. See for example: Vg -lau, Ch
-lu (Ko-lu= 20) ; Zr -mis (ko-mis= 20)
(6) .
I believe this is a satisfactory explana-
tion for the fact that there are apparently
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
5
six simple numbers rather than five in the
Fu languages.
The Seven-Six Equivalence
With such a change the confusion in
counting was removed, but the fact still
remained that the composed seven con-
ceptually could refer to six. In the Fu
religion seven was a holy number, a
sacred number. There were seven chief
gods. In religious ceremonies repeating
certain acts seven times was an important
feature (12,13,14).
In a society where seven was a sacred
number, this “equivalence” of seven and
six must have brought far-reaching reper-
cussions. When a property of a god was
represented by the composed seven, this
also must have had the value of six. Thus
six must have entered into religious in-
cantations and folklore together with
seven. Since such religious patterns tend
to persist an extremely long time we may
expect to find remnants of such an “equi-
valence” of seven and six in the remnants
of religious folklore.
This expectation is fulfilled. In reli-
gious stories and incantations we find nu-
merous examples of this “equivalence” of
7 and 6.
Ancient religious incantations, espe-
cially in the Ostyak and Vogul language,
survived to the present day. In these in-
cantations we can observe the amazing
fact that seven is mentioned together with
six, and always in this order (not six,
seven) .
Karjalainen describes the religious of-
fering of an Ostyak tribe in 1898 to their
idols (15). In the incantation following
the sacrifice of a rooster there was the
following passage: “I am asking for a
black stag, for a brown stag from the
regions of the Seven Lands of the Six
Lands, from a branch of the Seven Rivers
of the Six Rivers”.
In the same year Karjalainen (15) ob-
served another religious ceremony of this
tribe performed at a forest holy place
devoted to the chief god called Sanke. The
prayer to this god started like this: “You
are the light of seven lights, Oh Sanke,
You are the light of six lights, Oh Sanke”.
These examples demonstrate that the
7-6 equivalence really existed. Let me
illustrate this relationship between seven
and six with some other examples from
Vogul mythology:
“The Seven Stallion, the Six Stallions
(branch) of the god Numi-Tarem” (16).
“The god Ajas of little Ob is a Hero of
Seven Arrows of Six Arrows” (17).
“Snowshoe Man made of seven Animal
Hides, six Animal Hides” (18). “Stone-
eyed Seven Demons, Iron-eyed Six Demons
of the Ural” (19).
This “equivalence” of 7 and 6 has been
quite puzzling to students of Fu folklore
and religion. Karjalainen called this
“equivalence” of 7 and 6 “poetische Zu-
sammenstellung” (poetical composition).
This “equivalence” of 7 and 6 in religious
incantations is the result of the number
system in which this group of people hap-
pened to develop their numbers. In fact,
this “equivalence” of 7 and 6 is a very
strong argument for the existence of the
number system based on six because it
shows that seven was a composed number,
composed with the simple number 1 and
the base.
It is interesting to point out that Lenor-
mant (7) as early as 1875 expressed the
opinion, that it should be possible to prove
that 7 in these languages is composed from
1 and 6. To my knowledge, however, he
never presented evidence to prove this
point.
The Change of Base at 70
The Fu people now count in the decimal
system, but from the manner they form
their numbers we can detect that an origi-
nal number system based on six at a later
date was converted into the decimal sys-
tem. This conversion also reveals to us
that seven must have been originally a
composed number.
Let us see how such a switch can be
made. In the system based on six the
composed numbers 1-Bi, 2-Bi, 3-Bi, 4-Bi.
and 5-Bi with the meaning 7, 8, 9, 10, and
6
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
Notice the doubly composed nature of
80 and 90.
When this system is converted to the
decimal system, the expression 2-Bi, 3-Bi,
and so on could be taken over to mean
20, 30, . . . 60. The difficulty starts with
70. Seven in the original system was
already a composed number; so were eight
and nine. It is inadmissible to compound
these numbers with the same base once
more in order to get 70, 80, and 90. The
solution for this problem is: (1) to com-
pound the numbers 7, 8, and 9 with a
newly selected base to get 70, 80, and 90,
or (2) to form the tens uniformly and
replace the base in 7, 8, and 9.
If all the Fu people selected the second
alternative for adapting their numbers to
the decimal system, we would have very
little chance to discover the original num-
ber system because as soon as the base
became identified to mean “ten”, the con-
struction 3-B = 9 would make no sense.
Thus in analogy to 8 (=2-B) to be in-
terpreted as “two- (minus) -ten”, nine would
be reinterpreted to mean “one- (minus) -
ten”.
If the first alternative was adopted, we
could expect better success. In this meth-
od the original base for the “teens” would
not be changed; thus these numbers would
have a better chance to survive in their
original linguistic form.
We should then direct our attention to
those languages that have the same base
in the construction of 8 and 9 that also
appears in 20 and 30.
Let us see then if any of the Fu lan-
guages exhibit the feature of changing
the base at 70 in the formation of the tens.
Indeed, this situation is clearly seen in
the Zyrien language. The tens are formed
with the base - mis (-min) including 60.
but at 70 a new base -das takes over (20).
A new base had to be selected because
7, 8, and 9 were already composed num-
bers constructed with the base “-mis”. If
the number 7 was not originally composed,
but was a simple number, the selection of
a new base would have taken place at 80.
The change at 70 is a definite indication
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
i
that 7 originally was a composed num-
ber,9 In appendix 1 an attempt is made
to reconstruct the original form of the
composed seven.
In the Finnish language the change to
the decimal system apparently has taken
place without a change of the base at 70.
Ten in Fi is kiimmen and it is used for
the formation of all the tens (6,21). Thus
the numbers in the Fi language show the
application of the second alternative for
changing the number system. We should
expect, then, that the base for the com-
posed 7, 8, and 9 would be different.
This is indeed the case. The base for
the composition of 8 and 9 is deksa-, an
IE loan word (6). It is interesting that
instead of borrowing 8 and 9 from the IE
language, these people took the trouble to
conserve the composed nature of these
numbers.10
Discussion
The main advantage of the theory pre-
sented here is that practically all the scat-
tered data about Fu numbers now appear
in a consistent picture.
9 A similar situation exists with the ancient
Gothic numbers. The tens are formed with two
different bases. The tens including 60 are formed
with the base tig jus (e.g. twa tigjus= 20), but
at 70 a new base tehund takes over. {Sieben
tehund= 70) .
The meaning of this change at 70 in the
Gothic numbers is still debated. It has been
suggested, that it reflects the influence of the
sexagesimal system (20).
10 In the number system based on six, the num-
bers 10 and 11 are also composed numbers. It
may be inferred from the pattern of the forma-
tion of the tens in the Hu language, that 10
originally was a composed number: The change of
base of the tens in this language takes place at
40. Number 30 ( harmi-nc ; three-base) is formed
with the base -mis (reduced to - nc ) , but number
40 ( negy-ven ; four-base) is formed with a new
base {-ven) .
The composed number “4-base” originally
must have meant 10 and 24. When the decimal
system was introduced, a new word (tiz) re-
placed the composed 10. But when the composed
ten was discarded, the composed 24 (meaning
40 in the decimal system) also had to be re-
modeled in order not to bring back the composed
10. This was achieved by employing a new base
in the formation of forty.
In this picture the seven and six “equiv-
alence” so puzzling to students of Fu
mythology, acquires a simple explanation
as being the result of the number system
in which the number names were formu-
lated.
The only linguistic problem raised in
this paper and for which a solution is
offered is the etymology of the Hu kilenc.
The rest of the arguments follow from the
properties of the number system based
on six.
I think the solution here offered for
kilenc is a straightforward one and the
probable reason why linguists have not
advanced it before is that the strength
with which other data lead to the postula-
tion of the number system based on six
has not been appreciated.
The few loan words Fu people have
borrowed to complement their already
existing numbers when the switch to the
decimal system was made, came from one
of the eastern branches of the IE lan-
guages.
An interesting feature of the change to
the decimal system is the conservatism
exhibited in these changes. Apparently
all effort was made by these peoples to
bring about the change in their own lin-
guistic domain with the least amount of
borrowing. And even when borrowing
is made, the loan word is used for special
purposes. For example, the Zr language
borrowed the old Iranian -das to serve as
the new base. But in Iranian -das(u)
(meaning 10) is never used for the forma-
tion of the tens (20).
The spectacle of minimum borrowing
and tenacious adherence to their own pat-
tern indicates that the change of the num-
ber system was carried out with the under-
standing of the properties of the number
systems.
Summary
It is argued in this paper that the names
of Finno-Ugric numbers originally wrere
built up not in the decimal system, but in
a number system based on six.
It is pointed out that in most of the
O
o
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
Finno-Ugric languages the names of the
numbers eight and nine are composed with
a “simple” number and a base. Arguments
are marshalled to show that originally
seven also must have been a composed
number, although at present it is a loan
word from some Arian language. The
change from the original number system
to the decimal system was made in such a
way that it also permits the conclusion that
the original number system was based
on six.
A definite success of the theory is that
from the properties of the number system
based on six, a rational explanation can be
given for the puzzling equality of “seven
and six” in Vogul and Ostyak mythology
and religion.
Appendix 1
An Attempt to Reconstruct One Form oj
the Original Fu Composed Seven
In this paper several arguments are
presented to show that in the Fu lan-
guages the original number seven was a
composed number. At present, however,
in all these languages seven is a loan word
borrowed from some IE (Arian) lan-
guage.
In the following an attempt is made to
reconstruct how the original Fu seven
may have looked. In this attempt it is
recalled that the original seven must have
had the same “one-base” pattern as the
composed six. In the switch to the deci-
mal system this composed six in some of
the Fu languages may have been taken
over to mean ten, thus preserving the
original form of seven. We have to look
then for a composed Fu ten in which the
presence of the base and number one is
still recognizable. The Md kemen and Fi
kiimmen- stand for ten and are used for
the formation of the tens. Already Lenor-
mant (7) surmised that kemen and kiim-
men are composed words formed from
•men and ke- or kii-. His identification of
the components, however, cannot be ac-
cepted in the light of progress made in Fu
linguistics since Lenormant’s time.
According to Collinder (25), also kiim-
men is a complex of two particles, where
kiim - probably means big. The second
part of the complex, -men has the same
etymology as the Hu -ven, Zr -pen, and
thus means ten or number.
Since in the original Fu number system
based on 6, the composed six was the
first member of the “tens”, it could have
been called the “big” unit. The particle
kiim- could thus indeed mean “big”. On
the other hand, ke- in the Md kemen could
very well be identified as a variant of
number one (e.g. Hu eg (arch.) Fi iih-)
Thus the original meaning of kemen could
have been “one ten”, a combination of
number one and the base. These consid-
erations argue strongly for identifying
kiimmen and kemen as the composed forms
of the original composed six (one-base).
And since the original form of the com-
posed seven was similar, the Fu kiimmen,
the Md kemen may thus have preserved
for us one of the original forms of the
composed seven.
Appendix 2
The Members of the Finno-Ugric Lan-
guage Group
The Hungarian (12,000,000), the Vogul
(5.000) and the Ostyak (22,000) people
form the Ugric branch of the Finno-Ugric
language group. The Vogul and the Ost-
yak called the Ob-Ugrians, live now along
the Ob river and its tributaries.
The Finnic sub-branch includes: Zyrien
(400.000) , Votyak (600,000), (called to-
gether the Permic sub-branch) ; the Fin-
nish (4,000,000), Estonian (1,400,000),
Cheremis (480,000), Mordvinian (1,500,-
000), Lappish (28,000) (the Volga-Finnic
sub-branch) .
The Samoyed (21,000) and the Finno-
LTgric group is often referred to as the
Uralic language group.
On the basis of the Indo-European loan
words, one has to accept that the Proto
Finno-Ugric people lived in the close
proximity of the Proto Indo-European
peoples. According to the most probable
theory, the Proto Indo-European people
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
9
lived in central Europe, their eastern
boundary reaching to the Russian steppes
(23). Accordingly, the Proto Finno-Ugric
people must have lived east of this re-
gion. very likely in the southern and west-
ern part of the Russian steppes (6). At
this time their neighbors were the Proto-
Samoyed and some yet unidentified Turkic
tribes.11
Again judging from the loan words, the
Proto Finno-Ugric people were still in one
group when the Arian influence started.
The separation of the Proto Indo-Euro-
pean group into the western and eastern
(Arian) branch is not known definitely,
but it appears that it occurred in the mid-
dle of the 4th millenium B.C. Apparently
as a result of this mass movement, the
Samoyed and the unidentified Turkic tribe
were separated from the Proto Finno-
Ugric people and were pushed to the east
of the Ural mountains.
The Finno-Ugric people themselves were
pushed to the western side of the Ural
mountains in the region of the Kama river.
From here on the Finno-Ugric people
lived on the northern fringes of the Rus-
sian steppe. An otherwise uninviting land
of vast forests, tundra, and marshes pro-
vided security for them. The countryside
itself was enough deterrent from penetra-
tion by Scythians (24) and other people
of the steppes. Nevertheless, as the testi-
mony of the loan words shows, there was
a contact between the various Indo-Euro-
pean people of the steppes and the Finno-
Ugric tribes.
The centuries at around 2000 B.C. were
again a period of immense migrations.
This was the period when the Indo-Euro-
peans penetrated to Asia Minor (Hittites)
and when about 1700 B.C. Indo-European
tribes reached as far as the Yenissei River.
Apparently in this great migratory move-
ment the Finno-Ugric group became split
into two groups: the Finno-Permic branch
and the Ugric branch. The exact time of
the separation cannot be given but it is
11 For a somewhat different interpretation of
the data see: Molnar, The Ancient History of the
Hungarians (23).
believed to have occurred sometime be-
tween 2000 and 1000 B.C.
REFERENCES
1. H. Eves. An introduction to the his-
tory of mathematics. Rinehart and
Comp., New York, 1955.
2. T. Dantzig. Number. The Language of
Science, New York, 1954.
3. B. Collinder. Fenno-Ugric Vocabulary.
Almqvist & Wiksells, Uppsala, 1955.
4. G. Barczi. Magyar Szofejto szotar.
Kiralyi Magyar Egyetemi Nyomda.
Budapest, 1941.
5. A. Sauvageot. Langues Ouraliennes.
In “Les Langues du Monde”, Paris.
1952.
6. J. Szinnyei. Finnish-Ugrische Sprach-
wissenschaft. G. I. Goschen’sche Ver-
handlung, Leipzig, 1910.
7. F. Lenormant. La langue primitive de
la Chaldee et les idiomes Touraniens.
Paris, 1875.
8. Zs. Varga. Otezer ev tavolabol. Dr.
Bertok Lajos Bizomanya. Debrecen.
1942.
9. P. Hunfalvy. A szamlalas modjai es
az ev honapjai, Ertekezes az akademia
nyelv es szeptudomanyi korebol XI.
Budapest, 1884.
10. J. Budenz: Magyar-Ugor osszehason-
lito szotar, 1873-81. Magyar Tudom-
anyos Akademia Konyvkiado Hivatala.
11. E. Bako. Personal communication. Li-
brary of Congress, Washington, D. C.
12. J. Lotz. Appendix C in the book by G.
Roheim on Hungarian and Vogul
Mythology (see ref. 13).
13. G. Roheim, Hungarian and Vogul
Mythology. J. J. Augustin Publisher.
Locust Valley, New York, 1954.
14. B. Munkacsi. Vogul Nepkoltesi Gyiijte-
meny. Vol. I (1892-1902), Vol. II.
pt. 1 (1910-1921), pt. 2 (1892-1921).
Vol. III. (1893, Vol. IV (1896). Buda-
pest.
15. K. F. Karjalainen. Ostjakkeja opi-
massa. Journ. de la Soc. F. ougr. XVII.
16. Ref. 14, III. 40
17. Ref. 14, II 4
10
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
18. Ref. 14, II, pt. 1, p. 0202
19. Ref. 14, II, pt. 1, p. 0263
20. F. Sommer. Zum Zahlwort. Verlag der
Bayerischen Akademie der Wissen-
schaften. Miinchen, 1951.
21. G. Orban: A finnugor nyelvek szam-
nevei, Budapest, 1932.
22. P. Thieme. 1958. The Indo-European
Language. Scientific American, 199, 63.
23. E. Molnar. A magyar nep ostortenete.
Szikra, Budapest, 1953.
Finite Groups Having Elements of
Every Possible Order1 * *
Charles Hobby, Howard Rumsey,
and Paul M. Weiehsel
California Institute of Technology
A finite group G is said to have elements
of every possible order if G contains an
element of order n whenever n is a proper
divisor of the order of G. This paper gives
a characterization of such groups. The
authors wish to thank Dr. Olga Taussky
Todd for suggesting this problem.
Theorem. A finite group G has ele-
ments of every possible order if, and only
if, G satisfies one of the folloiving condi-
tions.
(1) G is cyclic.
(2) G is a p -group containing a cyclic
subgroup of index p.
(3) G has order p«q for distinct primes
p and q. It contains only one q-Sylow sub-
group, and this subgroup is the commuta-
tor subgroup G' of G. Also, if S is a p-
Svlow subgroup of G, then S is cyclic, say
S = <b> , and bp is in the center of G.
Proof. If G satisfies one of (1), (2),
and (3) it is easy to see that G has an
element of every possible order.
We suppose henceforth that G has ele-
ments of every possible order. If G is a
1 This work was supported in part by a Na-
tional Science Foundation pre-doctoral fellow-
ship.
p-group, then (2) obviously holds. If G has
composite order the Sylow subgroups of G
must be cyclic. Therefore (1) holds if G
is abelian. It remains to show that (3)
holds if G is a non-abelian group of com-
posite order. Since G has cyclic Sylow sub-
groups it is known [1; page 145] that G
is generated by two elements a, b with de-
fining relations
am = bn = l, a-1 b 1 a b = ar_1, (n,m)
= (r-l,m) = 1, and rn=l modulo m.
Thus G' = < a > , the cyclic group gen-
erated by a, and every element of G can
be written as a sb ' for positive integers s
and t. A computation shows that asbt=
b^^8, and it follows by induction that
(I) (asbt)k = btkau where u = srt(rtk — 1)/
(r*— 1).
We denote the order of an element g
of G by |g|. If x = asbt and |x|=nm/q
where q is a prime dividing m, then (n,t)
= 1 since x has order n modulo <a>.
Therefore G is generated by a and b\ It
follows from a-1b-t a bt = art_1 that G' =
<art_1>. Thus (D— 1, m) = l. Let-
ting k = n in (I), we have xn=(asbt)n
= 1 since bn = am = l and rn=l mod-
ulo m. Therefore nm/q=|x| divides n,
and hence m = q.
Suppose now that p is a prime dividing
n and pick y = asbt such that |y|=nq/p.
Then y has order n/p modulo <a> =G'.
Therefore t = pti where (ti,n) = l. If
(D— l,q) = l then, using (I), we see that
yn/p= (asbt)n/p= 1, which is impossible
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
11
lor y of order nq/p. Thus q divides r1— 1,
and it follows from aq = 1 that a_1b_ta b*
= ar‘~* = l. That is, bt = brTl is in the
center of G. But (ti,n) = l, hence <bp>
= <bptl> and <bp> is in the center of
G. It only remains to show that n is a
power of p. For <b> is then a cyclic
p-Sylow subgroup of G with bp in the
center of G, and the theorem will follow
since all p-Sylow subgroups of G are
isomorphic.
Suppose pi divides n, where px is a
prime distinct from p. Then a pi-Sylow
subgroup of G is contained in <bp> , and
hence is in the center of G. Repeating the
above argument for pi instead of p we see
that a p-Sylow subgroup of G is also in the
center of G. Since this is true for every
prime dividing n, it follows that b is in the
center of G if n is not a power of p. But
b is not in the center of the nonabelian
group G. This completes the proof.
REFERENCE
1. Zassenhaus, H. The theory of groups,
(trans.) New York, Chelsea, 1949.
Journal of the Washington
Academy of Sciences
Chester H. Page, Editor
In statistics, a sample of four is too
small to permit generalizations. In jour-
nalism, the first four issues of a new or
modified journal may be enough to indi-
cate what is to come, if the reader does
not draw too specific a picture. The cur-
rent feature article, however, differs suf-
ficiently from the previous three to indi-
cate the broad range of the Journal
coverage, and at the same time to indicate
its coherence.
Our aim is to present original research
that stimulates thought, and general
scholarly articles of scientific interest. The
Journal should be published for the benefit
of its readers, not for the convenience of
its authors. Unfortunately, budget con-
siderations make it impossible to publish
a large journal, without additional sup-
port. The editorial board has therefore
decided that short (1500 words) research
papers are preferred, and that eight pages
is the normal limit on longer papers. On
the other hand, many worthwhile papers
are longer than eight pages and would
suffer unduly from being cut. This dilemma
can be resolved by a simple ethical con-
sideration: The results of research have
little value until they are published.
The cost of publication is part of the
cost of doing research. This fundamental
principle is nowadays accepted almost uni-
versally. The Academy therefore expects
that the Journal page charges will be
honored by all institutions that have legal
authority to meet this moral obligation —
the Academy cannot afford to subsidize
the broad research programs of the Wash-
ington Area.
Since some institutions are “poverty-
stricken”, and some research is financed
by individual authors, the Academy will in
such cases continue to subsidize publica-
tion, but not in excess of eight pages per
article. Longer papers will not be accepted
unless page charges are to be honored,
and these longer papers will carry a foot-
note to the effect that the excess printing
cost has not been at the expense of the
Academy.
By holding the line on the moral and
fiscal issues involved, your editors feel
that we can maintain a journal in which
the membership can take pride.
12
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
Science in
SCIENTISTS IN THE NEWS
This column will present brief items concern-
ing the activities of members of the Academy.
Such items may include notices of talks given,
important conferences or visits, promotions,
awards, election to membership or office in sci-
entific and technical societies, appointment to
technical committees, civic activities, and mar-
riages, births, and other family news. Formal
contributors are being assigned for the systematic
collection of news at institutions employing con-
siderable numbers of Academy members (see
list on masthead) . However, for the bulk of the
membership, we must rely on individuals to
send us news concerning themselves and their
friends. Contributions may be addressed to
S. B. Detwiler, Jr., Associate Editor, 2605 S.
8th St., Arlington, Va.
APPLIED PHYSICS LABORATORY
Ralph E. Gibson participated in the Brook-
ings Institution’s Fourth Science Conference on
February 11 at Williamsburg. Dr. Gibson and
Irving H. Siegel, economist of the Council of
Economic Advisors, were the speakers at that
meeting on the topic, “Science, Technologv, and
Economic Growth.”
On March 9, Dr. Gibson received the fourth
annual Captain Robert Dexter Conrad Award
“for outstanding contributions to the Depart-
ment of the Navy in the development of solid
rocket propellants and guided missiles.” This
is the highest scientific achievement award granted
by the Navy.
Albert M. Stone addressed a meeting of the
Organization of Professional Employees of the
Department of Agriculture on February 24. His
topic was “APL, Guided Missiles and Their De-
scendants.”
GEOLOGICAL SURVEY
William W. Rubey presented the 1960 Silli-
man Lectures at Yale University on April 6, 7,
12, and 14. His subject was, “The Origin of the
Continental Masses.”
Victor T. Stringfield will serve as chair-
man of the Resolutions Committee of the Ameri-
can Association of Petroleum Geologists, at its
annual meeting in Atlantic City, April 25-28.
HARRIS RESEARCH LABORATORIES
On March 15, in New York, ASTM Committee
D-12 (Soaps and Detergents) presented its an-
nual award to Anthony M. Schwartz for his con-
tributions to the science of detergents.
Lyman Fourt attended a meeting of ASTM
Committee D-12 (Textiles) in New York, March
Washington
1-3, and served as chairman of Subcommittee B-l
on Chemical and Performance Test Methods.
On March 11, Dr. Fourt presented a paper
entitled “Comfort in Textiles in Relation to
Simultaneous Transfer of Heat and Moisture” at
the Fiber Society meeting in New Orleans.
Leo Mandelkern of NBS visited the Labora-
tories recently to present a seminar on “Contractile
Mechanisms in Fibrous Polymers.”
GEORGE WASHINGTON UNIVERSITY
Dean M. A. Mason, School of Engineering,
The George Washington University was chairman
of an advisory group reporting to the Metro-
politan Washington Board of Trade on graduate
education needs in the Washington area. The re-
port will be made public by the Board of Trade.
HOWARD UNIVERSITY
Lloyd N. Ferguson, professor and head of the
Chemistry Department, spoke on “Physicochemical
Studies on the Sense of Taste” before the Sus-
quehanna Valley Section of the American Chem-
ical Society on March 9. The meeting was held
at Bucknell University, in Lewisburg, Pa.
Dr. Ferguson was also a participant at the an-
nual National Conference on Higher Educa-
tion held in Chicago, March 6-9; the conference
theme was “Platform for Higher Education : Guide
Lines for the Sixties.” In addition, Dr. Ferguson
visited Providence College March 23-25, under the
American Chemical Society Visiting Scientist Pro-
gram; here he gave a public lecture on “Careers
in Science,” gave a seminar talk on “The Spectra
and Basicities of Isomeric Sweet and Tasteless
m-Nitroanilines,” and held several class meetings
of the elementary organic class.
Lewis K. Downing, dean of the School of En-
gineering and Architecture, has been elected sec-
retary-treasurer of the Joint Board on Science
Education. Dean Downing also has been elected
chairman of the Civil Engineering Division of the
American Society for Engineering Education for
1959-60. In the latter capacity, Dean Downing
will organize a panel composed of representatives
of the engineering education committees of various
professional engineering societies, which will ap-
pear on the program of the 58th annual meeting
of ASEE, next June 20-24 at Purdue University.
NATIONAL BUREAU OF STANDARDS
Allen V. Astin, director of the Bureau, was
selected by the National Civil Service League
as one of the top ten career employees in the
Federal civil service for 1960. The League, a
non-partisan citizens’ organization for better gov-
ernment through better personnel, honored the
award winners at a dinner held here on March
15.
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
13
William T. Sweeney received the Souder
Award of the Dental Materials Group of the In-
ternational Association for Dental Research, at
its meeting in Chicago on March 19. The award
was established by the Association in honor of
Wilmer Souder for his pioneering efforts and out-
standing scientific accomplishments in dental ma-
terials research. It represents the highest honor
conferred by their colleagues upon scientists who.
through achievement in the field of dental ma-
terials research, bring about outstanding advances
in dental health.
Lewis N. Branscomb has been appointed chief
of a new scientific division — Atomic Physics — at
NBS. Atomic Physics was created by partitioning
the Atomic and Radiation Physics Division; the
other half of the old division will be renamed
the Radiation Physics Division, and Lauriston S.
Taylor will continue as its chief. Research areas
of the new division will include precise determina-
tion of atomic constants and other physical prop-
erties associated with free electrons, atoms, ions,
and molecules.
Gerhard M. Brauer and George C. Paffen-
barger presented papers on “Synthesis of Eugenol
Isomers” and “Dimensional Changes in Artificial
Dentures on Drying, Wetting, and Heating in Wa-
ter,” respectively, at meetings of the Interna-
tional Association for Dental Research held in
Chicago March 17-20.
Marion M. Davis served as a member of a
panel that discussed “Women Scholars at Work”
before a meeting of the Washington Branch, Amer-
ican Association of University Women, on March
5.
John K. Taylor spoke on “High Precision
Coulometry” before the Howard University chem-
ical seminar on March 10.
Russell W. Mebs, of the Mechanical Metal-
lurgy Section, received the Burgess Memorial
Award from the Washington Chapter of the
American Society for Metals, at a banquet given
on February 8. The award, named in honor of the
late George K. Burgess, former director of NBS.
was presented to Dr. Mebs “in recognition of his
outstanding representation of the metallurgical
profession in local educational and engineering
activities, and his application of mathematical
principles to metallurgical research.”
TARIFF COMMISSION
Frank Gonet, the Commission’s authority on
coal-tar intermediates and dyes, has been made
chief of the Chemical Division, succeeding the
late James H. Hibben. The Chemical Division pre-
pares the Commission’s annual report on “Imports
of Coal-Tar Products” and the preliminary and
annual reports on “Synthetic Organic Chemicals,
U.S. Production and Sales.”
USDA, BELTSVILLE
Dewey Stewart was elected president of the
American Society of Sugar Beet Technologists at
its Eleventh General Meeting, held recently in h
Salt Lake City. The Society has more than a
thousand members, of whom about half were
present at the four-day meeting.
Clarence H. Hoffmann of the Entomology Re- f-
search Division, Agricultural Research Service,
gave two talks at the University of New Hamp
shire on March 10-11. In connection with a Uni-
versity-sponsored series of lectures on “Environ- »
mental Health in Relation to Man,” Dr. Hoffmann
gave the initial public address on the subject. 3
“The Effects of Pesticides on Man and Animals.”
He also spoke at a seminar on eradication of the j
screw-worm by irradiation, and possibilities of
using this method against other insects.
William B. Ennis was among the participants j
in a symposium on “The Nature and Fate of
Chemicals Applied to Soils, Plants, and Animals,” :
sponsored by the Farm Research group, Agricul-
tural Research Service, at Beltsville on April
27-29.
USDA, WASHINGTON
Hazel K. Stiebeling attended the annual meet-
ing of the National Institute of Animal Agricul
ture, held April 4-5 at Purdue University. Dr
Stiebeling spoke on “The Consumer’s Concern
about Chemicals and Food.”
Kenneth W. Parker has been appointed to
represent the Forest Service on the NAS-NRC ;
Advisory Committee for Arid Zone Research. Dr
Parker also has been invited to present a paper.
“Principles of Grazing Management as Related
to Vegetation Conditions and Soil Stability,” at
the Fifth World Forestry Congress, to be held i
in Seattle from August 29 to September 10.
Harold R. Curren and Arjen Tamsma are
authors of a paper, “Some Observations on the
Ultraviolet Irradiation of Milk (Centrifilmer Proc
ess) with Emphasis upon Organoleptic Effects and
Sporocidal Efficiency,” that appeared in /. Dair\ i
Sci. 43, 410 (1960)
Birth: To Dr. and Mrs. Floyd E. Kurtz, a
daughter, Martha Anne, on February 26.
UNIVERSITY OF MARYLAND
Ronald Bamford, dean of the University’s
Graduate School, was recently appointed a mem
ber of the Board of Natural Resources for the
State of Maryland. A professor of botany at the
University since 1931, Dean Bamford specialized
in cytology, chromosomes, and the behavior of
cells in toxic solutions. He was appointed to the
remainder of a four-year term which began in
June, 1958.
John S. Toll, professor and chairman of the
Physics Department, spoke on “Where We Stand
in Space” at the recent annual banquet of Phi
Kappa Phi, honorary scholastic fraternity. Dr.
Toll’s speech was not directed to a comparison
of United States and Russian achievements, but
rather to recent scientific theories and develop-
14
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
ments, including the theory of relativity and the
quantum theory, and their application to space
phenomena. Eventually, Dr. Toll said, intensive
study of gravitational fields may reveal greater
insieht into our universe.
Charles E. White and Frank Cuttitta pre-
sented a paper, “A Fluorometric Study of the
Magnesium Bissalicylidene — Ethylenediamine
System,” at the Pittsburgh Conference on Analyt-
ical Chemistry and Applied Spectroscopy, on
March 4.
“Experimental Celestial Mechanics” was the
title of a recent talk by S. Fred Singer at the
first of a series of Arts and Sciences convocations.
Tracing the development of this new science
over the past 10 years. Dr. Singer pointed to
three important discoveries: There are two belts
of intense radiation around the earth; the atmos-
phere around the earth extends to 40,000 miles;
at 200 miles from the earth, the density of the
atmosphere is 15 times greater than previously
expected.
DEATHS
Beno Gutenberg, former director of the Seis-
mological Laboratory at Pasadena, Calif., on Jan
uary 25.
Harley H. Bartlett, botanist, of Ann Arbor,
Mich., on February 21. Dr. Bartlett was elected to
non-resident membership in 1915.
AFFILIATED SOCIETIES
Acoustical Society of America, Washington
Chapter
President: Harold Burris-Meyer. Secretary:
Gerald J. Franz (Taylor Model Basin)
Meetings on third Monday of month during the
academic year, usually at Gallaudet College.
On March 21 Fred Schloss presented a lec-
ture demonstration on the Measurement of
Mechanical Impedance, with special reference to
development of instruments to evaluate isolation
mounts used by the U. S. Navy. The Chairman ap
pointed a committee of three persons to coordi-
nate Chapter participation in judging the D. C.
Area Science Fair and to determine an ap-
propriate award for possible winners in acoustics.
April 26 is planned as a combined meeting with
the AIA and the Audio Group of IRE to discuss
architectural acoustics, at a time and place yet
to be determined.
American Institute of Electrical Engineers.
Washington Section
Chairman: Wade M. Edmunds (REA). Secretary
Treasurer: Irvin L. Cooter (NBS)
Meetings in PEPCO Auditorium, 10th and E.
N.W.
The General Meeting for March 8 was the
Eighteenth Annual Student night, with D. L,
Greene, Vice-President of the Middle Eastern
District as guest of the section. Awards were
presented to Bernard Zempolich, David Loker-
son, Earl Folsom and Earl Channell, Student
Branch members, and a certificate of appreciation
to Professor L. J. Hodgins, of the University of
Maryland.
April 5, General Meeting, presented Dr. W. S.
Gillam, Office of Saline Waters, Department of
the Interior, on “Demineralization of Saline Wa-
ters.” Election of officers for the coming year
took place at this meeting.
April 26, Technical Meeting, “Power and Com-
munications Problems in the Design and Con-
struction of Dulles International Airport,” Her-
bert H. Howell, Federal Aviation Agency. Tech-
nical papers selected for annual awards will
be presented at this meeting.
American Meteorological Society, District of
Columbia Branch
President: Jack C. Thompson (WB). Secretary:
Raymond McGough (USN Hydro. Off.)
Meetings at NAS-NRC, 2101 Constitution Ave.,
N.W. on 3rd Wednesday
The 184th National Meeting of the American
Meteorological Society will be held in Washing-
ton, at the National Academy of Sciences build-
ing, April 27-30. The program will include a
number of general sessions on satellite meteor-
ology, wind stress over the oceans, spherics, and
thunderstorm electricity, Fred D. White (NSF)
is program chairman.
American Society For Metals, Washington
Chapter
President: William L. Holshouser (NBS). Secre-
tary: Glen W. Geil (NBS)
The Chapter conducted an educational course
on “Metallurgical Applications of Electrochem-
istry”, on five successive Wednesday evenings,
January 27-February 24.
The Burgess Memorial Award was presented,
February 8, to Russell W. Mebs, National Bu-
reau of Standards.
April 18, Walter L. Finlay, Crucible Steel Com-
pany, will speak on “Titanium and Competitive
Stainless Steels.”
May 16, National Officers Night; National
President Walter Crafts will speak on “Facing
the Productivity Challenge; Men and Metals of
the Next Decade.” This meeting will be held
at the Officers Mess, U. S. Naval Weapons Plant.
The chapter will provide 8-10 members for
judging papers entered in the Science Achieve-
ment Awards Program of the American Society
for Metals, conducted by the Future Scientists
of America Foundation, NSTA. Judging will take
place in April.
American Society of Civil Engineers, Nation-
al Capital Section
President: W. Orme Hiltabidle. Secretary: Daniel
P. Jenny
At the February 9 meeting, David Auld, Direc-
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
15
tor, D. C. Department of Sanitary Engineering,
dealt with the water supply and sanitary prob-
lems of metropolitan Washington.
The Annual Dinner was held on March 1, at
the Shoreham Hotel, where William L. Slayton,
Webb and Knapp International, spoke on “The
Redeveloper Looks at Redevelopment,” from the
background of his association with the Southwest
Washington program.
American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
Washington Section
Chairman: Alfred F. Bochenek. Secretary: Virgil
L. Pence
March 24, Student Night, featured technical pa-
pers by four students in mechanical engineering
from local universities, competing for section
cash awards, and gaining experience toward re-
gional and national ASME student competition.
April 7, Willard Fazar, Special Projects Office,
U. S. Navy, presented the management tech-
nique developed and successfully employed for
the Polaris weapon system.
April 20, Annual Banquet, Terrace Room, Ar-
lington Towers.
May 12, “Air Pad Surface Vehicle.”
May 26, Alfred Keil, “Response of Ships to
Underwater Explosions.”
Botanical Society of Washington
President: Harold T. Cook (USDA). Correspond-
ing Secretary: Muriel J. O’Brien (USDA)
Meetings on first Tuesday, Powell Auditorium.
8:00 P.M.
April 5, Russell L. Steere (USDA), discussed
“Recent Advances in Biology: Electron Micros-
copy and Nucleic Acid Studies.”
May meeting. Annual Dinner.
Chemical Society of Washington
President: Allen L. Alexander (NRL). Secretary.
John L. Torgesen (NBS).
The Board of Managers met on March 1 at
the new ACS building, with President A. L.
Alexander presiding. The minutes of the two
previous meetings were corrected and approved.
Chairman Wilkins Reeve of the Awards Com-
mittee reported that about 20 members of the
Society were eligible for various American Chem-
ical Society and AAAS awards, and that efforts
were being made to encourage their nomination
by individual members.
A suggestion by several members, that the
working name of the Society (Washington Section
of the ACS) be changed to the National Capital
Section, was referred to the Bylaws Committee for
consideration.
Chairman P. K. Reily of the Professional Rela-
tions & Status Committee reported that the
“PR&S Notes” column is expected to appear in
The Capital Chemist regularly throughout the
year; that the Committee would like to provide a
PR&S subject and speaker for one of the gen-
eral meetings during the coming year; that the
Committee expects to compile a register of re-
tired chemists in the area, many of whom may be
available for consulting activities: and that chem-
istry departments of local universities are being
invited to participate in PR&S seminars with
senior students.
President-elect W. J. Bailey outlined plans for
the Meeting-in-Miniature which is to be held at
the University of Maryland on May 6, jointly
with the ACS Maryland Section.
Chairman R. P. Maickel of the Public Rela-
tions Committee reported that the survey on use
of academic titles by newspapers was to be pub-
lished in a forthcoming issue of C&E News; and
that efforts were being made to conduct a pub-
licity program in the smaller newspapers of the
Washington area, on civic and other activities
of CSW members.
Letters were read from a CSW member, com-
menting on clannishness, lack of hospitality, and
unfriendliness at CSW meetings, and from E. S.
Pierce, on ways to increase attendance at meet-
ings. After considerable discussion, the Board
agreed to Dr. Pierce’s suggestion that an ad hoc
committee to make a thorough study of the prob-
lem of member interest and report back on pos-
sible solutions by next June.
Columbia Historical Society
President: Maj.-Gen. U. S. Grant, 3rd. Executive
Secretary: John T. Gibbs
April 14, Heurich Mansion, Paul Oehser spoke
on the “History of the Cosmos Club.”
May 14, Heurich Mansion, Mrs. Frank P. How-
ard will discuss “The Friday Morning Music Club,
a Record of 75 Years”
May 22, at Fort Myer Museum and Reviewing
Area, a program on “History of Fort Myer,” will
be presented.
A group of five program planners seeking ma-
terial on how various charitable enterprises were
handled in the past as basis of a projected 1960
UGF television program have found much data
in the Society records.
Entomological Society of \Uashington
President: Paul W. Oman (USDA). Correspond-
ing Secretary: Paul Woke, Recording Secretary:
Ernestine B. Thurman (NIH)
Meetings in Room 43, USNM, 10th and Con-
stitution Avenue, N.W. on first Thursday.
April 7, “Nesting Habits of Some Southwest-
ern Wasps and Bees,” Karl Krombein (USDA) :
"Insect Survey and Detection Operation — Past
and Present,” Louis G. Davis, (USDA).
Insecticide Society of Washington
Chairman: Milton S. Schechter (Ag. Res. Center).
Secretary-Treasurer : James F. Cooper (USDA)
March 16 meeting, Symons Hall at the Uni-
versity of Maryland, presented Roy J. Barker,
Insect Physiology Laboratory, USDA, on “Isotope
Effects as a Tool in Toxicology,” and Hamilton
16
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
Laudani, Stored Product Insects Branch, USDA,
on “Development of Insect Resistant Packages.”
Institute of Radio Engineers, Washington
Section
Chairman: John Durkovic. Secretary: Ben Melton
At the February 13 annual banquet of the Sec-
tion, Ronald L. MacFarlan, 1960 IRE President,
reviewed the award structure of the Institute.
Three members of the Section, Stuart L. Bailey.
Francis H. Engel, and Leland D. Whitelock, were
presented with “Patron Awards” for distinguished
service. John I. Bohnert for his “contributions
to the field of microwave antennas,” and Henry
R. Reed, for his “contributions to engineering ed-
ucation,” received “Fellow Awards.” National
and Section Awards were made to ten senior
radio engineering students for outstanding aca-
demic records and IRE student branch activities,
as follows: National Awards — Roger W. Bopp,
Bernard Zempolich, Leon Sibul, Alvin R. Robin-
son, and Earl C. Channell; Section Awards —
Robert W. Hamlin, John D. Watson, Richard L.
Potterton, R. Alfred Whiting, and William L.
Soper.
Medical Society of the District of Columbia
President: Dr. Victor Alfaro. Secretary: Theodore
Wiprud
“Current Medical Events”, published monthly
by the Society, lists an impressive number of
meetings of interest to medical persons and groups.
Philosophical Society of Washington
President: Louis R. Maxwell (Nav. Ord. Lab.).
Secretary: F. N. Frenkiel (Taylor Mod. Basin)
Meetings on alternate Fridays, Powell Auditorium,
8:15 P.M.
March 4, Ralph A. Alpher, G. E. Research
Laboratory, spoke on “Experiments in Magneto-
Fluid Dynamics.”
March 18, Gordon M. Tomkins, NIH, presented
a paper on “Principles of Molecular Biology.”
April 8, Erwin M. Mueller, Pennsylvania State
Univ., spoke about “Field Ion Microscopy.”
April 22, Elmer Hutchisson, Amer. Institute
of Physics, will discuss “Can We Merge Our
Two Cultures?”
Society for Experimental Biology and
Medicine, District of Columbia Section
President: George A. Hottle (NIH). Secretary:
Edwin P. Laug (FDA)
April 7, Hall A, G.W.U. School of Medicine,
1335 G Street. Richard S. Yamamoto (NIH),
‘-Studies on Dietary Obese Rates”; James H. Rust,
Jr., Walter Reed, “Effects of Radiation Injury
on Plague Infection”; Marian Webster and J. V.
Pierce (NIH), “Studies on the Hypotensive En-
zyme, Callicrein”; and Eugene Streicher and
Gilbert D. Press, NIH, “Measurement of Extracel-
lular Space of Rat Brain.”
Society of American Bacteriologists, Wash-
ington Branch
President: Mary L. Robbins (G.W.U.) . Secretary:
Eliz. J. Oswald (FDA)
March 22, a program of three technical pa-
pers, on microbial interactions (Eddie C. S. Chan
and Michael J. Pelczar, Jr., Univ. of Maryland) ;
virus-caused pancreatic necrosis of trout (Kenneth
E. Wolf, S. F. Snieszko, and C. E. Dunbar, Fish
and Wildlife Serv.) and studies on cholera in
South-East Asia (Capt. Eugene Gangarosa, Wal-
ter Reed) .
The 64th Annual Meeting of the national society
will be held in Washington in 1964, with the
Washington Branch as hosts; Roy C. Dawson,
FAO, will serve as chairman of the Committee
on Local Arrangements.
Society of American Foresters, Washington
Section
President: James M. Owens (Commerce). Sec-
retary: Matt C. Huppuch (Dept, of Army)
An Information Bulletin and folder, cover-
ing the Fifth World Forestry Congress is now
available. Inquiries concerning the Congress
should be addressed to I. T. Haig, c/o Office of
International Conferences, Department of State.
The Section has established a Seed Certification
Committee, under the chairmanship of Harry A.
Fowells, U. S. Forest Service, assisted by Ralph
Hodges, Nat. Lumber Manufacturers Assoc., and
Roland Rotty, U. S. Forest Service.
The Section is also interested in cooperating
with the National Arboretum in initiating and
stocking a living repository for special and un-
usual trees, shrubs and other plants, and has
formulated a suggested program leading to that
objective.
ACADEMY ACTIVITIES
Board of Managers, March Meeting
These notes are intended to outline briefly,
for the information of the membership, the prin-
cipal actions taken at Board meetings. They are
not the official Minutes as prepared by the Secre-
tary.— Ed.
The Board of Managers held its 527th meet-
ing on March 15 at NBS, with President Wood
presiding. The Minutes of the 526th meeting
were amended and approved.
Dr. Wood announced the appointment of Archie
I. Mahan as chairman of the Committee on
Awards for Scientific Achievement, and of Archi-
bald T. McPherson as chairman of the Com-
mittee on Policy and Planning.
Chairman Stiehler of the Meetings Committee
reported on speakers for the meetings of March 17
(Louis H. Bean, on “Science and the Art of Pre-
dicting”) ; April 21 (still open) ; and May 19
(Dr. Baker of the Bell Telephone Laboratories).
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
17
Chairman Hall of the Membership Committee
gave the First Reading of three candidates for
membership.
Chairman Schubert of the Committee on En-
couragement of Science Talent reminded the
Board that certificates of merit would be awarded
at the meeting of March 17 to 25 students — mem-
bers of the Junior Academy — and that special
recognition would be given to the teachers who
had most influenced these students to take up
careers in science. He hoped that in future, the
Committee or the Junior Academy might be able
to do something more in recognition of the
teachers.
Dr. Schubert next discussed the letter recently
addressed to the Academy by the Society of Amer-
ican Bacteriologists, suggesting the develop-
ment of improved rules for Science Fair exhibits,
which had been referred at the last Board meet-
ing to Dr. Schubert’s Committee for comment.
He indicated that the letter had been distributed
to Committee members and would be given serious
consideration; also, he felt that the Junior Acad-
emy and the Joint Board on Science Education
likewise would be seriously concerned with the
letter.
Dr. Wood asked Dr. Robbins to discuss the
recent letter from the Society of American Bac-
teriologists, suggesting the development of im-
proved rules for Science Fair exhibits. Dr. Robbins
indicated that the same letter had been sent to
various organizations, of which 10 had responded,
for the most part indicating emphatic agree-
ment with the position taken. This led to a
lengthy discussion of Science Fair activities, in
which most of the Board members participated.
No decisions were reached.
Dr. Schubert then discussed plans for a na-
tional meeting of Junior Academies of Science
proposed for next fall, indicating that financial
support for the meeting, to the extent of about
$35,000, may be forthcoming from HEW and
NSF. The matter of who should sponsor the meet-
ing has not been definitely decided. There was
considerable discussion of the question as to
whether the Academy’s executive secretary (Mrs.
Fell) would be available to oversee the paper work
involved in the operation, or whether the Academy
office could be used to house a director and
clerical help for the national meeting. No definite
conclusions were reached.
Chairman Hall of the Membership Committee
presented for Second Reading the names of two
candidates for membership previously proposed,
as follows: Ross C. MacCardle and Russell L.
Steers. These candidates were then elected to mem-
bership.
The secretary (Dr. Specht) reported for the
treasurer, who was out of town. Dr. Specht
then presented the recommendation of the Ex-
ecutive Committee, responding to a request for
life membership by Archibald T. McPherson,
that a charge of $25 be made for such member-
ship. After discussion of the manner of arriving
at this figure, the recommendation was approved
by the Board.
On motion of the secretary, the Board approved
the resignations of W. R. Wedel, John R. Magness,
O. L. Cartwright, Lloyd G. Henbest, Theodore
R. Gardner, George S. Switzer, Giles W. Mead, J.
L. Cask, George A. Llano, Lyman B. Smith, Clif-
ford Evans, C. V. Morton, Ernest Ambler, and
Edwin B. Bartram.
The secretary reported for the custodian (Dr.
Rehder) that the latter is leaving town for a pro-
tracted field trip; but that on his return the
Academy publications heretofore stored at the
National Museum would be moved to the Carnegie
Building, and at that time an accurate count
of publications would be made.
With reference to activities of the Special Com-
mittee on Bylaws and Standing Rules, Dr. Wood
noted that the proposed revision of the Bylaws
is now before the membership for approval by
mail ballot, and that the Committee would ex-
pect next to consider a revision of the Stand-
ing Rules.
The secretary informed the Board concerning
a contract with the National Institute of Mental
Health, which has been approved by the Ex-
ecutive Committee acting for the Board. A group
of retired scientists known as the “Fossils” had
been approached by NIH to act as subjects in a
study of mental abilities with respect to aging.
(This is a companion project to one conducted
by NIH at Baltimore City Hospital, on the physio-
logical aspects of aging.) Customarily, NIH
enters into contracts with organized groups in
order to provide modest compensation to the sub-
jects, who are nominally furnished through the
officers of the organization. But since the Fossils
were only informally organized and did not want
to enter into contractual status with the In-
stitute, it had been suggested that the Academy
could act in this capacity. Arrangements have
now been completed whereby the Academy will
receive the compensation and pass it on to the
subjects, and additionally will receive a payment
for overhead.
In a discussion of the Journal , Mr. Johnson
voiced the opinion that the publication in its
new format was off to a good start. Mr. Scribner
observed that for the first time since he has been
a member, he is looking at the issues of the
Journal, and actually reading some of the ma-
terial. Dr. Wood felt that the most important
function of the Journal involved informing the
membership on local scientific happenings, par-
ticularly among the various affiliates. Dr. Wood
also indicated his understanding that the Journal
would continue to carry some articles of a descrip-
tive nature, which would be paid for in part
by page charges. He expressed the feeling that
the examples set by the National Bureau of Stand-
18
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
ards and certain other Government agencies in
underwriting the cost of journal publications
by staff members, might lead to more widespread
adoption of the policy.
In a discussion of membership activities, Dr.
Wood pointed out that in the past it has been
left largely to the Membership Committee to
initiate nominations for new members. He felt
that the Board and the Academy membership
at large ought to assume a more prominent part
in this connection. Dr. Specht reported that at
the time the last directory was issued, he worked
with Mrs. Fell to send a copy to each WAS
member at NIH, together with an application
blank and a note asking the member to con-
sider nominating any eligible staff member at
NIH, not already a member of the Academy.
Dr. Wood observed that the Academy’s lack
of initiative in canvassing for new members
has resulted in a number of criticisms over the
past year. Dr. Shepard suggested that the En-
tomological Society might have as many as 50
eligibles who had not been approached con-
cerning membership in the Academy. Dr. Specht
reminded the Board that the prior status of
prospective nominees could be determined through
the Academy files — that is, whether an individual
had been approached previously, and what his
reaction had been.
Bylaws Revision Approved by Membership
The Academy membership has overwhelmingly
endorsed the proposed revision of the Bylaws
that was recently circulated for approval, ac-
cording to WAS Secretary Heinz Specht.
Results of the mail balloting, which closed
March 25, showed that of 349 votes cast, 335
were for the revision. Additionally, 3 votes were
provisionally in favor, while 9 were against the
revision, 1 was both for and against, and 1 was
neither for nor against.
Dr. Specht noted that sundry typographical er-
rors had inadvertently crept into the draft re-
vision that was circulated to the membership,
including omission of a line of copy from
Article III, Section 4. He pointed out, how-
ever, that these errors did not appear in the
portions subject to change, and hence had no
influence on the vote.
The following members have been placed
on the retired list at their request:
Emery C. Leonard, W. F. Swann, R. Clifford
Hall, J. B. Umpleby, Martha S. Carr, Benjamin
Schwartz
JOINT BOARD
The Joint Board has under preparation a source
book for science projects which will be pub-
lished in the late summer. Dr. Phoebe Knipling
and Dr. John K. Taylor are the editors. A grant
from the Eugene and Agnes E. Meyer Founda-
tion will underwrite part of the publication costs.
The project book stems from the expressed
need for such a reference source by local sec-
ondary school teachers. Consequently, several
years ago, Dr. Knipling, Science Supervisor for
Arlington schools called upon a number of local
scientific institutions to enlist the cooperation
of their scientific personnel for suggestions for
student projects. The ideas submitted were com-
piled, duplicated and given wide distribution,
locally, and have been stimulating not only for
student projects but for class research projects
as well.
Partly because the earlier booklet is out-of-
print, and also to enlarge its scope, technical
societies and individual scientists are being called
upon again to submit suggestions to be incor-
porated into a new book. Response to date has
been gratifying in the biological sciences area
but only meager in the fields of physical sciences,
mathematics, and engineering.
Accordingly, the request is being renewed for
project ideas, especially in the shortage cat-
egories mentioned above. Short (one-paragraph)
descriptions of activities that can be carried out
by students with readily available equipment or
with apparatus capable of being constructed by
the student are desired. Each write-up should
contain references to easily accessible sources
where further information or background ma-
terial can be found.
Suggestions should be sent to either editor:
Dr. Phoebe Knipling, Arlington Schools, Arling-
ton, Virginia; Dr. John K. Taylor, National Bu-
reau of Standards, Washington 25, D.C.
SCIENCE AND
DEVELOPMENT
The American Geophysical Union has
formed a Planning Committee on Planetary
Sciences, according to recent announcement.
Purpose of the new committee will be to ac-
commodate the increasing number of AGU mem-
bers engaged in planetary and space research
by expanding the Union’s activities in this
field. Its chairman is Homer E. Newell, Jr., of
the Office of Space Flight Programs, National
Aeronautics and Space Administration; its sec-
retary is Robert Jastrow, of NASA’s Goddard
Space Flight Center. Other members of the
12-man committee include WAS members Philip
H. Abelson, Allen H. Shapley, E. H. Vestine.
Harry Wexler, and Charles A. Whitten.
American University has received a
$17,800 grant from NSF for a summer con-
ference on the stratigraphy and structure
of the Appalachians. This program, scheduled
for June 8-21, will be open to 40 professors of
geology and earth science from institutions
throughout the United States. The grant will
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
19
cover operational costs as well as a travel-sub-
sistence allowance to each participant.
Georgetown University Medical Center
officials started in late February to review
400 applications for 20 research scholar-
ships in the Schools of Medicine and Den-
tistry next summer. They came from junior
class students of high scholastic standing in 50
public and private schools of the Washington
area. The awards, involving $100 plus facilities
and research equipment and supplies, were to be
announced on April 1.
A Space Education Institute was con-
ducted at the University of Maryland, begin-
ning February 29 and continuing through March.
Sponsored by the University College and the
Maryland Section of the American Rocket Society,
the Institute presented a series of five lectures
by authorities in the fields of space flight, rocket
control guidance, and space propulsion systems.
Maryland’s Microbiology Department has
received a NAS grant of $8,428 for its work
on classifying compounds effective in the
destruction of molds. This is the twelfth con-
secutive year that such a grant has been given.
Since the work began in 1948, more than 14,000
compounds have been sent to the University for
screening and classification. The testing of com-
pounds involves determinations not only of their
destructive effect on molds, but also of their
stability, boiling point, solvency, surface tension,
and corrosion of metals. Results are reported to
NAS’ for cataloging purposes.
Fifty-one chemicals that the Food & Drug
Administration believes are safe for use in
food have been listed as a proposal for con-
sideration by the country’s qualified experts; this
recent action was taken in accordance with pro-
visions of the Food Additives Amendment of the
Federal Food, Drug, and Cosmetic Act. FDA
said these chemicals would be an addition to
the 182 covered by a regulation of November
20, 1959. They would be generally regarded
as safe only when they were of food grade and
used in accordance with good food manufacturing
practice. If the proposal is adopted, no further
proof of their safety would be required.
A new portable missile service tower has
been developed by Army’s Engineer R&D
Laboratories at Fort Belvoir. It weights 175
tons and is 151 feet tall, and can handle missiles
of the Redstone and Jupiter classes, or any other
missile up to 136 feet tall. While previous missile
towers have been either fixed or rail-mounted,
the present structure is mounted on two base
trailers each having six pneumatic-tired wheels.
Another recent ERDL development is an im-
proved 5-kw, 60-cycle generator set that weighs
468 pounds, is powered by an air-cooled gasoline
engine, and can operate at rated load under any
environmental condition experienced by Army
tactical units.
A hypothesis suggesting that the blue
haze seen over the world’s vegetated areas
is actually petroleum in the process of for-
mation has been advanced by F. W7. Went
of the Missouri Botanical Garden. Writing
in the NAS Proceedings, Dr. Went attributes the
blue haze to a layer of asphaltic and bituminous
particles created by hundreds of millions of tons
of volatile hydrocarbons and near-hydrocarbons
expelled into the atmosphere annually by living
plants. These particles eventually rain down on
earth, and in time, form petroleum. Dr. Went
further suggests that these smog-like particles
influence the weather in a variety of ways, and
also serve to regulate plant growth.
The sea otter of northwestern Pacific
coasts, ruthlessly slaughtered for two centuries
as one of the most valuable fur animals, has
been saved from extermination by the rigorous
protection of American and Canadian authorities
over the last 50 years. So says Karl W. Kenyon,
Fish and Wildlife Service biologist, in the latest
annual report of the Smithsonian Institution.
Dr. Kenyon, who annually visits the Service’s
sea otter reserve on Amchitka Island in the
Aleutians, reports that there may be as many as
30,000 otters in Alaskan waters. A count two
years ago indicated as many as 1,000 in California
coastal waters, while individuals have been re-
ported off Washington and British Columbia.
In the heyday of the otter fur trade, a single
pelt brought as much as $300.
“Private Research and Development Or-
ganizations in the Washington Metropolitan
Area” is the title of a brochure recently compiled
and published by the Economic Development
Committee of the Washington Board of Trade.
It lists about 130 such organizations, each with
the address and name of the principal officer,
number of employees, year of establishment,
and fields of interest. The pamphlet is part of
a kit that includes also leaflets on “The National
Capital Area — Center for Research and Develop-
ment” (reprint from Career) ; “Young Research
Workers Sought for Washington Area Labora-
tories” (reprint from Science ) ; and “Profes-
sionally, Intellectually, Geographically, the
Climate is Perfect in the National Capital Area.”
Two new durum wheat varieties, with bet-
ter resistance to Race 15B stemrust than
any variety presently available to growers,
have been released by USDA in collaboration
with the North Dakota Agricultural Experiment
Station, for seed-increase next summer in Great
Plains states. In addition to improved stemrust
resistance, the new durums — Wells and Lakota —
ripen earlier, have shorter and stronger straw,
and yield as well or slightly better than varieties
now in commercial use. Both display good charac-
teristics for production of semolina flour, basic
ingredient of macaroni.
20
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
Vice-Presidents of the Washington Academy of Sciences
Representing the Affiliated Societies
Acoustical Society of America
Institute of the Aeronautical Sciences
Anthropological Society of Washington
Society of American Bacteriologists
Biological Society of Washington
Society for Experimental Biology and Medicine
Botanical Society of Washington
Chemical Society of Washington
American Society of Civil Engineers
International Assn, for Dental Research
American Inst, of Electrical Engineers
Washington Society of Engineers
Entomological Society of Washington
Society of American Foresters
National Geographic Society
Geological Society of Washington
Helminthological Society of Washington
Columbia Historical Society
Insecticide Society of Washington
Amer. Society of Mechanical Engineers
Medical Society of the Dist. of Columbia
American Society for Metals
American Meteorological Society
Institute of Radio Engineers
American Nuclear Society, Washington Section
Philosophical Society of Washington
Society of American Military Engineers
Richard Cook
Not Named.
Regina Flannery
Mary Louise Robbins
Herbert Friedman
Kathryn Knowlton
Herbert C. Hanson
William J. Bailey
Not Named.
Gerhard Brauer
Robert D. Elbourn
Howard S. Rappleye
Harold H. Shepard
Not Named.
Alexander Wetmore
Carle Dane
. Carlton M. Herman
U. S. Grant, III
Joseph Yuill
William G. Allen
Fred 0. Coe
John A. Bennett
Morris Tepper
Robert Huntoon
Urner Liddel
Louis R. Maxwell
Not Named.
Chairmen of Committees
Standing Committees
Executive
Meetings
Membership
Monographs
Awards for Scientific Achievement
Grants-in-Aid for Research
Policy and Planning
Encouragement of Science Talent
Lawrence A. Wood, Nat. Bureau of Standards
Robert D. Stiehler, Nat. Bureau of Standards
Wayne C. Hall, Naval Research Laboratory
Dean B. Cowie, Dept, of Terrestrial Magnetism
Archie I. Mahan, Applied Physics Laboratory
B. D. van Evera, George W ashington University
A. T. McPherson, Nat. Bureau of Standards
Raymond J. Seeger, Nat. Science Foundation
Special Committees
By Laws Harold H. Shepard, Dept, of Agriculture
Library of Congress John A. O’Keefe, Nat. Aeronautics & Space Admin.
Repres. on AAAS Council Howard A. Meyerhoff, Scientific Manpower Commission
Return Postage Guaranteed.
Library of Arnold Arboretum WAS
22 Divinity Ave
Cambridge 38 Mass
Volume 50 APRIL 1960 No. 4
CONTENTS
Page
The Number System Based on Six in the
Proto Finno-Ugric Language. K. LAKI 1
Finite Groups Having Elements of
Every Possible Order. C. HOBBY,
H. RUMSEY and P. M. WEICHSEL 11
Journal of the Washington Academy of
Sciences. CHESTER H. PAGE 12
Science in Washington
Scientists in the News 13
Affiliated Societies 15
Academy Activities 17
Joint Board 1 19
Science and Development 19
JOURNAL
of the
WASHINGTON
ACADEMY
of
SCIENCES
Vol. 50
May,
• No. 5
1960
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Editor: Chester H. Page, National Bureau of Standards
Managing Editor: Ileen E. Stewart, National Science Foundation
Associate Editors
Frank L. Campbell, National Academy of Russell B. Stevens, Geo. Washington Univer-
Sciences sity
Samuel B. Detwiler, Jr., U.S. Dept, of Agri- John K. Taylor, National Bureau of Standards
culture
Contributors
Albert M. Stone, Applied Physics Laboratory
John A. O’Brien, Jr., Catholic University
Elliott B. Roberts, Coast & Geodetic Survey
Margaret D. Foster, Geological Survey
Russell B. Stevens, Geo. Washington University
Moddie D. Taylor, Howard University
Frank L. Campbell, NAS-NRC.
Alphonse F. Forziati, National Bureau of
Standards
Howard W. Bond, National Institutes of Health
Allen L. Alexander, Naval Research Laboratory
Victor R. Boswell, USDA, Beltsville
Harold R. Curran, USDA, Washington
William J. Bailey, University of Maryland
This Journal, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes: (1)
historical articles, critical reviews, and scholarly scientific articles, (2) original research, if the
paper, including illustrations, does not exceed 1500 words or the equivalent space, (3) notices of
meetings and proceedings of meetings of the Academy and its affiliated societies, and (4) regional
news items, including personal news, of interest to the entire membership. The Journal appears
eight times a year in January to May and October to December.
Manuscripts and original research papers should be sent to the Editor. They should
be typewritten, double-spaced, on good paper; footnotes and captions should be numbered and
submitted on a separate sheet. The Editor does not assume responsibility for the ideas expressed
by any author.
Contributions to the regular columns should be sent to the appropriate Associate
Editor whose name appears at the beginning of each column, or to one of the Contributors, listed
above. The deadline for news items is approximately three weeks in advance of publication date.
News items should be signed by the sender.
Proof of manuscripts will generally be sent to an author if he resides in the Washington
area and time allows. Otherwise the Editor will assume responsibility for seeing that copy is
followed.
Subscription rate $7.50 per yr. (U.S.)
Single issues $1.00 per copy.
Subscription Orders or requests for back numbers or volumes of the Journal, or copies of the
Proceedings, should be sent to the Washington Academy of Sciences, 1530 P St., N.W., Washing-
ton, D.C. Remittances should be made payable to “Washington Academy of Sciences”.
Claims for missing numbers will not be allowed if received more than 60 days after date
of mailing plus time normally required for postal delivery and claim. No claims will be allowed
because of failure to notify the Circulation Manager of a change of address.
Changes of address should be sent promptly to the Academy Office, 1530 P St., N.W.,
Washington, D. C. Such notification should include both old and new addresses and postal zone
number, if any.
Advertising rates may be obtained from the Managing Editor, Ileen E. Stewart, Office of
Science Information Service, National Science Foundation, Washington 25, D. C.
Reprint prices may also be obtained from the Managing Editor.
Prices of back numbers and volumes, of Monograph No. 1, “The Parasitic Cuckoos of
Africa” by Herbert Friedmann, Index to Vols. 1-40, and Proceedings may be obtained by writing
to the Academy Office.
Entered as second class matter at the Post Office, Washington, D. C. Printing by McArdle
Printing Co., Washington, D. C.
Oceanographic and Hydrographic
Observations
At Wilkes IGY Station, Antarctica
Willis L. Tressler *
U. S. Navy Hydrographic Office , W ashington, D. C.
Wilkes IGY Station is located on one of
the Windmill Islands on the Budd Coast of
East Antarctica. Its exact geographic lo-
cation is 66°15'24" South and 110°31'39"
East. The station is situated at the Western
end of what is still called Clark “Island”,
although the results of gravimetric and
radio soundings give a profile which pretty
definitely show it to be a peninsula extend-
ing out from the ice-covered Budd Coast.
Commissioned on February 16, 1957, the
IGY station has been in operation for
over two consecutive years. Until Spring
of 1959 it was part of the IGY program
sponsored in this country by the Nation-
al Academy of Science. It is at present
being maintained by the Australians with
j three American scientists present.
During the year 1958-1959 when the
author was Station Scientific Leader at
Wilkes IGY Station, it was possible to
accomplish a certain amount of oceano-
graphic and hydrographic work, such as
! ice and current studies, tides, bottom sedi-
ments, and some hydrographic and topo-
graphic survey work. The condition and
extent of fast ice and floes were observed
daily from the aurora tower and on all
except days of extremely poor visibility;
movements of ice were photographed with
a 16 mm time-lapse motion picture camera
from the same location. A portable tide
gage was established and continuously run
for slightly longer than one complete
* The opinions expressed in this paper are those
of the author as an individual and are not to be
| construed as necessarily reflecting the official
{ views of the Department of the Navy.
lunar cycle in the fall and was again placed
in operation in the spring for approxi-
mately two months. A series of ten bot-
tom samples was obtained, extending from
the shore to deep water in Newcomb Bay
of the base. Survey work was accom-
plished in which the position and orienta-
tion of Clark and the northern islands were
tied in with the astro station on Holl
Island.
The first to enter Vincennes Bay, the
large indentation of the east antarctic
coast, on which this IGY station is situated,
was Lieutenant Charles Wilkes in com-
mand of the U. S. Exploring Expedition in
1840. Wilkes’ flagship, the Vincennes,
sailed into the bay and traversed it at a
point somewhat north of the present Wilkes
Station site. In 1912 the Aurora entered
these waters and again in 1931 the Dis-
covery was here. In 1947 during Oper-
ation High jump, two aerial photographic
runs were made from carrier based planes.
It is mainly from the photographs obtained
on these flights that the present charts have
been constructed by the Hydrographic Of-
fice. During Operation Windmill, in 1948,
the two icebreakers USS Burton Island
(AGB-1) and the USS Edisto (AGB-2)
entered Vincennes Bay and Lieutenant
Richard Holl, of the Navy Hydrographic
Office established an astro station on what
was later called Holl Island.
Not many vessels had visited the area
until 1956 when the Thala Dan which had
been chartered by the Australians with a
party under the leadership of Phil Law.
sailed in among the Windmill Islands and
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
1
went as far as Cloyd Islet, where they
erected a cairn and left a record. A number
of aerial photographs were taken at a time
when the area was unusually ice-free. In
the same year and shortly after the Aus-
tralian visit, the U. S. Navy icebreaker
USS Glacier (AGB-4) nosed into the edge
of the shelf ice at a point south of Cape
Folger and some five miles north of Wilkes
Station. The purpose of this visit was to
make a reconnaissance of the area to
locate a site for an IGY station to be
established the following year. A survey
of the area and adjacent water had just
commenced when we were driven out by
a sudden gravity wind which raged in
excess of 50 knots for several hours. The
next year, in late January 1957, the
Glacier returned and Wilkes Station was
constructed in about three weeks time.
During this time, a reconnaissance sound-
ing of the area was made by Lieutenant
Newcomb, the Glacier s navigator and the
author.
As in the case of the adjoining islands
of the Windmill group, Bailey and Mitchell,
Clark Island is composed of exposed, rocky
areas in between which are large, perma-
nent snow fields, the whole area finally
merging into one extensive snow slope
which, at an altitude of about 500 feet
ends in a sinuous shear moraine. Beyond
the shear moraine, the shelf ice extends
uninterrupted to the pole, some 1400
miles south. According to Hollin 1 the
glacial ice retreated from most of Clark
Island approximately 12,000 years ago.
Relieved of its load the land rose 100 feet
and apparently is continuing to rise at the
present time. Raised beaches in the area
substantiate this fact. In winter much of
the rocky area is snow covered, but during
the summer months, considerable bare
rock and rocky terrain is exposed. Several
coves indent the south and southwest shores
of the island, the base site being located
between what provisionally have been
called “Ramp” and “Tide Gage” coves.
1 Information furnished by John Hollin, Head
Glaciologist Wilkes Station 1958-1959.
(Figure 1). The water in these coves
averaged 7 fathoms but several pinnacles
of rock are in evidence. Newcomb Bay
does not appear, from the reconnaissance
sounding made in 1957, to exceed a depth
much greater than 45 fathoms. There are
some shoal areas and at least two sub-
merged pinnacles which do not uncover at
low tide, but have been charted. Both of
these obstructions are located away from
the main anchoring area, which was wire
dragged to 40 feet by the MSTS Greenville
Victory in 1957. The greater part of
Newcomb Bay offers a safe anchorage for
large vessels and the bottom provides good
holding ground. A prominent, perma-
nently ice-covered rock (Fitzpatrick Rock)
is located in the middle of the entrance to
the bay ; there is good water all around this
rock at a distance of not more than 15
yards.
Figure 1. Outline chart of the Wilkes IGY Station area.
Weather Conditions
Situated along the coast of East Ant-
arctica, Wilkes did not suffer the extreme
antarctic weather experienced by other
U. S. bases. At a latitude almost on the
Antarctic Circle, which is true of all the
bases along the east antarctic coast, the
French in Adelie Land, the Russians at
Bunger Oasis and Haswell Islet and the
Australians at MacRobertson Coast and at
the Vestfold Hills, Wilkes enjoyed a com-
2
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
paratively mild climate. When open water
surrounded the base the temperatures re-
mained in the upper 20’s and lower 30’s.
Even in the matter of winds, for which
Wilkes became famous during the first
year, the average monthly wind velocity
was often below that of the other U. S.
bases. Frequency of winds exceeding 50
knots and high peak gusts, however, have
earned for Wilkes the reputation of being
a windy station. There were days at a
time when no one who didn’t absolutely
have to, went out, but on the other hand,
there were many long periods during
which there was a complete absence of
wind. There was nothing to approach
Mawson’s experience at Commonwealth
Bay where the monthly average for the year
was over 40 miles per hour.
WILKES IGY STA MONTHLY AVERAGE TEMPERATURE
Figure 2. Monthly average air temperature for 1957-1958 and
1958-1959 at Wilkes Station.
An examination of Figure 2, which
shows monthly average temperatures for
the two years, shows that while the gen-
eral temperature trend is similar in both
years, there are some marked differences
in the two-year record. In 1957 average
temperature reached a low in June and
July, following which there was a gradual
upward trend. In 1958, however, the low
reached in June was followed by a sharp
increase in July and then a downward
trend in August which reached a point
almost as low in September as had been
recorded in June. September was certainly
our most unpleasant month, with low tem-
peratures, windy and generally unfavor-
able conditions the rule, day after day.
WILKES IGY STA MAX 8 MIN MONTHLY TEMPERATURE EXTREMES
1957
MAX MIN
Figure 3. Monthly air temperature extremes for 1957-1958
and 1958-1959 at Wilkes Station.
Figure 3 gives the monthly temperature
extreme for 1957 and 1958. Our low-
est temperature of —37° F. occurred in
July, with —29° registered in September.
At the Satellite Station, located 50 miles
out on the shelf ice and at an elevation
of something over 3700 feet, the lowest
temperature recorded was —53° F. Com-
paring the two years, it will be noted that
in 1957 the lowest temperature recorded
fell in July, while in the following year
the two lowest temperatures occurred in
June and September. The maximum tem-
perature observed at Wilkes Station was
44° F. which occurred on 6 January 1958;
the higest temperature recorded during the
previous year was 43°, observed on 20
December 1957.
Figure 4 shows average wind velocities
and peak gusts recorded at Wilkes Station
during the first two years of operation.
During both years April had the highest
average wind velocity, whereas in 1957
there was a second high average in Sep-
tember, this was not repeated in 1958.
April 1958 averaged 16 knots and Septem-
ber 1958 only 8 knots. Peak gusts were
also somewhat lower during the late win-
ter of the second year. The maximum
recorded gust occurred on the night of
April 24, 1958 when 116 knots (133 miles
per hour) was officially recorded before the
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
3
WILKES IGY STA MONTHLY AVERAGE WINOS 8 PEAK GUSTS
aerovane mast blew down. This was a
rather trying experience and there were
several times when we feared the roofs
would be blown off. Later on we learned
that the Clements buildings were designed
to withstand winds of 100 miles per hour.
In May 1958 the maximum gust reported
was 92 knots (105 miles per hour) while
gusts of over 70 knots (80 miles per
hour) were recorded during the months
of March, June, August and October. In
May 1958 there were 12 days with gusts
of over 50 knots (59 miles per hour).
Monthly precipitation in hundredths of
an inch is shown in Figure 5. The two
years are quite dissimilar. In 1957 pre-
cipitation showed a gradual and irregular
drop from March through December while
in 1958, the maximum precipitation rose
in May and again in July. Rain was ac-
tually observed twice; a trace was reported
on 5 January 1958 and on 17 May 1958
0.25 inches fell, causing heavy leaking in
all the buildings. The maximum sea level
barometric pressure occurred on 26 June
1958 when the barometer read 1019.5
MBS. The minimum barometric pressure
observed occurred during the storm of 24
April and was 947.9 MBS.
2 The weather data from which this summary
has been prepared were furnished by John Zim-
merman, Meteorologist USWB, at Wilkes Station
1958-1959.
lee Studies
Daily observations of the ice conditions
in the portion of Vincennes Bay surround-
ing the base were made from the aurora
tower or from nearby hills. The Hydro-
graphic Office Shore Observers Ice Log
was filled in each day. Open water per-
sisted around the base and in Newcomb
Bay between Clark and Bailey islands until
late in the fall. Rocks along the shores of
the coves gradually became ice covered
from spray of breaking waves but fast ice
did not finally form in the coves and for
several miles seaward until late May. Re-
peatedly, young ice would form, remain for
a few days and then be broken up and
blown out to sea by high winds, of which
there were record numbers in May. Finally
on May 27 the adjacent waters froze over
for the last time and on June 9, 1958,
14-inch thick ice was measured at a regular
ice measuring station established in the
Ramp Cove. At this time holes cut in
the ice farther offshore and in the center
of Newcomb Bay showed a uniform thick-
ness throughout. On June 11 the ice
thickness had increased 1 inch, while by
June 21, the thickness was 21 inches. In-
crease in ice thickness progressed as fol-
lows:
June 25 — 24 inches Aug. 8 — 42 inches
July 8 — 30 inches Aug. 25 — 42 inches
July 11 — 31 inches Sept. 16 — 50 inches
Figure 5. Monthly average precipitation for 1957-1958 and
1958-1959 at Wilkes Station.
4
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
From September 16 on, although the ice
thickness was measured regularly until
just before the fast ice went out, no
greater thickness than 50 inches was ob-
served. Snow blew in around the shore
lines making a smooth approach to the
rocky hills and snow fields adjoining the
coves. At the head of “Ramp” Cove, on
June 25, a 1-ton sled with mounted hand
winch was hauled up on a wind-swept
snow surface about 30 feet back from the
former shoreline. Within a few days the
sled was covered and when we finally
dug it out on July 19, it was buried under
4 feet of hard-packed snow which had
blown in from the land surface.
In ice holes which had been chopped
to measure ice thickness, ice formed again
rather rapidly during the colder months.
In one hole which was chopped on June
20, 14 inches of ice had formed five days
later. Conductivity of fast ice in situ
was measured at the time of each ice
thickness measurement by obtaining a clean
ice sample 4 to 6 inches beneath the sur-
face, melting it and determining the
conductivity with a Surface Conductivity
Bridge. Conductivity and hence salinity of
the samples varied throughout the time of
observation and showed no trend whatso-
ever. Conductivity was at about the same
level when last measured in December as
it had been when first measured on June
11. Salinities varied between 5 and 8°/oo.
Brine apparently seeps upwards in the ice.
In samples taken from hummocked ice
above submerged rocks in the Ramp Cove,
however, the salinity steadily decreased
until on December 4, 1958, six months
after the formation of the ice, the con-
ductivity was around 1,000 micromhos
(less than 1% salinity). This is perfectly
good water for drinking although it is a
little saline to most tastes. On the USS
Arneb (AK-56) coming down to Wilkes
Station, evaporator trouble caused the
drinking water to vary between around
300- and over 4,000-micromhos conductiv-
ity. Good distilled water should not run
much over 10 micromhos and this figure is
easily attained when the evaporators are
functioning properly.
Once the fast ice had formed in Vin-
cennes Bay, it slowly extended its seaward
range to what appeared to be a line about
two or three miles east of the Frazier
Islets which were some 10 miles out from
shore. Fast ice never reached these islets
during the winter of 1958-1959. The fast
ice extended out to and considerably be-
yond the Chappel Islets which were about
5 miles west of the base and continued
north along the shore as far as we could
see. This ice along the shore to the north
of the base remained in position until late
in the summer and was still in place when
the staff departed Wilkes on 6 February.
Break-up of the ice in southern Vin-
cennes Bay and in Newcomb Bay occurred
in late August in 1957 but was delayed
until early November in 1958. The ice
finally started breaking out on 6 Novem-
ber 1958 and in a few hours had broken
out half way into Newcomb Bay on a line
from the end of the “Ramp” Cove to Mc-
Mullin Islet and northwest to the northern-
most of the Chappel Islets. Fast ice re-
mained in the “Tide Gage” and “Ramp”
coves until well into December; blast-
ing was finally resorted to in “Ramp”
Cove to free it of ice to enable the dory
to be launched. In “Tide Gage” cove the ice
edge had receded just past the tide gage
site and with a little blasting to free the
rocks of ice, the tide gage was reactivated
on November 28, 1958.
Before the formation of the fast ice and
after the spring break-up, open water sur-
rounded the base and extended as far as
one could see toward the Frazier Islets.
On some days a line of pack ice with
numerous bergs could be seen near the
horizon in this direction, having appar-
ently been blown in from farther north or
west. Small block and brash and occa-
sional small floes of fairly thin ice would
be carried past the base by wind and cur-
rents from time to time. This ice move-
ment is illustrated nicely in a number of
time-lapse movie films taken throughout
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
5
the year from the aurora tower. During
the last two days while Wilkes Station
was being built in February 1957, large
masses of pack ice moved into Newcomb
Bay from the north and seriously inter-
fered with small boat movements in the
area. The head of Newcomb Bay re-
mained closed by fast ice and served as a
source of supply for brash and block which
was carried out of the bay by wind and
currents. In 1958-1959 the strait be-
tween Shirley and Bailey Islands also re-
mained frozen much longer than it had in
previous years.
South of Wilkes Station, fast ice re-
mained in position to the east of the
outer islands such as Midgley, O’Brien,
Warrington and Ardery, so that weasel
traffic over the ice was possible as far as
Browning Island until well into December.
On December 17 we made a weasel trip to
Browning, Peterson, O’Conner, Holl and
Cloyd Islands over the ice. At that time
only a narrow strip of ice connected
O’Conner Island with the ice north of
Browning Island.
Studies of the movement of Cape Folger,
an ice point 9 miles to the north of the
base, were made commencing on March
25, 1958 and continuing for nine months
until December 23, 1958. A signal pipe
was set in bedrock on the ridge across
from the tide gage and a point of observa-
tion with bench mark was established on
the rock ridge just to the south of the
recreation hall. By obtaining the angle
between the signal and the face of Cape
Folger at intervals, using a Wild T-2 theo-
dolite, the rate of seaward movement of
Cape Folger was determined. Commenc-
ing on March 25 with an angle of
1°29'26", by December 23 this angle had
decreased to 1°20'50" and by knowing
the distance to Cape Folger from the point
of observation — obtained by triangulation
with a long base line — it was determined
that a change in angle of 1 second arc
was equivalent to a movement of 0.253
feet. During the 9 months of observation
Cape Folger had moved 130 feet to the
westward at an average daily rate of 0.48
or approximately one-half foot per day.
This rate was not at all constant but varied
from 0.17 to 1.42 feet per day. Compared
with the Vanderford Glacier, which the
glaciologists determined to be moving at
the rate of nine feet per day,3 Cape Folger’s
rate is comparatively slow. Because it was
thought that the face of the tip of Cape
Folger might break off sooner or later
and also to establish more certain signals, j
a trip was made on 26 August to Cape j
Folger, where two ten-foot tripod signals
were frozen into the ice on top of the
cape. We found the surface of Cape Fol-
ger criss-crossed with crevasses, varying
in width from a foot to 12 or more feet
and mostly bridged over. Starting on
September 6, observations were made on
these two signals as well as on the face of
Cape Folger. The outer signal, located
about 75 yards from the tip of the Cape,
seemed to be moving westward more slowly
than the inner signal which was placed a
half mile inland. By November 20 the
outer signal was moving faster than the
inner and at a rate of 0.35 feet a day. i
The distance to Cape Folger from the point
of observation was determined by finding
the distance from the point of observation
(F-l) to G-3 as a base line and obtaining J
angles from each of these points. The
base line was 4883 feet and the distance
from F-l to Cape Folger was 9.94 statute
or 8.63 nautical miles. Up until the time
we left Wilkes Station, the tip of Cape
Folger had not broken off and fast ice
still sealed it in to westward.
Tide Records
A portable tide gage furnished by the
Navy Hydrographic Office, was installed
on the rocky shores of what came to be
referred to as “Tide Gage” Cove. A large ,
rounded rock, the top of which was some
15 feet above the surface of the water, j
served as a base and firm mount for the
recording drum, while the plastic pipe
containing the float, was secured alongside
3 Information determined by John Hollin Head
Glaciologist, Richard Robertson and Caspar '
Cronk, Glaciologists, Wilkes Station 1958-1959. I
6
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
a 2-inch iron pipe. This pipe was placed
at the end of a steel bridge, which was
suspended out over the water by steel
cables, and firmly anchored from sidesway
by other cables at the sides. The cables
were fastened to steel rods driven into
holes drilled in the rock. The fine wire
from the float was run up over a pulley
and through a 1-inch diameter pipe, to
prevent interference from the wind, and
to the recording mechanism on the rock.
This arrangement was used during the
fall operation of the tide gage to prevent
total loss of equipment should the ice
carry away the plastic pipe. In the spring
when the tide gage was reactivated, the
recording mechanism was placed directly
on top of the plastic pipe. A tide staff
was permanently mounted by steel braces
fastened to pins in the rock, with the zero
levelled in to a brass bench mark set in
the top of the rock near the recording
mechanism. In late April ice took out the
plastic pipe and damaged the staff, which
was replaced in the spring and relevelled.
Although the tide gage was first installed
in mid-February, it was not until early
March that we were able to obtain con-
tinuous and relatively uninterrupted rec-
ords. Even then we had trouble with the
wire breaking and later on with freezing
around the float. The latter condition was
remedied by pouring hot water and then
diesel fuel into the plastic pipe.
A more or less continuous record was
obtained from March 5 through April 19,
1958, and again in the spring from De-
cember 15, 1958 through February 2,
1959. During the fall operating period,
the maximum high tide level, based upon
an arbitrary datum, was 8.2 feet, the low-
est 1.7 feet, giving an extreme range of
6.5 feet. The maximum daily range was
5.8 feet, the minimum 0.7 feet. It was
observed on several occasions that at neap
tides between the time of full or new moon,
there was considerable slack water with
consequent lessening of tidal currents. The
average daily range for the fall period
of operation was 3.3 feet. In the spring
and summer operating period, the maxi-
mum high tide level was 7.9 feet, and
minimum low tide level 1.6 feet, which
gives an extreme range of 6.3 feet com-
pared with 6.5 feet in the fall period.
The maximum daily range was 6.0 feet,
the minimum daily range was 1.6 feet
and the average daily tidal range was 3.5
feet (3.3 feet during the fall period).
Although the period of time over which
tidal observations were recorded was not
of sufficient length to establish a true mean
sea level, the averages were taken as a
base for topographic survey work and
other work at Wilkes Station which re-
quired at least a tentative mean sea level
approximation. If the average for the
fall period of observation of the height
above our zero datum (4.59 feet) is com-
pared with the same figure for the spring
and summer (4.13 feet), we find a drop of
0.46 feet occurring in “mean sea level”
in the spring. This phenomenon has re-
cently been pointed out by Munk (1958)
and was shown for the North Atlantic
Ocean by Patullo and others (1955), al-
though in the northern hemisphere the
months are reversed, with high sea level
occurring in the month of September,
rather than in March. Munk (1958) gives
a figure of 20 cm (0.66 feet) difference at
Baltimore and this difference, while greater
than the amount noted at Wilkes Station,
is of the same order of magnitude and
probably is greater because the readings
were taken in September and March rather
than in March-April and December- Jan-
uary. Munk ascribed the cause of this dif-
ference in sea level at different seasons to
actual transport of water to and from the
polar regions, rather then being the effect
of heating and cooling of the water by
solar radiation, back radiation, evapora-
tion, or other means, as seems to be the
case in lower latitudes.
Strong tidal currents were produced in
and out of the coves, and these will be dis-
cussed in the next section of this report.
After the fast ice closed the coves and
extended for several miles out to sea, a
tidal crack developed along the shore. At
high tides water was extruded through
7
loURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
this crack out onto the ice. There seemed
to be little vertical movement of the ice,
although this fact was difficult to determine.
Other wintering-over expeditions have made
tidal observations of limited extent by
following the vertical movement of the ice
and recording this to show tidal fluctua-
tions. These results must be correlated
with actual vertical rise and fall of open
water, and the actual figures obtained can
be only approximate. Establishment of
such a tide gage on the ice at Wilkes
Station was considered but the idea was
abandoned after observing the apparently
minute vertical movement of the ice near
the tide gage. Operation of a tide gage
was not continued by the Australians be-
cause of lack of manpower at the base.
Currents
Approximately 3,000 feet of 16 mm
movie film was obtained from time-lapse
photography of ice movements made from
the aurora tower at Wilkes Station. Com-
mencing in February 1958, these studies
were made on all clear days when the
camera and equipment were functional and
there was open water with ice to photo-
graph. Exposures were made at 30 second
intervals at first, and later at 20 seconds.
The resulting film will be subjected to
careful examination by experts to deter-
mine current patterns and trends. At the
present time, only a few general state-
ments can be made. It is readily apparent
that there are strong currents of tidal
origin running into and out of the coves
and into Newcomb Bay. In “Tide Cage”
Cove the current is strongest near shore
on the base side of the cove. A reversal
in direction follows change in tide. Cur-
rents in Newcomb Bay appear strongest
near shore but there is also considera-
ble current flowing in the mid-bay area.
Currents flowing out of “Tide Gage” Cove
meet currents flowing out around “Base”
Point and cause a large eddy at certain
stages of the tide. In one instance it was
noted that two blocks of ice which were
travelling in opposite directions collided
with each other. A counter current runs in
opposite direction to the inshore current
at a distance of a few hundred yards off-
shore. Far out on the horizon large blocks
of ice and small bergs could be seen mov-
ing down southeast toward the Midgley
Island group. In some instances ice move-
ment near shore followed the direction of
low cloud formations, whereas in most
cases there was no correlation between di-
rection of ice movement and wind direc-
tion, as indicated by low cloud movement,
showing the currents to be of tidal origin.
It would be interesting and perhaps might
yield valuable information, if a wind di-
rection indicator could be placed in the
foreground when ice movement pictures
are taken in the future. In the “Ramp”
Cove there is an oscillatory motion of ice
blocks seen at certain stages of the tide.
When the Magga Dan, the Danish ship
chartered by the Australians, anchored
off the south side of “Base” Point, time-
lapse movies were made of her motions
while riding at anchor. It was hoped that
some indication of current direction
and shift might be obtained by following
her motions. However, the Magga Dan
seemed to switch about with little or no
regularity of change of direction. The pic-
ture obtained when run at 16 frames a
second reminded one of the lashing of a
cat’s tail and bore no resemblance to what
might be expected from ordetiy tidal
changes.
Survey Work
The first astronomical position for this
area of the East Antarctica coast was ac-
complished by Lieutenant Richard Iloli of
the U. S. Navy Hydrographic Office while
serving as hydrographic surveyor on Op-
eration Windmill in 1948. A brass marker >
was permanently placed on a prominent
peak on Holl Island, while two other posi-
tions on the island were occupied; South
Base and East Base. In 1956 the Austral-
ians under the leadership of Phil Law es-
tablished astros on Nelly Islet of the Fraz-
ier Islets group and on Thompson Islet in
the Balaana Islets to the north of Wilkes
8
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
Station. Richard Berkley, geomagnetist at
Wilkes during its first year of operation,
established a position on the base from
a number of star sights taken with a
transit. Lieutenant (jg) Donald Burnett,
OIC during the first year at Wilkes, had
set up a number of signals on prominent
high points on Clark Island and had tied
them in among themselves with a transit.
A start on the topography of Clark Island
had also been made by Lieutenant Burnett
and his men. Our task during the second
year at Wilkes Station, was to tie in Holl’s
astro and Burnett’s star sights with easily
identified positions on islands shown on the
existing charts of the Windmill group,
bring the survey up to Clark Island and if
possible tie in the small northern islands.
We wished also to complete the topographic
survey of Clark Island and fill in holiday
areas on the charts, notably in the Midgley
Island group and Herring Island.
In preparation for the survey work, per-
manent signals consisting of 1-inch iron
pipe inserted into drilled holes in solid
rock were placed on some 20 prominent
positions on Clark, Bailey, Mitchell,
O’Brien, Beal, Midgley, “West Midgley”,
Holl, Shirley and Ardery islands and the
Chappel Islets. Using a portable Swedish
rock drill, foot-deep holes were easily
drilled and the pipe with flag inserted
in the hole.4 In most cases the pipe could
be removed from the hole so that the theo-
dolite could be centered directly over the
hole; where this was impossible the pipe
was bent down. Two large cairns had al-
ready been erected by Lieutenant Robert
Newcomb and the author in early 1957 on
a prominent ridge east of the base and
formed a part of Lieutenant Burnett’s sys-
tem. Permanent signals were erected at
these sites. A half-mile base line was
chained out on a fairly level snow field
between two low rocky prominences on
4Audun Ommundsen, mechanic at Wilkes Sta-
tion 1958-1959 greatly assisted Lieutenant (jg)
Eyres and the author in preparing and establish-
ing the signals used in triangulation.
which permanent signals had been erected.
This was remeasured in the opposite di-
rection a few weeks later, and tied into
the triangulation system. Some survey
work with a Wild T-2 theodolite was ac-
complished in the fall of 1958, occasional
warm days permitting some work as late
as May, but most of the work was ac-
complished in late spring and summer,
when almost all signals on the nearby
islands were occupied and all signals
erected were tied into the net. Dean
Denison and Sebastian Borrello, Aurora
and Cosmic Ray physicist and geomagnet-
ist respectively, made a trip to Holl Island
and placed a permanent signal at the astro
site, also taking sights on all signals visible
to the north with the theodolite. They also
placed a signal on Ardery Island, the
highest point in the Windmill Group. Later
Lieutenant (jg) David Eyres CEC who
did all the remaining work with the theo-
dolite, was able to cut in the astro signal
on Holl Island from Midgley and West
Midgley islands. While the ice was still
in place, a second base line was chained
off on the ice between O’Brien and Mitchell
islands and tied in to signals on these is-
lands. Star sights with the Wild T-2 theo-
dolite were taken by Borrello and Eyres
to more accurately fix the geographical
location of Wilkes Station. The final best
position, 66°15'24" S. and 110°31'39"
E., is believed to be plus or minus 3
seconds in error. In the case of latitude the
error is estimated, while with longitude it
is the standard error of the mean. The
point of actual observation was the old
seismic hut located 176 yards east of
Berkeley’s Bo station. For latitude, B
Crucis and A Centauri at lower transit
were used; 11 sets of data on the stars
Sirius, Rigel, and Betelguese rising were
used for the determination of longitude.
A topographic survey with plane table
and telescopic alidade was completed for
the northernmost of the small islands to
the north of Clark Island by Robertson
and Borrello, and these two men with help
from others at the base covered the great-
JoURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
9
er portion of Clark Island in a similar sur-
vey. Supplementing the topographic survey,
a series of aerial photographs was taken
by Caspar Cronk from the little Auster
plane of the Australians, piloted by Lcdr
Leckie of the RAAF. For these surveys a
hole was cut in the floor of the plane so
that verticals with the F-56 aerial camera
could be taken. The elevation was approxi-
mately 8,000 feet. The Australians were
also kind enough to furnish the author
with copies of two dozen trimetrogon
photos which had been taken over Herring
and Midgley islands in 1956 when the
area was unusually ice free. With these
aids, it is believed that the Hydrographic
Office may be enabled to complete the
charting of the Windmill Island group.
Bottom Sediments
In February 1957, while the station was
being established under the critical super-
vision of Carl R. Eklund, Wilkes first Sta-
tion Scientific Leader, the present author
was able to obtain several short cores and
bottom sediment samples in the deeper wa-
ters of Newcomb Bay. These were obtained
from the deck of the USS Glacier (AGB-4),
while she was at anchor. The results of
these bottom samplings were reported on
in the Hydrographic Office Technical Re-
port No. 29 (1957). Because of a con-
siderable variation in the nature of the
samples taken, it was believed that a series
of samples taken from the shoreline out
to the deeper waters of Newcomb Bay,
might prove of interest. Accordingly, as
soon as the ice had formed in “Ramp”
Cove in June, a series of ten samples was
commenced, starting at a spot about 30
feet from the shoreline at the head of
the cove where the water was 1 fathom
deep and ending out in Newcomb Bay
proper at 37% fathoms depth. The first
few holes were chopped out by hand, but
as the ice became thicker, it was found
much easier to blow them with 2 to 3
pounds of C-4 plastic. This made a
blackened mess on the ice and a jagged
hole which was unsuitable for ice thick-
ness measurements but which served admir-
ably for obtaining bottom samples with an
orange peel sampler. A hand winch mount-
ed on a 1-ton sled was towed by the Rat
vehicle or weasel and when in deeper wa-
ter the sampler was hauled up by running
the vehicle out on the ice away from the
hole rather than by laborious hand wind-
ing of the winch. The results of the series
of bottom samples, together with those
obtained from samples taken on the
Glacier, are given in Table 1. Location
of the samples are shown in Figure 1.
Station GL-27 was an orange peel sample
taken off the Frazier Islets and is included
for comparison of the cove samples with
the deeper bottom sediments of Vincennes
Bay. Station 1 is located about 30 feet
from the edge of the shoreline at the head
of “Ramp” Cove, station 6 about 30 yards
out in the cove from station 1. The other
stations in succession were 60 yards apart
as far as station 5, and 120 yards apart
from then on into Newcomb Bay. CL-16
was taken from the Glacier off the entrance
to “Ramp” Cove.
Table 1 summarizes some of the results
obtained from field inspection of the fresh
samples and laboratory analysis of the
sediments, particularly in regard to size
analysis and statistical measures. It will
be noted that within the cove the sedi-
ments are coarse and relatively well sorted,
while out in Newcomb Bay the sediment
becomes much finer and sorting is poor.
None of the pebbles examined appeared to
be freshly deposited but gave indications
of long residence in the area. Most quartz
grains exhibited a glassy surface texture.
Frosted grains in samples 2, 3, 4 and 7
possibly suggest the existence of old beach
lines. Most of the pebbles were composed
of gneissic or banded quartzite, with bio-
tite the most abundant accessory mineral.
Some garnet was present but this mineral
was not nearly as abundant as its com-
mon and wide-spread occurence on the ex-
posed rocks of the area would appear to
indicate. Sand grains were almost all of
medium sphericity with angular or sub-
angular configurations. Quartz was the
10
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
Bottom samples taken in “Ramp” Cove, Newcomb Bay and Vincennes Bay. Abbreviations;
F = fathoms; M D G = medium dark gray; Gr 01 = grayish olive; L OG = light olive gray:
M 0 B = medium olive brown; L 0 B = light olive brown; Veget = vegetable like odor.
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
11
dominant mineral with feldspar, biotite,
hornblende and garnet subdominant min-
erals.
Organic remains in the samples varied
considerably from station to station de-
pending upon the nature of the bottom
sediment. The bottom of “Ramp” Cove is
pretty well covered with both brown
colored and bright red colored algae which
are attached to rocks on the substratum
and have long kelp-like fronds. At sta-
tion 1, the bottom was entirely gravel and
bare of organic material while at the next
station out in the cove some annelid worms
were recovered. The third station also
showed in addition to annelids, some clam
shell fragments. Although repeated at-
tempts were made with various devices to
obtain some of the living clams, which
could clearly be seen on the bottom, it
appeared that the clams were able to
burrow down into the sediment faster
than they could be scooped up by dredge
or other sampling device. The shells were
extremely thin and fragile. Some razor
clam type shells had been obtained in
Newcomb Bay two years earlier on the
Glacier. Clam shell fragments and an-
nelids appeared to be the only organic
remains in the cove proper and it was
not until the deeper water of the bay was
reached at station 9 in 31% fathoms that
other organisms such as sea cucumbers,
brittle stars and sea urchins were re-
covered.
No sponge spicules such as abound in
the sediments of the McMurdo Sound
region were noted in the bottom sediments
of the cove nor in Newcomb Bay. Diatoms
were not observed until well out in the
bay at station 10. A general scarcity
of diatoms in the waters of the area around
Wilkes may possibly be explained by the
following comments. With the spring break
up of the ice at Wilkes, the water was of
unusual clarity, making photographs of
the bottom possible through several meters
of water. It was expected, from experi-
ence gained at McMurdo Sound, that by
December the planktonic growth would be
dense enough to greatly reduce the trans-
parency, but this never happened and the
water remained very clear until we left
Wilkes in early February. At McMurdo
Sound, on the other hand, the water was
very clear on 4 November 1956 when the
Glacier made an early visit, and a trans-
parency of 47 meters was obtained. By 21
December 1956 the transparency had been
reduced to 5 meters and a %-meter net
haul produced a quart jar full of a thick
mass of plankton which smelled like a
freshly opened can of raw oysters. Appar-
ently the volcanic nature of the exposed
rocks at McMurdo Sound offer more easily
soluble nutrients, especially silica, in the
spring turnover period thus causing the
dense crop of diatoms, and also probably
contributing to the abundance of silicious
sponges, which feed on the diatoms. Both
of these organisms are very much less
abundant at Wilkes, where granitic types
of rock formations provide little in the way
of nutrient materials, despite considera-
ble runoff during the summer months.
This same condition was noted by Lisi-
tzin (1959) in reporting on bottom sedi-
ments of the Indian and Pacific sectors of
the Antarctic. Lisitzin commented upon
the scarcity of diatoms near the antarctic
continent with its predominance of glacial
material composing the sediments, while
farther north the glacial material decreased
and diatoms took the leading role in sedi-
mentation. Lisitzin also pointed out that in
regions of the Indian and Pacific sectors
submarine volcanoes were associated with
zones of diatom oozes.
In conclusion it may well be said that
despite the enormous amount of informa-
tion on various phrases of Antarctica con-
tributed during the International Geophysi-
cal Year, in the fields of oceanography and
hydrography, much remains to be accom-
plished, the surface having, so far. bare-
ly been scratched. Our year at Wilkes
Station was certainly one of the most en-
joyable periods of my life, but our oceano-
graphic accomplishments were negligible
and we are looking forward to a year at
12
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
McMurdo Sound where full-time, shore-
based oceanography will be carried out
during 1959-1960. Since the voyage of the
Atka in 1954-1955, icebreakers with a
single oceanographer from the Navy
Hydrographic Office aboard, have been
contributing a certain amount of scattered
oceanographic observations in the Antarc-
tic. However, a real and worthwhile ap-
proach to antarctic oceanography will only
be made when it becomes possible to send a
specially constructed oceanographic survey
vessel with a single mission, oceanographic
research, into the area for an extended
period.
REFERENCES
Munk, Walter. 1958. The Seasonal Budget of
water. Geophysical Monograph No. 2 Am. Geo.
Un. p. 175-176.
Patullo, June, Walter Munk, Roger R. Revelle
and Elizabeth Strong. 1955. The Seasonal Oscil-
lation in Sea Level. J. Marine Res., 14, p. 88-155.
U. S. Navy Hydrographic Office. 1957. Oper-
ation DEEP FREEZE II, 1956-1957. Oceano-
graphic Survey Results. Technical Report No.
29. p. 58, 135-140.
Lisitzin, A. P. 1959. Bottom Sediments of the
Antarctic. Abstracted in Reprints, International
Oceanographic Congress, A.A.A.S. Washington,
D. C. p. 468-469
Pioneering Research in the
Department of Agriculture
William E. Carnahan
Information Division , Agricultural Research Service
“Basic research is the starting point for
the imaginative processes that lead to new
things and new ways of doing things . . .
the thought, observation, experimentation,
and analysis that give us new scientific
facts and principles.”
This is how Byron T. Shaw, administra-
tor of the Department of Agriculture’s
Agricultural Research Service, has defined
the kind of work done at the new ARS
Pioneering Research Laboratories. The
first of these special laboratories to explore
beyond the known in science was estab-
lished in the summer of 1957, and a total
of 15 are now in existence. Seven are at
ARS Agricultural Research Center, Belts-
ville, Md., two are in Washington, D. C.,
two in New Orleans, La., and four others
are at Lafayette, Ind. ; Albany, Calif.;
Peoria, 111.; and Wyndmoor, Pa.
Scientists engaged in pioneering research
are not required to justify their work with
respect to its practical results but only
from the standpoint of its contribution to
basic knowledge. Also, pioneering research
scientists are freed from routine adminis-
trative duties. And there are no super-
visors in the new laboratories, only sci-
entists working together.
The first pioneering laboratory was es-
tablished in August 1957, at Beltsville to
study the mineral nutrition of plants.
Sterling B. Hendricks, principal scientist of
this unit, and six associates are involved
with a long-range study of the process of
nutrient uptake in plants. Scientists know
that the transfer of nutrient elements from
the soil to the interior of plant roots is
controlled by the respiration of the root
and is limited by cellular barrier. The ex-
act location and character of the barrier
are unknown.
Radioisotopes are used in this work to
measure rates of nutrient uptake. What
plants do with the nutrients is one of many
questions workers in the laboratory hope
to answer.
Also established at Beltsville very early
in the history of pioneering research was
the Blood Antigens Laboratory under the
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
13
Figure 1. Discovery by a team of scientists at the Plant
Physiology Laboratory headed by Dr. Harry A. Borthwick
of a light-sensitive pigment that acts as the triggering mech-
anism for plant development may eventually enable man to
control all stages of plant growth. Dr. Borthwick showed
some of the light pigment work to Russia’s Premier Nikita
Khrushchev during the Khrushchev visit to the U. S.
leadership of Sam L. Scheinberg. Cur-
rently, Dr. Scheinberg and his associates,
who concern themselves with blood chem-
istry and immunogenetics, are studying the
somatic variation of red cell antigens.
Variants have been found among red cells
which lack antigens found in most blood
cells. In man, A-negative cells have been
found to occur spontaneously at a fre-
quency of one per 1000. Similar and
higher frequencies of inagglutinable cells
have been found in pigeons and are
thought, perhaps, to be due to spontaneous-
ly occurring mutations. To support this
hypothesis, it was recently found that, fol-
lowing irradiation in both man and pig-
eons, an increase in inagglutinable cells
occurs.
Perhaps the most important single find
made so far in pioneering research efforts
was the discovery of a pigment in plants
that acts as a triggering mechanism for all
plant development. The discovery was made
at the Plant Physiology Laboratory at
Beltsville where the principal scientist is
Harry A. Borthwick. The finding may open
the way eventually to man’s complete con-
trol of plant growth from germination
through flowering and fruiting.
The pigment, named phytochrome, is
present in plants in very minute quantities,
and pioneering research workers have
found out much about it. For example,
they know that it is blue because it ab-
sorbs red light. They also know that it
takes two reversible forms — one that ab-
sorbs red light, and the other that absorbs
far-red light. Experiments show that, when
the red-absorbing form is exposed to red
light, it reverts to the form that absorbs
far-red light. Far-red light, in turn, causes
the pigment to revert to the red-absorbing
form.
The scientists have removed the pigment
from corn seedlings and are now attempt-
ing to purify it and identify it chemically.
Dr. Borthwick and his associates are
thus seeking to learn more about the ways
in which plants are influenced by their en-
vironment with special emphasis on their
response to light.
The Cellular Metabolism Laboratory, in
the ARS Institute of Home Economics at
Beltsville, is under the leadership of How-
ard Reynolds. Scientists in this group are
developing new basic information on
cellular nutrition, physiology, and biochem-
istry, using microorganisms such as algae,
bacteria, protozoa, yeasts, and molds as
experimental tools. The use of microor-
ganisms in this way is based on recogni-
tion that all organisms have much in com-
mon and that a new understanding of one
often leads to a new understanding of
others. For example, vitamins that func-
tion in the metabolism of microorganisms
also play essential roles in human and ani-
mal nutrition and, as far as is known, the
enzymatic functions of individual vitamins
are identical in all organisms.
The Insect Pathology and the Insect
Physiology pioneering laboratories are in
the ARS Entomology Research Division at
Beltsville. Clarence G. Thompson is leader
of the Insect Pathology group. He and his
14
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
associates are seeking to gain a funda-
mental understanding of the nature of
microorganisms that cause diseases of in-
sects. Environments in which microor-
ganisms are capable of causing disease out-
breaks in insect populations are being
analyzed, and the scientists are trying also
to determine how insect diseases start and
spread in nature in hope that their findings
will be useful in controlling insect popu-
lations. What happens to insect cells when
they are invaded by a virus is also being
investigated as well as how the viruses in-
vade the cells, and how they multiply with-
in the insect.
The Insect Physiology group, under the
leadership of William E. Robbins, studies
the normal life processes of insects, in-
cluding endocrine systems, development,
sensory perception, and reproduction. In
addition to increasing man’s knowledge of
insect physiology and biochemistry, this
work may provide clues to insect responses
to chemicals and the development of insect
resistance to insecticides.
Russell L. Steere heads a group working
in the Plant Virology Laboratory at Belts-
ville. Here, the scientists are attempting to
learn what happens after a virus enters a
plant and how the virus reproduces within
the plant cells. They are also studying the
relationship between various plant viruses
and plant response to them. Viruses are
being purified to study their chemical and
physical properties, and new serological
techniques for identifying plant viruses are
being developed.
Dr. Steere is also developing new tech-
niques for preparing biological specimens
for electron microscopy. By modification
of the frozen replica technique that he re-
cently developed, he hopes to be able to
follow the course of virus reproduction
within infected cells.
Two pioneering laboratories are located
in New Orleans at the ARS Southern Utili-
zation Research and Development Division.
One is the Seed Protein Laboratory, under
the direction of Aaron M. Altschul. Dr.
Altschul’s group is seeking basic knowledge
Figure 2. Dr. Sterling B. Hendricks, principal scientist at
the Laboratory for Mineral Nutrition of Plants, examines
chromatograph negative of barley root extract. Such photo-
material helps in the study of translocation of plant nutrients.
of the proteins, fats, and other components
of seed as they occur naturally in the seed
before processing treatments have changed
the nature of the constituents. Homogeniz-
ing the oilseed and separation of individual
subcellular particles by gentle physical
means, are among the techniques used.
Purification of individual proteins fur-
nishes materials that can be studied to de-
termine the amino-acid sequence and other
structural factors of plant proteins. It is
hoped that this information will permit
comparison of the fundamental structure
of seed protein with other plant and animal
proteins.
The Plant Fibers Laboratory, also at
New Orleans, is designed to develop basic
information on the structure of plant
fibers (with special emphasis on cotton),
and the relationship of this structure to
fiber properties. The information gained
in this research may assist in predicting
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
15
effects of chemical and physical treatments
on fibers. Knowing these effects in ad-
vance may help other scientists eliminate
or minimize the need to conduct experi-
ments on a trial-and-error basis. Carl Con-
rad is principal scientist of this group.
At the Laboratory for Microbiological
Chemistry in the ARS Northern Utilization
Research and Development Division at
Peoria, a group under Frank H. Stodola
seeks to discover fundamental principles
underlying metabolic synthesis in micro-
organisms. Recently, they investigated the
mechanisms by which yeast converts glu-
cose into more complex chemicals. A
thorough knowledge of these processes
may help to control them for beneficial
purposes.
A group at the regional utilization re-
search laboratory in Albany, Calif., called
the Plant Enzyme Laboratory, is develop-
ing basic knowledge to advance the utiliza-
tion of plants and plant products. Here,
Eugene F. Jansen, biochemist, and three
associates are currently working on two
problems: One of these is concerned with
the biosynthesis of ascorbic acid in fruit
and the discovery and characterization of
the specific enzymes involved in the reac-
tion chain of this synthesis. The other is
concerned with the biochemistry involved
in speeding up the post-harvest ripening of
fruit by ethylene gas.
Milk proteins are being analyzed at the
Laboratory for the Chemistry of Animal
Proteins at Wyndmoor, Pa., under the
leadership of T. L. McMeekin. Studies
there have already shown that the
caseins, albumins, and globulins making
up these proteins are not pure substances,
but similar fractions of slightly differing
properties. As the fractions are separated,
isolated, and identified, information is ob-
tained that may have profound effects on
the future science and technology of milk
and milk products.
A pioneering laboratory in animal
genetics has been organized at Lafayette,
Ind., under the leadership of Wendell H.
Kyle who is working on quantitative
genetics. The group is associated with the :
Population Genetics Research Institute at .
Purdue University.
Inheritance, gene behavior, mutations, ,
mating systems, selection, and environ-
mental factors affecting genetic traits of .
animals are under study at this laboratory.
The scientists use laboratory animals, such i
as mice and fruit flies, for theoretical and
mathematical studies of genetic problems, ,
where gene actions, mating systems, and I
selection systems are described. New meth- J
ods of selection and new systems of breed- l
ing are evaluated, and new mutations that
might be produced are investigated.
Henry Stevens is principal scientist in .
the Laboratory on Allergens in Agricultural
Products in Washington. He and his asso-
ciates are conducting basic research on r
the chemistry and immunology of allergens. ,
They are concerned with finding out just
how these materials produce allergic re-
sponses. The principles they establish will
be useful in the processing of agricultural
products to reduce or eliminate allergic
effects. This laboratory is contributing to
the little-known science of immunochem- •
istry and thus to human health.
The 15th, and newest, of the pioneering i
research groups has been organized for the .
study of interfirm integration in farming
and is under the leadership of Ronald L.
Mighell, agricultural economist.
Interfirm integration in farming refers !
to the ways by which production decisions,
services, and risks are linked between farm-
ers and related businesses. Dr. Mighell’s
group is analyzing the basic economic
principles and related social and techno-
logical forces underlying the development
of the various forms of integration and •
coordination in farm production. They are
working toward improved understanding
of the economic reasons for true produc-
tion coordination.
All the ARS pioneering research labora-
tories together serve as a training ground
for future U. S. scientific leaders and offer
new and expanding opportunities for young
scientists to grow and develop.
16
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
Science in Washington
SCIENTISTS IN THE NEWS
This column will present brief items concern-
ing the activities of members of the Academy.
Such items may include notices of talks given,
important conferences or visits, promotions,
awards, election to membership or office in sci-
entific and technical societies, appointment to
technical committees, civic activities, and mar-
riages, births, and other family news. Formal
contributors are being assigned for the systematic
collection of news at institutions employing con-
siderable numbers of Academy members ( see
list on masthead). However, for the bulk of the
membership, we must rely on individuals to
send us news concerning themselves and their
friends. Contributions may be addressed to
S. B. Detwiler, Jr., Associate Editor, 2605 S.
8th St., Arlington, Va.
Coast and Geodetic Survey
Dean S. Carder served on a panel of seis-
mologists and physicists that met April 21 before
the Joint Congressional Committee on Atomic
Energy. The panel was concerned with possibili-
ties of detecting underground nuclear explosions.
Geological Survey
Francis R. Fosberg attended a conference on
tropical botanical problems of concern to the
United States, held May 5-7 at the Fairchild
Tropical Gardens, Coconut Grove, Fla.
Louis W. Currier, a member of the Geo-
logical Survey since 1930, retired from the staff
on May 31.
George Washington University
H. George Mandel attended the recent 51st
Annual Meeting of the American Association for
Cancer Research and the 44th Annual Meeting
of the Federation of American Societies for Ex-
perimental Biology, both held in Chicago.
Harris Research Laboratories
Alfred E. Brown attended a meeting of the
Scientific Research Advisory Committee of the
Washington Board of Trade on March 14, and
discussed the Committee’s recommendations on
how to foster research and development in Wash-
ington. On March 24-25, he attended the 30th
Annual Meeting of the Textile Research Institute
in New York City, and was chairman of the
session on new textile fibers.
Dr. Brown and John Menkarl attended the
Second Quinquennial Wool Textile Research Con-
ference at Harrogate, England, on May 18-28,
where Dr. Brown presented a paper entitled
“Development of Wash-and-Wear Wool Fabrics
for Modern Home Laundering.”
National Bureau of Standards
Irwin H. Fullmer, chief of the Engineering
Metrology Section, has received a certificate from
the Board of Codes and Standards in appreciation
of his outstanding leadership in the development
of standards and codes.
Allen V. Astin, director of the Bureau, was
one of 35 scientists elected to membership in
the National Academy of Sciences at the Acad-
emy’s 97th annual meeting here, on April 26.
John K. Taylor, Director of Science Projects
under the NSF grant to the Wash. Academy,
has been elected to membership on the Board
of Directors of the Metallurgy-Ceramics Foun-
dation, Inc. which was established as an out-
growth of a study by a Special Committee on
Manpower for the Metallurgical and Ceramics
Professions. The Foundation, which has head-
quarters in Latrobe, Pa., is dedicated to “the
advancement of learning in the fields of metal-
lurgy, metallurgical engineering, ceramics, ceramic
engineering, and allied fields of science, and to
encourage the study of the same by more and
better qualified students . . .”.
To illustrate the role of scientific meetings in
today’s research, our contributor has compiled
the following list of papers presented by WAS
members at NBS during late March and April:
Samuel N. Alexander, “Data Reduction and
Computation in Relation to Space Instrumenta-
tion”— American Institute of Electrical Engineer-
ing in Space Technology, Dallas, April 13.
Vincent E. Bower, “The Dissociation Con-
stants of Three Ethanolamines” — American
Chemical S’ociety, Cleveland, April 12.
Lewis M. Branscomb, “The Determination
of Temperatures in Gases by Spectroscopy”—
Symposium on Optical Spectrometric Measure-
ments of High Temperatures, University of Chi-
cago, March 25.
Abner Brenner, “A Visit to a Scientific Con-
ference in Moscow” — American Electroplater’s
Society, Pittsburgh Branch, April 13, and Tri-
state Annual Meeting of American Electroplater’s
Society, Cincinnati, April 23.
Frank R. Caldwell, “Intercomparison of
Thermocouple Response Data” — Society of Auto-
motive Engineers, New York, April 5.
Forest K. Harris, “Basis of Electrical Stand-
ards”— New York Section of the American In-
stitute of Electrical Engineers, Hicksville, Long
Island, April 27.
Charles M. Herzfeld, “The Evaluation of
Modern Physics” — University of Maryland Chap-
ter of Sigma Pi S'igma, Physics Honor Society,
Washington, April 12.
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
17
John D. Hoffman, “Theory of Chain Fold-
ing of Polymer Molecules in Dilute Solution” —
American Physical Society, Detroit, March 23.
Julius L. Jackson, “Electric Field Distribu-
tion in a Dense Plasma” — American Physical So-
ciety, Washington, April 25-28.
Deane B. Judd, “Color-vision Theory, Impli-
cations and Applications” — Armed Forces NRC
Committee on Vision, Cleveland, April 5.
Lewis V. Judson, “Can You Measure It?” —
Metrology Seminar, AAAS, Chicago, April 21-28.
Harry J. Keegan, “Spectrophotometry 190 to
2500 Millimicrons” — Optical Society of America,
Washington, April 7-9.
Carl C. Kiess, “Evidence for Oxides of Nitro-
gen in the Atmosphere of Mars” — National Acad-
emy of Sciences, Washington, April 25-27.
Lawrence M. Kushner, “The Growth of
Crystals from the Vapor; Recent Experiments at
NBS with Zinc” — Southeastern Section of the
American Physical Society, Gatlinburg, Tenn.,
April 7-9.
Samuel L. Madorsky, “Thermal Degradation
of Polymers” — Brooklyn Polytechnic Institute,
Brooklyn, April 23.
Ladislaus Morton, “Some Aspects of Elec-
tron Physics” — Local Chapter of Sigma Phi
Sigma, Washington, April 13.
Robert S. Marvin, “J. D. Ferry as a Scientist
and Teacher” — American Chemical Society, Cleve-
land, April 12.
Alvin G. McNish, “The Twentieth Part of
One Poor Scruple” — Annual Conference of
Technical Societies, Council of New Jersey, New-
ark, March 29.
Archibald T. McPherson, “Standards— Good
and Bad” — Allentown-Bethlehem Section, Amer-
ican Society for Quality Control, Allentown, Pa.,
April 13.
Sanford B. Newman, “Microscopy with Elec-
trons and X-rays” — Carnegie Institution, Geo-
physical Laboratory, Washington, April 28.
Irwin Oppenheim, “Solvent Effect on In-
ternal Rotations of Linear Polymer Molecules” —
American Chemical Society, Cleveland, April 6.
George C. Paffenbarger, “Dimensional
Changes Occurring in Artificial Dentures During
Processing and in S'ervice”— Odontographic So-
ciety of Chicago, April 4, and “Evaluation of
Available Materials for Dental Impressions, Den-
tal Restorations, and Denture Base Materials” —
11th Mid-Atlantic States Conference on Dentistry,
Hershey, Pa., April 25-28.
Aaron S. Posner, “X-ray Diffraction Studies
on Contraction in High Polymers” — Harvard
Medical School, Biophysics Colloquium, Boston,
March 31, and “The Crystal Chemistry of Calci-
fied Tissue” — Section on Pathodontia, First Dis-
trict Dental Society of New York, April 11.
James B. Saunders, Sr., “Measurement of
Wave Fronts Without a Reference Standard” —
Optical Society of America, Washington, April 7.
Hubert R. Snoke, “Roofing Research” — As- ri
phalt Roofing Industry Bureau, Chicago, March 24.
Robert D. Stiehler, “Developments in Rub-
ber Laboratory Testing” — Quality Control Con- i
ference for Rubber Companies, White Sulphur
Springs, Pa., April 28.
Lauriston S. Taylor, “Radiation Protection
Standards” — PHS Radio Nuclides in Foods il
Course, Taft Engineering Center, Cincinnati, |
April 19, and “Historical Development of Radi-
ation Protection Standards” — Cincinnati Radi- j
ation Society, Cincinnati, April 19.
Edward Wichers, “The Work of the National
Bureau of Standards” — Lorain County Society of
Professional Engineers, Lorain, O., April 13.
William J. Youden, “What’s in Measure-
ment”— Mathematics Club, Roosevelt High School, !
Washington, March 31, and “Everyday Applica- ^
tion of Statistics” — Montgomery County Mathe- jj,
matics Teacher’s Association, Bethesda, Md., J
April 6.
Naval Research Laboratory
William A. Zisman was the principal speaker
at the “Frontiers of Chemistry” lectures held ?!
March 25, under the sponsorship of Western Re-
serve University. His subject was “Surface Ac-
tivity in Non-aqueous Liquids.” On the same day ;
he spoke before the staff of the Standard Oil
Company of Ohio. Dr. Zisman also recently 9
addressed the members of the Chicago Section n
of the American Chemical Society.
Herbert Friedman delivered an invited paper
on “Optical Experiments in Rockets and Satel-
lites” before the Optical Society of America at t
its spring meeting, held here in early April. On ;
April 11, Dr. Friedman spoke on “Instrumenta- i.
tion for Space Science” at the AIEE 1960 Con- .
ference on Electrical Engineering in Space Tech-
nology, held in Dallas. He also presented an
invited paper on April 28 at the annual meting r-
of the National Academy of Sciences, on the
subject, “Survey of Observations of Solar Ultra- :
violet and X-Rays.”
USDA, Beltsville
C. H. Hoffmann of the Entomology Research
Division presented a paper, “Relation of Insecti- '
cides to Fish and Wildlife,” before a meeting of
the North Central States Branch of the Entomo-
logical Society of America, held March 24 in «
Milwaukee.
USDA, Washington
Robert W. Webb is now rounding out 40
years of continuous service on the Department’s
scientific staff, the last 33 years of which have ■:
been devoted to cotton fiber technology. He is
generally referred to by his professional asso-
ciates as being the “father of cotton fiber tech-
nology in America.” During the next several i
18
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
years before his retirement from active service,
Dr. Webb will be engaged in evaluating some
complex relationships of importance to both pres-
ent and future cotton fiber technology. These
statistical investigations are of a highly explora-
tory nature; and as a consequence, Dr. Webb con-
tinues today to be a pioneer in his final plateau
of official work, no less than he was during the
early days of his program for the development of
cotton fiber technology in the United States,
over 30 years ago.
National Academy of Sciences
The 97th Annual Meeting of the National
Academy of Sciences, held April 25-27, 1960,
elected 35 new members. Five of these were mem-
bers of the Washington Academy of Sciences:
Allen V. Astin, director of the National Bureau
of Standards; Herbert Friedman, U.S. Naval
Research Laboratory; Karl F. Herzfeld, pro-
fessor of physics and head of department. Catho-
lic University; Richard N. Tousey, U.S’. Naval
Research Laboratory; and Robert J. Huebner,
chief, Laboratory of Infectious Diseases, Nat.
Inst, of Allergy and Infectious Diseases, NIH
(resigned WAS, 1959).
Four WAS members presented papers during
the National Academy meetings: C. G. Abbot,
Smithsonian Institution, “A Forecast of United
States Precipitation Through 1967”; Edward V.
Evarts, NIH, “Effects of Sleep and Waking on
Single Cortical Neurons”; C. B. Anfinsen, Jr.,
NIH, “Topology and Topography of the Genetic
Fine Structure”; Herbert Friedman, Naval Re-
search Laboratory, “Survey of Observations of
Solar Ultraviolet and X-rays”. David McK.
Rioch, Walter Reed, lead a symposium discus-
sion; Leonard Carmichael, Smithsonian Insti-
tution, was chairman of a Symposium on Current
Investigations on the Brain and Behavior.
Alan T. Waterman, director, National Science
Foundation, received the Academy’s Public Wel-
fare Medal for “eminence in the application of
science to the public welfare”. The honor medal
is unique in recognizing public service in the
uses of science rather than achievement in any
particular scientific discipline.
DEATHS
Reno Gutenberg, geophysicist, died in Pasa-
dena, Calif., on January 25, at the age of 70.
A native of Darmstadt, Germany, Dr. Gutenberg
studied under Emil Wiechert at the University
of Gottingen, where he received the Ph.D. degree
in 1911. He remained at Gottingen for some
years, later serving with the International Seis-
mological Central Station in Strasbourg, and as
professor at the University of Frankfort. In
1930 he was called to California Institute of Tech-
nology as professor of geophysics and meteor-
ology. Later he was appointed first director of
the Seismological Laboratory, a position which
he occupied until his retirement in 1957.
Among his many outstanding accomplishments,
Dr. Gutenberg was especially recognized for his
computation of the depth of the earth’s core —
2900 km, a value that still stands — and his pub-
lication with Richter of the several editions of
“Seismicity of the Earth.” His particular dis-
covery, according to Perry Byerly (Science, April
1), was the low-velocity layer in the earth just
below the Mohorovic discontinuity.
Paul Bartsch, internationally-known biologist,
died April 24 at “Lebanon,” his 458-acre home
and wildlife preserve on the Potomac near Mount
Vernon. He was 89.
A native of Silesia, Dr. Bartsch was brought
to the United States at the age of 11 and raised
in Iowa. He received the master’s and Ph.D.
degrees from the University of Iowa.
Dr. Bartsch retired in 1941 from his post as
curator of mollusks at the National Museum, but
remained active as a consultant until his death.
In 1945 he retired as professor emeritus of George
Washington University’s Zoology Department,
which he established in 1900 with a class of four
students. He introduced botany and biology
into the University’s curriculum, and started
graduate work in the natural sciences.
Dr. Bartsch also taught for 37 years at Howard
University’s Medical School, directing the histori-
cal and Physiological laboratory. He was elected
to the Washington Academy in 1906, and re-
tired in 1948.
Peter Chrzanowski, 49, a physicist and ex-
pert on acoustics at the National Bureau of Stand-
ards, died April 11 of a heart attack, at his home
in Chevy Chase. Born in New Britain, Conn.,
Mr. Chrzanowski joined the Bureau staff in 1929;
he graduated in physics from George Washing-
ton University in 1937.
In 1941, Mr. Chrzanowski worked with Paul
Heyl in their classic determination of the gravi-
tational constant. He was awarded the Depart-
ment of Commerce silver medal for meritorious
service in 1952. At the time of his death he was
head of the NBS Infrasonics Group, which last
year received the Department’s gold medal for
exceptional service in classified defense work.
AFFILIATED SOCIETIES
Acoustical Society of America, Washington
Chapter
April 26, colloquium on “Architecture, Acous-
tics, and Electronics in Modern Architectural
Acoustics,” with Harold Burris-Meyer, John W.
Mcleod, Horace Trent, and Albert Preisman: a
joint meeting with the Washington Chapter of
the American Institute of Architects, the Wash-
ington Audio Society, and the Professional Group
on Audio of the Washington Chapter of IRE —
8 P.M., in the Pan American Room of the Stat-
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
19
ler, preceded by the usual informal dinner at
Alfonso’s, 1403 L Street, N.W.
American Institute of Electrical Engineers,
Washington Section
April 26, Technical Meeting, “Design Theory
of Dulles International Airport,” Herbert H.
Howell, Federal Aviation Agency.
American Meteorological Society, District of
Columbia Branch
May 18, “Current Problems in Synoptic Me-
teorology,” Harlin Saylor, U. S’. Weather Bureau.
American Society of Mechanical Engineers,
Washington Section
May 12, “Ground Effect Machines,” Major
J. J. Wosser, 8 P.M., PEPCO Auditorium.
May 26, “Response of Ships to Underwater
Explosions,” Alfred Keil.
Botanical Society of Washington
May 5, Annual Dinner, University Methodist
Church, College Park, Md., featuring an address
by Justice William 0. Douglas.
Chemical Society of Washington
The Society held its 698th meeting on April 14
in the John Wesley Powell Auditorium of the
Cosmos Club. Sir Eric K. Rideal, professor
emeritus of King’s College, University of London,
addressed the group on “Chemical Reactions in
Adsorbed Monolayers.” Prior to the general
meeting, the Board of Managers entertained Sir
Eric at dinner, but transacted no business.
The Society held its 699th meeting on May 6
at the University of Maryland. This was a
“meeting-in-miniature,” conducted jointly with
the Maryland Section of the American Chemical
Society. In afternoon and evening sessions, over
50 technical papers were presented in the divi-
sions of analytical, bio-, industrial and engineer-
ing, inorganic, organic, and physical chemistry.
In addition to the technical papers, a general
program featured tours of the Maryland Chem-
istry Department; a popular lecture on “Science
and Magic” by Samuel Shapiro of the Engineer
Research & Development Laboratories at Ft.
Belvoir; presentation of awards to the chemistry
winners at the recent area science fairs, and to
their chemistry teachers; and a dinner at which
the principal speaker was Richard L. Kenyon,
editorial director of ACS applied journals, who
discussed “The Future of the American Chem-
ical Society Publications.”
A special women’s program was highlighted
by a lecture, “How the Food and Drug Admin-
istration Protects Your Health,” by Daniel Banes
of FDA’s Bureau of Biological and Physical
Sciences.
Columbia Historical Society
May 14, Heurich Mansion, Mrs. Frank P. How-
ard on “The Friday Morning Music Club, a
Record of 75 Years.”
May 22, Fort Myer Museum and Reviewing
Area, program on the “History of Fort Myer.”
Geological Society of Washington
April 25-28, The Geological Society of Wash-
ington acted as host society for the annual meet-
ings of the American Association of Petroleum
Geologists and the Society of Economic Min-
eralogists and Paleontologists, Atlantic City. The
President, Harry S. Ladd, served as General Chair-
man for the convention.
Society awards for the earth sciences at the
D. C. Science Fair this year were as follows:
Senior High — Leonard Vacher (mineral content
of the sediments of the Rock Creek tributaries) ;
9th Grade — Antoinette Bonanno (identification of
gemstones) ; 8th Grade — Adele Ichilian (evolu-
tion of the horse) ; 7th Grade — Louis Lawwill
(craters of the moon).
Entomological Society of Washington
May 5, “The Work of the Plant Quarantine
Division,” M. H. Sartor, USDA, “The Hidden
Menace,” a movie, and Science Fair winners and
their entomological exhibits.
Insecticide Society of Washington
April 20, “Control of Pests on Ornamentals in
Home Gardens,” by Floyd F. Smith, USDA, and
“Application Equipment and Gadgets for Ap-
plying Pesticides,” Robert V. Travis, Garden
Pest Control, Greenbelt, Md.
May 18, symposium on pesticide residues, fea-
turing a panel of specialists from various agencies
dealing with these problems.
Institute of Radio Engineers, Washington
Section
Section meetings held first Monday of each
month. Perpetual Building Auditorium.
International Association for Dental
Research, Washington Section
May 2, Guest Night, dinner at Walter Reed
Army Medical Center Officers Club, 6:00 P.M.;
meeting Room 276, Institute of Research, “The
National Health Service in England — its Ad-
vantages and Disadvantages,” Alexander B. Mac-
Gregor, The Medical School, Birmingham, Eng.
Society for Experimental Biology and
Medicine, District of Columbia Section
June 2, Annual Dinner Meeting. Program on
Advances in Tumor Virus Research: “Host Re-
sponse,” Sarah E. Stewart, NIH; “Character-
istics of Tumor Viruses,” Bernice Eddy, NIH.
ACADEMY ACTIVITIES
Board of Managers, April Meeting
These notes are intended to outline briefly, for
the information of the membership, the principal
20
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
actions taken at Board meetings. They are not
the official Minutes as prepared by the Secre-
tary.— Ed.
The Board of Managers held its 528th meeting
on April 19 at NBS, with President Wood pre-
siding.
The minutes of the 527th meeting was approved
as previously circulated, without correction.
Dr. Wood reported that the Executive Commit-
tee had agreed on a price of $1.00 for copies of
the Directory and back issues of the Journal;
also, that the end of March had been set as a
cutoff date for the receipt of requests for emeritus
status.
Chairman Stiehler of the Meetings Committee
announced that at the May meeting. Dr. Baker
of the Bell Telephone Laboratories would speak
on analogies between solid state and biological
systems.
Chairman Hall of the Membership Committee
presented, for first reading, the names of eight
candidates for membership. He announced that
59 additional proposals for membership were
being processed by the Committee.
In the absence of Chairman Van Evera of the
Committee on Grants-in-Aid, Dr. Wood reported
that no student applications for aid were cur-
rently on file. Dr. Specht mentioned receipt of
a reminder from AAAS, to the effect that the
$900 still available from 1959 and 1960 grants to
the Academy would be lost if not spent within
two years.
Leo Schubert reported for the Committee on
Encouragement of Science Talent that (1) he
had responded favorably to a questionnaire from
the St. Louis Academy, asking whether a na-
tional meeting of junior academies of science
would be desirable; (2) the Washington Junior
Academy is now publishing its own journal, in
mimeographed form; and (3) concerning the
problem raised at a previous Board meeting by
Dr. Robbins for the Society of American Bac-
teriologists, on improved rules for the develop-
ment of Science Fair exhibits, the problem was
under study by a committee of the Joint Board.
Dr. Wood reported receipt of a letter from the
AAAS Academy Conference, asking our views
on whether a strong National Junior Academy
of Science should be formed; whether each local
junior academy should remain under the spon-
sorship of the corresponding senior academy,
where there is one; whether the national junior
academy should be sponsored by the AAAS Acad-
emy Conference; and whether the national junior
academy would interfere with the operations of
any existing youth science group. After some
discussion, the Board agreed that the first three
questions should be answered affirmatively, and
the last one negatively.
Dr. Stiehler presented for second reading the
names of three candidates previously proposed for
Academy membership, as follows: Basil deB.
Darwent, Ellsworth S. Obourn, and David Rosen-
blatt. These candidates were then elected to
membership.
In the absence of Chairman Shepard of the
Committee on Bylaws, Dr. Wood reported that
the Committee is continuing work on a revision
of the Standing Rules.
Dr. Specht reported the following figures on
Academy membership: Local active, 761; local
emeritus, 65; non-resident active, 185; non-resi-
dent emeritus, 60; honorary, 6; total, 1077.
Treasurer Aslakson reported that for the quar-
ter ended March 31, receipts were $6,267 and
disbursements were $6,976.
Announcement was made that the Philosophi-
cal Society expects to publish important talks in
Physics Today. It is hoped that reprints of these
papers can be bound with other material and
issued at intervals as the Bulletin of the Philo-
sophical Society of Washington, Series 2.
Elected to Academy Membership
The following scientists have been elected to
membership in the Washington Academy of
Science :
Roy J. Barker, Agr. Res. Service, USD A
Robert F. Blunt, Nat. Bur. Standards
Richard F. Davis, Univ. of Maryland
Lafe R. Edmunds, Nat. S'c. Foundation
Robert B. Fox, Naval Res. Lab.
Alan D. Franklin, Nat. Bur. Standards
S. L. Friess, Naval Med. Center
Sydney Geltman, Nat. Bur. Standards
William A. Geyger, Naval Ordnance Lab.
Stanley A. Hall, Agr. Res. Service, USDA
Ronald E. Kagarise, Naval Res. Lab.
Arnold H. Kahn, Nat. Bur. Standards
Gunnar Kullerud, Geophys. Lab.
George S. Langford, Univ. of Maryland
S. Kenneth Love, Geological Survey
Raymond L. Nace, Geological Survey
H. S’teffen Peiser, Nat. Bur. Standards
Homer W. Schamp,, Jr., Univ. of Maryland
Milton M. Slawsky, USAF, Off. Sc. Res.
Bertram Stiller, Naval Res. Lab.
Joseph T. Vanderslice, Univ. of Md.
John B. Wachman, Jr., Nat. Bur. Standards
Madelyn Womack, U. S. Dept. Agric.
JOINT BOARD
The Washington Academy of Sciences is the
recipient of a grant from the National Science
Foundation in the amount of $34,990 for the pur-
pose of conducting a science education program
during 1960-61. The Joint Board on Science
Education has been designated by the Academy
to administer the grant and the program that it
supports.
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
21
The objectives of the science education pro-
gram are defined as follows: (a) to bring about a
more vigorous effort in science education at the
community level; (b) to encourage experimental
approaches to the improvement of education in
which scientists work in close cooperation with
secondary schools. Four projects are planned to
implement the program.
Project I involves the development of a roster
of scientists and engineers willing to assist in
educational activities and making it available to
the schools of the area. A start was made in
this direction during the current year when mem-
bers of the Academy and other interested sci-
entists were contacted to indicate their willing-
ness to participate. An all-out effort will be
made in the coming school year to publicize the
roster, and develop the procedure by which it
might be most effectively used. Members of the
Academy who wish to add their names to the
roster are invited to do so.
Projects II and III are concerned with the
support of experimental courses being developed
by several schools in the area with the purpose
of getting better correlation between science and
mathematics instruction. Advisory committees of
scientists assist in the planning and evaluation of
course content and actively aid local programs
in various ways. Project I is concerned with
junior high school courses while Project III re-
lates to the upper elementary school level. An
allocation of $22,000 has been made for these
projects.
A series of round-table discussions on the
teaching of science and mathematics is designated
as Project IV. As in the past year, it is planned
to sponsor conferences in each of the neighboring
areas of Maryland, Virginia, and the District of
Columbia for each of the disciplines of biology,
chemistry, mathematics, and physics, in which
scientists, teachers, and university instructors
will discuss both course content and teaching
problems. Additionally, a new feature will be a
series of conferences on junior high school mathe-
matics and science in which junior high school
and senior high school teachers will meet with
scientists to discuss educational matters.
Dr. John K. Taylor of the National Bureau of
Standards continues to serve as Director of the
program. The grant provides for retaining a full-
time secretary and a part-time executive secre-
tary who are concerned with the administrative
details. Both are located in the Academy office,
1530 P Street, N.W., Washington 5, D. C. The
telephone number is NO 7-3661.
In view of the objective of the program — to
bring about a closer cooperation between the
scientific community and the schools — members
of the Academy are invited to make known the
ways in which they are willing to participate.
SCIENCE AND
DEVELOPMENT
Once a bat flew more than 2,000 miles
across the ocean from the Pacific Coast to
Hawaii. This is dscribed as perhaps the most
remarkable mammalian flight of all time by
David H. Johnson, Smithsonian curator of mam-
mals, in a report on the present-day mammals
of the Pacific Islands. The animal was a hoary
bat, fairly common in western North America.
It has been in Hawaii for thousands of years,
and has undergone various changes, but is un-
mistakably related to the mainland variety. Prob-
ably the original Hawaiian immigrant was a
pregnant female that had lost her way in a
northward spring migration.
The world’s most accurate yardstick of
radio frequency has been established by NBS
at Sunset Canyon, west of Boulder, Colo. The
radio station, with call letters WWVL, will
transmit on the very low frequency of 20 kilo-
cycles; its range may extend as far as Hawaii.
Currently, the Bureau’s Station WWV at Belts-
ville, which transmits on such short-wave fre-
quencies as 15 megacycles, can be used to mea-
sure frequency to a few parts in ten million.
In contrast, users of the WWVL Sunset station
will be able to make measurements to one part
in 10 thousand million.
The 10th Annual Instrument Symposium
and Research Equipment Exhibit will be
held October 4-7 at the National Institutes of
Health. Chairman of the Symposium Committee
is Herman C. Ellinghausen of USDA, who is de-
veloping a scientific program in the fields of
fluorescence, infrared, activation analysis, ultra-
centrifuge, microscopy, and electrodes. In ad-
dition, manufacturers and distributors of scien-
tific equipment will present extensive displays
of modern analytical instruments.
An electronic survey system that may pro-
vide rapid, accurate means of measuring
distances and establishing positions is being
evaluated by the Army’s Engineer Research
& Development Laboratories at Fort Belvoir.
Called “Lorac,” the system can be used where
line-of-sight conditions do not exist, and for es-
tablishing positions of boats, aircraft, and land
vehicles. Using a continuous-wave unmodulated
radio transmission sent out from each end of
the line to be measured, the system can measure
distances up to 100 miles over mountains with
minimum accuracy of 1:10,000; over salt water,
the maximum range is 200 miles and the mini-
mum accuracy, 1 :45,000. To establish positions,
the system employs two baselines extended from
a central transmitting station, and a transmitter
at each end of the two baselines.
The distressing disappearance of valuable
scientific documents is one of the concerns of
22
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
a group of scientists, historians, and other spe-
cialists who met in Washington May 5-6 at the
Cosmos Club. The specific problem is not one
affecting national security but scientific scholar-
ship: how to locate and save the original papers
of great American scientists whose personal
memorabilia may otherwise be lost to mankind
forever. The Library of Congress, Smithsonian
Institution, and NAS-NRC were among the or-
ganizations represented on the conference or-
ganizing committee. Funds for the conference
were supplied by NSF.
Twenty Washington area high school
juniors — 15 boys and 5 girls — have been awarded
summer research scholarships at Georgetown Uni-
versity Medical Center. Picked from 325 appli-
cants, all with high qualifications and recom-
mendations, these young people will participate
during July and August as members of actual
research teams, working on research projects in
basic or clinical science.
The American Geophysical Union has
formed a Planning Committee on Planetary
Sciences, according to recent announcement.
Purpose of the new committee will be to ac-
commodate the increasing number of AGU mem-
bers engaged in planetary and space research
by expanding the Union’s activities in this
field. Its chairman is Homer E. Newell, Jr., of
the Office of Space Flight Programs, National
Aeronautics and Space Administration; its sec-
retary is Robert Jastrow, of NASA’s Goddard
Space Flight Center. Other members of the
12-man committee include WAS members Philip
H. Abelson, Allen H. S’hapley, E. H. Vestine,
Harry Wexler, and Charles A. Whitten.
Pre-white Kansas was not always a region
of roving, rather hostile Indian hunters.
According to Waldo R. Wedel in a recent report
of the Bureau of American Ethnology, this stage
was preceded by one of farming peoples having
some contacts with the Pueblos of the South-
west. Basically, he says, the story is one of
several millennia of hunting-gathering subsistence
economies, followed by several centuries of hor-
ticulture, with hunting again coming into the
ascendancy in the last century or two, this time
with the horse as an important adjunct. The
original hunters were living perhaps 10,000 years
ago, when large game animals of species now
extinct roamed the Kansas grasslands. Farming
was probably introduced within the Christian
Era; its subsequent intensification gave rise about
1000 AD to small village cultures, from which
developed larger communities. Just before the
white man arrived, the farmers were replaced by
wandering bison hunters; drought possibly
played a major factor in this change.
Experimental “artificial recharge” of
water-bearing rocks a few miles east of Walla
Walla, Wash., has shown the practicability of
using this means of backstopping the municipal
water supply, according to a recent Geological
Survey report. About 70 acre-feet of creek
water were injected, at an average rate of 650
gallons per minute, into a 1200-foot municipal
well penetrating the water-bearing rock formation
known as the Columbia River basalt. The
study area is one in which the structure of the
rocks limits natural recharge, and there has been
concern over the persistent lowering of water
level caused by years of pumping. With a care-
fully controlled schedule of alternating recharge
and pumping, it is believed that as much as
1000 gpm can be injected into the well during
the 9 months of the year when creek water is
available.
Dairy heifers eat sparingly and grow
slowly when fed silage made from freshly-
chopped unwilted grass-legume mixtures,
presumably because some unidentified organic
compound formed during fermentation of silage
decreases the appetite of the animals. Lane A.
Moore and J. William Thomas of USDA’s Agri-
cultural Research Center are working to identify
the compound responsible. Until more informa-
tion is obtained, they suggest that farmers wilt
their crop a few hours before ensiling, even though
this involves mowing before chopping. The
scientists found that heifers consumed about
twice as much dry matter eating wilted silage
as they did eating unwilted silage. In fact,
there was little difference between consumption
of heavily wilted silage and hay.
A new electrochemical determination of
the faraday has been accomplished at the Na-
tional Bureau of Standards by D. N. Craig and
W. J. Hamer, in collaboration with Catherine Law
and James I. Hoffman. This constant — the quan-
tity of electricity associated with a change of
one equivalent weight of the reacting substance
in any electrolytic process — was redetermined by
measuring the electrochemical equivalent of silver
dissolved by one coulomb of electricity. This,
together with the atomic weight of the silver
used, gives the new value — 96,516.4 ± 2.0
coulombs per gm equivalent on the physical
scale or 96,489.9 ± 2.0 coulombs on the chemical
scale. The increased accuracy in the faraday
afforded by this new evaluation is of major
importance in both physics and chemistry, where
the faraday enters into the determination of
other fundamental constants.
The first edition of Small-craft Chart Series
140, Fort Pierce to Miami, Fla., has just been
published by the Coast & Geodetic Survey. This
is the second chart published in Series 140, which
was designed to suit the needs of small boat own-
ers. Prior to the adoption of the small craft series,
C&GS presented four experimental formats, Series
A, B? C, and D, to thousands of small craft opera-
tors throughout the country. Upon the basis of
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
23
the comments received, Series B was the format
chosen as most suitable for the small craft series.
A re-examination of the comments received from
individuals in Florida also indicated their pref-
erence for format B plus a number of suggested
changes. This series, folio size 8-1/2 by 15-1/2
inches, consists of four sheets at the scale of
1 :40,000 and insets of active boating areas at
1 :24,000.
An all-aluminum sea water distillation unit,
the first known application of aluminum for this
purpose, is being developed by the Engineer Re-
search & Development Laboratories at Fort Bel-
voir. Equipment currently supplied to troops for
desalting sea water is fabricated of cupro-nickel.
The new equipment will be lighter, have greater
capacity, and better fuel economy, and will elim-
inate the need for large amounts of nickel
which may not be available in the event of mobi-
lization. It is currently undergoing engineer tests
near Daytona Beach.
The Geological Survey is engaged in a
terrain study of the surface of the moon
which may prove highly valuable in the selection
of a landing site for initial scientific investigation
of the moon. The study, when completed this year,
also may have an effect on the design of surface
vehicles for use on the moon, for geologic moon
investigations, and for further space exploration.
First phase of the work involved use of modern
stereoscopic methods to plot the relationships of
surface features of the moon. With this phase
completed, Survey personnel will interpret the
moon’s surface constituents, textures, and bearing
power.
A new instrument — the universal ortho-
photoscope, a photogrammetric machine that
“flattens the mountains” to the satisfaction
of the mapmakers — was exhibited by the
Geological Survey at a recent meeting in
Washington. In the new instrument, advan-
tage is taken of the stereophotogrammetric prin-
ciple to produce photographs that are free from
image displacement due to camera tilt or topo-
graphic relief. The instrument represents the
culmination of nearly a decade of research and
development in the field of uniform-scale photo-
graphy. In the present model of the orthophoto-
scope, two overlapping aerial photographs are
projected to form a three-dimensional image on a
moving screen, which has in its center a small
slit through which light passes to strike a photo-
graphic film. The operator views the images
on the screen and causes the screen and film
to raise or lower so that the slit skims
the surface of the ground as it appears to the
three-dimensional image. Thus, objects farther
from the camera are enlarged more, and those
closer to the camera are enlarged less, so that
the entire image pattern is brought to one uni-
form scale.
The lady mosquito’s “love song” is the
heat of her wings in flight. This is what at-
tracts males of the species, although actually they
cannot be credited with any true sense of hearing
comparable to that of birds or mammals. In some
way, however, the male, by means of a highly
developed and complex organ — the so-called or-
gan of Johnston in the antenna — is extremely
sensitive to certain ranges of vibrations coming
through the air. Discussing this subject in a re-
cent Smithsonian Institution report, R. E. Snod-
grass cites experiments reported elsewhere which
show that males, when subjected to the sound of
a tuning fork at 480 cps held behind a sus-
pended piece of cloth, fly at once to the source
of the sound where they exhibit typical mating
activities although no females are present. On
complete removal of the organ, however, they have
no such reaction.
Weather predictions through 1967 for 32
cities of the United States were recently released
by the Smithsonian Institution. They cover pre-
cipitation for each month and are also broken
down into four-month seasonal averages for the
use of farmers. This is apparently the first time
that anyone has ventured to forecast the monthly
rainfall eight years in advance for definite cities,
stating the exact expected percentage departures
from the normal values. The predictions were
prepared by Charles G. Abbot, the Smithsonian’s
secretary from 1928 to 1944, and are based upon
his studies of harmonic periods in solar variations.
Coast and Geodetic Survey continues ac-
tive in its program of charting obstructions
to air traffic around major transport-category
airports in the United States. During a recent
two-week period, survey parties were sent out
to cover eight airports — in the vicinity of Tusca-
loosa, Ala.; Lufkin, Tex.; Moultrie, Ga.; Modesto,
Calif.; Alexandria, La.; Vicksburg, Miss.;
Burbank, Calif.; and Beaumont, Tex. Each party
will determine the location and elevation of any
obstructions to air traffic in an area of about
50 square miles around its airport, and the
horizontal position of all aids to air navigation.
The Airport Obstruction chart series was inaugu-
rated in 1945 at the request of CAA (now
FAA) ; to date, C&GS has on issue about 450
charts, including all of the more important
airports in the United States.
Another continuing C&GS program, instituted
in 1878, is illustrated by the activities of a
10-man leveling party that was recently sent out
to determine elevations of selected points in
various directions from Augusta, Ga. The party
will determine the elevation of bench marks —
bronze discs set in concrete by an advance party,
about each mile along the route. This is called a
geodetic survey. Data are referred to mean sea
level as observed at 26 tide stations in the United
S’tates and Canada.
24
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
Vice-Presidents of the Washington Academy of Sciences
Representing the Affiliated Societies
Acoustical Society of America
Institute of the Aeronautical Sciences
Anthropological Society of Washington
Society of American Bacteriologists
Biological Society of Washington
Society for Experimental Biology and Medicine
Botanical Society of Washington
Chemical Society of Washington
American Society of Civil Engineers
International Assn, for Dental Research
American Inst, of Electrical Engineers
Washington Society of Engineers
Entomological Society of Washington
Society of American Foresters
National Geographic Society
Geological Society of Washington
Helminthological Society of Washington
Columbia Historical Society
Insecticide Society of Washington
Amer. Society of Mechanical Engineers
Medical Society of the Dist. of Columbia
American Society for Metals
American Meteorological Society
Institute of Radio Engineers
American Nuclear Society, Washington Section
Philosophical Society of Washington
Society of American Military Engineers
Richard Cook
Not Named.
Regina Flannery
Mary Louise Robbins
Herbert Friedman
Kathryn Knowlton
Herbert C. Hanson
William J. Bailey
Not Named.
Gerhard Brauer
Robert D. Elbourn
Howard S. Rappleye
Harold H. Shepard
Not Named.
Alexander Wetmore
Carle Dane
. Carlton M. Herman
U. S. Grant, III
Joseph Yuill
William G. Allen
Fred O. Coe
John A. Bennett
Morris Tepper
Robert Huntoon
Urner Liddel
Louis R. Maxwell
Not Named.
Chairmen of Committees
Lawrence A. Wood, Nat. Bureau of Standards
Robert D. Stiehler, Nat. Bureau of Standards
Wayne C. Hall, Naval Research Laboratory
Dean B. Cowie, Dept, of Terrestrial Magnetism
Archie I. Mahan, Applied Physics Laboratory
B. D. van Evera, George Washington University
A. T. McPherson, Nat. Bureau of Standards
Raymond J. Seecer, Nat. Science Foundation
Special Committees
By Laws
Library of Congress
Repres. on AAAS Council
Standing Committees
Executive
Meetings
Membership
Monographs
Awards for Scientific Achievement
Grants-in-Aid for Research
Policy and Planning
Encouragement of Science Talent
Harold H. Shepard, Dept, of Agriculture
John A. O’Keefe, Nat. Aeronautics & Space Admin.
Howard A. Meyerhoff, Scientific Manpower Commission
Return Postage Guaranteed.
Library of Arnold Arboretum WAS
22 Divinity Ave
Cambridge 3° Mass ^
Volume 50 MAY 1960 No. 5
CONTENTS
Page
Oceanographic and Hydrographic Observations at Wilkes IGY Station,
Antarctica. WILLIS L. TRESSLER 1
Pioneering Research in the Department of Agriculture.
WM. E. CARNAHAN 13
Science in Washington
Scientists in the News 17
Affiliated Societies 19
Academy Activities 20
Joint Board 21
Science and Development 22
JOURNAL
of the
WASHINGTON
ACADEMY
of
SCIENCES
•n m ^ ^
Vol. 50 • No. 6
OCTOBER 1960
JOURNAL OK THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Editor: Chester H. Page, National Bureau of Standards
Managing Editor: Ileen E. Stewart, National Science Foundation
Associate Editors
Frank L. Campbell, National Academy of Russell B. Stevens, Geo. Washington Univer-
Sciences sity
Samuel B. Detwilf.r, Jr., U.S. Dept, of Agri- John K. Taylor, National Bureau of Standards
culture
Contributors
Albert M. Stone, Applied Physics Laboratory
John A. O’Brien, Jr., Catholic University
Elliott B. Roberts, Coast & Geodetic Survey
Margaret D. Foster, Geological Survey
Russell B. Stevens, Geo. Washington University
Moddie D. Taylor, Howard University
Frank L. Campbell, NAS-NRC.
Alphonse F. Forziati, National Bureau of
Standards
Howard W. Bond, National Institutes of Health
Allen L. Alexander, Naval Research Laboratory
Victor R. Boswell, USDA, Beltsville
Harold R. Curran, USDA, Washington
William J. Bailey, University of Maryland
This Journal, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes: (1)
historical articles, critical reviews, and scholarly scientific articles, (2) original research, if the
paper, including illustrations, does not exceed 1500 words or the equivalent space, (3) notices of
meetings and proceedings of meetings of the Academy and its affiliated societies, and (4) regional
news items, including personal news, of interest to the entire membership. The Journal appears
eight times a year in January to May and October to December.
Manuscripts and original research papers should be sent to the Editor. They should
be typewritten, double-spaced, on good paper; footnotes and captions should be numbered and
submitted on a separate sheet. The Editor does not assume responsibility for the ideas expressed
by any author.
Contributions to the regular columns should be sent to the appropriate Associate
Editor whose name appears at the beginning of each column, or to one of the Contributors, listed
above. The deadline for news items is approximately three weeks in advance of publication date.
News items should be signed by the sender.
Proof of manuscripts will generally be sent to an author if he resides in the Washington
area and time allows. Otherwise the Editor will assume responsibility for seeing that copy is
followed.
Subscription rate $7.50 per yr. (U.S.)
Single issues $1.00 per copy.
Subscription Orders or requests for back numbers or volumes of the Journal, or copies of the
Proceedings, should be sent to the Washington Academy of Sciences, 1530 P St., N.W., Washing-
ton, D.C. Remittances should be made payable to “Washington Academy of Sciences”.
Claims for missing numbers will not be allowed if received more than 60 days after date
of mailing plus time normally required for postal delivery and claim. No claims will be allowed
because of failure to notify the Circulation Manager of a change of address.
Changes of address should be sent promptly to the Academy Office, 1530 P St., N.W.,
Washington, D. C. Such notification should include both old and new addresses and postal zone
number, if any.
Advertising rates may be obtained from the Managing Editor, Ileen E. Stewart, Office of
Science Information Service, National Science Foundation, Washington 25, D. C.
Reprint prices may also be obtained from the Managing Editor.
Prices of back numbers and volumes, of Monograph No. 1, “The Parasitic Cuckoos of
Africa” by Herbert Friedmann, Index to Vols. 1-40, and Proceedings may be obtained by writing
to the Academy Office.
Entered as second class matter at the Post Office, Washington, D. C. Printing by McArdle
Printing Co., Washington, D. C.
The Magnetic Field Accompanying Neuronal Activity
A New Method for The Study of The Nervous System
John H. Seipel * and Robert 1). Morrow * *
Introduction
From the time of Galvani and Volta it
has been accepted that electrical activity is
associated with the transmission of infor-
mation by the nervous system; in its ulti-
mate form this activity consists of separate
electrical impulses conducted by neurons.
The neurophysiological literature, reflect-
ing Currently accepted methods and pro-
cedures for research in this field, describes
much work measuring neuronal activity by
direct electrode implantation and other
procedures. While these methods have been
highly developed they carry certain inher-
ent limitations and inaccuracies; the most
advanced of these methods carry addition-
ally a high degree of technical difficulty
precluding their use in many laboratories.
Further, as is true for any experimental
method, information may be obtained only
within the scope of the quantities measure-
able; extension of a method to the investi-
gation of other parameters is rarely ac-
complished without great difficulty. In dis-
cussing the various methods of neurophysi-
ological research the authors concluded
that a new approach to the investigation of
neuronal activity was indicated. It was
hoped that a method might be found that
would be technically simple, accessible to
all investigators, and capable of extension
to the determination of quantities hither-
to measured indirectly.
I
* Laboratory of Experimental Neurology, Dept,
of Neurology, Georgetown University Medical
School, Washington, D. C.
* * 6324 Hazelwood Ave., Baltimore 6, Md.
Since the time of Maxwell it is a recog-
nized physical fact that an inductive field
having both electromagnetic and electro-
static components is associated with the
movement of charged particles, i.e., elec-
trical activity. These fields are directly and
rigorously dependent upon the underlying
electrical activity; measurement of such
magnetic fields gives a precise and com-
plete determination of the quantity and di-
rection of the underlying activity.
Hitherto overlooked as a possible ap-
proach to the investigation of neuronal
electrical activity, intuitively such a field
should be present and, with proper appa-
ratus, be measureable (Figure 1).
Fig. 1. The magnetic field surrounding a
conductor
In an extensive search of the literature
many publications were found that dis-
cussed various bioelectric fields and their
effects, but only one, that of Burr and
Mauro,1 draws the important and basic dis-
tinction between an electrical field, such as
exists in a potential gradient between two
electrodes in a conducting solution or sur-
rounding a conductor in an ionic medium,
and the inductive field generated by elec-
1 Burr, H. S., and Mauro, A., Yale J. Biol. Med.,
21, 457-462 (1949)
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
1
trical activity. In this paper the authors
detected and measured the electrostatic
field about a stimulated frog sciatic nerve
and found it extended to at least 12 mm. in
air from the nerve, varying from 550 mi-
crovolts at the nerve to 150 microvolts at
12 mm. These observations were then
compared with values calculated using the
equations of Lorente de No 2 and were
found to be in close agreement. It is ap-
parent, however, that Lorente de No in his
derivation used the Maxwellian equations
transformed for fields in volume conduc-
tors rather than for general inductive fields.
Neither in the above cited papers or else-
where in the literature is there a reference
to the magnetic component of the field ac-
companying the electrical activity of the
neuron.
Theoretical considerations indicate that
a magnetic field is relatively unaffected by
its surroundings and is shielded only by
ferromagnetic materials; a method of de-
tection of neuronal activity based upon
magnetic methods would be almost inde-
pendent of the tissues surrounding the
nerve and, with proper instrumentation, the
ionic properties of the tissue fluids. In
short, the magnetoneuronal activity should
be detectable at a distance, perhaps even
beyond the skin of an intact subject.
Experimental
Apparatus
For these qualitative attempts at detec-
tion of the neuronal field a DuMont Model
304A oscilloscope was modified by use of
carefully selected high-gain vertical ampli-
fier tubes and metallic shielding of its in-
put terminals; both chassis and case were
grounded directly to an earth ground. An
unmodified Weston Model 983 oscilloscope
was used when simultaneous direct record-
ing of the electrical impulse was necessary.
2 Lorente de No, R., Stud. Rockefeller Inst.
Med. Res., #131 and 132 (1947)
A Grass Model 3C stimulator was used
with carefully shielded leads and was cali-
brated against the DuMont oscilloscope.
This unit was connected to earth ground.
Because of stray fields and their inter-
fering noise it was found necessary to place
a direct ground post through the floor ex-
tending 6' below the lowest level of the
building; all electrical equipment in the
room, including lights, refrigerator, solder-
ing irons, and the various Units of the ap-
paratus described in this paper were con-
nected by heavy soldered ground straps to
this post.
Detection of the magnetic field was ac-
complished using detector heads of various
designs. Basically these heads consisted of
one or more highly compact series-wound
coils of ultra-fine copper wire and differed
only in the presence or absence of steel or
other metallic shielding and in the presence
or absence of ferrite cores within the coils.
The steel shielding was most effective in
blanking extraneous noise; in this case the
coil protruded slightly less than half of its
diameter in the direction of the nerve. The
ferrite made no measureable difference in
the sensitivity of the coil. The coils meas-
ured 2mm. x 3 mm. x 6 mm. and contained
approximately 3000 turns of copper wire;
they were completely insulated in plastic
tape and potted. The heads were mounted
on a rack and pinion arm graduated in
millimeters and could be positioned at vari-
ous distances from the nerve and at various
axis positions relative to the nerve. When
used, shielding was carefully connected to
earth grounding.
Signals from the detector were amplified
by a self-contained battery-operated two-
stage resistance-coupled preamplifier us-
ing a selected noise-free 6SC7 tube. The
entire preamplifier was contained with the
experimental subject in a specially con-
structed electrostatically shielded alumi-
num apparatus. The output from this amp-
2
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
lifier was led directly to the DuMont oscil-
loscope.
All connecting leads within the above
apparatus were doubly shielded; all other
leads were singly shielded.
Permanent recordings were taken by
Polaroid land camera, on tape using a
specially designed Product Development
Associates Mark I dual channel medical
tape recorder, and on 16 mm. motion pic-
ture film.
Synchronization was run to the AC line
to give as stable a base line as could be
obtained.
Procedure
The sciatic nerve of the American bull-
frog. R. catesbiana, was chosen for study
as it is easily obtained and has been ex-
haustively studied by classical methods.2
Selected jumbo bullfrogs were pithed and
their sciatic nerves freed from the spinal
column to the gastrocnemius muscle, ligat-
ing vessels and severing twigs where
necessary; other nerves to the thigh mus-
cles were severed to prevent as much move-
ment as possible during stimulation. Iso-
lated nerves were prepared according to
the method of Lorente de No.2 The frog
was mounted on a dissecting tray with the
copper screen ground electrode for the
electrical readout between the frog and
the wax; the thigh muscles were pinned
back exposing the nerve. The tray was in-
serted in the apparatus case and connected
to ground within the case. The nerve was
suspended between the stimulator electrode
hooks and the copper wire electrode for
electrical impulse detection. The magnetic
detector was placed at various distances
from the stimulator electrodes and before
the electrical readout electrode with ap-
proximately % to 1 mm. air gap from the
coil to the nerve. The nerve was moistened
as necessary with Ringer’s solution.
Stimulus was applied at a level sufficient
to give a maximum electrical action pulse
but was not increased above this level. This
stimulus varied with each nerve but was
usually initially about .7-.9 volts for 1 milli-
second at a frequency of 50-70 per second.
Isolated nerves were suspended in a
plexiglass constant humidity chamber con-
taining Ringer’s solution. These nerves
were stimulated electrically or by mechani-
cal crushing. In the latter case determina-
tions were made both with the electrical
pickup electrodes contacting the nerve and
with no connections of any sort in the ap-
paratus except the electromagnetic detector
coil.
Results
The directly recorded electrical action
potentials are equivalent to those in the
literature.2’ 3
A composite tracing typical of the elec-
tromagnetic component of the action pulse
is shown in Figure 2.
70 i
Fig. 2. Composite tracing of the electromagnetic
action pulse
3 Erlanger, J., and Gasser, H. S., “Electrical
Signs of Nervous Activity,” University of Penn-
sylvania Press, Philadelphia, 1937
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
3
The scale in millivolts is the value observed
on the oscilloscope; since the detection and
amplification equipment were uncalibrated
the relationship of these values to the in-
pxit signal is unknown.
Placement of the magnetic detector at
varying distances from the stimulator elec-
trodes gave the expected variable delay of
the electromagnetic trace following the
stimulus artifact and showed the same time
lag as the electrical pulse when the elec-
trical pickup was in the same position.
As the nerves gradually died or became
refractory to stimulation the decrease in
amplitude of the electrically observed pulse
paralleled that of the electromagnetically
observed pulse, both disappearing simul-
taneously. Disappearance of muscle con-
traction in those experiments where the
nerve was not removed from the animal
also occurred simultaneously with the dis-
appearance of both pulses. With the use of
stimulus voltages below that required to
give a maximum electrical action pulse the
percentage decrease below the maximum
impulse detected electrically exactly paral-
leled the decrease in the electromagnetically
detected impulse. Continued stimulation of
inactive nerves gave only the stimulus arti-
fact; no neuron action pulse could be ob-
served electrically or electromagnetically.
Finally, mechanical stimulation by crush-
ing an intact portion of an isolated nerve
in the ungrounded plastic container gave
single transient electromagnetic impulses
visually equivalent to those obtained by
electrical stimulation. These transient
pulses could not be photographed because
of the rapid trace decay of the oscilloscope
phosphor.
Discussion
There can be no doubt that this field
exists, is an inescapable component of neu-
ron activity, and must be of sufficient mag-
nitude to be readily measureable since it
could be detectable using relatively simple
equipment. The experiments of Burr and
Mauro 1 demonstrating the existence of an
electrostatic field about an isolated frog
sciatic nerve immediately confirms the
existence of the electromagnetic field. Both
fields are component vectors of the induc-
tive field surrounding the actively conduct-
ing nerve, arise simultaneously, and are in-
terdependent. Thus neuron impulses fellow
the same laws applicable to moving charges
as other phenomena and have the same in-
ductive fields as those accompanying mov-
ing charges in general.
Detailed discussion of the theoretical and
practical implications of the existence of
these fields will be held for future publi-
cations. However, it should be noted that
by proper measurement of these fields a
method of localizing and mapping central
nervous system activity is feasible without
direct contact with the structure investi-
gated, thus avoiding the trauma and arti-
fact caused by the present contact methods.
Summary
The electromagnetic field associated with
neuronal activity is demonstrated for the
first time and affords a new method for the
study of the nervous system that avoids di-
rect instrumentation.
4
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
Educational Activities of Washington Scientists
John K. Taylor
Director , Science Projects
Joint Board on Science Education
One of the distinguishing characteristics
of a learned profession is the desire of its
members to perpetuate it by fostering high
educational standards and by attracting
talented young people into its ranks. Wash-
ington area scientists as individuals have
long been aware of this professional re-
sponsibility. Collective action in this re-
spect has been of recent origin, however.
The first major cooperation of the scien-
tific community with local educational pro-
grams was brought about by the advent of
the science fair activities in 1947. Local
educators found that they needed scientists
and engineers in considerable numbers to
serve as judges and counselors for student
projects and appealed to the technical so-
cieties for assistance. In serving in these
capacities, scientists became keenly aware
of the part that they could play in coopera-
tion with the schools to improve and
strengthen science education, particularly
at the secondary level.
As a result of these experiences, scien-
tists and engineers reported back to their
technical societies the need and opportunity
for service. Apparently, their selling was
effective for there was a sudden mush-
rooming of society-sponsored educational
activities. Indeed the uncoordinated efforts
that followed bordered on the side of cha-
otic in extreme cases. Accordingly, it be-
came clear that some mechanism must be
found for better utilization of these com-
munity resources. The D. C. Council of
Engineering and Architectural Societies
took positive action by establishing a school
contacts committee with a member desig-
nated for each school to serve as liaison be-
tween it and the scientific community. The
wisdom of this procedure has been proven
by the fact that the school contacts pro-
gram is today a major factor in science-
education activities.
Joint Board Established
As a result of the success of the above
program, the need was estabished for a
permanent organization to administer co-
operative educational activities. After care-
ful study by science education leaders of
the D. C. Council and the Academy, the
Joint Board on Science Education for the
Greater Washington Area was formed in
1955 under joint sponsorship of the two
groups for the purpose of “assisting and
counseling the faculties of schools and re-
lated organizations, with power to initiate
action, where desirable, and to raise funds
to carry out the various activities of the
Board.”
The Board’s program has evolved and
expanded from the original school contacts
activity to include a number of endeavors
with an annual combined budget of about
$7,500. One of the first of these was the
project in which some 1000 scientists and
engineers replaced class-room teachers to
permit them to attend the annual meeting
of the National Science Teachers Associa-
tion which convened in Washington during
March, 1956. This is the first known in-
stance of a major cooperative effort be-
tween schools and scientists of the commun-
ity and it aroused national attention. This
activity has been repeated several times in
this area, however on a smaller scale.
The science fair movement has grown
to such an extent in this locality that most
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
o
of the schools now participate. As a result,
the one area-wide fair has been replaced
by five local area fairs, each affiliated with
the National Science Fair-International.
The Joint Board assists each of these by
providing publicity material, entrance
blanks, and other printed matter. (The
Junior Academy of Sciences which is also
a co-sponsor provides the major awards for
each fair). The Joint Board also provides
the transportation and expenses of the stu-
dent-finalists and their teacher escorts to
participate in the annual National Science
Fair-International.
On becoming aware of the need for bet-
ter communication between the educational
and scientific communities, the Joint Board
established a newsletter in 1958. This 8-
page publication, known as THE RE-
PORTER, appears monthly during the
school year and is sent without charge to
every teacher of science and mathematics
in each of the junior and senior high
schools of the Greater Washington Area.
School contact persons and others inter-
ested in science education are also in-
cluded in the monthly circulation of over
2000 copies.
A recent project of the Joint Board has
been the publication of a book containing
many suggestions for science projects.
Scientists and engineers of this area were
invited to outline projects, particularly
those involving research or investigation
on the part of the student. These contribu-
tions were edited by the writer, in collab-
oration with Dr. Phoebe Knipling and Dr.
Falconer Smith and the resulting ‘’Project
Ideas for Young Scientists” was published
in September 1960. a grant from the
Eugene and Agnes E. Meyer Foundation
made it possible to place a free copy of
this book in the library of each secondary
school in the area and to sell copies at a
nominal price.*
National Science Foundation Projects
In 1959, the Washington Academy of
Sciences received a grant of $35,000 from
the National Science Foundation to make
its science-education program more effec-
tive. The Joint Board became the logical
body to administer this activity. With the
writer as Director and Dr. William T. Read
as Executive Secretary, four projects were
developed and carried on. These may be
summarized as follows:
Project I. To establish a community
consultation service, including a roster of
scientists and engineers willing to assist in
educational activities.
Project II. To sponsor and participate
in experimental educational programs con-
cerned with better coordination of science
and mathematics teaching in secondary
schools.
Project III. To sponsor and participate
in experimental educational programs con-
cerned with better coordination of science
and mathematics teaching in elementary
schools.
Project IV. To sponsor conferences of
school teachers and officials, university and
college instructors, and scientists and engi-
neers to consider problems concerned with
science and mathematics teaching.
Details of the first year of this program
and an evaluation of the results obtained
are contained in the annual report sub-
mitted to the National Science Foundation
on July 15, 1960. A limited number of
copies are available for distribution and
may be obtained by request to the office of
the Joint Board on Science Education. 1530
P Street, N.W., Washington 5, D. C.
The National Science Foundation has
made another grant of $35,000 to the Acad-
emy to continue this program during
1960-61. Administrative details will be the
* Copies are available from the office of the
Joint Board on Science Education. 1530 P Street,
N.W., Washington 5, D. C.. at $1.25 per copy.
6
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
same as during the previous year except
that Mr. G. Gravatt Coleman, an engineer
with the Chesapeake and Potomac Tele-
phone Company, has replaced Dr. Read as
Executive Secretary.
In addition to continuing the projects of
the previous year, a special effort will be
made to increase the usefulness of the
roster of the scientists and engineers.
Under the title, “Visiting Scientists and
Engineers,” a brochure has been published
which lists over 100 lectures, many illus-
trated and containing demonstrations, that
local scientists and engineers are willing to
present to school groups. It is expected
that school contacts will assist teachers in
selecting subjects from this list that
would be most helpful in a given situation.
The office of the Joint Board will assist in
making arrangements.
More Help Needed
Although several hundred persons are
Science in
SCIENTISTS IN THE NEWS
This column will present brief items concern-
ing the activities of members of the Academy.
Such items may include notices of talks given,
important conferences or visits, promotions,
awards, election to membership or office in sci-
entific and technical societies, appointment to
technical committees, civic activities, and mar-
liages, births, and other family news. Formal
contributors are being assigned for the systematic
collection of news at institutions employing con-
siderable numbers of Academy members (see
list on masthead). However, for the bulk of the
membership, we must rely on individuals to
send us news concerning themselves, and their
friends. Contributions may be addressed to
S. B. Detwiler, Jr., Associate Editor, 2603 S.
8th St., Arlington, Va.
APPLIED PHYSICS LABORATORY
Albert M. Stone, technical assistant to the
directory, represented APL at the Twelfth Gen-
eral Assembly of the International Union of
Geodesy and Geophysics, held July 25-August 6
in Helsinki.
engaged in some phase of these educational
activities, there is a need for more partici-
pants. The Joint Board serves the counties
of Calvert, Charles, Montgomery, Prince
Georges, and St. Mary’s in Maryland and
the counties of Arlington, Fairfax, and
Prince William, and the cities of Alex-
andria and Falls Church in Virginia, as
well as the District of Columbia. Private
and parochial schools are included in the
approximately 170 junior and senior high
schools in this territory. Accordingly, the
roster of scientists and engineers must be
extensive and represent a large geographi-
cal area to be useful. Interested scientists
are invited to register with the office of the
Joint Board.
There is a special need for persons will-
ing to assist in the administrative details
of the program and also with editorial
assignments.
Archie 1. Mahan served as program chairman
for the annua] meeting of the Optical Society of
America, held in Washington last spring. Dr.
Mahan has been elected to a six-year term as
associate editor of the Society’s Journal.
CARNEGIE INSTITUTION OF WASHINGTON
Philip H. Ablson, director of the Institution’s
Geophysical Laboratory and president-elect of
the Washington Academy of Sciences, has been
made a member of the General Advisory Commit-
tee of the Atomic Energy Commission. The ap-
pointment was approved by President Eisenhower
as of June 29. Dr. Abelson, an early pioneer in
atomic energy, was the first scientist in this coun-
try to identify uranium fission products; with
Edwin MacMillan he discovered neptunium. Dur-
ing World War II he designed and developed a
method for uranium isotope separation that was
used at Oak Ridge; subsequently he was involved
in the first report indicating the feasibility of an
atomic submarine.
COAST AND GEODETIC SURVEY
Norman F. Braaten, Donald A. Rice, El-
Washington
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
liott B. Roberts, and Charles A. Whitten at-
tended the Twelfth General Assembly of the In-
ternational Union of Geodesy and Geophysics,
held July 25-August 6 in Helsinki. Mr. Whitten
was elected president of the International Associ-
ation of Geodesy, to serve for the three-year period
1960-63. Mr. Rice was elected chairman of the
IAG's Gravimetry Section.
Thomas J. Hiekley, chief of the Instrument
Division, recently returned from a six-week trip
to Europe, where he inspected hydrographic,
oceanographic, and geophysical instruments at
institutions in England, Germany, and Sweden.
Barry G. Knapp, son of David G. Knapp and
a 1960 graduate of Montgomery-Blair High
School, has been awarded a scholarship at Johns
Hopkins University for studies in the physical
sciences and engineering.
GEORGETOWN UNIVERSITY
The promotion of Walter C. Hess to associate
dean of the Georgetown University Medical Cen-
ter Schools of Medicine and Dentistry was an-
nounced September 10 by the Very Reverend
Edward B. Bunn, S.J., president of the University.
Previously, Dr. Hess had served as professor of
biochemistry and assistant dean for research at
the Medical Center.
NAS-NRC
On June 1, George A. Llano left his position
with the Commission on Polar Research to be-
come science specialist in biology in the Science
and Technology Division, Library of Congress.
Effective July 1, W. H. Larrimer has been
appointed executive secretary of a new NAS-NRC
Committee on Pest Control and Wildlife Rela-
tionships in the Division of Biology and Agricul-
ture.
Linn Hoover, on a year’s leave of absence
from Geological Survey, has been named executive
secretary of the Division of Earth Sciences, effec-
tive July 1. The last permanent appointee to this
post was William R. Thurston, who transferred to
Geological Survey in May 1959, but continued to
assist the Division until March 1960, when Adrian
Richards was temporarily detailed to the position
from the Navy’s Hydrographic Office.
At the end of August. Frank L. Campbell, ex-
ecutive secretary of the Division of Biology and
Agriculture, attended the annual meetings of the
American Institute of Biological Sciences, held at
Stillwater, Okla.
NATIONAL BUREAU OF STANDARDS
Fred L. Mohler retired August 1 as chief of
the Mass Spectrometry Section, after 43 years
with the Bureau. Dr. Mohler joined the Atomic
Physics Section in 1917, just after receiving the
Ph.D. degree in physics from Johns Hopkins, and
was made chief of the Section in 1928; during
this period, he worked on fundamental phenom-
ena in atomic physics, including electrical dis-
charges in gases, the study of ionization poten-
tials, and ionization of liquids. After service in
World War II with the Ninth Air Force in Euro-
pe, and a year with the Manhattan Project, Dr.
Mohler was appointed to head the Mass Spec-
trometry Section, where he has been engaged in
the development of mass spectrometric methods
as applied to chemical and isotope analysis and I
molecular physics.
Harold F. Stimson, a senior physicist in the
Temperature Physics Section, retired April 30 I
after more than 42 years with the Bureau. Dr.
Stimson joined the staff in 1916 after receiving \
the Ph.D. degree from Clark University. He has
pioneered many scientific advances in the field I
of heat measurement, and is recognized as one of
the world’s foremost authorities on the Interna-
tional Temperature Scale. His activities have in-
cluded important research on the accurate deter-
mination of the thermal properties of water and
steam, as part of an international program for the
production of steam tables to be used as a basis
for engineering and power plant design. As a i
member of the Advisory Committee on Ther- j
mometry, he played a major role in drafting the I
International Temperature Scale of 1948; and he >
has recently completed work on a text revision j
which may be adopted at the 1960 meeting of the t
General Conference on Weights and Measures.
Hubert R. Snoke retired July 31 as assistant
chief of the Building Technology Division, after fe
over 40 years of service. A graduate of Lebanon )
Valley College, Dr. Snoke joined the staff as a i
chemist in the Chemistry Division’s Paint Lab- E
oratory. Since 1929 he has specialized in bitumi- I
nous and other roofing materials, and is an inter- ►
nationally-recognized authority in the field. When I
the Building Technology Division was formed in »
1947, Dr. Snoke was named to head the Floor. S
Roof, and Wall Coverings Section; and in 1956 8
he was assigned concurrent duties as assistant I
chief of Division. Lebanon Valley awarded him I
the honorary D.Sc degree in 1952.
Archibald T. McPherson was guest of honor 9
at a reception and dinner held May 24 at the \
Army-Navy Club by the Washington Chapter, j)
American Institute of Chemists. Dr. McPherson
was awarded the Chapter’s 1960 Honor Scroll.
Kurt E. Shuler, an authority in the fields of
chemical kinetics, statistical mechanics, energy j|
transfer, and molecular spectroscopy, has been J
appointed consultant to the director. In this ca- (
pacity he will advise on the Bureau’s continuing f
efforts to strengthen its basic science program. Dr. L
Shuler will at the same time continue his own |
research in chemical physics.
The following Academy members are among 9
the Bureau scientists who recently received De- j
partment of Commerce awards for outstanding i
accomplishment: Gold Medal for Exceptional ?
Service, to Chester H. Page, consultant to the
director and chief of the Electricity Division, for I
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences >
contributions in electronics, ordnance, and physi-
cal research and measurement ; Herbert I*.
Broida, technical coordinator of free radicals re-
search, and Arnold M. Bass, chief of the Free
Radicals Section, for leadership in the direction
of the Bureau’s free radicals program ; and
Charlotte Moore-Sitterly of the Spectroscopy
Section, for research in spectroscopy and astro-
physics. Silver Medal for Meritorious Service, to
John K. Taylor, for contributions to accurate
electrochemical methods of analysis; and Hugh
L. Logan of the Corrosion Section, for research
on stress-corrosion cracking of metals.
NATIONAL INSTITUTES OF HEALTH
Kenneth S. Cole, chief of the Biophysics
Laboratory, National Institute of Neurological
Diseases and Blindness, recently returned from a
five-week visit to European laboratories that are
conducting research on electrical potentials in
nerve fibers. He discussed results of continuing
work on ionic membrane currents with authori-
ties in Paris, Stockholm, Uppsala, London, and
Cambridge. Dr. Cole spent most of his time at
Uppsala University, where he discussed compar-
ative results of analogue computer studies of
clamped nerve fibers with Torsten Teorell.
NAVAL RESEARCH LABORATORY
Peter King, associate director of research for
materials, was awarded the Navy’s Distinguished
Civilian Service award in ceremonies on May 31.
Dr. King was honored for outstanding achieve-
ment in contributing to the development and di-
rection of a Long Range Detection Program which
led to conclusive evidence of the first atomic
explosion by a foreign power. The analytical sys-
tem developed by Dr. King identified the bomb
material and fixed the approximate time of the
explosion. His final chemical analysis for the fis-
sionable material revealed the advanced state of
technology of the foreign power concerned.
George R. Irwin, superintendent of the Me-
chanics Division, received the Charles B. Dudley
Medal of the American Society for Testing Mate-
rials on June 29, at the Society’s annual meeting
in Atlantic City. This award is “presented for a
paper of outstanding merit constituting an orig-
inal contribution on research in engineering ma-
terials.” The paper, entitled “Fracture Strengths
Relative to Onset and Arrest of Crack Propaga-
tion,” was published in ASTM Proceedings 58,
640 (1958).
Dr. Irwin also has received the NRL-RESA
Award for Applied Science for 1960, which was
presented in ceremonies on May 10. The award
was given for his studies in the theory of fracture
failure in me als.
USDA, BELTSVILLE
Kermit W. Kreitlow, Crops Research Divi-
sion, was chairman of the Herbage Disease Sec-
tion at the Eighth International Grassland Con-
gress, held July 11-21 at Reading, England. In
conjunction with the Congress, Dr. Kreitlow vis-
ited a number of European laboratories where
diseases of forage grasses and legumes are being
investigated.
Erwin L. LeCIerg, director of Biometrical
Services, Agricultural Research Service, was a
recent honor guest at ceremonies on the Colorado
State University campus, where he received the
Honor Alumnus Professional Achievement
Award.
Edward F. Knipling, director of the Ento-
mology Research Division, ARS, was a co-winner
of this year’s Hoblitzelle National Award in the
Agricultural Sciences for his part in developing
a new method of fighting insect pests with atomic
energy. The other recipient was Raymond C.
Bushland of the Department’s entomology lab-
oratory at Kerryville, Tex. The two scientists re-
ceived the award — $10,000 and a gold medal —
for their part in developing the use of male screw-
worm flies, made sterile by exposure to radio-
active cobalt-60, to eradicate the screwworm, a
serious pest of cattle.
Dr. Knipling also received a Distinguished
Service Award at the USDA Honor Awards Cere-
mony on May 17.
USDA, WASHINGTON
Kenneth W. Parker attended the Eighth In-
ternational Grassland Congress at Reading, Eng-
land, July 11-21, as a representative of USDA;
he subsequently traveled in Bavaria, France, and
Spain to observe range and wildlife habitat man-
agement on high mountain rangelands. Dr. Parker
was scheduled to present an invited paper, “Prin-
ciples of Grazing Management as Related to Veg-
etation Condition and Soil Stability,” at the Fifth
World Forestry Congress, held at Seattle on the
University of Washington campus, August 29-
September 10.
Harold H. Shepard last June led a Soviet
exchange team of six specialists in fertilizers, in-
secticides, and other agricultural chemicals on a
20-day tour of United States facilities conducting
research in the field. The group met with Federal,
state, and industrial workers in six states as well
as the Washington, D. C., area.
Justus C. Ward spoke on “Federal Pesticide
Laws and Sanitation” before the Indiana Associa-
tion of Sanitarians, meeting June 9 at Indian-
apolis. On August 14 he spoke on “Toxicology
and Federal Pesticide Control” before the Ameri-
can College of Veterinary Toxicology at Denver.
Harold T. Cook attended the Institute of
Food Technology’s Pacific Rim Food Conference,
held May 19-29 in Hawaii. Dr. Cook was chair-
man of the Section on Tropical Fruit and Spice
Products.
At the USDA Honor Awards Ceremony on May
17, Herbert L. J. Haller received the Distin-
guished Service Award, while Elbert L. Little
and Harold H. Shepard received Superior Serv-
ice Awards.
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
9
Hazel k. Stiebeling was a member of the
organizing committee and chairman of the publi-
cations subcommittee for the Fifth International
Congress on Nutrition, meeting in Washington
September 1-7. She also was co-chairman of one
of the sessions at wThich original research papers
relating to human nutrition were presented.
I N CLASSIFIED
Ward Pigman has been appointed professor
and chairman of the Department of Biochemistry
at New York Medical College, effective Septem-
ber 1. Dr. Pigman was formerly associate pro-
fessor of biochemistry at the University of Ala-
bama Medical College.
Six Academy members attended the 21st In-
ternational Geological Congress, held August 15-
25 at Copenhagen. They are George T. Faust,
Edwin W. Rodder, and Clarence S. Ross, of
the Geological Survey: Waldmar T. Schaller,
retired: William W. Rubey, former WAS presi-
dent, now located at the Institute of Geophysics,
LCLA: and James Gillulv, who is currently re-
tiring from a Geological Survey post at Denver.
DEATHS
Ernest L. Jackson, retired former chemist at
the National Institutes of Health who was noted
for his contributions to the chemistry of carbo-
hydrates, died of cancer on June 14 at the NIH
Clinical Center, after a long illness. He was 68.
Dr. Jackson received his doctorate at Harvard
University. After teaching at Western Reserve
and Emory Universities, he joined the staff of the
Public Health Service in 1928. His early work in-
cluded the discovery and pioneer development of
a technique for the periodic acid oxidation of
sugars, considered one of the most valuable tools
for structure determination ever devised in sugar
chemistry. He also wTorked on the development of
chemo-therapeutic agents for use against tuber-
culosis, and on the synthesis and structure of
antibacterial agents. During recent years. Dr.
Jackson investigated various approaches to the
synthesis of an analogue of thyroxine in which the
ether bridge is in the meta position to the alanine
side chain. He retired from NIH two years ago,
but remained active by writing articles for pro-
fessional journals.
Howard A. Edson, a resident member of the
Academy, died February 29. 1960. Dr. Edson was
elected to the Academy in 1921 from the field of
plant pathology, and retired in 1946.
Carroll E. Cox of the Botany Department,
University of Maryland, died June 24. In 1959,
Dr. Cox represented the Botanical Society of
Washington on the Academy’s Board of Man-
agers.
AFFILIATED SOCIETIES
Chemical Society of W ashington
President: Allen L. Alexander (NRL). Secretary :
John L. Torgesen <NBS).
The Board of Managers met on May 3 at the
American Chemical Society Building, with Pres-
ident Alexander presiding. The minutes of the
March 1 meeting were read and approved. The
treasurer’s report for the period January 4-May
2 was distributed.
A proposal that the Society’s working name be
changed from “Washington Section” (of the
American Chemical Society) to “National Capi-
tal Section” was considered by the Board and
defeated.
Frank S. Grimaldi reported for the Education
Committee that ten chemistry winners in the re-
cent Science Fairs, and their teachers, would be
dinner guests of the Society at its May 6 “meet-
ing-in-miniature.” John M. Leonard reported that
a total of S1600 had been provided by the Soci-
ety, the Washington Academy of Sciences, and
the Junior Academy, for use as lunch money and
carfare for high school students working in
Washington-area laboratories during the summer.
Up to the time of the meeting, 21 student appli-
cations had been received.
John K. Taylor reported for the Professional
Relations and Status Committee, that plans were
under way to devote one of the regular meetings
of the Society to a panel discussion of such a
topic as “Improving the Status of Chemists.” He
also reported that the Committee was exploring
the establishment of an employment sendee for
local chemists.
W illiam J. Bailey of the Programs Committee
circulated the program for the May" 6 “meeting-
in-miniature” to be held jointly with the Mary-
land Section of ACS; this showed a total of 53
papers to be presented at afternoon and evening
sessions of six divisions.
Chairman Andrew F. Freeman of the Mem-
bership Committee reported on collaboration with
The Capital Chemist in preparation of the clas-
sified membership list for the annual Directory.
Mr. Freeman also urged that membership appli-
cations originating in the area be sent to the ACS
through the Membership Committee, so that com-
missions might be properly credited to the local
Society.
An ad hoc Committee on Member Interest, ap-
pointed at the Board’s March 1 meeting, reported
on a study of annual reports of other ACS local
sections, with the findings that (1) the number
of people who help to govern the affairs of the
sections is in direct proportion to the number of
active members, and (2) the proportion of com-
mittee members is greater in the more active
sections than in the Chemical Society of W ash-
ington. At the Committee’s recommendation, the
Board agreed to the appointment of a new ad hoc
Committee on Member Participation, charged
with making a survey of special talents among
the membership, and with determining the mem-
bers’ interest in participating in ACS activities.
10
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
THE BROWNSTONE TOWER
Frank L. Campbell
In the issue of June
1948 of the late Scien-
tific Monthly ap-
peared the last col-
umn called “The
Brownstone Tower.”
It had run through 42
issues of the Monthly
and terminated only
because we moved on
to other work. As a
memento we took with
us the cut of the
Smithsonian’s princi-
pal tower, the brownstone tower, on the eighth
floor of which behind the clock face we had writ-
ten the earlier columns. We had never expected to
use it again, but here it is and it seems even
more appropriate in this journal about science
and scientists in Washington than it did in the
old Scientific Monthly.
And now we are off again on our observational
rambles, promising nothing, but hoping that the
new Brownstone Tower will help to broaden the
view of professional and amateur scientists in
Washington.
We have just returned from the 11th annual
meeting of the American Institute of Biological
Sciences at the Oklahoma State University in
Stillwater. The AIBS is a federation of national
biological societies, some of which hold their an-
nual meetings under the auspices of the Institute,
always on a university campus. These societies
are affiliated not only with AIBS but with the
National Academy of Sciences — National Re-
search Council and the American Association for
the Advancement of Science. We represent NAS-
NRC at the AIBS meetings and Raymond Taylor
the AAAS. Thus we are interested both in the
individual socieities and in the AIBS itself.
Our experience in Stillwater and at seven pre-
vious meetings of AIBS leads us to reflect on
organizational differences between biology and
chemistry, to the advantage of the latter. Chem-
istry is unified in its nomenclature, and in its
educational and organizational arrangements.
Every scientist who deals with transformations of
non-living matter can and usually does call him-
self a chemist. If he is a pure chemist, he may
think of himself as an inorganic chemist, organic
chemist, analytical chemist, electrochemist, etc.
If he works in applied chemistry he may be a
rubber chemist, petroleum chemist, textile chem-
ist, insecticide chemist, etc. — the name is always
“chemist” with suitable modification. In institu-
tions of higher education he prepares for his pro-
fession in departments of chemistry and when he
is ready for membership in a professional so-
ciety, he becomes a member of the American
Chemical Society. All along the line “chemist,”
“chemistry,” and “chemical” prevail and the
chemical chorus before other scientists and the
lay public is clear and strong.
What a contrast is found among scientists who
study living and dead organisms, excluding man !
They all could be called biologists with suitable
modifiers to express the area of biology in which
they work, but unfortunately they did not pro-
vide for the unity so characteristic of and help-
ful to the chemical profession. There is no har-
monious chorus as yet and there may never be
anything like the chemical chorus among those
who would call themselves biologists but do not.
Specialists in biology use many names; e.g.,
botanist, ecologist, embryo’ogist, entomologist,
geneticist, mycologist, physiologist, zoologist, etc.,
etc. In applied biology we have agronomist, ani-
mal husbandman, forester, horticulturalist, plant
breeder, plant pathologist, poultry scientist, veter-
inarian, etc., etc. Furthermore, we have university
departments of agronomy, animal husbandry, bac-
teriology, botany, entomology, physiology, plant
pathology, zoology, etc., and various combinations
of these. And when majors in these departments
are ready for membership in professional society
they join one or more of the societies concerned
with or related to the field of their specialization.
For example, a man who takes his degree in
agronomy does not become an agronomical biol-
ogist and join an American Biological Society;
he becomes an agronomist and joins the American
Society of Agronomy. Thereafter, he thinks of
himself only as an agronomist and if he is a
loyal member of his society, he thinks only in
terms of the advancement of agronomy through
his society. Although quite aware of soil science
and less conscious of other branches of biology
round about, such as horticulture, plant physi-
ology and plant patholgy, to him agronomy alone
is really important. This narrow outlook is not
restricted to agronomists; it is prevalent among
foresters, horticulturalists, entomologists, plant
pathologists and other applied biological scien-
tists. To a lesser extent it is found among botan-
ists, geneticists, zoologists, etc.
The interphase between biology and mathe-
matics, physics, and chemistry has been delivered
to the last three disciplines through the currently
accepted nomenclature, biometrics, biophysics
biochemistry — never statistical biology, or physi-
cal biology, or chemical biology. And as between
chemistry and physics, chemistry wins with “phys-
ical chemistry.”
And so it is that biology next to mathematics,
physics, and chemistry has become “et cetera.”
But through AIBS biology is moving toward use-
ful unification through the federation of existing
biological societies.
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
11
ACADEMY ACTIVITIES
Board of Managers, May Meeting
These notes are intended to outline briefly, for
the information of the membership, the principal
actions taken at Board meetings. They are not
the official Minutes as prepared by the Secretary.
—Ed.
The Board of Managers held its 529th meeting
on May 17 at NBS, with President Wood pre-
siding.
The minutes of the 528th meeting, previously
circulated, were approved with minor changes.
Dr. Wood announced the appointment of new
members of the Committee on Policy and Plan-
ning. The complete roster of the Committee is:
Through 1960, F. M. Setzler and J. E. P. Mor-
rison: through 1961. W. Schmidt and P. D.
Foote; through 1962, A T. McPherson (chair-
man ) and A. M. Sookne.
Dr. Wood also announced the complete roster
of the Committee on Science Education, as fol-
lows: Through mid-1961, R. J. Seeger (chairman)
and F. Smith; through mid-1962, H. A. Meyer-
hof! and J. K. Taylor; through mid-1963, J. A.
Sanderson and L. Schubert. Dr. Wood observed
that the Committee members are also the Acad-
emy representatives on the Joint Board on Science
Education, and that its business largely concerns
the Joint Board; however, as a Committee it may
bring before the Academy other matters consider-
ed germane to science education.
Dr. Stiehler. reporting for the Meetings Com-
mittee, initiated a general discussion concerned
with the development of programs that would
stimulate increased attendance at the Academy’s
general meetings. It was noted that the Philosoph-
ical Society has had excellent attendance at its
meetings, despite the fact that its membership is
no larger than that of the Academy. The desir-
ability of holding joint meetings with the Acad-
emy’s affiliates was discussed at length, with an
essentially negative reaction. Dr. Wood suggested
that the Academy membership at large might
very desirably assist the Meetings Committee by
offering ideas on speakers for future programs.
Chairman Hall of the Membership Committee
presented, for first reading, the names of 11
candidates for membership. Dr. Wood indicated
that these nominations would be voted upon at
the June meeting.
Mrs. Fell reported on sales by Pergamon Press
of the Academy’s monograph on microsomal par-
ticles. She indicated that as of April 30 about
500 copies had been sold in New York and 400 in
London, and that 1061 copies in all could be ac-
counted for. According to the contract with Per-
gamon, royalties will accrue to the Academy only
after 1500 copies have been sold.
Chairman McPherson of the Policy and Plan-
ning Committee called attention to the Board’s
request in November 1959, that the Committee
should study the current relationship between the
Academy and its affiliated societies, with a view
to determining whether some societies might wish
to sever relations. Dr. McPherson asked permis-
sion to expand this instruction, as follows: “The
Policy and Planning Committee is requested to
study the relations of the Academy with its af-
filiated societies to determine ways and means
whereby (1) these relations can be extended and
made closer to the mutual benefit of the affiliated
societies and the Academy; (2) the Academy can
provide a larger measure of leadership in the
activities of the scientific community; (3) the
affiliated societies whose aims, objectives, and in-
terests are no longer consistent with those of the
Academy can be tactfully induced to sever rela-
tions with the Academy.” The Board agreed to
this language.
Chairman Schubert of the Committee on En-
couragement of Science Talent reported that he
had met with Watson Davis and others concerned
with national science fairs, concerning the criti-
cisms of these fairs that had been raised at pre-
vious meetings of the WAS Board. Dr. Davis ap-
peared to be in agreement with the concept of
state science fairs, and to feel that national sci-
ence fairs are giving inadequate returns on the
expense involved ; also, he felt that it is necessary
to develop new rules for the conduct of local
science fairs.
Dr. Schubert also reported that the Joint
Board has carefully considered, and was prepar-
ing a response to, the letter transmitted some
months ago by Dr. Robbins for the Society of
American Bacteriologists, on improved rules for
the development of science fair exhibits.
Dr. Hall presented for second reading the
names of eight candidates previously proposed
for Academy membership, as follows: G. Robert
Coatney. Helen L. Garstens, Warren W. Hastings,
Jack C. Jones, Robert C. Likins, Geoffrey S. S.
Ludford. Meyer Rubin, and Emma Shelton. These
candidates were then elected to membership.
SCIENCE AND
DEVELOPMENT
The tornado is one of the most dangerous
of all storms. The deadly funnel dips suddenly
from a cumulo-nimbus cloud to spread its de-
struction, often over a very small area. The possi-
bility that a meteorological satellite orbiting some
400 miles above the earth would photograph an
isolated mass of tornado-producing clouds seems
remote; yet Weather Bureau scientists believe
that NASA’s satellite TIROS I did just that, last
12
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
May 19. During a painstaking analysis of over
20,000 photograpns taken by TIROS, the Bureau’s
satellite meteorologists discovered a striking and
unusual picture that showed an isolated group of
clouds appearing in the photograph as a very
bright square in an otherwise cloudless part of the
sky. A subsequent analysis showed that the
“square” cloud mass was precisely in the area of
heavy thunderstorm activity reported by the
Texas cities of Hobart, Childress, and Wichita
Falls at the exact time the TIROS wide-angle
camera snapped the picture. The analysis also
produced strong evidence that this cloud mass
later expanded and spread northeastward, spawn-
ing tornadoes and hail in central Oklahoma.
The NIH Record has provided the follow-
ing idea of the relative pain-killing power of
analgesic drugs by rating them, on the basis of
equivalent doses, on a numerical scale, assigning
to morphine the value of 100: 500-1,000 — phenazo-
cine (NIH-7519) and 14-hydroxydihydromorphi-
none (Numorphan) ; 500 — levophan ( Dromor-
an) ; 300-400 — dihydromorphinone (Dilaudid)
and metopon ; 300 — heroin ; 100-morphine and
methadone (Dolophine) ; 80-90 — dihydrohydroxy-
codeinone (Eucodal) ; 30-50 — anileridine (Leri-
tine) and diethylthiambutene (Themalon) ; 20-
30 — meperidine (Demerol) ; 15 — codeine; and 1-
2 — aspirin. Aspirin actually does not belong with
the other drugs, but is inserted for comparison.
All of the drugs are addicting to some degree
with the exception of aspirin, which definitely is
not. Heroin, although listed above, is not used in
medical practice in the United States; it has been
banned because of its high rate of abuse as an
addicting drug.
A marvel in fish obstetrics — a pregnant
female shark containing 114 embryos each
about 10 inches long — has been reported by
the Division of Fishes of the Smithsonian
Institution. The total mass of embryos amounted
to about 5 gallons, probably a record for fish.
The specimen, belonging to a species of bramble
shark, was received from the Hawaiian Islands in
connection with a world-wide census of shark
attacks now being conducted under Institution
auspices. Although formidable in appearance —
the body is covered with short, sharp spines —
this shark is not considered dangerous to humans,
since it is a bottom dweller in deep water and
seldom comes near the surface.
NBS has developed an improved scanning
photometer to determine wavelengths of
spectral lines on a spectrographic plate eas-
ily, rapidly, and accurately. The instrument, de-
vised by M. L. Kuder of the Bureau’s Electronic
Instrumentation Laboratory, optically scans a
0.5-mm-wide portion of the plate and then pre-
sents, on an oscilloscope tube, a curve of spectral
line density versus wavelength. The instrument
was developed for the Bureau’s Spectroscopic
Laboratory to help automate the processing of a
large volume of spectrographic plates.
The Coast and Geodetic Survey issues
regular press releases to report the activities
of its numerous triangulation survey parties
that range the country, establishing accurate
base points that are used in mapmaking, engi-
neering projects, local surveying, etc. Each press
release contains an interesting stock statement
that appears intended to quash superstitious ru-
mors before they can get started. The statement
generally reads as follows:
“Someday you may suddenly notice a slender
steel tower silhouetted against the skyline, or
at night the blinking of lights in Morse code
may catch your eye. These strange sights coup-
led with the busy movement of men and trucks
may cause some of the local residents partic-
ular concern. Though unfamiliar to the area,
these sights are actually part of one of the
oldest operations carried on by the Federal
Government, that is, to survey accurately all of
the land area within our borders. The towers
are not used in drilling for oil, and the strange
lights are not some mysterious secret code.
“The activities are merely the work of a
Coast and Geodetic Survey field party. This
party is one of several similar parties that
methodically roam the country, in a nomadic
way of life, from the Great Lakes to the Gulf
and from the Atlantic to the Pacific. Their
summer schedule finds them working the north-
ern states and gradually moving south with the
sun. Thus these men perform the geodetic work
of the Survey.”
The Geological Survey has completed a
terrain study of the moon for the Army En-
gineer Corps, to provide lunar surface informa-
tion for selecting landing sites, and as an aid in
designing telemetering instruments and a lunar
surface vehicle. The study consists of three dia-
grams, all of which show the visible face of the
moon at a diameter of 36 inches, and an accom-
panying brief text. One diagram shows the physi-
ographic regions of the moon: the second dia-
gram is a general photogeologic map of the moon,
showing relative ages of the various craters and
maria; and the third diagram depicts the promi-
nent lunar rays, which are interpreted as splashes
of crushed rock derived from the impact of large
fragments thrown out at times of meteoric impact.
A program for the reporting of unusual
or adverse reactions to drugs was announced
in May by the Food and Drug Administra-
tion. To be conducted initially with a limited
number of hospitals selected to represent a cross-
section of medical specialties, the program is
designed to develop information promptly on the
untoward effects of drugs, especially the newer
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
13
drugs; the information will be used by FDA in
the resolution of medical and administrative
problems under the Food, Drug, and Cosmetic
Act. The project is an outgrowth of a voluntary
pilot study carried out during the past four years
in cooperation with the American Association of
Medical Record Librarians, the American Soci-
ety of Hospital Pharmacists, the American Medi-
cal Association, and the American Hospital As-
sociation.
Federal support to the nation's leading
oceanographers in an international expedi-
tion to the Indian Ocean was announced last
June by the White House. The expedition, a sci-
entific project of extraordinary scope and magni-
tude, will begin late this year and extend through
1964. Like the recent International Geophysical
Year, the International Indian Ocean Expedition
will incorporate a many-sided scientific attack on
a single area of interest under the leadership of
a special committee of the International Council
of Scientific Unions. Scientific responsibility for
U. S. participation is vested in NAS-NRC. Key
financial contributions will be made by the Navy
Department and the National Science Founda-
tion.
Vast, isolated islands in the sky, the larg-
est about 2,500 square miles in area, are the
flat, green tops of the sandstone massifs
which constitute the Guavana Highlands of
northeastern South America. An account of
these islands was recently presented at a Smith-
sonian staff seminar by John J. Wurdack, who
explored them for the New York Botanical Gar-
den. He reports that some of them are almost two
miles high, and are cold, rainy, desolate regions,
swept constantly by penetrating, wet winds; they
are almost devoid of animal life, except for birds.
The canyon of one mountain, Cerro Neblina, is
deeper than any gorge in the United States. Man,
except for a few hardy explorers, has never at-
tained most of the summits. Seen from above,
large portions of the surfaces appear to be level,
treeless green plains; actually these are peat
bogs in which one may sink to the ankles. One
flyer who landed safely enough was forced to
abandon his plane, which is still there, sinking
slowly into the bog.
The Coast and Geodetic Survey in July
began a 1500-mile shoreline survey of Ches-
apeake Bay, in cooperation with the Maryland
Department of Tidewater Fisheries. The project
will provide 37 special shoreline maps for the
Maryland agency in its study and development of
seafood resources, especially oyster cultivation.
In addition, C&GS will revise about 80 of its own
large scale base maps of the Bay with the aerial
photography and field data thus acquired. Both
State and Federal governments will share the ex-
pense of this project, expected to cost about
1120,000.
A new index map of the United States has
been published by the Geological Survey
covering small-scale maps in the 1 :250, 000-scale
topographic map series. When completed, this
series, covering all 50 States, will contain 626
maps, 437 of which are now available. Five show
the eight principal islands in Hawaii. Alaska is
covered by 153. Ninety-five have been completed
during the past 15 months and 32 are in progress.
All are expected to be available by late 1962 or
early 1963.
NBS has found that its parallel-testing in-
terferometer, developed a few years ago by
J. B. Saunders for measuring the parallelism
of the opposite faces of gage blocks, can he
used without modification to compare the
lengths of such blocks. This method has the
advantage of not requiring wringing which, when
repeatedly applied, can injure the surfaces of
gage blocks to the extent that reworking is often
necessary. Further, as blocks are measured in a
horizontal position, use of the parallelism inter-
ferometer eliminates corrections for gravitational
distortion in length measurements. Faster testing
is another consequence of the technique, which
makes it possible to measure blocks without
handling, thus doing away with a major source of
thermal disturbance.
More than 5,000 “shooting stars” a year
have been recorded authentically by compe-
tent observers over much of the world dur-
ing the past half century. Some 294,000 of
these luminous bodies reported over the years
1901-1959 have been catalogued by Charles P.
Oliver, director of the American Meteorological
Society; results of this laborious task have just
been published by Smithsonian’s Astrophysical
Observatory. The figures have been broken down
into averages for months and hours of each night
when reliable observations were possible. With
a few notable exceptions, the monthly rates re-
mained fairly constant throughout the 50-year
period, but showed a tendency to increase in
autumn and early winter, possibly because of
better observing conditions. There also was a
tendency to increase rather markedly toward the
middle of each month and, in general, in hours
just after midnight.
The Optical Society of America now has
an executive office in the new American
Chemical Society Building at 1155 16tli St.,
N.WT. Its publication, Optics and Spectroscopy,
is a cover-to-cover translation of the Russian
journal, Optikaispektroskopiya ; OSA initiated
this translation journal with the January 1959
issue ( Vol. 6, No. 1).
Studies made by the Geological Survey in
the vicinity of Dulles International Airport
at Chantilly, indicate ample water for con-
struction needs but showT it to be moderately
14
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
mineralized, very hard, and in need of treat-
ment to make it suitable for domestic and
some industrial uses. Pumping tests of two
wells drilled to 860 and 955 feet by contractors
in the spring of 1959 indicate yields of 327 and
600 gallons per minute, which are very high for
the red shale water-bearing formation pene-
trated. Previously no known well in the immedi-
ate vicinity was more than 180 feet deep or pro-
duced more than 12 gallons per minute.
Continued belief in old wives’ tales, magic
potions, and old-fashioned home remedies
in the 20th century, enabled an enterprising pro-
moter to stock more than a hundred herbs and
offer them in packages labeled as specific “cures”
for practically every human ailment. In July, Food
and Drug Administration announced seizure of
his “teas” and “tonics” for conditions including
arthritis, asthma, change of life, diabetes, epilep-
sy, external cataracts, hardening of the arteries,
heart trouble, kidney stones, overweight, tape-
worms, and varicose veins. Also taken into custody
were raw materials such as cramp bark, devil
shoe string, dog grass, figwort, skunk cabbage,
queen of the meadow, and turtlebloom. Misbrand-
ing charges were filed, based on false and mis-
leading curative claims in the labeling.
NAS-NRC has announced the formation
of a new Committee on Pest Control — Wild-
life Relationships, to investigate the relation-
ship between chemical control of agricultural
pests and conservation of America’s wildlife pop-
ulations. Creation of the Committee, which will
function within the Division of Biology and
Agriculture, is most recent of several steps taken
by the Academy-Research Council during the
past few years in response to concern expressed
in several quarters over use of chemicals to con-
trol agricultural pests. Committee chairman is
Ira L. Baldwin, special assistant to the president
of the University of Wisconsin.
Three methods of removing radioactive
contaminants from drinking water supplies
have been successfully tested by the Army
Engineer R&D Laboratories at Fort Belvoir.
These methods involve a standard purification
unit consisting of chemical coagulation and diat-
omite filtration that the Engineers call an “Erd-
lator,” a mobile ion exchange unit, and an elec-
trodialysis demineralization process. In one of the
tests, conducted at the Nevada Test Site, radio-
active soil ground to simulate fallout was added
to a water source to give a contamination level
of 660,000 units (micro microcuries per liter).
After treatment in the “Erdlator,” the contami-
nation was reduced to 5,000 units (300,000 units
is considered a safe emergency drinking water
tolerance) .
Chysanthemum stems can be greatly shoi-t-
ened by a new and relatively inexpensive
plant-growth regulator, according to USDA
scientists at Beltsville. Growers may be able to use
this chemical — “phosfon” — to advantage because
short chrysanthemum plants require no staking.
Flower size is not noticeably affected by phosfon.
The flowers of treated plants last longer, and their
leaves are dark green, as compared with the
medium- to light-green leaf color of untreated
plants.
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
15
Vice-Presidents of the Washington Academy of Sciences
Representing the Affiliated Societies
Acoustical Society of America
Institute of the Aeronautical Sciences
Anthropological Society of Washington
Society of American Bacteriologists
Biological Society of Washington
Society for Experimental Biology and Medicine
Botanical Society of Washington
Chemical Society of Washington
American Society of Civil Engineers
International Assn, for Dental Research
American Inst, of Electrical Engineers
Washington Society of Engineers
Entomological Society of Washington
Society of American Foresters
National Geographic Society
Geological Society of Washington
Helminthological Society of Washington
Columbia Historical Society
Insecticide Society of Washington
Amer. Society of Mechanical Engineers
Medical Society of the Dist. of Columbia
American Society for Metals
American Meteorological Society
Institute of Radio Engineers
American Nuclear Society, Washington Section
Philosophical Society of Washington
Society of American Military Engineers
Richard Cook
Not Named.
Regina Flannery
Mary Louise Robbins
Herbert Friedman
Kathryn Knowlton
Herbert C. Hanson
William J. Bailey
Not Named.
Gerhard Brauer
Robert D. Elbourn
Howard S. Rappleye
Harold H. Shepard
Not Named.
Alexander Wetmore
Carle Dane
Carlton M. Herman
U. S. Grant, III
Joseph Yuill
William G. Allen
Fred O. Coe
John A. Bennett
Morris Tepper
Robert Huntoon
Urner Liddel
Louis R. Maxwell
Not Named.
Chairmen of Committees
Standing Committees
Executive
Meetings
Membership
Monographs
Awards for Scientific Achievement
Grants-in-Aid for Research
Policy and Planning
Encouragement of Science Talent
Lawrence A. Wood, Nat. Bureau of Standards
Robert D. Stiehler, Nat. Bureau of Standards
Wayne C. Hall, Naval Research Laboratory
Dean B. Cowie, Dept, of Terrestrial Magnetism
Archie I. Mahan, Applied Physics Laboratory
B. D. van Evera, George Washington University
A. T. McPherson, Nat. Bureau of Standards
Raymond J. Seeger, Nat. Science Foundation
Special Committees
By Laws Harold H. Shepard, Dept, of Agriculture
Library of Congress John A. O’Keefe, Nat. Aeronautics & Space Admin.
Repres. on AAAS Council Howard A. Meyerhoff, Scientific Manpower Commission
Volume 50
OCTOBER 1960
No. 6
CONTENTS
The Magnetic Field Accompanying Neuronal Activity:
A New Method for the Study of the Nervous System J. H. SEIPEL
and R. D. MORROW 1
Educational Activities of Washington Scientists. J. K. TAYLOR 5
Science in Washington
Scientists in the News 7
Affiliated Societies 10
The Brownstone Tower 11
Academy Activities 12
Science and Development 12
*ash ACADEMY OF SCIENCE a 2ND CLASS POSTAGE
1530- PSTN tf PAID AT
WASHINGTON 0 C WASHINGTON D C
RETURN POSTAGE
guaranteed
t I 0 R A R Y OF ARNOLD
ARBORETUM
2 DIVINITY A V E J
CAMBRIDGE 3Q M ASS WAS
JOURNAL
of the
WASHINGTON
ACADEMY
of
SCIENCES
Vo!. 50 • No. 7
NOVEMBER 1960
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Editor: Chester H. Page, National Bureau of Standards
Managing Editor: Ileen E. Stewart, National Science Foundation
Associate Editors
Frank L. Campbell, National Academy of Russell B. Stevens, Geo. Washington Univer-
Sciences sity
Samuel B. Detwiler, Jr., U.S. Dept, of Agri- John K. Taylor, National Bureau of Standards
culture
Contributors
Albert M. Stone, Applied Physics Laboratory
John A. O’Brien, Jr., Catholic University
Elliott B. Roberts, Coast & Geodetic Survey
Margaret D. Foster, Geological Survey
Russell B. Stevens, Geo. Washington University
Moddie D. Taylor, Howard University
Frank L. Campbell, NAS-NRC.
Alphonse F. Forziati, National Bureau of
Standards
Howard W. Bond, National Institutes of Health
Allen L. Alexander, Naval Research Laboratory
Victor R. Boswell, USDA, Beltsville
Harold R. Curran, USDA, Washington
William J. Bailey, University of Maryland
This Journal, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes: (1)
historical articles, critical reviews, and scholarly scientific articles, (2) original research, if the
paper, including illustrations, does not exceed 1500 words or the equivalent space, (3) notices of
meetings and proceedings of meetings of the Academy and its affiliated societies, and (4) regional
news items, including personal news, of interest to the entire membership. The Journal appears
eight times a year in January to May and October to December.
Manuscripts and original research papers should be sent to the Editor. They should
be typewritten, double-spaced, on good paper; footnotes and captions should be numbered and
submitted on a separate sheet. The Editor does not assume responsibility for the ideas expressed
by any author.
Contributions to the regular columns should be sent to the appropriate Associate
Editor whose name appears at the beginning of each column, or to one of the Contributors, listed
above. The deadline for news items is approximately three weeks in advance of publication date.
News items should be signed by the sender.
Proof of manuscripts will generally be sent to an author if he resides in the Washington
area and time allows. Otherwise the Editor will assume responsibility for seeing that copy is
followed.
Subscription rate $7.50 per yr. (U.S.)
Single issues $1.00 per copy.
Subscription Orders or requests for back numbers or volumes of the Journal, or copies of the
Proceedings, should be sent to the Washington Academy of Sciences, 1530 P St., N.W., Washing-
ton, D.C. Remittances should be made payable to “Washington Academy of Sciences”.
Claims for missing numbers will not be allowed if received more than 60 days after date
of mailing plus time normally required for postal delivery and claim. No claims will be allowed
because of failure to notify the Circulation Manager of a change of address.
Changes of address should be sent promptly to the Academy Office, 1530 P St., N.W.,
Washington, D. C. Such notification should include both old and new addresses and postal zone
number, if any.
Advertising rates may be obtained from the Managing Editor, Ileen E. Stewart, Office of
Science Information Service, National Science Foundation, Washington 25, D. C.
Reprint prices may also be obtained from the Managing Editor.
Prices of back numbers and volumes, of Monograph No. 1, “The Parasitic Cuckoos of
Africa” by Herbert Friedmann, Index to Vols. 1-40, and Proceedings may be obtained by writing
to the Academy Office.
Entered as second class matter at the Post Office, Washington, D. C. Printing by McArdle
Printing Co., Washington, D. C.
Proceedings of the
Geological Society of Washington
794th Meeting
The 794th meeting of the Society was
held in the John Wesley Powell Audi-
torium, January 14, 1959, President
Joseph W. Greig presiding.
Program — DEAN S. CARDER: March
5-7, 1958 eruptions of Manam Volcano off
the north coast of New Guinea. See pub-
lished abstract in Geol. Soc. Amer. Bull.,
v. 70, no. 12, p. 1711, 1959.
WALLACE DE WITT, JR. and G. W.
COLTON: Stratigraphy of the Upper De-
vonian rocks in the Finger Lakes District
of New York. See published abstract in
Geol. Soc. Amer. Bull., v. 70, no. 12, p.
1761, 1959.
GEORGE W. COLTON : Sedimentary
structures in some Upper Devonian rocks
in western New York. See published ab-
stract in Geol. Soc. Amer. Bull., v. 70, no.
12, p. 1759, 1959.
795th Meeting
The 795th meeting of the Society was
held in the John Wesley Powell Audito-
rium, January 28, 1959, President Joseph
W. Greig presiding.
Program — MARTIN F. KANE: Gravity
study of the Rowe-Mora Basin, New
Mexico.
A regional gravity survey of the Rowe-
Mora area in northeastern New Mexico
was made in May, 1957. The area sur-
veyed is bounded by the Rio Grande on
the west, extends to Raton on the north,
to Logan and Gladstone on the east, and to
Vaughn and Fort Sumner on the south.
Most of the gravity anomalies that were
outlined by the survey seem to be caused
by density changes within the Precam-
brian basement rocks. A few of the
anomalies are probably related to relief
on the surface of the basement.
A gravity anomaly of -50 milligals is
present in the Sangre de Cristo Mountains
which occupy the western part of the
area. The anomaly may be caused by a
granitic core underlying the mountains, a
thick section of clastic sedimentary rocks
of Pennsylvanian age, or a thick wedge
of younger and less dense sedimentary
rocks presumably overlain by the Pre-
cambrian and Pennsylvanian thrust sheets
exposed at the surface. Calculations indi-
cate that the maximum depth to the mass
deficiency is less than 15 kilometers, thus
seeming to rule out a subcrustal root as
the source.
In the plains-plateau area to the east,
a positive gravity nose indicates the pres-
ence of dense basement rock, probably a
mafic intrusive, which may mark an ex-
tension of the Wichita uplift of Oklahoma
and Texas. A gravity low is present over
the Sierra Grande uplift indicating that
the rock forming the uplift has a relatively
low density. The rock is probably felsic,
a conclusion that is supported by the
available drill-hole data. In the area
around Las Vegas and Santa Rosa the
gravity anomalies seem to be related to
relief of the basement.
North of the town of Wagon Mound,
both aeromagnetic and gravity data indi-
cate the presence of a deep sedimentary
basin, probably bounded on the east and
south by faults.
EUGENE S. SIMPSON : A ground water
mechanism for the deposition of glacial
till.
An hypothesis is presented to explain
erosion, deposition, and compaction of till
by continental glaciers in temperate re-
gions. Except for a relatively narrow
zone at the periphery and at the surface
of a continental glacier, ice is at the
pressure-melting temperature and melt-
water is produced by heat flow due to
thermal gradients. Near the periphery
meltwater escapes as fast as produced.
This together with reduced ice pressure
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
1
(because of thinning) results in “cold”
ice. i.e., ice whose temperature is below
the pressure-melting point. This ice erodes,
incorporates, crushes, and mixes rock de-
bris. However, average ice velocity is
greater than ice velocity near the base,
and debris lags farther and farther behind
the glacial toe. Eventually, debris is in a
zone where ice is at the pressure-melting
temperature and where meltwater is ac-
cumulating. This ice has no shear strength
and consequently the incorporated debris
is deposited. Meltwater escaping from the
ice and moving down through the debris
into the subjacent rock aquifer (from
whence it discharges outward toward the
toe) causes compaction.
GERMAINE A. JOPLIN: The origin
of the calc-alkaline rocks.
796th Meeting
The 796th meeting of the Society was
held in the John Wesley Powell Auditor-
ium, February 11, 1959, President Joseph
W. Greig presiding.
Program— T. C. HOERING and P. L.
PARKER : Abundance of chlorine isotopes
in nature.
A procedure for measuring small differ-
ences in the Cl 37 — Cl 35 ratio was de-
veloped. It consisted of transforming
precipitates of silver chloride quantita-
tively to hydrogen chloride gas and the
measurement of the isotope ratio in the
mass spectrometer. This technique was
applied to a large number of chlorine
samples from a wide variety of geological
origins. No detectable difference in the
chlorine isotope ratio was found. These
observations are discussed in terms of the
reactions in the geochemical cycle of chlor-
ine. Since the geochemistry of chlorine
is that of a chloride ion, few chances for
isotope fractionation in equilibrium and
kinetic processes exist. In the few cases
where an isotope fractionation may exist,
the temperature was high enough to make
the effect small.
ROBERT B. NEUMAN : Sedimentation
in the Ocoee series. Great Smoky Moun-
tains.
Detritus derived from both eastern and
western quadrants can be inferred from
stratigraphy and sedimentary structures of
the Ocoee series (late Precambrian) in
western North Carolina and eastern Ten-
nessee. The lowest part, the Snowbird
group, has coarse-grained sandstone at its
base that grades upward through quartz-
ite and silty sandstone to siltstone. This
sequence records a transgression toward
the southeast, confirmed by crossbedding
in the quartzite that indicates currents
moving westward.
Rocks overlying the Snowbird form two
contrasting sequences: on the southeast the
Great Smoky group (and three formations
not assigned to groups) is characterized by
feldspathic sandstones with pronounced
graded bedding; to the northwest the Wal-
den Creek group is dominantly siltstone
with lenses of coarse sandstone and pebble
conglomerate. Transportation and depo-
sition of sandstones of the southeastern
sequence was probably largely by tur-
bidity currents. Furrows at the base of
some sandstone beds have a NW-SE orien-
tation, indicating that currents came from
one or the other of these directions. That
these currents came from the southeast is
suggested by the contrasting composition
of the Walden Creek group for which a
northwesterly source is inferred. The
northwestern source of detritus persisted
in the Appalachians through Early Ordovi-
cian time.
STANISLAW DZULYNSKI: Evolution
of the Carpathian Geosyncline during the
Oligocene. See published abstract in Geol.
Soc. Amer. Bull., v. 69, no. 12, p. 1556,
1958.
797th Meeting
The 797th meeting of the Society was
held in the John Wesley Powell Audito-
rium, February 25, 1959, President Joseph
W. Greig presiding.
Informal communication — HENRY
FAUL: On carbonitites and other, seem-
ingly related, subjects.
Program — W. GARY ERNST : Glauco-
2
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
phane stability and the glaucophane schist
problem.
Glaucophane, Na^MgsALSigO^OH) 2,
has been hydrothermally synthesized and
its stability field determined up to 2000
bars vapor pressure. The experimental
investigation shows that high pressure is
not required for the stable existence of
glaucophane.
Consideration of laboratory and field
evidence leads to the conclusion that glau-
cophane schists can form under a variety
of conditions.
(a) Since glaucophane is not a high-
pressure mineral, it may occur over a
wide P-T range in rocks of unusual chem-
istry; bulk compositions (rock + pore
fluid) deficient in CaO, and rich in Na20
(and MgO _j_ FeO) relative to AUO3
would favor the development of glauco-
phane. Moreover, bulk compositions with
soda in excess of alumina would promote
crystallization of intermediate members of
the glaucophane-riebeckite series.
(b) Those alkali amphibole-bearing
schists which are compositionally identical
to greenschists and epidote amphibolites
must belong to a separate metamorphic
facies. Since reactions involved in con-
verting greenschists and epidote amphi-
bolites into glaucophane schists are fa-
vored by elevated pressures (or diminished
temperatures), the glaucophane schist
facies represents a relatively high pressure
(or low temperature) equivalent of these
two more common facies. The glauco-
phane schist facies may be defined by
the diagnostic assemblages (1) glauco-
phane -j- calcium-aluminum-silicate, (2)
glaucophane -j- white mica, and (3) jade-
ite -j- quartz. Assemblage (1) occurs in
rocks of roughly basaltic composition ;
assemblage (2) is typical of aluminous
bulk compositions; and assemblage (3) is
obtained in rocks relatively enriched in
Na20.
E-AN ZEN: Mineral assemblages in
slate in western Vermont.
JOHN C. REED, JR. and BRUCE H.
BRYANT: Lower Cambrian and Late Pre-
cambrian rocks in the Grandfather Moun-
tain window, North Carolina.
Sedimentary and volcanic rocks of low
metamorphic grade in the Grandfather
Mountain area, well within the Blue Ridge
province of western North Carolina, were
recognized by Arthur Keith during his
survey of the Cranberry, Morganton, and
Mt. Mitchell quadrangles in the 1890’s.
He correlated these rocks with the Chil-
howee group of the Valley and Ridge
province to the west, and believed they
occurred in a complex syncline in the
crystalline rocks of the Blue Ridge prov-
ince. Subsequent workers have suggested
that these rocks are exposed in a window
beneath a major overthrust along which
early Precambrian gneisses, schists, and
granites of the Blue Ridge have been car-
ried many miles northwestward. This
later interpretation has been confirmed by
recent detailed mapping in the Linville and
Table Rock quadrangles.
All sedimentary rocks within the Grand-
father Mountain window have been pro-
gressively metamorphosed to a grade at
which albite and sericite have developed.
New biotite has formed in rocks of ap-
propriate composition. Basement rocks
within the window have been retrogres-
sively metamorphosed to a similar grade.
In the coarse-grained clastic rocks, sedi-
mentary textures and structures are well
preserved; in the fine-grained rocks, clastic
original textures have been destroyed by
recrystallization.
Two structurally separate sequences of
sedimentary rocks are present in the west-
ern part of the window: an autochthonous
sequence which rests unconformably on a
basement of cataclastic granitic gneisses
and phyllonites ; and an allochthonous
sequence which occurs in a thrust sheet
that has overridden the autochthonous
rocks and has in turn been overridden by
the Precambrian rocks in the main over-
thrust sheet west of the window.
Arkose overlain by phyllite forms a
thick basal unit of the autochthonous
sequence. In the west-central part of the
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
3
window, arkose also overlies the phyllite
of the basal unit, but to the south the
upper arkose appears to finger out into
phyllite. In the upper part of the autoch-
thonous section is a widespread unit of
amygdaloidal greenschist derived from
basaltic flows (Montezuma schist).
The arkose of the autochthonous se-
quence is coarse- to fine-grained and con-
tains minor interbeds of light-gray to
green sericite phyllite. The lower part
of the basal arkose member is generally
fine-grained; the upper part of the mem-
ber contains very coarse-grained units in
which individual feldspar clasts reach
more than one centimeter in diameter.
Conglomerates are most common in the
upper part of the basal arkose; they occur
as channel fillings and contain quartz,
arkose, phyllite, rhyobte, and granitic
pebbles. A local conglomerate consists
only of rhyolite cobbles.
The large feldspar clasts in the arkoses
are predominantly microcline. Plagioclase,
in subordinate amounts, occurs in small
grains, most of which retain their clastic
shapes. Quartz has been recrystallized
except for some large clastic grains.
Chlorite and biotite are absent, but the
rock contains abundant green iron-rich
sericite. The heavy mineral suite in the
arkose consists of abundant zircon, mag-
netite, and leucoxene. Tourmaline is rare.
Dark biotite phyllite and phyllitic silt-
stone comprise the bulk of the phyllitic
portion of the autochthonous sequence.
Locally, thin beds of calcareous phyllite
and rare lenses of sandy marble are pres-
sent. The uppermost beds exposed adja-
cent to the window boundary in the Linville
quadrangle are metagraywackes and con-
glomeratic metagraywacke containing
abundant pebbles of andesite, phyllite,
arkose, granitic rocks, and occasional peb-
bles of limestone and rhyolite. Typically,
the phyllite contains biotite and chlorite in
addition to sericite. The proportion of
feldspar is quite variable, but plagioclase
is predominant.
Structural complexity has precluded an
accurate estimate of the stratigraphic
thickness of these units, but the total may
be as much as 50,000 feet.
The allochthonous sequence differs from
the autochthonous sedimentary sequence
in lithology, is more uniform stratigraphi-
cally, and is structurally simpler. The
lowest unit of the allochthonous sequence
consists of well-bedded sericitic arkose,
arkosic quartzite, and some clean quart-
zite with much interlayered dark-green
and gray sericite phyllite. This unit is at
least a thousand feet thick, but its total
thickness is unknown because of its posi-
tion in the thrust sheet.
Overlying this unit is 30 to 100 feet of
steel-blue to dark-gray lustrous phyllite
which passes upward into thick-bedded to
massive white sugary quartzite and arkosic
quartzite, commonly with minor interbeds
of blue phyllite. The upper quartzite unit
is approximately 800 feet thick.
Near the western edge of the window,
massive blue-gray dolomite conformably
overlies the upper quartzite. This unit is
almost certainly the equivalent of the
Lower Cambrian Shady dolomite of the
Valley and Ridge province.
In general, rocks of the allochthonous
sequence contain less feldspar than the
arkoses of the autochthonous sequence.
Texturally, however, rocks of comparable
grain size in the two sequences are quite
similar. Green sericite is abundant, espe-
cially in the lower part of the allochthonous
rocks. Biotite and chlorite are absent in
the phyllites of this sequence, apparently
because the original composition was in-
appropriate. The heavy mineral suite
from the allochthonous sequence is char-
acterized by abundant tourmaline, together
with zircon, magnetite, and leucoxene.
No fossils have been found in any of
the rocks of the Grandfather Mountain
window. The lithology and stratigraphic
position of the rocks of the allochthonous
sequence beneath the Shady dolomite
strongly suggest that these beds are part
of the Lower Cambrian and late Precam-
brian ( ? ) Chilhowee group, presumably
representing the Erwin and Hampton
formations and, perhaps, parts of the
4
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
Unicoi formation. Correlation of the
autochthonous sediments is less certain.
Lithologically and stratigraphically they
differ strikingly from any Chilhowee or
younger deposits in the Valley and Ridge
province. They are probably pre-Chil-
howee, and possibly represent a transi-
tional facies between the nonvolcanic clas-
tic rocks of the Ocoee series to the west
and the volcanic rocks of the Mount
Rodgers volcanic group to the north, both
of which underlie the Chilhowee group.
They may, of course, represent an isolated
deposit of pre-Chilhowee age for which
no correlatives have been recognized.
798th Meeting
The 798th meeting of the Society was
held in the John Wesley Powell Audito-
rium, March 11, 1959, President Joseph
W. Greig presiding.
Program — EMILY JAGER: Age meas-
urements on some Alpine and pre-Alpine
micas. See note published in Geol. Soc.
Amer. Bull., v. 70, no. 12, p. 1553-1557,
1959.
WILLIAM BACK: Calcium carbonate
saturation in ground water.
HELEN FOSTER: Mt. Fuji, Japan, and
its deposits of volcanic ash.
799th Meeting
The 799th meeting of the Society was
held in the John Wesley Powell Audito-
rium, March 25, 1959, President Joseph
W. Greig presiding.
Program — ROBERT B. GUILLOU :
Project ARMS (Aerial Radiological Moni-
toring Surveys) — an important contribu-
tion to geology.
The U.S. Geological Survey, on behalf of
the U.S. Atomic Energy Commission began
a nationwide program of aerial radiologi-
cal monitoring surveys (Project ARMS) in
July, 1958. The purpose of the program
is to obtain data which can be used to
appraise changes in environmental levels
of radiation brought about by nuclear
testing programs, operation of reactors
and other nuclear facilities, and radiation
accidents. At first, most of the ARMS
work will consist of surveys of reactor
and major production facilities, including
the area extending out about 50 miles from
the center of each facility. The airborne
surveys are flown 500 feet above the
ground along parallel flight lines oriented
normal to regional geologic trends and
spaced one or two miles apart. In addi-
tion to aeroradioactivity data, aeromag-
netic data are being recorded on all sur-
veys.
ARMS projects scheduled at present in-
clude: Savannah River Plant, Georgia
Nuclear Aircraft Laboratory, Oak Ridge,
New England, Pittsburgh, Chicago, Fort
Worth, Los Angeles, San Francisco, Han-
ford, Idaho Falls, and Nevada Test Site.
Reports submitted to the AEC on each
area will include aeroradioactivity data
and a correlation of aeroradioactivity
data, geology, and pedology.
Aeroradioactivity and aeromagnetic
data are expected to make a significant
contribution to knowledge of the geology
of each area surveyed. Work to date in-
dicates that both types of data are ex-
tremely useful in mapping and under-
standing the geology of the Piedmont and
other areas of complex geology. In sedi-
mentary terrane, the interpretation of
aeromagnetic data can yield information
on basement structure while information
on the distribution of surficial material
is obtained from the radioactivity data.
PAUL BARTON and P. M. BETHKE:
Distribution of minor elements between
coexisting sulfides.
ROBERT S. SIGAFOOS: Botanical
evidence of floods and flood-plain deposi-
tion.
800th Meeting
The 800th meeting of the Society was
held in the John Wesley Powell Audito-
rium, April 8, 1959, President Joseph W.
Greig presiding.
Program — HUGH D. MISER: Our So-
ciety— retrospect and prophecy.
SIDNEY P. CLARK, JR.: Estimates of
temperature in the outer mantle.
T. C. PHEMISTER: Nature of the con-
tact of Temiskaming and Grenville geo-
logical provinces in northern Ontario.
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
o
801st Meeting
The 801st meeting of the Society was
held in the John Wesley Powell Audito-
rium, April 22, 1959, President Joseph W.
Greig presiding.
Program— ALAN E. PECKHAM: pre-
liminary investigations of underground
waste disposal near Arco, Idaho.
Since 1954 the U.S. Geological Survey,
in cooperation with the U.S. Atomic
Energy Commission, has been studying
the direction, rate of movement, and the
dispersion of saline-water effluent dis-
charged from the Chemical Processing
Plant (CPP) to the underlying basalt
aquifer through a disposal well at the
National Reactor Testing Station (NRTS),
Idaho. The effluent averages about 250
ppm in chloride concentration, whereas
natural waters in this area normally have
chloride concentrations of less than 20
ppm.
Earlier studies indicate that the regional
ground-water flow is from northeast to
southwest. Detailed interpretation of the
movement is made difficult by local varia-
tions in permeability, the effects of inter-
mittent recharge from the Big Lost River,
and intermittent pumping of the CPP
production wells, combined with the dy-
namics of the disposal well and the aquifer
itself.
Chloride concentrations of more than
150 ppm have been detected in 3 test wells
near the disposal well, and 2 other wells
have yielded water containing about 100
ppm of chloride. Six more distant test
wells have yielded water having chloride
concentrations as much as 3 times that
normally expected in water from this area.
The significance of these data is difficult
to establish.
The lag in time between changes in
plant discharge through the disposal well
and changes in chloride concentrations in
test wells indicates straight-line average
rates of ground-water movement of 15 to
50 feet per day, from the disposal well to
“intercept” wells south and west of the
disposal well. The effluent moves radially
from the disposal well in one or more
permeable zones for some distances (per-
haps 1,000 feet) before the flow lines
trend directly down the regional ground-
water gradient. This is just the reverse
situation of the lines of flow into a pumped
well in a region in which ground water
has a constant motion in a general direc-
tion, as described by C. S. Slichter in
the 19th Annual Report, part II, of the
U.S. Geological Survey.
It is hoped that future tracer tests and
other studies, supported by some addi-
tional test wells, will yield more accurate
knowledge of the geologic and hydrologic
character of the aquifer, and will facili-
tate operation of AEC’s Chemical Proc-
essing Plant.
BRIAN SKINNER: System ZnS-MnS-
FeS; effects of maganese on the sphalerite
geothermometer.
WILLIAM A. OLIVER, JR. and ALON-
ZO W. QUINN : Geology of the Narragan-
sett Basin, Rhode Island and Massachu-
setts.
Several areas, in all of the New Eng-
land states except Vermont, have been
mapped at one time or another as contain-
ing Carboniferous sedimentary or meta-
sedimentary rocks. The 1932 Geologic
Map of the United States shows 5 major
and several minor basins, extending from
the south shore of Rhode Island to Bath,
Maine. The age of most of these basins
is in question, but the southernmost one,
the Narragansett basin, is dated as Penn-
sylvania (probably Allegheny age) by an
abundance of plant fossils.
The Narragansett basin covers a 55 by
25 mile area in eastern Rhode Island and
Massachusetts. The sedimentary rocks in
the basin are less resistant to erosion than
surrounding, older rocks, and the basin
is a partially drowned, heavily glaciated,
lowland margined by a crystalline escarp-
ment.
Within the basin, the basal Pondville
conglomerate is overlain to the north by
red shale, sandstone and conglomerate
of the Wamsutta formation, 1000 to
2000 feet thick. The thickest and most
6
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
widespread unit is the Rhode Island
formation which overlies and interfingers
with the Wamsutta formation to the
north, but rests on the Pondville con-
glomerate or the older crystalline rocks
to the south. The Rhode Island forma-
tion consists of some 10,000 feet of grey
and black shale, sandstone, and conglom-
erate with several intercalated coal beds.
The youngest formation in the northern
part of the basin is the Dighton conglom-
erate, preserved in the troughs of several
synclines. To the south, the Purgatory
conglomerate may be of the same age or
may represent one or more conglomerate
units within the Rhode Island formation.
Plant fossils are common in the black
shales and have been found in the sand-
stone and red shale. Well over 100 species
of ferns, seed ferns, arthrophytes, lepido-
phytes and miscellaneous plants have been
described or listed from the Rhode Island
formation. A few species are known from
one or two localities in the Wamsutta for-
mation. Animal fossils, all from the Rhode
Island formation, consist of some 14 in-
sects (mostly cockroaches), 1 arachnid, 12
to 15 fresh water pelecypods, and a few
worm tubes. Locally common are 4
species of conchostracans.
The Pennsylvanian rocks of the Narra-
gansett basin rest uncomforably on, and
are downfaulted against, older Paleozoic
and Precambrian (?) crystalline rocks.
Numerous faults and folds lie within, as
well as along, the margins of the basin.
In the southern part of the basin, small
folds with axial plane cleavage are abun-
dant and there appears to be at least one
major overturned anticline. Stretched
pebbles reflect increasing structural com-
plexity toward the south. Northeast of
Providence, pebbles in the sedimentary
rocks are apparently undistorted; just
south of Providence they are 2 to 3 times
as long as they are wide; and in the
southwest corner of the basin a length-
width ratio of 13:1 has been reported.
Wherever determinable, the long axes of
the pebbles lie in the plane of the bedding
and parallel to the axes of associated
north trending folds. Southwestward in-
creases in metamorphic grade of the rocks,
and in coal rank, are also noted.
The shape and extent of the Narra-
gansett basin in Pennsylvanian time is
unknown, but the abundance of coarse
conglomerate throughout the section seems
to indicate considerable surrounding re-
lief and the area probably consisted of one
or more intermontaine basins. Portions of
the basal conglomerate were locally de-
rived, but the bulk of the sediments in
all formations were transported some dis-
tance by streams. The sandstones and
conglomerates have the characteristic, ir-
regular cross-bedding and cut-and-fill fea-
tures of stream deposits. The finer sedi-
ments were deposited on the flood plains,
and at one time or another coal swamps
covered much of the basin. There is no
indication of any marine connection at
any time. A northern source for most
of the sediment is indicated by (1) sedi-
mentary structures, (2) an increase in
quartz content of sediments to the south,
and (3) the red to gray-black facies
change.
The red color of the Wamsutta forma-
tion is due to the preservation of red iron
pigment which was brought in during
sedimentation. The area of deposition of
this sediment was apparently slightly
higher and better drained so that the red
color could be preserved. To the south,
lower gradients with poorer drainage
produced conditions under which the
iron-oxide was reduced so that grays and
blacks predominate. Later deposits over
the whole basin are predominately gray
sandstones and conglomerates with only
minor amounts of shale. Evidently the
area continued to be mountainous through-
out the period of deposition.
The Narragansett basin is the only
Pennsylvanian coal basin of its kind in
North America, but it is strikingly similar
in its characteristics and history to the
limnic coal basins of France and adjacent
countries. The Narragansett basin and
the limnic basins of Europe were inter-
montaine basins that received great thick-
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
7
nesses of non-marine sedimentary rocks
which were deposited in complete isolation
from the sea and from areas of alternately
marine and non-marine deposition. They
have comparatively few. but thick, coal
beds and exhibit rather complex, com-
monly metamorphic structures dating
from late phases of the orogenic move-
ment which produced the intermontaine
basins in the first place.
802nd Meeting
The 802nd meeting of the Society was
held in the John Wesley Powell Audito-
rium, October 14, 1959, President Joseph
W. Greig presiding.
Program — HARRY W. SMEDES:
Structural interpretation of western Mon-
tana and northern Idaho.
An east-trending trough in western
Montana marks a major crustal block
which has affected sedimentation since
Precambrian Belt time and has influenced
Laramide deformation. Between Helena
and Missoula, the trough is characterized
by infolded Belt rocks and younger strata
and is bounded by Belt strata to the north
and pre-Belt crystalline rocks to the
south. The Boulder and Philipsburg
batholiths and an eastern salient of the
Idaho batholith are restricted to the area
of this block. The northern boundary,
marked by en echelon folds and east-west
thrusts, lies on strike with the straight
northern edge of the Idaho batholith.
Thrust belts east of the Boulder batholith
and near the Philipsburg batholith bulge
eastward within the trough. A wedge pat-
tern of northwesterly trending faults in
Idaho forms an apparent apex near Mis-
soula. Displacement along some of these
faults such as the Osburn fault, is right
lateral.
These structural elements can be inte-
grated by the following kinematic inter-
pretation. During the Laramide orogeny,
the supracrustal rocks of the trough (and
perhaps the crustal block itself) moved
eastward and produced: (1) a left-lateral
tear zone along the northern border,
marked by en echelon folds and thrusts
which may have localized the northern
contacts of the batholith; and (2) east-
ward deflections of the Lewis-Lombard
and Philipsburg fold and thrust belts.
Right-lateral faults branched from the
tear zone near Missoula to form a com-
posite wedge that moved relatively west-
ward, as though pinched between the
trough rocks and those to the north.
L. T. ALDRICH: Mineral ages in the
metamorphic rocks of Iron and Dickinson
Counties, Michigan.
Thirty-five independent mineral ages of
micas suggest the following sequence of
events : Basement gneisses formed and
basal member of Dickinson series laid
down before 2000 m.y. ago; metamorphic
events at 2000 m.y.; pegmatite intrusion
at 1800 m.y.; metamorphism at 1650 m.y.;
and granite intrusion and metamorphism
at 1400 m.y. The 1650 m.y. event may
be the result of the super-position of the
1800 and 1400 m.y. events.
MARIAN KSIAZKIEWICZ: Sedimenta-
tion and tectonics in the Carpathians. See
published paper in Geol. Soc. Amer. Bull.,
v. 70, no. 8, p. 1089-1118, 1959.
803rd Meeting
The 803rd meeting of the Society was
held in the John Wesley Powell Audito-
rium, October 28, 1959, President Joseph
W. Greig presiding.
Program — ALLISON R. PALMER:
Early Late Cambrian stratigraphy of the
United States.
Sedimentation during the early late
Cambrian seems to have been in three gen-
erally contrasting belts approximately
paralleling the shoreline. The inner and
outer belts are characterized by consider-
able amounts of argillaceous and arenace-
ous materials. The middle belt is char-
acterized by oolitic, echinodermal, algal,
sublithographic, banded or mottled, and
generally clean carbonate rocks. In addi-
tion, sediments in the inner belt are often
glauconitic. Limestones included in the
inner belt are generally muddy, whereas
those in the outer belt are generally silty.
Fine suspended material, in the liquid re-
sulting from solution of limestones from
8
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
these belts in acid, is generally brown,
yellow or orange for limestones from the
inner belt, and black for limestones from
the outer belt.
The general early late Cambrian sedi-
mentary history indicates lateral move-
ment of the sedimentary belts toward the
continental shoreline during the early and
later parts of this time. A short-lived,
but widespread, movement of the sedi-
mentary belts away from the shoreline
took place between the times represented
by the beginning of the Aphelaspis zone
and the end of the Dunderbergia zone of
the standard early Late Cambrian faunal
succession (Lochman and Wilson, 1958,
p. 333). According to the interpretation
presented here, the Nolichucky and Conas-
auga formations of Tennessee and Ala-
bama represent the outer sedimentary belt,
and the Maynardville limestone and some
of the lower part of the Knox group (of
authors) represent the generally eastward
regressive movement of the middle car-
bonate belt over the outer belt. In eastern
Nevada and western Utah, the eastward
transgressive movement of the outer belt
is represented in the Dunderward shale
(of Nevada only), the Lincoln Peak
formation in eastern Nevada, and thin-
bedded limestones, shales, and siltstones
in the middle part of the Orr and Hicks
formations in western Utah. The Johns
Wash limestone in eastern Nevada and
limestones in the upper part of the Orr
and Hicks formations in western Utah
represent westward regressive movement
of the middle carbonate belt. The Corset
Spring shale in eastern Nevada and the
“Dunderberg” shale (of authors) in west-
ern Utah represent the maximum west-
ward regression of the inner sedimentary
belt.
Refinement of knowledge of the early
Late Cambrian faunal succession in east-
ern Nevada and western Utah shows that
the fauna of the “Dunderberg” shale (of
authors) in western Utah is partly
younger than that of the Dunderberg
shale of Nevada. Regional stratigraphic
evidence indicates that the two units repre-
sent sedimentation from different sources
and that they were probably never co-
extensive.
Sedimentary successions of Early and
Middle Cambrian age, later Cambrian
age, and Early Ordovician age in western
United States can probably also be ex-
plained in terms of the three shifting belts
of sedimentation. Study of the facies
significance of particular kinds of carbon-
ate sediments within the middle carbonate
belt presents a challenge with considerable
potential for further refinement of Cam-
brian stratigraphy.
Reference
Lochman, Christina and Wilson, J. L.,
1958, Cambrian biostratigraphy in North
America; Jour. Paleontology, 32, no. 2,
p. 312-350.
DAVID B. DOAN: Some eustatic sea
levels of the Western Pacific.
H. A. TOURTELOT. L. G. SCHULTZ,
and J. R. GILL: Chemical and mineralogi-
cal composition of the Pierre shale in
South Dakota and adjacent states.
804th Meeting
The 804th meeting of the Society was
held in the John Wesley Powell Audito-
rium, November 11, 1959, President Joseph
W. Greig presiding.
Program — DONALD R. NICHOLS and
LYNN A. YEHLE: Mud volcanoes in the
Copper River Basin, Alaska.
Two groups of mud volcanoes, consist-
ing largely of clayey silt cones which
discharge gas and highly mineralized
spring water, occur within 15 miles of
Glennallen. The four cones of the Tol-
sona group range in height from 20 to 60
feet, and lie west of the Copper River
near coal-bearing rocks of Tertiary age:
three cones are active, discharging meth-
ane and nitrogen gas and sodium and cal-
cium chloride water. The three cones in
the Drum group are 150 to 300 feet high,
lie east of the Copper River near the
slopes of the volcanic Wrangell Moun-
tains, and emit carbon dioxide gas and
warm sodium chloride and bicarbonate
waters.
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
9
The gas source of Tolsona springs may
be from buried marsh or coal deposits
because the springs contain only a trace
of carbon dioxide and lack hydrocarbons
heavier than methane. Gas from Drum
springs probably emanates from volcanic
sources. Water in Tolsona springs may be
a mixture of meteoric, connate, or highly
saline ground water; the Yuma springs
may also include small amounts of vol-
canic water.
Formation of the cones was by quiet
intermittent accretion and, in the Drum
cones, probably included eruptive phases.
Most of the cones formed largely before
or during the last major glaciation.
ALICE D. WEEKS: The role of diagen-
esis of sandstone-type uranium deposits.
GORDON G. LILL: The Moho deep
drilling project.
805th Meeting
The 805th meeting of the Society was
held in the John Wesley Powell Audito-
rium, December 9, 1959, Vice-President
C. A. Anderson presiding.
Program — The Presidential address;
JOSEPH W. GREIG: Development of
phase equilibrium studies in the interest
of petrology.
67th Annual Meeting
The 67th annual meeting was held im-
mediately following the 805th meeting,
President Joseph W. Greig presiding. The
reports of the secretaries, treasurer, and
auditing committee were read and ap-
proved. The Awards Committee presented
first prize for the best paper of the year
to W. GARY ERNST for his paper “Glau-
cophane stability and the glaucophane
schist problem.” Second prize was
awarded to JOHN C. REED, JR. and
BRUCE H. BRYANT for their paper
“Lower Cambrian and Late Precambrian
rocks in the Grandfather Mountain win-
dow, North Carolina.” Three honorable
mention awards were given to : R. S.
SIGAFOOS for his most enjoyable talk
on “Botanical evidence of floods and
flood-plan deposition”; E. S. SIMPSON
for his controversial “A ground water
mechanism for the deoosition of glacial
till”; and EMILY JAGER for her paper
“Age measurements on some Alpine and
pre-Alpine micas.” The Sleeping Bear
Cup was presented to HENRY FAUL, a
consistent critic of geologists, over the
years.
Officers for the year 1960 were then
elected :
President: HARRY S. LADD
First Vice-President: LUNA B. LEOPOLD
Second Vice-President: WALTER S.
WHITE
Secretary (2 Years) : JOHN T. HACK
Treasurer: MARGARET COOPER
Members-at-Large of the Council (2
years): PHILIP H. ABELSON,
DEAN S. CARDER, and S. WAR-
REN HOBBS.
The Society nominated CARLE H.
DANE to be a Vice-President of the Wash-
ington Academy of Sciences for the year
1960.
Science in Washington
SCIENTISTS IN THE NEWS
This column will present brief items concern-
ing the activities of members of the Academy.
Such items may include notices of talks given ,
important conferences or visits, promotions,
awards, election to membership or office in sci-
entific and technical societies, appointment to
technical committees, civic activities, and mar-
riages, births, and other family news. Formal
contributors are being assigned for the systematic
collection of news at institutions employing con-
siderable numbers of Academy members (see
list on masthead) . However, for the bulk of the
membership, we must rely on individuals to
send us news concerning themselves, and their
friends. Contributions may be addressed to
Dr. Harold T. Cook, U.S.D.A., ashington
25, D.C.
10
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
APPLIED PHYSICS LABORATORY
Ralph E. Gibson presented a talk, “A Sys-
tems Approach to Research Management,” at
the Naval Research Reserve Seminar on Research
Planning and Management, held August 25 at
Princeton University.
Alfred J. Zmuda published a paper, “Iono-
spheric Electrostatic Fields and the Equatorial
Electrojet,” in the August issue of the Journal
of Geophysical Research.
CATHOLIC UNIVERSITY
Karl F. Herzfeld, head of the Physics De-
partment, will be awarded the Gibbons Medal by
the University Alumni Association at its annual
meeting in November. This medal is presented
annually for outstanding contributions to the
United States of America, the Catholic Church,
or Catholic University.
Dr. Herzfeld attended the 8th Annual Sympo-
sium on Combustion, held at Pasadena, Calif.,
August 28 to September 2.
George D. Rock, professor of physics, has
be named secretary-general of the University.
William S. Osgood, who recently retired
from Renssalaer Polytech with the title of profes-
sor emeritus, has been appointed professor of
civil engineering.
W. Gardner Lynn, head of the Biology De-
partment, presented a paper, “Types of Amphibian
Metamorphosis,” at the American Society of
Zoologists’ Refresher Course on Metamorphosis at
Stillwater, Okla., August 29. Professor Lynn also
attended the 10th International Congress for Cell
Biology in Paris, September 4-9, and the Sympo-
sium of the International Institute of Embryology
at Pallanza, Italy, September 15-20. While abroad
he visited the biological laboratories of the
University of Milan, the Oceanographic Institute
in Paris, Louvain University, the University of
Stockholm, and Bedford College, University of
London.
GEOLOGICAL SURVEY
Waldemar T. Schaller presented a paper,
“Some Ideas on Beryl,” before the Mineralogical
Society of Great Britain and Ireland on June 2.
He also attended sessions of the 21st Inter-
national Geological Congress, held in Copen-
hagen August 14-25. During the summer, Dr.
Schaller traveled in various other European
countries, visiting fellow scientists and points of
scientific interest.
During the summer, Clarence S. Ross at-
tended meetings of the International Geological
Congress in Copenhagen, served as delegate to a
conference of the International Mineralogical
Association, and participated in a field trip
around North Cape, Norway. While in Europe,
Dr. Ross visited several other countries before
returning to Washington on September 20, his
80th birthday.
Thomas P. Thayer gave a paper at the Inter-
national Geological Congress in Copenhagen on
“Some Critical Differences between Alpine and
Stratiform Ultramafic Complexes.” In September
Dr. Thayer examined ultramafic complexes in
Yugoslavia and Turkey, and attended a confer-
ence on chromite in Ankara, September 26-Octo-
ber 5, for the International Cooperation Adminis-
tration.
Edwin W. Roedder attended meetings of the
International Geological Congress in Copenhagen
and gave a paper on “Fluid Inclusions as Samples
of Ore-forming Fluids.” Dr. Roedder and his
family also toured a number of Scandinavian and
other European countries before returning to
Washington.
George T. Faust attended sessions of the
International Union of Geodesy and Geophysics
at Helsinski, Finland, July 24 to 27, and of the
International Mineralogical Association and Inter-
national Geologic Congress in Copenhagen. Dr.
Faust served as secretary pro tern of the Mineral
Data Commission of the IMA and was elected
secretary for 1961-62. Between the meetings in
Helsinski and Copenhagen he made several field
trips in Norway, and after the meetings in Copen-
hagen he did field work in West Germany and
Alsace before returning to Washington.
Jewell J. Glass participated in field trips in
Norway and Sweden and attended sessions in
Copenhagen of the International Geological Con-
gress. After the Congress she visited West Ger-
many.
Martha S. Carr and Walter B. Lang were
married July 21. Both retired on July 31, having
been in the Geological Survey since 1918 and
1922, respectively. Since their marriage, Mr. and
Mrs. Lang have been traveling in England and
Europe; they attended meetings of the Inter-
national Geological Congress in Copenhagen
during August.
Irving May has been appointed a member of
the Division of Chemistry and Chemical Tech-
nology of NAS-NRC, to serve as liaison represen-
tative on behalf of the Geological Survey.
Raymond L. Nace received the Ph.D. degree
(geology) from Columbia University on June 6.
HOWARD UNIVERSITY
The year 1960 has brought three distinct honors
to Moddie D. Taylor, professor of chemistry.
In June, he was selected as one of six winners
of the Manufacturing Chemists’ Association’s
Chemistry Teacher Awards. Each award consists
of a medal, a citation, and $1,000, given for out-
standing undergraduate teaching. Francis O. Rice
of the Georgetown University Chemistry Depart-
ment also was a winner of a 1960 MCA award.
Dr. Taylor also was one of a group of five
well-known scientists selected by the Robert A.
Welch Foundation to participate in its Visiting
Scholar Program. Dr. Taylor will spend the
academic year 1960-61 conducting personal re-
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
11
search on rare earth compounds at Prairie View
(Tex.) A&M College. The other four participants
are Edward Teller, who will visit at Rice Univer-
sity: Hans Jonassen of Tulane, who will visit at
the University of Texas; W. B. Smith of Ohio
State University, who will visit at Texas Chris-
tian; and Daniel Bovet, Nobel laureate in chem-
istry from the University of Rome, who will visit
at Southwestern Medical School in Dallas.
Also, Dr. Taylor’s book, “First Principles of
Chemistry,” was published this year by D. Van
Nostrand. It has already been adopted by 25
schools throughout the country and promises to
become one of the more rigorous general chem-
istry texts on the market.
Dr. Taylor has been on the faculty at Howard
University since 1948, and is very active in
chemical education at the college and high school
level. His research has included work on the
hydrogen bond of dimeric carboxylic acids, and
on the physical properties of rare-earth halides
and benzoates.
NATIONAL BUREAU OF STANDARDS
Allen V. Astin, director of the Bureau, was
one of 35 new members recently elected to the
National Academy of Sciences.
William D. Appel, former chief of the Tex-
tiles Section before his retirement received an
honorary doctor of science degree from North
Carolina State College at its May commencement.
William N. Harrison, chief of the Enameled
Metals Section, was one of 19 persons to receive
the 1960 Award of Merit of the American Society
for Testing Materials, in recognition of distin-
guished service to the Society. He received a cer-
tificate at the ASTM June meeting in Atlantic
City.
Archibald T. McPherson, associate director,
received the 1960 Honor Award of the Washing-
ton Chapter, American Institute of Chemists, at
a dinner on May 24. Dr. McPherson was cited
for “unselfish devotion to the encouragement of
young scientists, and interdisciplinary contribu-
tions in the national interest through his imagina-
tive leadership in calibration and specification
activities.”
Lauriston S. Taylor, chief of the Radiation
Physics Division, received an honorary doctorate
of science from the University of Pennsylvania
on June 15.
William Wr. W alton has been appointed chief
of the Floor, Roof, and Wall Coverings Section
of the Building Technology Division. Kurt E.
Shuler, formerly consultant to the Heat Divi-
sion, has been appointed consultant to the
director.
Several Academy members have retired from
the staff in recent months, as follows: Garbis H.
Keulegan, physicist in the Fluid Mechanics
Section, on July 31; Fred L. Mohler, chief of
the Mass Spectrometry Section, on July 15;
Hubert R. Snoke, assistant chief of the Building
Technology Division, on July 31; and Harold F.
Stimson, senior physicist in the Temperature
Physics Section, on April 30 after more than 42
years at the Bureau.
Academy members presenting papers at recent
international meetings have included the follow-
ing: Norman Bekkedahl, “Research Work in
the Polymer Structure Section of the National
Bureau of Standards,” at the Institut Argentino
Elastomeres, Buenos Aires, September 21; Fran-
cis C. Breckenridge, “A Correlation of Signal
Color Recognition Tests,” at the 6th International
Technical Conference on Lighthouses and Other
Aids to Navigation, Washington, September
26-30; Herbert P. Broida, “Electronically Ex-
cited CN Produced by Reactions of Atomic Ni-
trogen with Hydrocarbons: Pressure Dependence
of Rotationally Perturbed Lines in the Ultraviolet
Band Spectrum of CN,” at the Symposium on
Atomic Reactions, McGill University, Montreal,
September 7 ; H. P. R. Frederiske, “Properties
of Turile (TiCL),” at the IUPAC Conference of
Semiconductors, Prague, August 29-September 2;
Gordon M. Kline, “Absorption of Polyesters and
Other Polymers to Glass and Other Substrates,”
at the IUPAC Division of Plastics and High Poly-
mers Symposium on Reinforced Polyester Resins,
Turin, Italy, September 28; Ladislaus Marton,
“Characteristic Energy Losses of Electrons,” be-
fore the Czechoslovakian Academy of Sciences,
Prague, in August; and Charlotte M. Sitterlv,
‘Report on Atomic Spectra,” before the Triple
Union Commission on Spectroscopy, Ottawa,
September 5.
NATIONAL INSTITUTES OF HEALTH
Chester W. Emmons, head of the Medical
Mycology Section, National Institute of Allergy
and Infectious Diseases, gave his presidential
address before the Mycological Society of
America at its recent meeting in Stillwater, Okla.
“Mycologists must continue,” he stated, “to take
increasing responsibility in the study of the
fungi” which cause systemic mycoses. Emphasizing
the importance of work in this field, Dr. Emmons
noted that in one recent year mycotic deaths in
the United States equalled the number of polio-
myelitis deaths and exceeded by one the total
number of deaths reported for whooping cough,
diphtheria, scarlet fever, typhoid, malaria, and
brucellosis.
Sarah S. Stewart, of the National Cancer In-
stitute, and Bernice E. Eddy, Division of Bio-
logies Standards, have reported that the resistance
of mice to tumor induction by the SE polyoma
virus has been traced to the presence of anti-
bodies in serum and milk of the mothers. Their
paper, of which Marjean Irwin and Stephanie
Lee are co-authors, appeared in a recent issue
of Nature.
Nathan B. Eddy, principal pharmacologist at
NIH since 1939, and the foremost world figure in
the field of drug addiction and analgesics, re-
12
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
tired September 1 at the mandatory age of 70.
Dr. Eddy announced that he planned to make few
changes in his regular schedule of scientific
activities.
NAVAL ORDNANCE LABORATORY
Hermann H. Kurzweg has left NOL to be-
come assistant director of research at the National
Aeronautics and Space Administration. He has
been succeeded as associate technical director for
aeroballistics by Robert E. Wilson, who for the
past three years had been chief of the Laboratory’s
Aeroballistics Program.
USDA, BELTSVILLE
Clarence H. Hoffmann, assistant director of
the Entomology Research Division, gave a lecture,
“Approaches to Biological Control by the Ento-
mology Research Division of the U.S\ Department
of Agriculture,” at the recent 11th International
Congress of Entomology in Vienna; he was an
official delegate of the Entomological Society of
America. While abroad, Dr. Hoffmann visited a
number of scientific laboratories, educational
institutions, and chemical companies.
Dr. Hoffmann also presented a paper, “Effects
of Insecticides on Aquatic Life,” at a Conference
on Physiological Aspects of Water Quality, held
in Washington under the auspices of the Public
Health Service.
USDA, WASHINGTON
Robert W. Webb received a high public
tribute from Senator John S. Cooper (R. Ky.) in
the September 2 issue of the Congressional Rec-
ord Appendix. Senator Cooper called attention
to Dr. Webb’s pioneering research on the nature
and properties of cotton fiber, and stated that it
had completely changed the concepts of cotton
quality in production, marketing, and utilization.
He inserted an article in the Record entitled, “He
Pioneered a New Science that Changed the Ways
of a Great Industry,” that described Dr. Webb’s
work.
Hazel K. Stiebeling, director of the Institute
of Home Economics, was a member of the organ-
izing committee of the Fifth International Con-
gress on Nutrition, held here September 1-7. She
served as co-chairman of one of the sessions
and reported on original research.
Joseph R. Spies presented a paper, “The
Chemistry of Allergens XV. Inactivation of the
Castor Bean Allergen and Ricin by Heating with
Aqueous Calcium Hydroxide,” before the Biologi-
cal Chemistry Division of the American Chemical
Society, meeting in New York on September 12.
E. Jack Coulson, Harry S. Bernton, and
Henry Stevens were co-authors.
Elbert L. Little, Jr., dendrologist of the For-
est Service, represented the United States in the
FAO Latin American Conifer Seminar and Study
Tour, held in Mexico September 19 to October 28.
UNIVERSITY OF MARYLAND
In the Institute for Molecular Physics,
Edward A. Mason and Homer W. Schamp,
Jr., have been promoted from associate professor
to professor.
UNCLASSIFIED
Ellsworth P. Killip, retired, has described
11 new species of the passion-flower family in a
recent Smithsonian Institution publication. Dr.
Killip, who has had a lifelong interest in the pas-
sion-flower, some years ago listed the 365 species
then known in America. He discovered the new
varieties during explorations in Colombia and
Venezuela.
Samuel B. Detwiler, retired, spoke on “Trees,
Forests, and Water” before the science class of
Gunston Junior High S'chool, Arlington, on Sep-
tember 14. This was the first lecture to be given
in the current scholastic year under the visiting
scientists and engineers program sponsored by
the Joint Board on Science Education.
DEATHS
Frank C. Kracek died July 5 at the age of
69. He received his doctorate in physical
chemistry from the University of Minnesota in
1924, and 33 years was a physical chemist asso-
ciated with the Geophysical Laboratory of the
Carnegie Institution; his principal researches at
the Geophysical Laboratory were in the field of
phase equilibrium studies of the alkali silicates,
sodium sulfate, and the silver sulfides and tellu-
rides. More recently, his research was in the
field of mineral thermochemistry, in particular
determining heats of formation of the feldspar
minerals and alkali silicates. In 1956, upon
retirement from the Geophysical Laboratory, he
became associated with the Geological Survey,
continuing his work on the thermochemistry of
rock-forming minerals.
AFFILIATED SOCIETIES
Experience during the first several months of
the current year indicates that the Journal will
better serve the Academy members if it reports
the activities of the affiliated societies in two
separate ways. We shall, as occasion permits,
gradually shift our format in this direction, and
hope to have the change fully accomplished in
time for the January, 1961, issue. One facet of
this proposed arrangement will be a “Calendar
of Events.” to include only those programs which
will be held after the scheduled (and, we hope,
actual) appearance of the Journal. This calendar
will be listed by date, rather than by organization,
and will restrict itself essentially to title and a
minimum of other essential data. A second fea-
ture of the projected reporting system will be
devoted to the activities of the societies, special
projects, executive committee actions, educational
activities and any other newsworthy material. Up
to now we have signally failed to get a representa-
tive amount of this kind of thing, yet we are
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
13
convinced that it would be interesting as well
as valuable if we had it. Our decision to separate
the calendar of events from the news items is
largely prompted by the hope that more time
will thus be freed for gathering the latter. Finally,
we hope to publish, at least once each year, a
complete listing of the affiliated societies, includ-
ing the incumbent officers, the place and time
of regular meetings, scheduled election dates,
and so on.
For this and the December issue, the prevail-
ing format will be retained in reporting the
activities of the affiliated societies.
Acoustical Society of America, Washington
D.C. Chapter
On 19 September, Mr. M. K. Bull, Depart-
ment of Aeronautics and Astronautics, Univer-
sity of Southampton, spoke on boundary layer
work, particularly as it concerns measurement of
pressure fluctuations on the walls of wind tunnels
and water tunnels.
The October 17 program featured R. K. Cook
and J. M. Young, National Bureau of Standards,
dealing with “Strange sounds in the atmosphere.”
American Institute of Electrical Engineers,
Washington Section
A panel meeting on “Planning the structure
of the engineering profession for unity”, provid-
ing an opportunity for participation by members
of the section, and looking to a vote on certain
alternative plans, was held on October 11. Ample
evidence of the need for facing the problem of
unified action is indicated by the fact that there
are now well over one hundred different engineer-
ing organizations in the U. S.
American Society for Metals, Washington
Chapter
On November 14, John A. Bennett, Chief Metal-
lurgy Section, National Bureau of Standards, will
speak on “What the metallurgist is doing about
fatigue.”
American Society of Civil Engineers, National
Capital Section
At the September 13 meeting, Mr. Erskine
S'tewart, Acting Director, Better Highways In-
formation Foundation, spoke on the role of his
organization. The following month, October 11,
Mr. 0. A. Schmidt, who is World Bank director
of operations for the Western hemisphere, de-
scribed the program of the organization in
general and discussed some specific projects in
Latin America.
The section is arranging to hold joint meetings
with various student chapters in the Washington
area; the first, on October 5, was at the George
Washington University.
Two prizes, one for associate members and one
for student members, are to be awarded for
papers on the place of professional ethics in the
engineering curriculum, and on ethics in the
legal, medical, and engineering professions, re-
spectively. Candidate papers are to be given
before sectional or student chapter meetings, and
the best entered in a final competition for the
Daniel W. Mead award.
American Society of Mechanical Engineers,
Washington Section
September meetings included a discussion on
September 8 of the “Utilization of outstanding
rubbers and plastics” by G. W. Flanigan of the
B. F. Goodrich Chemical Co., and on September
22 a talk by Dr. A. G. Norem, Institute of De-
fense Analyses, on “Engineering aspects of aero-
dynamic heating.”
On October 13, R. E. Fischell and M. A.
Schreiber, both of the Johns Hopkins Applied
Physics Laboratory, described the design and
use of the Transit satellite, supplementing their
remarks with a sound color film. Two papers
were presented on October 27: (1) Jeffrey
Watkins, of the Solar Aircraft Company, on
“Design and development of an advanced high
performance gas turbine engine,” the 1100 HP
Saturn; and (2) J. J. Pippenger, Double A
Products Company, Michigan, on “Fluid power
controls,” including comment on the modification
of industrial equipment for ground support.
Botanical Society of W ashington
At the first meeting of the current season, C. B.
Davey and George Papavizas, of the Plant In-
dustry Station, Beltsville, jointly summarized
their research of the past three years on the
“Biological control of soil pathogens,” particularly
as it relates to root rot fungi.
Chemical Society of W ashington
Two concurrent sessions were held, following
dinner, on October 13, at Catholic University:
(1) P. J. Elving, University of Michigan, on
“Mechanisms of organic electrode reactions,” and
(2) a panel discussion, moderated by Frederick
Nachod, Sterling-Winthrop Research Institute, on
“Improving the professional stature of chemists
and chemical engineers.”
In addition to the election of officers, the
November 10 meeting included a talk by Stephen
Brunauer, Portland Cement Association Labora-
tories, on the “Hydration of the calcium silicates.”
Arthur Cope MIT, and president-elect of the
ACS, is scheduled to address the society at its
December 1 meeting in Hurst Hall, American
University, on the subject “Unusual transannular
reactions.” There will be a dinner in Mary
Graydon Hall preceding the program.
Columbia Historical Society
The society’s first meeting of the season,
October 18, featured presentation by Donald
14
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
Mugridge of a "‘Photographic record of Wash-
ington during the Civil War,” and by Richard
Mansfield on “Washington as Dick Mansfield
knows it.”
Recent gifts to the organization include: several
hundred old lantern slides from the collection
of the late Dr. Laurence S’chmeckebier, covering
more than fifty years; bound volumes of clippings
from various sources; material on the history of
the Marine Band, and a large collection of first
edition Sousa marches; a gavel made from wood
recovered in the 1927 repair of the White House
roof; and several inauguration programs of his-
torical interest and value.
Helminthological Society of Washington
An all-day program of scientific programs,
culminating with a banquet, was held on October
8. at the University of Maryland in commemorat-
ing the fiftieth anniversary of the founding of the
Society. Formal papers on perspectives in para-
sitology, on dietary factors affecting ovarial trans-
mission of symbiotes, on physiology of intra-
cellular parasites, and on goals for parasitologists,
in the morning, were followed by afternoon in-
formal discussions organized about six “interest
groups.” The banquet speaker was Dr. C. D.
Leake, whose address was entitled “Paralouge
and Parasite.”
Insecticide Society of Washington
Four papers, all directed to the problem of
the face fly in livestock, made up the October 19
meeting. The material was presented by scien-
tists from the Entomology Research Division of
the USDA and from the Department of Ento-
mology of the University of Maryland.
Institute of Radio Engineers, Washington
D.C. Section
Phil Allen, of the Naval Research Laboratory,
who has been long concerned with satellite track-
ing techniques, spoke on October 10 of the
“Monopulse system — a precision tracking radar.”
The emphasis was laid on new microwave tech-
niques and components.
A series of lectures, at two-week intervals until
December 6, is offered jointly by the Professional
Groups on Microwave Theory and Technics and
on Antennas and Propagation, on the general
topic “Antenna theory and techniques.” Selected
lecturers will be featured, and the sessions held,
beginning October 11, in the East Building of the
National Bureau of Standards.
Medical Society of the District of Columbia
A considerable array of programs of interest to
medical personnel in the Washington area were
noted in the October issue of Current Medical
Events. Among these were: October 6 symposium
organized by the Committee on Public Informa-
tion and Education for the doctors’ office staff;
a forum on “General problems in medical prac-
tice” held October 29 arranged by the Medical
Council of the Washington Metropolitan Area;
and a series of postgraduate lectures on the basic
sciences, weekly from October 5 to November 15,
in the auditorium of the Medical Society Build-
ing at 1718 M Street, N.W.
Philosophical Society of Washington
A special Fifteen Hundreth meeting of the
society is scheduled for December 2!
ACADEMY ACTIVITIES
Board of Managers, June Meeting
These notes are intended to outline briefly, for
the information of the membership, the principal
actions taken at Board meetings. They are not
the official Minutes as prepared by the Secretary.
— Ed.
The Board of Managers held its 530th meeting
on June 21 at NBS, with President Wood presid-
ing. The Minutes of the 529th meeting were
approved as previously circulated, with minor
corrections.
Dr. Wood announced appointments to the 1960
Committee on Awards for Scientific Achievement,
as follows: General chairman, Archie I. Mahan;
panel chairmen, W. Gardner Lynn (biological
sciences), Charles Herzfeld (engineering
sciences), Francis E. Johnston (mathematical
sciences), Norman Bekkedahl (physical sciences),
and Ralph B. Kennard (teaching of science). Dr.
Wood also indicated that the membership of the
panels would be established by agreement between
the general chairman and each panel chairman.
Chairman Hall of the Membership Committee
presented, for first reading, the names of 14
candidates for membership.
In the absence of Chairman McPherson of the
Policy and Planning Committee, Arnold M.
S’ookne stated that the Committee has met to
consider means for improving relations between
the Academy and its affiliated societies. The
Committee plans to meet with society officers to
check the amount of interest in the Academy,
and in particular to determine the present num-
ber of society members who are also members
of the Academy; also, it hopes to prepare some
literature on the Academy’s objectives and activi-
ties for the information of scientists of the metro-
politan area. Further, it is examining the feasi-
bility of issuing a joint directory of the Academy
and affiliated societies, along the lines of the
one that appeared in 1948. The Committee felt
that the voting privileges of representatives of
affiliated societies at WAS Board of Managers
meetings should not be curtailed.
Dr. Hall presented for second reading the
names of 11 candidates previously proposed for
Academy membership, as follows: Morris K.
Barrett, Morris Belkin, Robert W. Berliner,
William R. Carroll, Margaret K. Derringer (Mrs.
Morris K. Barrett), George W. Howard, George
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
15
B. Mider, David F. Rail, Joseph L. Stearn, Paul
DeL. Thomas, and Charles G. Zubrod. These
candidates were thereupon elected to member-
ship.
The secretary reported the following figures on
Academy membership: Resident active, 765;
resident retired, 61; nonresident active, 184;
nonresident retired, 60; total, 1070.
The treasurer reported that for the period
January 1 to June 21, receipts were $13,526 and
disbursements were $12,066.
Board of Managers, October Meeting
The Board of Managers held its 531st meeting
on October 18 at NBS. with Secretary Specht
presiding in the absence of the President and
President-Elect.
The minutes of the 530th meeting were ap-
proved with minor corrections.
In the absence of Chairman Stiehler of the
Meetings Committee Dr. Specht announced the
next three meetings as follows:
October 20. Dr. S. L. Madorsky. Impressions
of a recent trip to Russia.
November 17. Professor E. Bright Wilson, Jr.
An introduction to scientific research. A joint
meeting with the Junior Academy and the D. C.
Chapter of Sigma Xi.
December 15. Dr. Harry Wexler. Weather
satellites.
Commenting on these talks, A. T. McPherson
pointed out that Dr. Madorsky, having been born
in Russia, can speak the language and has taken
advantage of his opportunity to talk to the
people; that Professor Wilson has written a book
on his subject; and that Dr. Wexler’s satellites
are completely revolutionizing the forecasting of
weather.
In the absence of Chairman Hall of the Mem-
bership Committee, Howard H. Campaigne pre-
sented, for first reading, the names and citations
of 21 candidates for membership.
For the Committee on Grant-in-Aid, Dr. Specht
reported $916.22 available for grants.
Chairman McPherson of the Policy and Plan-
ning Committee reported that his committee is
making a systematic attempt to obtain from ihe
affiliated societies suggestions for strengthening
the bonds between them and the Academy. He
thanked Gerhard Brauer for a report on this
subject from the Washington Section of the In-
ternational Association for Dental Research.
For the Committee on Science Talent, Dr.
Specht reported success of a summer program for
providing scientific working experiences for
selected high school students. The Academy
contributed toward pin money for the students’
lunch and car fare.
For the Joint Board and the Committee on
Science Education, Dr. Specht passed around
for inspection John K. Taylor’s report of July
15 to the National Science Foundation on the
activities of the Academy’s 1959-60 science educa-
tion program that had been supported by the
Foundation.
Dr. Campaigne presented for second reading
the names of 14 candidates proposed last June.
They were elected and will be invited to accept
membership in the Academy. Their names and
affiliations are listed at the end of this report.
Dr. Specht reported the following figures on
Academy membership: Resident active, 778;
resident retired, 62 ; non-resident active, 177 ;
non-resident retired, 63; honorary, 6; total, 1086.
Treasurer Aslakson reported that as of Sep-
tember 30 receipts were $11,599; disbursements,
$12,302.
Chairman Shepard of the Special Committee
on By Laws handed to Dr. McPherson a draft
of a revision of the Standing Rules of the
Academy for consideration by the latter’s Com-
mittee on Policy and Planning. Dr. Shepard’s
committee was then discharged with the thanks
of the Board.
Present by invitation of President Wood to
report this meeting for the Journal of the Wash-
ington Academy of Sciences , Past President
Campbell gave the Board an informal report of
plans of the editorial group for the 1961 Journal
and allocation of responsibility for its produc-
tion.
Mrs. R. R. Fell, the Academy’s staff officer,
suggested that a member wishing to resign in
good standing before the end of a calendar year
be permitted to pay partial dues for his last year,
covering the period from January 1 to the date of
his resignation. No action could be taken im-
mediately on this proposal.
The meeting adjourned at 9:15. Dr. Specht
requested the Vice-Presidents representing the
Affiliated Societies to remain for a special meet-
ing to nominate officers of the Academy for 1961.
Elected to Academy Membership
John I. Bohnert, Naval Research Lab.
Rollon O. Bondelid, Naval Research Lab.
Bernard B. Brodie, Nat. Heart Institute
Harvey R. Chaplin, Jr., David Taylor Model Basin
Kenneth L. Dunning, Naval Research Lab.
Alan C. Kolb, Naval Research Lab.
Cornell H. Mayer, Naval Research Lab.
Edward F. McClain, Jr., Naval Research Lab.
Leonard M. Murphy, Coast and Geod. Survey
Bruce M. Pollock, Plant Industry Station
Milton S. Schechter, Agr. Res. Center
Allen H. Schooley, Naval Research Lab.
Robert F. Steiner, Naval Med. Res. Institute
Eligius A. Wolicki, Naval Research Lab.
16
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
THE BROWNSTONE TOWER
Frank L. Campbell
One would think
that all readily un-
derstandable improve-
ments in ordinary
devices that make our
lives easier would
have been invented
long ago and that all
modern improvements
might be confined to
sophisticated applica-
tions of mathematical
physics and chemis-
try, the kind of
wizardry that old-timers who failed to keep up
to date cannot now understand. Actually, in-
ventors are as busy as they ever were and are
turning out devices that are so effective and so
simple that we exclaim, “Why didn’t / think of
it!”
The first Washington inventor we ever heard
of was the late husband of our Aunt Mary. He
had invented (nowadays we say “formulated”)
a potent mixture that our aunt firmly believed
to be a panacea. Before the days of the Food
and Drug Administration there was nothing to
prevent Aunt Mary from proclaiming the virtues
of “Johnson’s Painkiller” without restraint and
from making it in Washington and trying to
sell it in Philadelphia. It was probably harmless,
for she used it and lived to an overripe old age.
This early experience did not cause us to
concoct a better panacea. We just didn’t have
the practical inventive urge, but we have always
been interested in the achievements of those who
are often called gadgeteers. Why this term
should be not quite respectable, is a mystery to
us. Is a happy turn of phrase more worthy than
a better mouse trap? We think not. We believe
that the imagination, knowledge, and skill re-
quired to build a better mouse trap are quite as
rare and more valuable than the art of putting
words together in a way that should cause a
reader to pay attention. Indeed, we would glorify
the mouse trap builder, and consign to perdition
those advertisers who for a price imply that
Sylvan Cigarettes are the breath of romance or
that Belch Beer and beauty are synonymous.
As a boy our best friend was a gadgeteer, and
we encouraged, applauded, and sometimes fi-
nanced his creative adventures, which culminated
in the building of an automotive vehicle. In be-
tween our catalytic activities in gadgeteering,
we read Le Comte de Monte Cristo and other im-
practical creations of Alexandre Dumas, pere.
We did not encounter inventive genius again
until many years later here in Washington. Then
we had the privilege of knowing Dr. Lyle D.
Goodhue, a member of the staff of the Division
of Insecticide Investigations of the old Bureau
of Entomology, U. S. Department of Agriculture.
It happened that we worked in the same building
at the Agricultural Research Center in Beltsville.
Lyle realized that the effectiveness of a liquid or
solid insecticide depended not only on its chem-
ical composition but on the size of particles
brought into contact with the insect. A priori
it seemed that the effect would be proportional
to the degree of dispersion of the insecticide, the
smaller the particles the greater the effect for
a given weight of material. Therefore he became
interested in the production of insecticidal smokes,
or, as he called them, aerosols, a term then
current in colloid chemistry. He made a sys-
tematic study of ways and means for producing
such smokes, for example, by impinging a fine
stream of insecticide on a hot plate, or by burn-
ing a flammable mixture containing a stable
insecticide.
One day in 1935 it occurred to Lyle that it
would be possible to produce a useful aerosol by
dissolving an insecticide in an inert volatile
liquid that could be sprayed out of a container
by the pressure of its own vapor. He asked
us to witness this idea in his notebook. This we
did by initialing his description of it. Thus we
were present at the birth of one of the most
lucrative ideas that was ever gestated by a Wash-
ington scientist. It was later the subject of a
Public Service Patent that was the beginning of
a billion dollar industry, not only for the con-
venient dissemination of insecticides, but for the
pushbutton application of a hundred other prod-
ucts including paint, perfume, and shaving lather.
In the beginning Lyle was not trying to create
a general labor-saving device, but merely to pro-
duce satisfactory insecticide aerosols. Thus his
work may be called basic to the tremendous
practical devlopments that followed. He was
successful because of his thorough grounding in
physical and chemical principles, methods, and
materials, his ability to do his own shop work,
and his lively curiosity about current scientific
developments. Looking back, one can identify
the key that opened the door for Lyle; it was
his knowledge of the physical and chemical
characteristics of Freon, a fluorinated hydro-
carbon then, and still, used as a refrigerant, that
caused him to select it as a safe solvent and
propellant for his insecticide. After that it was
just a matter of working out mechanical details
and of testing and promoting the resulting
“aerosol bombs,” which were used to protect our
soldiers in World War II. The testing and pro-
motion were well done by our former assistant.
William N. Sullivan.
Did Lyle Goodhue become a millionaire? No,
he did not even become prosperous as a result
of his flash of genius, but he did benefit by it.
He became Director of Research in Agricultural
Chemicals for the Phillips Petroleum Company
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
17
in Bartlesville, Oklahoma, and has raised his
family there in a very pleasant environment.
Although seriously handicapped by defective
vision throughout his life, Lyle has always been
an unusually happy person with a penetrating
sense of humor. His job now is to find agri-
cultural uses for chemicals that Phillips can
produce. So far he has not hit a jack pot re-
motely approaching the potential of the push-
button propellant but he still has the pleasure
of the search from which products now un-
imagined may arise. Currently he is investigat-
ing the action of certain chemicals on pest
birds, having found one that will temporarily
prevent birds from flying. It seems that birds
so grounded become frustrated and when they
are able to fly away they do not return to the
scene of their discomfiture. We look forward
to the destarlingization of Washington by this
method.
When Lyle is not working for Phillips, he is
usually to be found at home, working in the
greenhouse that he built himself for the produc-
tion of exotic house plants. He has made the
interior of his greenhouse a thing of beauty and
a source of some additional income. By any
reasonable standards he is a very successful man.
We cannot close this little excursion into inven-
tive genius without calling attention to an in-
vention of our own. which we think reduces the
daily business of shaving to the lowest common
denominator. And Lyle Goodhue was responsible
for it. We had been using one of his pressurized
lather cans while on a trip that enabled us to
visit him in Bartlesville. At the Tulsa Airport
we opened our bag and found everything in the
central compartment buried in lather. Something
in the bag had pressed against the valve of the
can and released all the lather in it! From that
moment we resolved never to use Lyle’s lather
dispenser again. Then we quickly found by trial
of various cakes of soap that some produce
suds more readily and abundantly than others.
Furthermore, we found that it is not necessary to
use a brush or soap container for the purpose
of whipping up and applying a lather; one simply
washes his face and hands with the right kind
of soap and then continues the motions of hand
washing without rinsing until the foam, originally
in large bubbles, has been reduced to a creamy
persistent lather. Then by using one hand as
a squeegee on the other the lather is collected
into a large blob on the fingers of one hand,
by which it is applied to the face as one would
apply a blob from a pressure can. Thus materials
for shaving are reduced to a razor and cake of
soap, the hands and face are washed at the same
time (not a necessary accompaniment of the use
of an electric razor) , and cost is minimized. As
an inventor we now bow out.
JOINT BOARD
Gravatt Coleman, General Engineer with the
C & P Telephone Co., is the new Executive Secre-
tary, Science Projects, for the Joint Board on
Science Education. He replaces Dr. William T.
Read who was unable to continue due to other
commitments. Mr. Coleman will be responsible
for many details of the science project program
of which Dr. John K. Taylor is Director.
A Virginian by birth and education, Mr. Cole-
man had two engineering degrees from Virginia
Polytechnic Institute at the age of 21. He was
a 1st Lieut., Machine Gun, in World War I.
Grav has been with the TELCO Engineering
Dept, since 1923 and retires in Feb. ’61, when
he will devote even more time to JBSE work.
The TELCO should be given a vote of thanks
for permitting him, in the meantime, to engage
in this very excellent public relations job.
He has been active in the Washington Section
of the AIEE, having held most of the local com-
mittee’s chairmanships and elective positions, and
a member of one of the National Committees for
several years. He helped to establish the Student
Branch of the AIEE at Maryland University.
The Washington Society of Engineers will
remember him for the banquets he ran for them
longer than they will remember his work as a
Director of their organization. He has cooper-
ated extensively on the annual Engineers, Scien-
tists and Architects Day celebrations each
February.
While with the TELCO, he has determined
location for central offices, laid out underground
conduit systems for a number of cities in Mary-
land, Virginia, West Virginia, as well as D. C.,
prepared cost studies and originated a system of
record keeping which has been in use for over
20 years. More recently he has been responsible
for engineering contracts with other associated
companies and with the Long Lines Department
of the A. T. & T. Co., joint ownership of plant
used by more than one company, and the engi-
neering decisions on Division of Revenues for
toll usage.
Project Ideas for Young Scientists is the
title of a new book just published by the Joint
Board on Science Education. Some 400 sugges-
tions are given for science projects that should
be instructive and stimulate research and in-
vestigation by secondary school students.
The book is the outgrowth of several years of
collection of ideas for science projects from a
large number of leading scientists of the local
area. Dr. John K. Taylor, Dr. Phoebe Knipling,
and Dr. Falconer Smith edited these contribu-
tions and prepared supplemental material which
is contained in the 144 page book. Mr. George
E. Taylor, science teacher at Wakefield High
School assisted in the collection of many of
18
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
the suggestions prior to his leaving the area for
a year of sabbatical leave to do further graduate
work. A copy of the book has been donated to
the library of every secondary school of the
Washington area.
The book contains a preliminary chapter on
general considerations for preparing a science
project. Ten chapters follow that deal with the
several subject-matter categories of science fairs.
All project ideas include references for further
information. A chapter entitled Annotated Titles
presents some 200 ideas in abstract form and
a bibliography that should be especially helpful
for background material.
A grant from the Eugene and Agnes E. Meyer
Foundation has made it possible to donate the
library copies mentioned above and also to per-
mit the sale of the book at a price somewhat
below cost. Teachers and students desiring
copies may obtain them at $1.25 per copy, post-
paid, by writing to the Joint Board on Science
Education, 1530 P Street, N.W., Washington 5,
D.C. Checks should be made payable to the Joint
Board.
Teaching conferences planned for Fall
and Winter. As part of the program made
possible by a grant from the National Science
Foundation, the Joint Board will hold a series
of conferences concerned with the teaching of
science and mathematics. Patterned after the
highly successful series held last year, the con-
ferences will take place during the fall and
winter seasons.
As in the past, conferences on the teaching
of the senior high school subjects of biology
chemistry, mathematics, and physics are being
scheduled. In addition, a series of meetings
devoted to junior high school general science will
be held.
A somewhat different procedure than last
year will be followed. A single conference for
the entire area will be held for each of the four
senior high school subjects. Approximately 100
persons will be invited to attend the all-day
sessions and will be the guests of the Joint
Board to luncheon. A prominent speaker will
address a joint session, after which attendees
will be divided into discussion groups to consider
problems concerned with subject matter teaching.
As formerly, teachers, university instructors, and
scientists will participate.
The junior high school conferences, four in
number, will be held in as many areas of the local
region. Approximately 100 persons from that
particular area will be invited to a meeting
similar to that described above. Attendees will
be selected from junior high school teachers, and
scientists.
The first conferences are scheduled for Novem-
ber. One in general science for the Virginia area
will be held at St. Agnes Espiscopal school in
Alexandria on November 5. Dr. John K. Taylor
will serve as chairman of the conference. A con-
ference for the entire area on the teaching of
physics will be held at Catholic University on
November 19, at which Dr. Raymond J. Seeger
will preside.
It is regretted that attendance at these confer-
ences is limited and must be confined to a small
group of invitees. Extensive notes will be taken,
however, and will be available on request to the
office of the Joint Board.
Joint Board supports experimental
courses. Is science more meaningful when
taught quantitatively with the aid of lots of
mathematics? Is arithmetic easier to understand
when its application to the solution of laboratory
experiments is stressed? The answers to these
and many other questions are being sought in
eleven experimental classes being conducted by
several local school systems with financial assist-
ance from the Joint Board.
The support of experimental teaching pro-
grams was a major objective of the Joint Board
in its request in 1959 through the Washington
Academy of Sciences to the National Science
Foundation for a grant. The Foundation ap-
proved of the idea and $20,000 was allocated to
nine schools to underwrite part of the costs of
the experimental classes. Descriptions of the
program were carried in the 1959-60 issues of
THE REPORTER and are given in more detail
in the Summary Report which is available from
the Joint Board office.
The 1960-61 grant from the NSF to the Joint
Board makes it possible to continue the program.
Currently, grants totalling $22,000 have been
allotted by the Joint Board for experimental
classes in 10 schools. They are summarized as
follows:
Beauvoir School will continue to develop a
course of study and curriculum materials for a
K-3rd grade science program.
Fairfax County will continue an experimental
study of the coordination of science and mathe-
matics instruction at the 5th Grade level.
D. C. Schools will continue its experimental
classes at the 3rd grade and initiate a new one
at the 6th grade level. Both are concerned with
applying arithmetic to the study of science.
The excellent experimental classes in elemen-
tary education sponsored last year in Montgomery
County and also with the Archdiocese of Wash-
ington are being continued.
In addition to these, Arlington County also
developed an experimental course under Joint
Board sponsorship during the 1959-60 school year.
They did not request assistance during the cur-
rent year. It is understood that the course is
being continued with county support during the
present year, however.
At the junior high school level, grants have
been renewed to Arlington County, to the D.C.
Schools and to Sidwell Friends School to con-
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
19
tinue their excellent experimental programs of
last year. In addition. Prince Georges County
and Georgetown Day School have been given
grants to initiate experimental classes on the
coordination of mathematics and science instruc-
tion at the junior high school level.
Another newcomer is Osbourn High School
at Manassas, Virginia, which is the recipient of
a grant to help develop a 12th grade course for
accelerated students who have previously had
biology, chemistry, and physics. The course
will attempt to correlate the science and mathe-
matics already covered into a meaningful fund
of knowledge.
SCIENCE AND
DEVELOPMENT
The tellurometer, an electronic distance-
measuring instrument that eliminated the
time-consuming taping method used in
surveying, has now gone airborne. Currently
being tested by the Army Engineer R&D Labs
at Fort Belvoir, the airborne tellurometer is
expected to provide a position determination or
a distance measurement up to 150 miles with a
high degree of accuracy; the range of the ground
instrument is 40 miles. In addition, the airborne
equipment will not be hampered by line-of-sight
restrictions, such as curvature of the earth and
mountains, which limit the operation of the
ground instrument. It involves the application
of ground tellurometer microwave phase compari-
son ranging techniques to aircraft use.
Geological Survey’s “Geologic Map of the
United States,” first published in 1933, has
been reprinted with important color changes that
make it easier to read. The 1960 edition is
issued in four 27-by-47-inch sheets and sells
for $6.00 a set. The scale is 1:2,500,000. Long
considered to be a masterpiece of lithographic
art, when first issued the map was printed on
old-style flat-bed presses from 92 lithographic
stones quarried in Germany; each stone weighed
400 to 500 pounds, and lithographing 5,000 copies
required 138 working days, or about six months.
The 1960 run was printed on presses capable of
handling 5,000 sheets an hour, printing two colors
simultaneously; instead of the heavy stones, 48
aluminum lithographic press plates were used.
American University was honored on Sep-
tember 12 as the “birthplace of the Army
Chemical Corps.” A plaque was unveiled on
McKinley Hall by Col. C. P. Wood of the First
Gas Regiment and accepted by AU President
Hurst R. Anderson; principal speaker at the
ceremonies was Maj. Gen. Marshall Stubbs, the
Army’s chief chemical officer. Among those
attending was 82-year-old Maj. Gen. Amos Fries,
retired, chief of the Gas Service under General
Pershing, and first chief chemical officer from
1921 to 1924. The plaque recounts AU’s 1917
offer of its campus and buildings for war work,
and its occupation by the Bureau of Mines for
use as chemical warfare laboratories and proving
grounds. In August 1917 the 30th Engineers,
later known as the First Gas Regiment, was
organized at the University; units of this regiment
marched from the campus on Christmas Day,
1917, and sailed for France the next day. In
June, 1918, the Chemical Warfare Organization
of the Bureau of Mines was transferred to the
War Department as a step toward the creation of
the Chemical Warfare Service, now the Army
Chemical Corps.
In its recent report, “Meteorology on the
Move,” the NAS-NRC Committee on Atmos-
pheric Sciences notes with satisfaction a
number of recent undertakings by govern-
ment and academic institutions in response to
previous Committee recommendations — including
a first step toward a National Center for Atmos-
pheric Research — but points out that still further
steps are urgently required. Chief among the
latter are the rapid development by the National
Center of an extensive research and analysis
program and the strengthening of the research
program of the Weather Bureau. To point up
the need for urgency, the report underscores the
striking success of the weather satellite TIROS
I. man’s first instrument for the continuing
observation of large-scale weather phenomena.
“Analysis of such world-wide meteorological in-
formation obtained at regular, short intervals,”
the report states, “may be expected to increase
greatly our understanding of the basic principles
of meteorology as well as the precision of fore-
casting. One may expect that this increased
understanding will some day provide the answer
to the question whether small- or large-scale
weather control is possible.”
The first phase of an improved global
weather communications network for the reg-
ular exchange of weather information on a co-
ordinated basis began operation on October 1,
according to Weather Bureau announcement; this
involves the activation of weather communication
centers at New York, Frankfurt/Offenbach,
Moscow, and New Delhi, which will exchange
northern hemisphere weather data collected from
observation stations within their designated areas
of responsibility. A second phase, activation cf
a Tokyo center in the spring of 1961, will provide
for completely coordinated exchange of informa-
tion for the whole northern hemisphere. A third
phase of the program will involve establishment
of a similar network in the southern hemisphere,
connected with the northern hemisphere network
to permit a world-wide exchange. Eventually
the network, sponsored by UN’s World Meteoro-
logical Organization, will consist of an unbroken
chain of point-to-point radio teletypewriter and
land-line teletypewriter circuits involving the 102
member states and territories represented in
WMO.
20
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
Vice-Presidents of the Washington Academy of Sciences
Representing the Affiliated Societies
Acoustical Society of America
Institute of the Aeronautical Sciences
Anthropological Society of Washington
Society of American Bacteriologists
Biological Society of Washington
Society for Experimental Biology and Medicine
Botanical Society of Washington
Chemical Society of Washington
American Society of Civil Engineers
International Assn, for Dental Research
American Inst, of Electrical Engineers
Washington Society of Engineers
Entomological Society of Washington
Society of American Foresters
National Geographic Society
Geological Society of Washington
Helminthological Society of Washington
Columbia Historical Society
Insecticide Society of Washington
Amer. Society of Mechanical Engineers
Medical Society of the Dist. of Columbia
American Society for Metals
American Meteorological Society
Institute of Radio Engineers
American Nuclear Society, Washington Section
Philosophical Society of Washington
Society of American Military Engineers
Richard Cook
Not Named.
Regina Flannery
Mary Louise Robbins
Herbert Friedman
Kathryn Knowlton
Herbert C. Hanson
William J. Bailey
Not Named.
Gerhard Brauer
Robert D. Elbourn
Howard S. Rappleye
Harold H. Shepard
Not Named.
Alexander Wetmore
Carle Dane
. Carlton M. Herman
U. S. Grant, III
Joseph Yuill
William G. Allen
Fred 0. Coe
John A. Bennett
Morris Tepper
Robert Huntoon
Urner Liddel
Louis R. Maxwell
Not Named.
Chairmen of Committees
Standing Committees
Executive
Meetings
Membership
Monographs
Awards for Scientific Achievement
Grants-in-Aid for Research
Policy and Planning
Encouragement of Science Talent
Science Education
Lawrence A. Wood, Nat. Bureau of Standards
Robert D. Stiehler, Nat. Bureau of Standards
Wayne C. Hall, Naval Research Laboratory
Dean B. Cowie, Dept, of Terrestrial Magnetism
Archie I. Mahan, Applied Physics Laboratory
B. D. van Evera, George Washington University
A. T. McPherson, Nat. Bureau of Standards
Leo Schubert, American University
Raymond J. Seeger, Nat. Science Foundation
Special Committees
By Laws
Library of Congress
Repres. on AAAS Council
Harold H. Shepard, Dept, of Agriculture
John A. O’Keefe, Nat. Aeronautics & Space Admin.
Howard A. Meyerhoff, Scientific Manpower Commission
S V#
r
s s v w ©
3 A V
cnCN&y
2
A X f N I A ♦ 0 ZZ
Kfli 3fc09b V
iO Ats V « 9 I 1
Volume 50 NOVEMBER 1960 No. 7
CONTENTS
Proceedings of the Geological Society of Washington 1
Science in Washington
Scientists in the News 10
Affiliated Societies 13
Academy Activities 15
The Brownstone Tower 17
Joint Board 18
Science and Development 20
im
JOURNAL
of the
WASHINGTON
ACADEMY
of
SCIENCES
* *
"MV
Vol. 50 • No. 8
DECEMBER 1960
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Editor: Chester H. Page, National Bureau of Standards
Managing Editor: Ileen E. Stewart, National Science Foundation
Associate Editors
Frank L. Campbell, National Academy of Russell B. Stevens, Geo. Washington Univer-
Sciences sity
Samuel B. Detwiler, Jr., U.S. Dept, of Agri- John K. Taylor, National Bureau of Standards
culture
Contributors
Albert M. Stone, Applied Physics Laboratory
John A. O’Brien, Jr., Catholic University
Elliott B. Roberts, Coast & Geodetic Survey
Margaret D. Foster, Geological Survey
Russell B. Stevens, Geo. Washington University
Moddie D. Taylor, Howard University
Frank L. Campbell, NAS-NRC.
Alphonse F. Forziati, National Bureau of
Standards
Howard W. Bond, National Institutes of Health
Allen L. Alexander, Naval Research Laboratory
Victor R. Boswell, USDA, Beltsville
Harold R. Curran, USDA, Washington
William J. Bailey, University of Maryland
This Journal, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes: (1)
historical articles, critical reviews, and scholarly scientific articles, (2) original research, if the
paper, including illustrations, does not exceed 1500 words or the equivalent space, (3) notices of
meetings and proceedings of meetings of the Academy and its affiliated societies, and (4) regional
news items, including personal news, of interest to the entire membership. The Journal appears
eight times a year in January to May and October to December.
Manuscripts and original research papers should be sent to the Editor. They should
be typewritten, double-spaced, on good paper; footnotes and captions should be numbered and
submitted on a separate sheet. The Editor does not assume responsibility for the ideas expressed
by any author.
Contributions to the regular columns should be sent to the appropriate Associate
Editor whose name appears at the beginning of each column, or to one of the Contributors, listed
above. The deadline for news items is approximately three weeks in advance of publication date.
News items should be signed by the sender.
Proof of manuscripts will generally be sent to an author if he resides in the Washington
area and time allows. Otherwise the Editor will assume responsibility for seeing that copy is
followed.
Subscription rate $7.50 per yr. (U.S.)
Single issues $1.00 per copy.
Subscription Orders or requests for back numbers or volumes of the Journal, or copies of the
Proceedings, should be sent to the Washington Academy of Sciences, 1530 P St., N.W., Washing-
ton, D.C. Remittances should be made payable to “Washington Academy of Sciences”.
Claims for missing numbers will not be allowed if received more than 60 days after date
of mailing plus time normally required for postal delivery and claim. No claims will be allowed
because of failure to notify the Circulation Manager of a change of address.
Changes of address should be sent promptly to the Academy Office, 1530 P St., N.W.,
Washington, D. C. Such notification should include both old and new addresses and postal zone
number, if any.
Advertising rates may be obtained from the Managing Editor, Ileen E. Stewart, Office of
Science Information Service, National Science Foundation, Washington 25, D. C.
Reprint prices may also be obtained from the Managing Editor.
Prices of back numbers and volumes, of Monograph No. 1, “The Parasitic Cuckoos of
Africa” by Herbert Friedmann, Index to Vols. 1-40, and Proceedings may be obtained by writing
to the Academy Office.
Entered as second class matter at the Post Office, Washington, D. C. Printing by McArdle
Printing Co., Washington, D. C.
Science in Washington
SCIENTISTS IN THE NEWS
This column will present brief items concerning
the activities of members of the Academy. Such
items may include notices of talks given, im-
portant conferences or visits, promotions, awards,
election to membership or office in scientific
and technical societies, appointment to technical
committees, civic activities, and marriages, births,
and other family news. Formal contributors are
being assigned for the systematic collection of
news at institutions employing considerable num-
bers of Academy members (see list on masthead) .
However, for the bulk of the membership, we
must rely on individuals to send us news concern-
ing themselves, and their friends. Contributions
may be addressed to Harold T. Cook , Associate
Editor, U. S. Department of Agriculture ,
Agricultural Marketing Service, Room 3917
South Building, Washington 23, D. C.
GEOLOGICAL SURVEY
Dean S. Carder, chief seismologist, attended
the second conference of Joint Working Group
No. 16 (CJOWOG-16), London and Aldermaston,
England, September 19-23, 1960, and consulted
geophysicists in Cambridge. The CJOWOG-16
consists of English and American geophysicists.
Its function is the detection of clandestine nuclear
explosions. Dr. Carder presented illustrations
showing traces of seismograms from underground
nuclear explosions and from comparable earth-
quakes.
Raymond L. Nace attended the Annual In-
formation Meeting of the Health Physics Division,
Oak Ridge National Laboratory, October 27 and
28.
Clarence S. Ross attended the Ninth Annual
Conference on Clays and Clay Minerals, Purdue
University, Lafayette, Indiana, October 5-8. He
reported on the discussion on clay mineral nomen-
clature of C.I.P.E.A. in Copenhagen, Denmark,
in August.
GEORGE WASHINGTON UNIVERSITY
Harold G. Mandel, professor of Pharmacology,
has been named Executive Officer of that depart-
ment in the School of Medicine. He succeeds
the late Paul K. Smith.
Benjamin D. Van Evera, with Mrs. Van
Evera, has returned from a nine-week holiday
trip in Europe this past summer. Dr. Van Evera
attended the American Council on Education
meetings in Chicago, October 6-7.
HOWARD UNIVERSITY
Kelso B. Morris has taken a second year’s
leave of absence to serve as visiting professor of
chemistry at the Air Force Institute of Tech-
nology, Wright-Patterson Air Force Base.
Lloyd N. Ferguson served as visiting professor
of chemistry at the University of Oregon, Sum-
mer, 1960.
NATIONAL BUREAU OF STANDARDS
Allen V. Astin, NBS Director, was awarded
a lifetime Honorary Membership by the Instru-
ment Society of America. This is the highest
honor of the Society and Dr. Astin is the eighth
man to receive this distinction since the society
was founded in 1946.
Harry A. Bright (Ret.) received the Anachem
Award of the Association of Analytical Chemists
at Detroit, Michigan, on October 25, 1960. The
award is presented annually for outstanding
achievement in analytical chemistry. Following
the presentation Mr. Bright spoke on “NBS
Standards — Past Forty Years in Retrospect.”
USDA, BELTSVILLE
Lawrence Zeleny recently returned from an
extended foreign trip which included a month
in the USSR as a member of a U. S. Scientific
Exchange team studying grain handling, storage,
and processing in the Soviet Union.
James H. Turner received the Bray ton Howard
Ransom Memorial Award for “meritorious service
to Parasitology and related Sciences” at the 50th
Anniversary meeting of the Helminthological
Society of Washington, October 8, 1960. This
marks the first time the award has been
presented.
Edna M. Buhrer received “The Anniversary
Award of the Helminthological Society of Wash-
ington” at the 50th Anniversary meeting of the
Society October 8, 1960. The award is “in recog-
nition of distinguished contributions and service
toward achievement of the Society’s aims and
objectives.” The “Anniversary Award” was estab-
lished at this time, and is to be granted in the
future, on anniversary dates, but not necessarily
every year.
Ross W. Davidson reports that Dr. Kiyowo
Aoshima, Government Forest Experiment Station,
Tokyo, Japan, is in this country on a fellowship
award and will be studying for six months at
the Forest Disease Laboratory, Plant Industry
Station.
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
1
Ross W'. Davidson attended the annual New
York State fall Mycological Foray at Paul Smiths,
New York, October 9 and 10.
E. E. Wehr presented papers on “Further
observations on the life history and development
of Ascaridia columbae (Gmelin, 1790) Travassos,
1913, in the pigeon” and “Occurrence of Capillariu
obsignata Madsen, 1945, in the peafowl and its
transmission to chickens” at the 34th Annual
Meeting, American S’ociety of Parasitologists,
University Park, Pa. Dr. Wehr also attended the
11th World Poultry Congress in Mexico City,
Mexico, and presented a paper on “Glimpses
into poultry parasite problem in the United
States.”
USDA, WASHINGTON
Joseph R. Spies presented a paper, “Aller-
genic proteins from oilseeds,” at the Eastern
Experiment Station Collaborators’ Conference on
Proteins, U. S. Department of Agriculture, Eastern
Utilization Research and Development Division,
Philadelphia, Pa., October 26, 1960.
Benjamin Schwartz attended the First Inter-
national Conference on Trichinosis in Warsaw,
Poland, September 12 and 13, as a consultant
in parasitology to Federal meat inspection. The
conference designated Dr. Schwartz, who read a
paper on “Trichinosis in the United States,”
chairman of an international committee charged
with the responsibility of organizing a second
international conference on Trichinosis to be held
in 1962, encouraging research on this parasitic
disease of animals and man, making a study of
the prevalence and host relationship of trichinae
throughout the world, and stimulating efforts
leading to the ultimate eradication of these
nematodes. Other members of the committee
are one representative each from France, West
Germany, USSR, and the United States.
NATIONAL SCIENCE FOUNDATION
Raymond J. Seeger, deputy assistant director
for Mathematics, Physical and Engineering
Sciences, gave the 1960 James Mapes Dodge
Lecture for Young People at the Franklin Institute
in Philadelphia on Nov. 1 and 2. His lecture
was entitled “Faster than sound.”
DEATHS
Paul K. Smith, Professor of Pharmacology,
George Washington University since 1946, died
on October 6 at the age of 52.
AFFILIATED SOCIETIES
Acoustical Society of America, Washington
D.C. Chapter
The November meeting, on Monday the 14th,
featured a presentation by Dr. Cyril Harris,
Columbia University, on “Some impressions of
acoustics in Japan.”
American Institute of Electrical Engineers,
Washington Section
Dr. William B. Kouwenhoven, for many years
a member of the faculty of the Johns Hopkins
University, spoke on November 9 on the topic,
“The effect of electric current on humans,” deal-
ing, among other things, with techniques for
restoring normal heart function after electric
shock.
The monthly bulletin reports local efforts to
raise funds toward the twenty story Engineering
Center now being erected in New York city to
house the major engineering societies.
The Section is moving ahead on its program to
organize technical groups within five basic divi-
sions (communications; instrumentation and
telemetry; transportation, industry and manage-
ment; power; and science and electronics). The
Instrumentation and Telemetry division held its
first meeting on the 15th, featuring a talk by
W. A. Geyger on magnetic amplifiers in instru-
mentation.
The Student Guidance Committee places most
of its emphasis on cooperating through the Joint
Board on Science Education to establish closer
liaison between professional men and interested
high school students. They point out, further,
the desirability of offering summer employment
to students and teachers.
American Society for Metals, Washington
Chapter
Dr. Robert C. McMaster. Professor of Welding
Engineering, spoke on December 12 on the sub-
ject of “Nondestructive testing.” The program
for January 9 will feature Fred D. Rosi, RCA.
in a presentation on “Materials for auxiliary
power energy conversion.” It should be noted
that the latter event, and subsequent meetings,
will be held at the AAUW Headquarters, 2401
Virginia Avenue, N.W.
American Society of Civil Engineers, Na-
tional Capital Section
On November 8 William N. Dripps, Dept, of
Licenses and Inspections, gave a talk on “Build-
ing construction and inspection in the District
Columbia.”
December 29 is the date set for the annual
Christmas party.
The Associate Member Forum is sponsoring a
basic course in the use of electronic computers
open to any member of the National Capital Sec-
tion. It is scheduled to start in early December
and to continue for about 12 weekly sessions,
at a cost of $5.00 per registrant.
2
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
American Society of Mechanical Engineers,
Washington Section
Wade S. Plummer, on November 10, discusstd
the modernization program in the Post Office
Department, particularly the extensive introduc-
tion of mechanized and automated equipment,
and showed a film entitled “Machines to move
tomorrow’s mail.”
The schedule for December and January as
presently arranged calls for a December 8 meet-
ing on creative design (Mr. Jacob Rabinow),
one on hydrofoils for January 12, and on aviation
reliability, January 26 (John Coutinho).
Anthropological Society of Washington
The 1960-61 program will focus on anthropology
and human behavior, with the twofold purpose
of calling attention to current inquiry in psychol-
ogy and related disciplines and of examining
theory underlying two possible approaches to
the study of culture. The series was introduced
on October 18 by Dr. Thomas Gladwin, NIH.
On November 15, Dr. Dell H. Hymes, University
of California (Berkeley) dealt with “Speech and
personality,” and on December 20 Dr. Ulric
Neisser, Brandeis University, discussed “Cognitive
and cultural discontinuities.”
Botanical Society of Washington
The annual business meeting and election of
officers took place on December 6, at which time
the retiring President, Dr. H. T. Cook, spoke
on “Plant disease control without chemicals.”
Chemical Society of Washington
The outgoing president of the Society, Dr. A. L.
Alexander, speaks on January 12 concerning
“Recent research on functional organic coatings.”
At the October 18 meeting of the Board of
Managers, it was reported by John Leonard of
the Education Committee that lunch money and
carfare was provided for 15 youngsters working
in area laboratories during the summer.
The Society now numbers just under 2500 mem-
bers, as judged by a newly assembled directory,
which makes it the 8th largest of the local sections
of the American Chemical Society. The Capital
Chemist now has a circulation of 2725. The
Public Relations Committee has not been suc-
cessful in interesting local television stations
directly in the affairs of the Society, but has
received requests for assistance and advice in
choosing programs.
Geological Society of Washington
At the first meeting of the fall season, K. J.
Murata, US'GS, presented color slides and motion
pictures to document a description of the 1959-60
eruption of Kilauea. H. B. Stewart, Jr., of
CGS, then described the formation and move-
ment of submarine sand ridges off the New
England coast in which he showed that Georges
Shoal, 120 miles east of Cape Code, is topped
by a swarm of elongate ridges rising to within
two fathoms of the surface. Evidence suggests
that these ridges have migrated westward for
distances up to 900 feet since the 1931 survey.
Despite almost constant transport of sediment
there is no net movement resulting from tidal
currents; the answer seems to lie in bottom
oscillations induced by the predominantly west-
ward-moving surface waves. This can be shown
in motion pictures.
Insecticide Society of Washington
Two papers were given on November 16 at
the regular meeting: Morris Alpert, Bureau of
Ships, spoke on “Military requirements for
military pesticides and how they are met”; Dr.
Clyde S. Barnhart, U. S. Army, dealt with “New
developments in pesticide dispersal equipment for
military use.”
International Association for Dental Re-
search, Washington Section
Dr. Samuel Natelson, biochemist, Roosevelt
Hospital, discussed the application of x-ray
spectroscopy to analysis of elements in biological
systems on November 7, specifically as the
technique relates to phosphorus, sulfur, calcium,
potassium, iodine, strontium and iron, in micro-
gram quantities or less. A second paper, on
studies related to carbohydrate metabolism in
calcified tissues, was presented by Dr. Robert
Van Reen, presently supervisory chemist at the
Naval Medical Research Institute. Dr. Van Reen
handled certain biochemical studies related to
citric acid metabolism in these tissues which are
of special interest in that they can accumulate
up to 5% of the dry, fat-free weight of the citric
acid.
Medical Society of the District of Columbia
Not fewer than 25 meetings of interest to
medical scientists are noted in the period Novem-
ber 1 to December 2, as many as five in a single
day. While many are highly specialized or tech-
nical, only three are designated as closed meet-
ings, and a number range into related areas of
the biological sciences.
Philosophical Society of Washington
On Friday, November 18, Dr. Alexander Rich,
MIT, spoke on “The structure of biological
macromolecules.”
The 1500 meeting of the Society, open to the
public, was held December 2, in the Natural
History Museum Auditorium, and featured an
address by E. U. Condon, of Washington Univer-
sity. A dinner at the Raleigh Hotel preceded
the affair. Under the circumstances, it seems
entirely appropriate to reproduce the following
summary of the organization, as it appears
in the program announcement; prepared by
F. N. Frenkiel:
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
3
"The Philosophical Society of Washington was
founded on March 13, 1871, and was incorporated
on May 20, 1901, in the District of Columbia.
The aims for which the Society was incorporated
are “the promotion of science, the advancement
of learning and the free exchange of views among
its members on scientific subjects.”
Since March 26, 1887. the date of the 300th
meeting of the Society, the meeting place has
been the Assembly Hall of the Cosmos Club,
except on special occasions. Prior to the organ-
ization of the Cosmos Club in 1878 and for
some nine years thereafter, meetings were held
in the library of the Surgeon General’s Office,
Old Ford’s Theater, where Lincoln was assas-
sinated.
Meetings are now held usually on alternate
Friday evenings from October to May in the John
Wesley Powell Auditorium of the Cosmos Club
(Entrance: 2170 Florida Avenue, N.W.). Fol-
lowing the scheduled programme for the evening,
opportunity is given for the presentation of
informal communications. Refreshments are
served following adjournment of meetings.
In 1931 the Society inaugurated the Joseph
Henry Lectures sponsored annually (except in
1943) by the Society in honor of its first presi-
dent. In 1952 the Society inaugurated the Annual
Christmas Lectures which are arranged primarily
for high school and advanced junior high school
students and which have been held, since 1954,
in the Lisner Auditorium of the George Washing-
ton University.
On June 6, 1874, the Society adopted the rule
that in the official records of the Society no
title except “Mr.” shall be used. This rule was
amended on May 26, 1945, to include Mrs.
and “Miss.” As the oldest scientific society of
the Washington area, the Philosophical Society
maintains many of its traditions. In April 15,
1899, the Society celebrated its 500th meeting.
The 1000th meeting was celebrated on January
18, 1930. The 1500th meeting will be held on
December 2, 1960.
With the exception of business transacted at
the Annual Meeting in December, the Society
is managed by the General Committee composed
of the elected officers of the Society, four elected
members-at-large, the latest two living ex-Presi-
dents of the Society and members of the Com-
mittee on Communications. Regular meetings
of the General Committee are held before each
regular meeting of the Society.
Membership in the Society is open to all per-
sons who are interested in the aims for which
the Society was incorporated. A nomination for
membership must be signed by three members
of the Society, and accompanied by a statement
of the qualifications of the candidate. The annual
dues of active members were five dollars during
the first thirty years of the existence of the
Society. For about sixty years the dues have
been reduced to three dollars. The General
Committee has recommended that the dues of
the Society be reinstated to five dollars in 1961.
There is no entrance fee. Members of the Society
are entitled to subscribe at a reduced rate to
the journals published by the American Institute
of Physics with which the Society is affiliated.
Annual subscription to Physics Today can be
obtained through the Society at a special rate of
two dollars.
This year’s Annual Christmas Lectures are set
for December 22 and 23, on the general topic
“Genes as living molecules,” by G. W. Beadle
of the California Institute of Technology.
The December 16th meeting was the Ninetieth
Annual Meeting.
Society of American Bacteriologists, Wash-
ington Branch
The annual dinner meeting was held on Novem-
ber 28 at the Officer’s Club of the Walter Reed
Army Medical Center. Dr. Charles R. Phillips,
Fort Detrick, chose the topic “The Moon, Mars,
and Microorganisms.” In addition to election of
officers. Life Membership Certificates were
awarded to William R. North, Jr., H. H. McKin-
ney, and Katherine Alvord.
This is perhaps the place to note that the parent
organization, now the Society of American Bac-
teriologists will very shortly become the Amer-
ican Society for Microbiology; presumably the
local section will follow suit in due time.
Society of American Military Engineers,
Washington Post
The November 21st meeting, at the Officers’
Club, Naval Weapons Plant, was addressed by
Dr. A. C. Mason, USGS, on “The first photo-
geologic study of the moon.” All meetings for
the current year have been in line with the
“Space Exploration” theme.
ACADEMY ACTIVITIES
Board of Managers, November Meeting
The following notes are for the timely informa-
tion of the membership; they are not the official
minutes of the meeting. Ed.
The Board of Managers held its 532 meeting
on November 15 at NBS, with President Wood
presiding.
The minutes of the 531st meeting were ap-
proved.
Reporting a meeting of the Executive Com-
mittee, Dr. Wood announced that the Committee
recommended the election of Samuel B. Detwiler,
Jr., as Editor of the Journal of the Washington
Academy of Sciences for 1961. He said that
Chester H. Page would retire as Editor and
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
4
that Ileen E. Stewart would continue temporarily
as Managing Editor. The Committee recom-
mended the election of Frank L. Campbell, Harold
T. Cook, Russell B. Stevens, and John K. Taylor
as Associate Editors. He announced that Robert
C. Miller of the California Academy of Sciences
will talk to the Board of Managers at its Feb-
ruary meeting. He reported that the Washington
Board of Trade has been setting up a Science
Bureau. This development has been discussed
by the Joint Board, and Ralph Cole of Melpar
will report on it to the Board of Managers at
its next meeting.
Chairman Stiehler of the Meetings Committee
reminded the Board of the meeting of November
17 at which E. Bright Wilson, Jr. will speak on
“An Introduction to Scientific Research.” This
will be a joint meeting with the Junior Academy
and the D. C. Chapter of Sigma Xi. He an-
nounced that Dr. Harry Wexler of the Weather
Bureau will speak on recent developments in
meteorology.
Chairman Hall of the Membership Committee
presented for first reading the names of two
candidates for membership.
There was no report from the Committee on
Awards for Scientific Achievement. A. T. Mc-
Pherson again recommended that the Board con-
sider the establishment of an award in the field
of earth sciences. President Wood referred this
recommendation to the Committee on Policy and
Planning for study and recommendation.
Secretary Specht read a letter from Chairman
Van Evera of the Committee on Grants-in-Aid for
research recommending that a grant of $55.00
be made to Michael Finnegan of the Fairfax
High School. A letter of recommendation from
the instructor, Mr. Tishler, was read. The ap-
plication was approved by the Board.
Chairman A. T. McPherson of the Committee
on Policy and Planning moved the adoption of
the revised Standing Rules of the Academy as
presented last month by Chairman Shepard of
the Special Committee on Bylaws. Some discussion
preceded the adoption of the standing rules by
the Board.
Dr. McPherson, concerned about improving
relations between the Academy and its affiliated
societies, recommended that a dinner be arranged
for the Presidents of the affiliated societies to
discuss: (1) the production of a directory cover-
ing the members of the Academy and the af-
filiated societies, (2) the possibility of obtaining
headquarters for the Academy large enough to
be used also by some of the affiliated societies
and (3) cooperation between the Academy and
the affiliated societies in promoting scientific
activities in this area.
In the discussion that followed it was pointed
out that it would probably be impossible to
assemble all the Presidents of the affiliated
societies at one time. The Board agreed that this
was really not necessary but that every society
should be represented by a responsible officer who
of course might be the delegate of the Society
to the Academy. It was moved that the Academy
pay the bill for this dinner. The Board voted
to do so.
Elected to Academy Membership
Meyer R. Achter, Naval Research Laboratory
Frank H. Attix, Naval Research Laboratory
Louis A. Beach, Naval Research Laboratory
Peter L. Bender, National Bureau of Standards
George E. Clark, Jr., Johns Hopkins University
John R. Clement, Jr., Naval Research Laboratory
Walter I). Compton, Naval Research Laboratory
James W. Davisson, Naval Research Laboratory
Paul H. Egli, Naval Research Laboratory
Howard W. Etzel, Naval Research Laboratory
Robert J. Ginther, Naval Research Laboratory
John Mandel, National Bureau of Standards
Matthew F. M. Osborne, Naval Research Labora-
tory
William C. Overton, Jr., Naval Research Labora-
tory
William S. Pellini, Naval Research Laboratory
Edward I. Salkovitz, Office of Naval Research
Sidney T. Smith, Naval Research Laboratory
Helmut Sommer, Diamond Ordnance Fuze Lab-
oratories
Harald W. Straub, Diamond Ordinance Fuze Lab-
oratories
Carl I. Vigness, Naval Research Laboratory
Peter Waterman, Naval Research Laboratory
Inadvertently Dr. Shubert’s opinions were re-
ported as Dr. Watson Davis’ in the report of
the May meeting of the Board of Managers (page
12, column 2, paragraph 2.) The meeting reporter
apologizes for this error.
THE BROWNSTONE TOWER
Frank L. Capbell
Reflecting on the
meaning of the word
“editor”, we turned
to our favorite book,
the English diction-
ary, and found as we
expected, that “edi-
tor” is given more
than one definition.
We could wrap them
all into one by defin-
ing an editor as a
middleman between
writers and printers.
In various ways editors determine what is printed,
their actions ranging all the way from application
of rules of punctuations to the determination of
the objectives and character of a publication.
Among those who are responsible for the pub-
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
5
lication of a scientific periodical the unmodified
title "editor’’ should be reserved for the person
who heads the whole operation, who is respon-
sible for the organization and performance of
the staff, for control of expenditures and acquisi-
tion of income, and for format and content of
the periodical — all within lines laid down by
representatives of those for whom the periodical
is published. In brief, the “editor” should be
the boss.
All scientific periodicals, whether restricted to
the publication of the results of research (primary
scientific publication) or open to other kinds
of material of interest to scientists, can benefit
by active solicitation of manuscripts by the editor
and his assistants. Where demand for space is
sufficient the editor of a primary scientific pub-
lication can get by without solicitation of manu-
scripts. He need only select, with the help of
advisers, the manuscripts he thinks should be
published. However, the more general the
periodical the greater the desirability of soliciting
the material to be published. For some journals
solicitation may be a necessity for survival and
growth.
The editors of the old Journal of the Washing-
ton Academy of Sciences were usually passive,
accepting whatever manuscripts they received
that seemed to be scientifically respectable. One
will never know whether earlier active solicita-
tion of manuscripts would have established and
preserved an interdisciplinary research character
for the Journal, which was probably wanted by
most of the members of the Academy. Certainly,
with little or no solicitation of manuscripts the
Journal became irreparably unbalanced in the
direction of descriptive science, which the ma-
jority did not want.
The transition from a passive to an active
editor of the Journal has been taking place dur-
ing the past year, after the Journal was changed
suddenly from an archival repository of taxonomic
research to the Academy’s house organ. In 1961
the Journal will have an active editor, Samuel B.
Detwiler Jr., a chemist who is a Special Assist-
ant to the Administrator of the Agricultural Re-
search Service, USDA. Sam is noted in the
Agricultural Research Service for his capability
as an organizer of complex programs of agricul-
tural research, particularly chemical research on
the utilization of farm prducts. He is noted outside
of ARS as the Editor of The Capital Chemist ,
the publication of the Chemical Society of Wash-
ington that pays for itself through receipts from
advertising. We predict he will become noted as
the editor of the Journal of the Washington
Academy of Sciences who caused the members to
look forward to its appearance and to read it.
Some members of the Academy have queried,
“Why take the time and go to the expense of
publishing a Journal for which there is no clear
demand?” Our answer is that we should not
quit when demand is weak but should strive to
create demand in the belief that a good Journal
will help to make the Academy strong and useful.
Sam can do it because he will set an example
of hard work that his staff will emulate and that
will gradually permeate the Academy.
Sam will become Editor in January 1961 under
difficult circumstances, for he will be traveling
in India and Southeast Asia on official business
for several weeks before he takes over. Therefore
in October 1960 he was setting up schedules and
deadlines and allocating responsibility among the
members of his staff for the contents of next year’s
issues. He does not want any predictions or prom-
ises to be made about these contents; he wants
next year’s issues to speak for themselves, hop-
ing that the members of the Academy will recog-
nize that they are becoming more timely and
hence more useful. We can say, at least, “Don’t
judge the 1961 Journal by 1960 issues — we can
do better.”
JOINT BOARD
The Joint Board is engaged in its annual fi-
nancial campaign to raise funds for its budget
for the 1960-61 school year. A total of $7,500
must be obtained to carry on its program of sci-
ence education.
Two major activities account for more than half
of the Budget. One of these is the cost of publica-
tion of The Reporter. This 8-page newsletter is
published monthly from October to June and is
sent free to each teacher of science and mathe-
matics in every secondary school of the Greater
Washington Area. Also, school contact persons,
education committee chairmen of technical so-
cieties, and others interested in science educa-
tion are included in the circulation of some 2200.
The second major activity is cooperating with
local school systems in underwriting expenses in-
curred in their operation of the five area sci-
ence fairs. Printing costs for publicity materials
(posters, etc.), entry blanks, record forms, and
similar items are paid for by the Joint Board. In
addition, the Board pays entry fees and travel
expenses of contestants from three of the areas
to the National Science Fair. (Expenses of this
nature for the Northern Virginia fairs are pro-
vided for by the Alexandria-Arlington-Fairfax
Realty Board.)
Other budgetary items include the operation
of the School Contacts Program, popular lectures
for school children known as the “Frontiers of
Science Lectures”, as well as the normal expenses
concerned with operation of the Board.
There has been some confusion about the
projects financed under a grant from the National
Science Foundation. These funds are specifically
granted for three projects: The Visiting Scientists
and Engineers Program of lectures for school
classes and science clubs; cooperative experi-
mental educational programs; and a series of
6
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
conferences for teachers and the scientific com-
munity. It also provides for the maintenance of
the office required to administer the program. No
part of the $35,000 grant may be used for the
general program of the Joint Board. It is separate
and financed from locally raised funds.
The Board’s Finance Committee, under the
chairmanship of Dr. Russell W. Mebs, is engaged
in raising the Budget for this year. Local scientific
and engineering societies and private industrial,
research, and business organizations are re-
quested to contribute. Many societies provide
funds for the Joint Board in their budgets. Others
solicit contributions from their members at a
meeting of their society. The Joint Board, how-
ever, has adopted a policy of not soliciting indi-
vidual contributions.
Individuals may assist in several ways to fur-
ther the program of the Joint Board. One of these
is to see that the technical societies with which
they are affiliated provide funds in their budgets
for the Joint Board’s program, which is being
carried on in their behalf. The other is to vol-
unteer for participation as individuals in various
phases of the program. One of the most urgent
needs at the present is for science fair judges.
Lists are currently being prepared for use of the
schools beginning in late February. Further in-
formation may be obtained from the office of the
Joint Board on Science Education, 1530 P Street,
N.W., Washington 5, D.C., Telephone NO. 7-3661.
SCIENCE AND
DEVELOPMENT
A Pacific Science Information Center has
been established at the Bishop Museum in
Honolulu, Hawaii. It was established by the
Pacific Science Association with the help of a
grant from the National Science Foundation.
Information will be gathered and made available
on current activities in special fields such as hu-
man ecology, land fauna, geography of the Pacific
and relevant cartographic and statistical data.
Pear decline is causing death of many
pear trees in Washington, Oregon, and Cali-
fornia. Scientists of the U. S. Department of
Agriculture and the Washington and California
Experiment Stations have not yet found the
cause of the condition. Quick decline kills some
trees in about two weeks in mid-summer or late-
summer. Slow decline takes longer. The trees
show little or no terminal growth, leaves are
small, sparse and pale green, and there is a
gradual loss of vigor, and eventually death. The
malady is not connected with malnutrition, un-
favorable soil condition, fungus attack, or orchard
practices. It occurs on trees grown on Oriental
rootstock, but not on trees grown on Bartlett root-
stock. Studies are being made to determine if
pear decline is caused by a virus.
The world adopted a new standard of
length at 6 PM, Paris time, October 14,
1960. The new standard is a “wavelength of
light.” It replaces the meter bar which has
served as the standard for over seventy years.
The action was taken by the 11th General Con-
ference on Weights and Measures. The American
delegation to the Conference was headed by
Allen V. Astin, a member of the Washington
Academy of Science. Another Academy member
in the delegation was A. G. McNish, Chief,
Metrology Division, National Bureau of Stand-
ards. The new meter is defined as 1,650,763.73
wavelengths of the orange-red line of krypton 86.
The new standard is of great importance to those
engaged in precision measurements since it re-
lates the meter to a constant of nature, the
wavelength of a specified kind of light, which is
believed to be immutable and can be reproduced
with great accuracy in any well equipped labora-
tory. There was doubt in the minds of some
scientists regarding the stability of the inter-
national meter bar.
Flies of the genus Ogcodes pass the larval
stage of their lives inside spiders and de-
vour the tissues, sometimes almost com-
pletely, apparently without much obvious
awareness on the part of the doomed spider.
How the fly larva gets into the spider is a matter
of conjecture. Presumably, it is swallowed in a
very immature stage or maybe the egg is swal-
lowed and hatched inside the host. Once the
larva is inside, the spider is doomed. The amount
of feeding varies. Often only an empty shell is
left. The doomed spider continues the normal
activities until very near the end, but usually at
a considerably reduced rate. When the larval
stage is about over, the parasite eats a hole
through the spider’s abdomen, escapes to the out-
side world and eventually leads a normal adult
fly existence.
Unusual recordings of infrasonic disturb-
ances in the atmosphere have been reported
by the National Bureau of Standards. This
is believed to be the first time the relation be-
tween sources of infrasonic waves generated in
the atmosphere and the incident sound pressure,
the direction of approach of the incident wave,
and the speed of the wave across the earth’s
surface have been studied quantitatively. A sys-
tem of detectors of the type used in this study
could track tornadoes and could probe upper
atmospheric disturbances, especially interactions
of the sun and the earth’s magnetic field. These
studies were begun under the late Peter Chrzur-
owski, a member of the Washington Academy of
Science.
The U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey has
achieved a spectacular degree of accuracy
in earth measurement. With unprecedented
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
7
precision the Survey succeeded in tying a net-
work of nine missile tracking ballistic cameras,
spread over an area of 4,000 square miles, with
the launching site at Cape Canaveral, Florida, to
pinpoint tracking of space missiles and flares
against a background of stars. The camera sites
were calculated to within an average probable
error of about 0.2 feet with respect to a fixed
point at Cape Canaveral, achieving an accuracy
of better than one to 1,000,000, or 1/16 of an
inch in one mile. The precision of the instru-
ments, superior advance planning for the project,
and the highly refined skills of the field engineers
combined to produce a degree of accuracy in
geodetic measurements hertofore unattained any-
where.
The tracking, warning and forecasts dur-
ing the passage of Hurricane Donna were
the most complete in history according to
Dr. F. W. Reichelderfer, Chief of the
Weather Bureau, Department of Commerce.
If this most destructive and vicious hurricane
since 1886 had occurred 5 years ago hundreds of
people in the United States might have lost their
lives and thousands more would have been seri-
ously injured. From the time Donna was sighted
1,200 miles east of Puerto Rico, the Weather
Bureau hurricane warning centers in San Juan,
Miami, Washington and Boston issued over 90
advisories and bulletins on the storm’s progress.
Much of the success in tracking the hurricane
was made possible by the high powered weather
radar installed in 1959 and 1960 along the Gulf
and Atlantic Coasts and the dozens of missions
flown by the Weather Bureau’s National Hurri-
cane Research Project’s aircraft.
A fish with a “lamp” inside its mouth is
a prize specimen collected by the Danish
oceanographic ship Galathea. It was collected
from a depth of two and a half miles in the
mid-Pacific and has been named Galatheatharuna
axeli. It is an aberant member of the coldly
predaceous anglerfish group and lives far below
the deepest penetration of light. Some fish of
this group carry luminous organs on stalks pro-
truding from the head region. The lights are
used to attract other mid-depth organisms close
to the mouth where they can be trapped by the
big sharp teeth and swallowed. This creature is
unique in having the light inside the mouth.
It rests on the bottom in the darkness with the
mouth wide open.
An analysis of spectrograms obtained by
photographing the planet Jupiter has been
completed at the National Bureau of Stand-
ards. The first detailed measurements were
made of lines in Jupiter’s ammonia and methane
bands. The presence of the hydrogen molecule
was detected from its quadruple rotation-vibra-
tion spectrum. A continuous absorption recorded
in the violet and ultraviolet regions closely re-
sembles that of the nitrogen tetroxide molecule.
Spectrograms were recorded from 3600 to 8900
A, using high-dispersion gratings.
Formal organization of the Science In-
formation Exchange within the Smithsonian
Institution was announced on September 28 by
Leonard Carmichael, secretary of the Institution.
Basic purpose of the group is “to foster and
facilitate effective planning and management of
scientific research activities supported by United
States agencies and institutions by promoting
the exchange among participating agencies of
administrative data about all types of current
research . . .” Sponsoring agencies are PHS,
Defense, NSF, Veterans Administration, NASA,
AEC, and the Smithsonian. For the coming year,
Orr Reynolds is chairman of the Governing Board
and Lyndon Lee is vice chairman. Staff director
is Stella L. Deignan, director of the former Bio-
Sciences Information Exchange, of which the new
group represents an expansion.
“Invisible fishes” whose bodies are as
translucent as the clearest glass are described
by Leonard P. Schultz, Smithsonian Institution
curator of fishes, in a comprehensive recent report
on the fish life around the Marshall and Marianas
Islands. Members of the family Trichonotidae,
they are called “sand divers” because, says Dr.
Schultz, that is exactly what these fishes are.
One to two inches long, they spend their lives
entirely buried in loose coral sand at the sea
bottom. Through this sand they apparently make
their way as easily as other fishes can through
water. They are extremely difficult to attract to
the surface. They have hairy fringes around the
lips that keep the sand out of their mouths.
Electronic digital computers will be used
by Coast and Geodetic Survey for the more
accurate location of the origin of earth-
quakes. The new system requires that the data
reported from some of the 200 earthquake stations
in the world-wide network be punched on
standard business machine cards; the coding
process includes the name of the reporting sta-
tion and the exact time that the first shock wave
was recorded. It is believed that this method
will eventually be accurate to within seven miles
of the point of origin.
Two new research groups have been set
up by Coast and Geodetic Survey as part of
a major shift in program emphasis. An Office of
Research and Development has been established
to pursue basic research in the earth science
fields of the Survey’s work, and coordinate and
assist in applied research and development con-
ducted by technical divisions in its field of
competence. A new Office of Oceanography will
be responsible for a comprehensive program of
oceanographic surveys, and a broad complex of
related programs related to the sea as one of
man’s major environmental elements.
8
Journal of The Washington Academy of Sciences
Vice-Presidents of llie Washington Academy of Sciences
Representing the Affiliated Societies
Acoustical Society of America
Institute of the Aeronautical Sciences
Anthropological Society of Washington
Society of American Bacteriologists
Biological Society of Washington
Society for Experimental Biology and Medicine
Botanical Society of Washington
Chemical Society of Washington
American Society of Civil Engineers
International Assn, for Dental Research
American Inst, of Electrical Engineers
Washington Society of Engineers
Entomological Society of Washington
Society of American Foresters
National Geographic Society
Geological Society of Washington
Helminthological Society of Washington
Columbia Historical Society
Insecticide Society of Washington
Amer. Society of Mechanical Engineers
Medical Society of the Dist. of Columbia
American Society for Metals
American Meteorological Society
Institute of Radio Engineers
American Nuclear Society, Washington Section
Philosophical Society of Washington
Society of American Military Engineers
Richard Cook
Not Named.
Regina Flannery
Mary Louise Robbins
Herbert Friedman
Kathryn Knowlton
Herbert C. Hanson
William J. Bailey
Not Named.
Gerhard Brauer
Robert D. Elbourn
Howard S. Rappleye
Harold H. Shepard
Not Named.
Alexander Wetmore
Carle Dane
Carlton M. Herman
U. S. Grant, III
Joseph Yuill
William G. Allen
Fred 0. Coe
John A. Bennett
Morris Tepper
Robert Huntoon
Urner Liddel
Louis R. Maxwell
Not Named.
Chairmen of Committees
Standing Committees
Executive
Meetings
Membership
Monographs
Awards for Scientific Achievement
Grants-in-Aid for Research
Policy and Planning
Encouragement of Science Talent
Science Education
Lawrence A. Wood, Nat. Bureau of Standards
Robert D. Stiehler, Nat. Bureau of Standards
Wayne C. Hall, Naval Research Laboratory
Dean B. Cowie, Dept, of Terrestrial Magnetism
Archie I. Mahan, Applied Physics Laboratory
B. D. van Evera, George Washington University
A. T. McPherson, Nat. Bureau of Standards
Leo Schubert, American University
Raymond J. Seeger, Nat. Science Foundation
Special Committees
By Laws Harold H. Shepard, Dept, of Agriculture
Library of Congress John A. O’Keefe, Nat. Aeronautics & Space Admin.
Repres. on AAAS Council Howard A. Meyerhoff, Scientific Manpower Commission
Volume 50
DECEMBER 1960
No. 8
CONTENTS
Science in Washington
Scientists in the News 1
Affiliated Societies 2
Joint Board 6
The Brownstone Tower 5
Academy Activities 4
Science and Development r 7
Washington Academy of Sciences
1530 — P St, N. W.
Washington, D. C.
Return Postage Guaranteed
2nd Class Postage
Paid at
Washington, D. C.
I I AR Y OF ARNOLD
arboretum
22 DIVINITY aye
CAMBRIDGE 30 MASS